Right choice for ultimate yield

LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your
partner.

SV-iS7 User Manual

0.75~22kW(200V) 0.75~160kW[400V
z Read this manual carefully before
installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.

z Keep this manual within easy reach
for quick reference.









i

Thank you for purchasing LS Variable Frequency Drives!

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

To prevent injury and property damage, follow these instructions.
Incorrect operation due to ignoring instructions will cause harm or
damage. The seriousness of which is indicated by the following
symbols.

































DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
This symbol indicates the possibility of
death or serious injury
This symbol indicates the possibility of
injury or damage to property
This symbol indicates the instant death or
serious injury if you don’t follow instructions
■ The meaning of each symbol in this manual and on your equipment is as follows.
This is the safety alert symbol.
Read and follow instructions carefully to avoid dangerous situation.
This symbol alerts the user to the presence of “ dangerous voltage”
inside the product that might cause harm or electric shock.
■ After reading this manual, keep it in the place that the user always can contact
easily.
■ This manual should be given to the person who actually uses the products and is
responsible for their maintenance.







ii

WARNING

„ Do not remove the cover while power is applied or the unit is in operation.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.

„ Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock due to high voltage terminals or charged capacitor
exposure.

„ Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring, even if
the input power is not applied.
Otherwise, you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock.

„ Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10 minutes
after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC link voltage is
discharged with a meter (below DC 30V).
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

„ Operate the switches with dry hands.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

„ Do not use the cable when its insulating tube is damaged.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

„ Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.









iii

CAUTION


„ Install the inverter on a non-flammable surface. Do not place flammable
material nearby.
Otherwise, fire could occur.

„ Disconnect the input power if the inverter gets damaged.
Otherwise, it could result in a secondary accident and fire.

„ Do not touch the inverter while the input power is applied or after removed. It
will remain hot for a couple of minutes.
Otherwise, you may get bodily injuries such as skin-burn or damage.

„ Do not apply power to a damaged inverter or to an inverter with parts
missing even if the installation is complete.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.

„ Do not allow lint, paper, wood chips, dust, metallic chips or other foreign
matter into the drive.
Otherwise, fire or accident could occur.


OPERATING PRECAUTIONS


( 1) Handling and installation

… Handle according to the weight of the product.
… Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
… Install according to instructions specified in this manual.
… Do not open the cover during delivery.
… Do not place heavy items on the inverter.
… Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
… Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
… Use the ground impedance of 100ohm or less for 200 V Class and 10ohm or less for 400V class.
… Take protective measures against ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) before touching the PCB for
inspection or installation.
… Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:







iv

Ambient temp.
CT Load: - 10 ~ 50℃ (non-freezing)
VT Load: -10 ~ 40℃(non-freezing)
Note: Use below 80% of load when used under VT
Load at 50℃
Relative humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temp. - 20 ~ 65 ℃
Location
Protected from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil
mist or dust
Altitude, Vibration
Max. 1,000m above sea level, Max. 5.9m/sec
2

(0.6G) or less
E
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t

Atmospheric pressure 70 ~ 106 kPa


( 2) Wiring

… Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or RFI filter to the output of
the inverter.
… The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of
rotation of the motor.
… Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage.
… Reversing connection of the input/output terminals(R,S,T / U,V,W) could damage the inverter.
… Only authorized personnel familiar with LS inverter should perform wiring and inspections.
… Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or have bodily
injury.

( 3) Trial run

… Check all parameters during operation. Changing parameter values might be required depending
on the load.
… Always apply permissible range of voltage to the each terminal as indicated in this manual.
Otherwise, it could lead to inverter damage.


( 4) Operation precautions

… When the Auto restart function is selected, stay away from the equipment as a motor will restart
suddenly after an alarm stop.
… The Stop key on the keypad is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made.
Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
… If an alarm reset is made with the reference signal present, a sudden start will occur. Check that
the reference signal is turned off in advance. Otherwise an accident could occur.
… Do not modify or alter anything inside the inverter.
… Motor might not be protected by electronic thermal function of inverter.
… Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter.
… Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic
equipment may be affected.
… In case of input voltage unbalance, install AC reactor. Power Factor capacitors and generators may
become overheated and damaged due to potential high frequency noise transmitted from inverter.









v
… Use an insulation-rectified motor or take measures to suppress the micro surge voltage when
driving 400V class motor with inverter. A micro surge voltage attributable to wiring constant is
generated at motor terminals, and may deteriorate insulation and damage motor.
… Before operating unit and prior to user programming, reset user parameters to default settings.
… Inverter can easily be set to high-speed operations, Verify capability of motor or machinery prior to
operating unit.
… Stopping torque is not produced when using the DC-Break function. Install separate equipment
when stopping torque is needed.

( 5) Fault prevention precautions

… Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and
equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.

( 6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

… Do not conduct a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.
… Refer to Chapter 12 for periodic inspection (parts replacement).

( 7) Disposal

… Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

( 8) General instructions

… Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a circuit
breaker, a cover or partially open. Never run the inverter like this. Always place the cover with
circuit breakers and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.







Introduction to the Manual



i
Introduction to the Manual
z This manual describes the specifications, installation, operation, functions and maintenance of SV-iS7 series inverter
and is for the users who have basic experience of using an inverter.

z It is recommended you read carefully this manual in order to use SV-iS7 series inverter properly and safely.

z The manual consists as follows.

Chapter Title Contents
1 Basics
Describes the precautions and basic items which should be learned before using the
Inverter.
2 Specifications The control specifications, ratings and types of the input and output
3 Installation Information on the use environment and installation method.
4 Wiring Wiring information for the power supply and signal terminals.
5
Peripheral
Devices
Peripheral devices which can be connected with the input and output terminals of the
Inverter
6
How To Use
Keypad
Descriptions on the display and operation keys on the main body of the Inverter.
7 Basic Functions
Descriptions on the basic functions including frequency setting and operation
command.
8 Applied Functions Descriptions on the functions required for system application.
9 Monitor Functions Information on the operational status and troubles of the Inverter.
10
Protective
Functions
Describes the protective functions for the motor and Inverter.
11
Communication
Functions
The specifications of the RS-485 communication.
12
Checking &
Troubleshooting
Descriptions on the failures and anomalies which may occur during operation.
13 Table of Functions Brief summarize of functions.













Contents



i
Chapter 1 Basics
1.1 What You Should Know before Use
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.1 Check of product - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.2 Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.3 Preparation of device and Parts for operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.4 Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.5 Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2 Names and Uses of Parts
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2.1 End product (not more than 75 kW) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2.2
When the front cover is removed (not more
than 75kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2.3 End product (more than 90kW) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2.4
When the front cover is removed (more than
90kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3


Chapter 2 Specifications

2.1 Specifications
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2.1.1
Rated Input and Output:: Input voltage of
200V class (0.75~22kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2.1.2
Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V
class (0.75~22kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2.1.3
Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V
class (30~160kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.4 Other commons
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2


Chapter 3 Installation

3.1 Installation
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
3.1.1 Cautions before installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1






Contents


ii
3.1.2
Exterior and Dimension
(UL Enclosed Type 1, IP21 Type)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.1.3
External dimension
(UL Enclosed Type12, IP54 Type)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.1.4
Dimension and Weight of frame
(UL Enclosed Type 1, IP21 Type)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
3.1.5
Dimension and Weight of Frame
(UL Enclosed Type 12, IP54 Type)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.1.6
Installation Guide
(UL Enclosed Type12, IP54 Type)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15

Chapter 4 Wiring

4.1 Wiring
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
4.1.1
How to separate front cover when wiring
(below 75kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
4.1.2
How to separate front cover when wiring
(90~160 kW)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.3 Built-in EMC Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.1.4 Wiring precaution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
4.1.5 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
4.1.6
Terminal wiring diagram
(Power terminal block)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.1.7 Terminals of main circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.8
Specifications of power terminal block and
Exterior fuse
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.1.9
Control terminal line diagram
(Basic I/O terminal block)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
4.1.10
Control terminal line diagram
(Insulated I/O terminal block)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.1.11 Control circuit terminal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.1.12
Specifications of signal terminal block
distribution
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16







Contents



iii
4.2 Operation Checking
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.2.1 Easy start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.2.2 Easy start operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.2.3 Checking for normal working - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices

5.1 Peripheral Devices
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
5.1.1 Composition of peripheral devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
5.1.2
Specifications of wiring switch, Electronic
contactor and Reactor
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.1.3 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4

Chapter 6 How To Use Keypad
6.1 How To Use Keypad
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
6.1.1
Standard KEYPAD appearance and
description (Graphic keypad)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-1
6.1.2 Menu composition - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6
6.1.3 Mode shift - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
6.1.4 Group shift - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
6.1.5 Code (Function item) shift - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12
6.1.6 Parameter setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
6.1.7 Operating status monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6.1.8 Failure status monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20
6.1.9 How to initialize parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22










Contents


iv
Chapter 7 Basic Functions
7.1 Basic Functions
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
7.1.1 How to set frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1
7.1.2 Analog command frequency fixation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.1.3 Changing frequency to revolution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
7.1.4 Sequential frequency setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
7.1.5 Operating command setting method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
7.1.6
Local/Remote by-pass operation using multi-
function keys
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
7.1.7
Prevention of forward or reverse rotation: Run
Prevent
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
7.1.8
Run Immediately with power on: Power-on
Run
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.1.9 Restarts by reset after trip: RST Restart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.1.10
Setting of accelerating/decelerating time and
pattern
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.1.11 Acc/Dec pattern setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
7.1.12 Acc/Dec stop command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.1.13 V/F voltage control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.1.14 Torque boost - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-23
7.1.15 Motor output voltage adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
7.1.16 Selection of starting method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.1.17 Stop method selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
7.1.18 Stop after D.C. braking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
7.1.19 Frequency limit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.1.20 Selection of second operating method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30
7.1.21 Multi-function input terminal control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31
7.1.22
Digital input and output control by extended
I/O option card
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31






Contents



v
Chapter 8 Applied Functions
8.1 Applied Functions
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1
8.1.1
Override frequency setting using auxiliary
frequency command
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1
8.1.2 Jog operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.1.3 UP/DOWN operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.1.4 3-WIRE operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7
8.1.5 Safe operation mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8
8.1.6 Dwell operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9
8.1.7 Slip compensation operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-11
8.1.8 PID control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-12
8.1.9 Auto tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17
8.1.10 V/F operation using speed sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-20
8.1.11 Sensorless(I) vector control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-21
8.1.12 Sensorless(II) vector control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.1.13 Vector control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27
8.1.14 Torque control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-31
8.1.15 Droop control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-33
8.1.16 Speed/Torque change function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-32
8.1.17 Kinetic energy buffering - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-34
8.1.18 Energy saving operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-35
8.1.19 Speed search operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-36
8.1.20 Automatic restart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38
8.1.21 Operation sound selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-39
8.1.22 2
nd
Motor operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-41
8.1.23 By pass operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-42






Contents


vi
8.1.24 Cooling fan control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43
8.1.25 Input power frequency selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-44
8.1.26 Inverter input voltage selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-44
8.1.27 Parameter writing and reading - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-44
8.1.28 Parameter initialization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45
8.1.29 Parameter view lock and Key lock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45
8.1.30 Addition to User Group (USR Grp) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-47
8.1.31 Addition to Macro Group - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48
8.1.32 Easy start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48
8.1.33 Other Config(CNF) mode parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-49
8.1.34 Timer function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-50
8.1.35 Auto sequence operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-52
8.1.36 Traverse operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-53
8.1.37 Brake control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-54
8.1.38 Multi-function output On/Off control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-56
8.1.39 MMC function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-56
8.1.40 Regeneration evasion function for press - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61
Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9.1 Monitor Functions
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1
9.1.1 Monitor in operation - Keypad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-1
9.1.2 Failure status monitor – Keypad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5
9.1.3 Analog output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
9.1.4 Selection of relay function and multi-function
output terminal of terminal block
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-10
9.1.5 Failure status output by relay and multi-
function Output terminal of terminal block
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-16






Contents



vii
9.1.6
Output terminal delay time and type of contact
point
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17
9.1.7 Operating time monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18
9.1.8 Selection of keypad language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18
Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10.1 Protective Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-1
10.1.1 Motor protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-1
10.1.2 Overload warning and troubleshooting (Trip) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.1.3 Stall prevention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.1.4 Motor overheat sensor input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-6
10.1.5 Inverter and sequence protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-7
10.1.6 External failure signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-8
10.1.7 Inverter overload - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.1.8 Keypad command loss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.1.9 Braking resistance use rate setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11
10.1.10 Underload warning and failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12
10.1.11 Overspeed error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13
10.1.12 Speed variation failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.1.13 Speed sensor error detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.1.14 Fan failure detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.1.15
Selection of action in case of low voltage
failure
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.1.16 Output blocking by multi-function terminal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15
10.1.17 How to terminate failure state - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15
10.1.18
Selection of action in case of option card
failure
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15
10.1.19
Detection of motor not connected to inverter
output terminal
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16
10.1.20 Table of failures/warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17






Contents


viii
Chapter 11 Communication Functions
11.1 Communication Functions
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-1
11.1.1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-1
11.1.2 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.3 Composition of communication system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.4 Basic setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-3
11.1.5 Operating command and frequency setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
11.1.6 Command loss protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
11.1.7 Virtual multi-function input setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
11.1.8
Caution in parameter setting for
communication
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
11.1.9 Communication frame monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
11.1.10 Special communication area setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6
11.1.11
Parameter group for periodical data
transmission
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-7
11.1.12
Parameter group for transmission of Macro
Grp and U&M Mode User
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8
11.2 Communication protocol
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
11.2.1 LS INV 485 protocol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
11.2.2 Detailed reading protocol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-10
11.2.3 Detailed writing protocol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-11
11.2.4 Monitor registration detailed protocol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-11
11.2.5 Modbus-RTU protocol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-13
11.2.6
Existing iS5/iG5/iG5A compatible common
area parameter
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-16
11.2.7 iS7 extended common area parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-19









Contents



ix
Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting
12.1 Checking and troubleshooting
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-1
12.1,1 Protective functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-1
12.1.2 Alarm functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3
12.1.3 Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.1.4 Replacement of cooling fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-6
12.1.5 Daily and regular checkup list - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
Chapter 13 Table of Functions
13.1 Table of Functions
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-1
13.1.1 Parameter mode – DRV group (ÎDRV) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-1
13.1.2 Parameter mode – Basic function group
(ÎBAS)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-3
13.1.3
Parameter mode – Parameter mode –
Extended function group (PARÎADV)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-7
13.1.4 Parameter mode – Control function group
(ÎCON)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-11
13.1.5 Parameter mode – Input terminal block
function group (ÎIN)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-16
13.1.6 Parameter mode – Output terminal block
function group (ÎOUT)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-20
13.1.7 Parameter mode – Communication function
group (ÎCOM)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-24
13.1.8 Parameter mode – Applied function group
(ÎAPP)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-27
13.1.9 Parameter mode – Auto sequence operation
group (ÎAUT)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-30
13.1.10 Parameter mode – Option card function group
(ÎAPO)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-33






Contents


x
13.1.11 Parameter mode – Protective function group
(ÎPRT)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-36
13.1.12
Parameter mode – 2nd motor function group
(ÎM2)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-39
13.1.13 Trip mode (TRP Current (or Last-x)) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-40
13.1.14 Config mode (CNF) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-40
13.1.15 User/Macro mode – ÎMC1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-43
13.1.16
User/Macro mode – Traverse operation
function group (ÎMC2)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13-44







Chapter 1 Basics



1-1
1.1 What You Should Know before Use
1.1.1 Check of product
Take the inverter out of the box, check the rating shown on a side of the product body and whether the inverter type
and rated output are exactly what you ordered. Check also whether the product has been damaged during delivery.

SV 008 iS7 - 2 N O F D
Capacity of Applied Motor
Series
Name
Input Voltage Keypad UL EMC DCR
0008 0.75 [kW]
0015 1.5 [kW]
0022 2.2 [kW]
0037 3.7 [kW]
0055 5.5 [kW]
0075 7.5 [kW]
0110 11 [kW]
0150 15 [kW]
0185 18.5 [kW]
0220 22 [kW]
0300 30 [kW]
0370 37 [kW]
0450 45 [kW]
0550 55 [kW]
0750 75 [kW]
0900 90 [kW]
1100 110 [kW]
1320 132 [kW]
L

S

I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

1600 160 [kW]
W
i
d
e
-
U
s
e

I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

-









2: 3-Phase
200~230[V]

4: 3-Phase
380~480[V]









N: NON

S: GLCD
(Graphic
Loader)









O:OPEN

E: Enclosed
UL Type1

P: Enclosed
UL Type 12









Blank:
Non-
EMC

F:EMC










Blank:
Non-
DCR

D:DCR


1.1.2 Parts
If you have any doubt about the product or found the product damaged, call our company’s branch offices(see the
back cover of the manual).
1.1.3 Preparation of device and Parts for operation
Preparation for operation might slightly vary. Prepare parts according to the use.
1.1.4 Installation
Make sure you install the product correctly considering the place, direction or surroundings in order to prevent
decrease in the life and performance of the inverter.








Chapter 1 Basics


1-2
1.1.5 Distribution
Connect the power supply, electric motor and operating signals(control signals) to the terminal block. If you fail to
connect them correctly, the inverter and peripheral devices might be damaged.

1.2 Names and Uses of Parts
1.2.1 End product (not more than 75 kW)










1.2.2 When the front cover is removed (not more than 75 kW)












Front cover:
removed when wiring
Keypad
Volt for front cover fix
Wiring bracket
Ground terminal
Cooling FAN
Keypad connection
terminal
Encoder option
Inverter condition
display BAR
I/O board & terminal
Power terminal
Wiring bracket
Communication option
connection part
PLC, extension I/O,
communication option
connection part






Chapter 1 Basics



1-3
1.2.3 End Product (more than 90kW)

1.2.4 When the front cover is removed (more than 90kW)



Remark
Please refer to option board manual for option board relations..

Keypad
Volt for upper front
cover fix (left side)
Volt for lower front
cover fix (left side)
Volt for upper front
cover fix (right side)
Volt for lower front
cover fix (right side)
Cooling fan
Communication option
board connection part
PLC, Extension I/O,
Communication option
Connection part
Encoder option board
Keypad connection
terminal
I/O board and terminal
Inverter condition display
LED
Power Busbar (R/S/T, U/V/W, P/N)
Shield plate
Main SMPS circuit
Upper front cover
Lower front cover
Ground
Power input Signal input
SCR snubber circuit FAN SMPS circuit
Safety option board
(Selectable function)





Chapter 2 Specifications


2-1
2.1 Specifications

2.1.1 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 200V class (0.75~22kW)

Type : SV xxx iS7 – 2x 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0185 0220
[HP] 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
1)
Motor Applied
[kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
2)
Rated Capacity
[kVA]
1.9 3.0 4.5 6.1 9.1 12.2 17.5 22.9 28.2 33.5
CT 5 8 12 16 24 32 46 60 74 88
3)
Rated
Current[A]

VT 8 12 16 24 32 46 60 74 88 124
Output
Frequency
4)
0 ~ 400 [Hz]
R
a
t
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

Output Voltage
[V]
5)
3-phase 200 ~ 230V
Available Voltage
[V]
3-phase 200 ~ 230 VAC (-15%,+10%,)
Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%)
CT 8.3 12.9 18.6 24 32.9 41.4 58 69 88 96
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
p
u
t

Rated
Current [A] VT 7 10.6 14.8 21.5 28 42 52 60 75 107
* Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only

2.1.2 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V class (0.75~22kW)

Type : SV xxx iS7 – 4x 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0185 0220
[HP] 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
1)
Motor Applied
[kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
2)
Rated Capacity
[kVA]
1.9 3.0 4.5 6.1 9.1 12.2 18.3 22.9 29.7 34.3
CT 2.5 4 6 8 12 16 24 30 39 45
3)
Rated
Current[A]

VT 4 6 8 12 16 24 30 39 45 61
Output Frequency
4)
0 ~ 400 [Hz]
R
a
t
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

Output Voltage [V]
5)
3-phase 380 ~ 480V
Available Voltage
[V]
3-phase 380 ~ 480 VAC (-15%~+10%)
Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%)
CT 4.3 7.2 10.6 15.4 21 25.8 39 44 57 57
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
p
u
t

Rated
Current [A] VT 3.5 5.3 7.3 10.8 13.8 22.5 26 33 40 52
* Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only






Chapter 2 Specifications


2-2

2.1.3 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V class (30~160kW)

Type : SV xxx iS7 – 4x 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750 0900 1100 1320 1600 -
[HP] 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 180 225 -
1)
Motor Applied
[kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 -
2)
Rated Capacity
[kVA]
46 57 69 84 116 139 170 201 248 -
CT 61 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 325 -
3)
Rated
Current[A]

VT 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 325 370 -
Output Frequency
4)
0 ~ 400 [Hz] (Sensorless-1:0~300Hz, Sensorless-2,Vector:0~120Hz)
R
a
t
e
d

O
u
t
p
u
t

Output Voltage [V]
5)
3-phase 380 ~ 480V
Available Voltage
[V]
3-phase 380 ~ 480 VAC (-15%,+10%)
Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%)
CT 57 69 83 113 154 195 239 286 362 -
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
p
u
t

Rated
Current[A] VT 90 109 123 162 195 237 282 350 403 -
* Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only
1) Motor Applied indicates the maximum capacity applied to use of a standard 4 pole standard motor.
2) Rated capacity : the input capacity of a 200V class is based on 220V and that of a 400V class is based on 440V. The current
rating is based on CT current.
3) The output of rated current is limited according to setting of the carrier frequency (CON-04).
4) In case of Sensorless-1, you can set the frequency at up to 300Hz by selecting 3, 4 as the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode).
In case of Sensorless-2, you can set the frequency at up to 120Hz by selecting 3, 4 as the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode).
5) The maximum output voltage does not go up over the supplied power voltage. You can select the output voltage as you want
below the supplied power voltage.

2.1.4 Other commons
1) Control
Control Method
V/F control, V/F PG, slip compensation, sensorless vector-1, sensorless vector-2,
vector control
Frequency Setting
Resolving Power
Digital command : 0.01Hz
Analog command : 0.06Hz (maximum frequency : 60Hz)
Frequency Degree
Digital command operation : 0.01% of the maximum frequency
Analog command operation : 0.1% of the maximum frequency
V/F Pattern Linear, double reduction, user V/F
Overload Capacity CT current rating :150% for 1 minute, VT current rating :110% for 1 minute
Torque Boost Manual torque boost, Automatic torque boost
* Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only









Chapter 2 Specifications


2-3
2) Operation
Operating Method Selectable among keypad/terminal block/communication operation
Frequency Setting
Analog: 0 ~ 10[V], -10 ~ 10[V], 0 ~ 20[mA]
Digital: keypad
Operating Function
PID control, up-down operation, 3-wire operation, DC break, Frequency limit,
Frequency jump, Second function, Slip compensation, Reverse rotation prevention,
Auto restarting, Inverter By-pass, Auto tunning Flying Start, Energy buffering, Power
breaking, Flux breaking, Leakage current reduction, MMC, Easy Start.
NPN (Sink) / PNP (Source) selectable
Input
Multi-function
terminal
(8 points)
P1 ~ P8
1)

Function: forward operation, reverse operation, reset, external trip, emergency stop,
jog operation, sequential frequency-high/medium/low, multi - level acceleration and
deceleration – high/medium/low, D.C. control during stop, selection of a second motor,
frequency increase, frequency decrease, 3-wire operation, change to general operation
during PID operation, Main inverter body operation during option operation, analog
command frequency fixation, acceleration and deceleration stop selectable.
Multi-function
open collector
terminal
Below DC 24V 50mA
Multi-function
relay terminal
Failure output and inverter operation
output
Below (N.O., N.C.) AC250V 1A,
Below DC 30V 1A
Output
Analog output
0 ~ 10 Vdc (below 20mA) : selectable from frequency, current, voltage, direct current
voltage
1) The Functions for Multi-function terminal available according to IN-65~75 parameter setting of IN Group.

3) Protective Function
Trip
over voltage, low voltage, over current, earth current detection, inverter overheat,
motor overheating, output imaging, overload protection, communication error,
frequency command loss, hardware failure, cooling fan failure, pre-PID failure, no
motor trip, external break trip. etc
Alarm
stall prevention, overload, light load, encoder error, fan failure, keypad command
loss, speed command loss.
Instantaneous
Interruption
2)
Below CT class 15 msec (VT class 8 msec) : operation continues
(within rated input voltage, rated output)
Over CT class 15 msec (VT class 8 msec) : automatically restarts
2) Operation at the CT (Heavy Duty) current rating

4) Structure and Use Environment
Cooling Method
Forced air blast cooling: 0.75~15kW (200/400V class), 22kW (400V class)
Inhalation cooling: 22kW (200V class), 30~160kW (400V class)
Protection Structure
Below 75 kW: Open type (IP 21), UL enclosed type 1 (Option)
Above 90kW: Open type (IP 20), UL enclosed type 1 (Option)
Separate product (Below 22kW): sealed IP54 type, UL enclosed type 12
Surrounding Temperature
CT (Heavy Duty) load: - 10 ~ 50℃ (with no ice or frost)
VT (Normal Duty) load: - 10~ 40℃ (with no ice or frost)
(It is recommended that you use less than 80% load when you use VT load at 50℃)
Preservation Temperature -20°C ~ 65°C
Surrounding Humidity Below 90% RH of relative humidity (with no dew formation)
Altitude, Vibration Below 1,000m, below 5.9m/sec
2
(0.6G)
Environment There should be no corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist or dust.







Chapter 3 Installation



3-1
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Cautions before installation
Be careful so that the plastic parts of the inverter may not be damaged.
Do not move the product holding the cover only.
Do not install the product where there is vibration, a press or truck.
Life of the inverter greatly influenced by the surrounding temperatures, make sure that the surrounding temperature
does not exceed the permitted temperature (-10 ~ 50°C).

<Measurement Points of Surrounding Temperature>

Install the inverter on an inflammable surface because its temperature rises high during operation.
Sufficient space is required to prevent heat saturation because the inverter emits heat.















Remark
Over 50cm, B : over 20cm is necessary when you install an inverter above 30kW



A: over 10cm
B
over
5cm
B
over
5cm
A: over10cm
Inverter
Enough space is required
for the distribution duct not
to block the cooling air.
cooling air
Built-in cooling fan






Chapter 3 Installation


3-2


If you install two or more inverters inside the panel, be careful about the location of the ventilation fan and inverter.
See the figure below.














Install the inverter upright using screws or bolts so that the inverter does not move.

Note
Arrange the panels in order to the hot air generated by the heating of the inverter should be released.

Caution
Avoid direct rays of light or a warm and humid place.
Install the inverter in a closed panel or clean place free from foreign substances such as oil mist and fiber dust.
Where the ventilation fan is installed
Inverter Inverter
Ventilation
Ventilation
(X) Unacceptable
When two or more units are installed

Inverter Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Built-in cooling fan
(X) Unacceptable (O) Acceptable
(O) Acceptable






Chapter 3 Installation



3-3
3.1.2 Exterior and Dimension (UL Enclosed Type 1, IP21 Type)
1) SV0008-0037iS7 (200V/400V)

2) SV0055-0075iS7 (200V/400V)






Chapter 3 Installation


3-4
3) SV0110-0150iS7 (200V/400V)


4) SV0185-0220iS7 (200V/400V)










Chapter 3 Installation



3-5
5) SV0300-0450iS7 (400V)







Chapter 3 Installation


3-6
6) SV0550-0750iS7 (400V)













Chapter 3 Installation



3-7
7) SV0900-1100iS7 (400V)







Chapter 3 Installation


3-8
8) SV1320-1600iS7 (400V)







Chapter 3 Installation



3-9
3.1.3 External dimension (UL Enclosed Type12, IP54 Type)
1) SV0008-0037iS7 (200V/400V)





























Chapter 3 Installation


3-10
2) SV0055-0075iS7 (200V/400V)






























Chapter 3 Installation



3-11
3) SV0110-0150iS7 (200V/400V)






























Chapter 3 Installation


3-12
4) SV0185-0220iS7 (200V/400V)






























Chapter 3 Installation



3-13
3.1.4 Dimension and Weight of frame (UL Enclosed Type 1, IP 21 Type)
Inverter Capacity W[mm] H[mm] D[mm]
Weight
[Kg]
Non DCR
Product
weight[Kg]
Non EMC
Product
weight[Kg]
Non EMC&DCR
Product
weight[Kg]
SV0008iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0015iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0022iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0037iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0055iS7-2/4 200 355 225 10 8.4 9.3 7.7
SV0075iS7-2/4 200 355 225 10 8.4 9.3 7.7
SV0110iS7-2/4 250 385 284 20 17.2 16.8 14
SV0150iS7-2/4 250 385 284 20 17.2 16.8 14
SV0185iS7-2 280 461.6 298 30 27 25.9 22.9
SV0220iS7-2 280 461.6 298 30 25.8 25.9 22.9
SV0185iS7-4 280 461.6 298 27.4 23.5 23.3 19.7
SV0220iS7-4 280 461.6 298 27.4 23.5 23.5 20.1
SV0300iS7-4 300 594 300.4 41 28 - 28
SV0370iS7-4 300 594 300.4 41 28 - 28
SV0450iS7-4 300 594 300.4 41 28 - 28
SV0550iS7-4 370 663.4 371 63 45 - 45
SV0750iS7-4 370 663.4 371 63 45 - 45
SV0900iS7-4 510 784 423 101 - - -
SV1100iS7-4 510 784 423 101 - - -
SV1320iS7-4 510 861 423 114 - - -
SV1600iS7-4 510 861 423 114 - - -

Note
Weight[Kg] above indicates total weight including EMC FILTER, DCL. (excluding box packing)
30~160 kW products have only DCL option.







Chapter 3 Installation


3-14
3.1.5 Dimension and Weight of Frame (UL Enclosed Type 12, IP54 Type)
Inverter Capacity W[mm] H[mm] D[mm]
EMC&DCR
Weight[Kg]
Non DCR
Weight[Kg]
Non EMC
Weight[Kg]
Non EMC&DCR
Weight[Kg]
SV0008iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0015iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0022iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0037iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0055iS7-2/4 254 461 232 12.8 10.2 12.1 9.5
SV0075iS7-2/4 254 461 232 12.9 10.3 12.2 9.6
SV0110iS7-2/4 313 591 294 25.6 22.8 22.4 19.6
SV0150iS7-2/4 313 591 294 25.9 23.1 22.7 19.9
SV0185iS7-2 343 751 316 38.3 34.2 34.1 29.9
SV0220iS7-2 343 751 316 38.3 34.2 34.1 29.9
SV0185iS7-4 343 751 316 34.9 31 31 27.1
SV0220iS7-4 343 751 316 - - 31 27.1

Note
Weight[Kg] above indicates total weight. (excluding packing)
0.75~22 kW products have only IP54 type product.







Chapter 3 Installation



3-15
3.1.6 Installation Guide (UL Enclosed Type12, IP54 Type)
1) How to separate IP54 keypad cover and keypad
- Release the upper/lower screw on the transparent keypad cover and then separate the transparent cover from
the inverter.
- Separate the keypad from the inverter.












2) How to separate IP54 front cover
- Loosen the captive screws (nine or thirteen, depending on the size of the frame) around the edge of the cover.
- Remove the cover.







Chapter 3 Installation


3-16
2) Mounting the inverter
- Remove the four rubber packings on the corner.
- Mount the inverter onto fixing hole on the panel and securely tighten the four screws or bolts.
- Place the four rubber packings to the each corner.













3) Power cable wiring
- Connects the input/output power cable as followed picture.
- Refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for the detailed wiring.








Chapter 3 Installation



3-17
4) How to attach the IP54 front cover
- Place the front cover matching with plate hole.
- Securely tighten the screw at the corner of front cover.
- Connect the cable to the keypad and then place the front cover on the inverter.
- Place the transparent keypad cover on the keypad and tighten the upper/lower screw.








Chapter 4 Wiring




4-1
4.1 Wiring
4.1.1 How to separate front cover when wiring

Remove Keypad on the product and release fixed volt of the lower end of up cover.

1) How to separate Keypad




2) How to assemble plug when connecting Keypad

As showing figures below, install the keypad after connecting the plug.











Under pressing the lower end of keypad,
pull the upper part of keypad.
Connection wire for
Loader when
keypad is
disconnected.





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-2
3) How to separate front cover

[IP21 Type]

[IP54 Type]
Separate the transparent keypad cover releasing fixed bolt and then separate keypad.
Separate the front cover releasing fixed bolt.
Before wiring, IP54 product must be installed on the panel.


Separate front
cover
releasing the
fixed bolt.
I/O board control circuit
Terminal
Power circuit terminal
Front
cover
fixed
bolt
Keypad
Keypad fixed cover
Wiring hole
Built-in
circulation fan
Keypad
cover
fixed bolt





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-3
4.1.2 How to separate front cover when wiring (90~160 kW)
Releasing the right/left fixed bolt on the lower front cover and get down the lower front cover and then open it. Now, you
can wire power part (R/S/T, P/N, U/V/W) and signal cable (terminal block, encoder option, communication operation,
PLC option etc.).







Chapter 4 Wiring




4-4
4.1.3 Built-in EMC Filter
iS7 inverter has built-in EMC Filter. It has effect in reducing air electric wave noise of inverter input part. It’s initial setting
is OFF. If you are to ON, Connect please short pin on the EMC filter ON/OFF Connector.

1) How to set EMC Filter functions (Less than 7.5kW Products)

EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON

2) How to remove EMC Filter ON/OFF connector (Less than 7.5kW Product)




EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF
Check the voltage by a tester in 10minute after cutting the power supply. In case separate with connector, pull the
connector while pressing fixed hasp. When reinstalling, be sure to hook the hasp of the connector. (if it is hard to
separate them, please use radio pincher or tweezers.)
- Cut off plastic cover which marked below.
- If short circuit connector is connected with SW1
which is inside, EMC Filter works.





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-5
3) How to set EMC Filter functions (11~22kW Products)
EMC filter ON/OFF set terminal is located in lower part of the 11~22KW Terminal as shown figure below. Initial set is
OFF. When the green wire is connected in upper metal connection terminal, EMC filter is ON and EMC filter is OFF if it
is connected in insulated connection terminal.



EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF


EMC filter has effect in reducing air electronic wave while being used in power source of symmetrical ground method.
Be sure to use EMC filter in symmetrical ground method such as Y connection.

















Caution
Leakage current increases while EMC filter is ON. Do not use EMC filter when the input is asymmetrical way such as
Delta connection. It may cause an electric shock.
Asymmetrical Ground structure
1 phase is grounded
in Delta connection

Grounded middle tap
of 1 phase in Delta
connection

Grounded in single
phase end



Non-grounded 3
Phase connection

Metal terminal for EMC filter
ON
Insulated terminal for
EMC filter OFF
R(L1)


S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)


S(L2)
T(L3)
L


N
R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)
R(L1)

S(L2)

T(L3)





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-6
4.1.4 Wiring precaution
1) The internal circuits of the inverter will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output
terminals (U, V, W).
2) Use ring terminals with insulated caps when wiring the input power and motor wiring.
3) Do not leave wire fragments inside the inverter. Wire fragments can cause faults, breakdowns, and malfunctions.
4) For input and output, use wires with sufficient size to ensure voltage drop of less than 2%. Motor torque may drop of
operating at low frequencies and a long wire run between inverter and motor.
5) The cable length between inverter and motor should be less than 150m (492ft). Due to increased leakage
capacitance between cables, overcurrent protective feature may operate or equipment connected to the output side
may malfunction. (But for products of less than 30kW, the cable length should be less than 50m (164ft).)
6) The main circuit of the inverter contains high frequency noise, and can hinder communication equipment near the
inverter. To reduce noise, install line noise filters on the input side of the inverter.
7) Do not use power factor capacitor, surge killers, or RFI filters on the output side of the inverter. Doing so may damage
these components.
8) Always check whether the LCD and the charge lamp for the power terminal are OFF before wiring terminals. The
charge capacitor may hold high-voltage even after the power is disconnected. Use caution to prevent the possibility of
personal injury.
9) Do not connect with MC at output pare of inverter and make MC On/Off during operation. It can cause the Trip or
damage of inverter

4.1.5 Grounding
1) The inverter is a high switching device, and leakage current may flow. Ground the inverter to avoid electrical shock.
2) The ground impedance for 200V class is 100 ohm or less and 400V class 10ohm or less .
3) Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the inverter. Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding.
4) As a minimum, grounding wire should meet the specifications listed below. Grounding wire should be as short as
possible and should be connected to the ground point as near as possible to the inverter.
Grounding wire size ( mm²)
Inverter Capacity
200V class 400V class
0.75 ~ 3.7kW 3.5 2
5.5 ~ 7.5 kW 5.5 3.5
11 ~ 15 kW 14 8
18.5 ~ 22 kW 22 14
30 ~ 45 kW - 22
55 ~ 75 kW - 38
90 ~ 110 kW - 60
132 ~ 160 kW - 100






Chapter 4 Wiring




4-7
4.1.6 Terminal wiring diagram (POWER terminal block)

1) Wiring of Inverter below 7.5kW




















2) Wiring of 11~22kW Product
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) B N(-) U V W

3) Wiring of 30~75kW Product
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P1(+) P2(+) N(-) U V W

4) Wiring of 90~160kW Product
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) N(-) U V W

Note
Products over 11kW have a linear arrangement of terminal blocks. Products for 0.75~160kW have built-in DC
Reactor, so it does’t necessary any other DC Reactor connection. Ground terminal must be grounded. Do not
use ground to command for ground cable, welding machine and power machine etc. Ground cable must be
wire as short as possible. If ground terminal of inverter is far from the inverter,electric potential of inverter
terminal ground can be unstable because leakage current of inverter can be gernerated form inverter.

3Phase
AC
IM
R( L1) S( L2)
N( - )
U V W
P( + )
B
3Phase
AC
IM
T( L3)
3-phase AC input
power supply
Dynamic brake resistor
Motor
Ground terminal
External
Fuse





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-8
4.1.7 Terminals of main circuit

1) 0.75 ~ 22 kW (200V/400V)

R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) B N(-) U V W









Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R(L1),S(L2),T(L3) AC power supply input Connects normal AC input
P(+) (+) AC voltage terminal (+) DC link voltage terminal
N(-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal.
P(+),B Dynamic brake resistor Connects dynamic brake resistor.
U,V,W Inverter output Connects the 3 phase induction motor

2) 30 ~ 75 kW (400V)

R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P1(+) P2 N(-) U V W








Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R(L1),S(L2),T(L3) AC power supply input Connects normal AC input
P1(+) (+)DC voltage terminal (+)DC link voltage terminal
P2,N(-)
Dynamic brake unit
connection
Voltage terminal connecting Dynamic brake
unit
N(-) (-)DC voltage terminal (-)DC link voltage terminal.
U,V,W Inverter output Connects the 3 phase induction motor

Motor
DBU
DBR
P N B1 B2
DBR
Dynamic
Brake Resistor
3 Phase AC
Input

3 Phase AC
Input

Motor





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-9

3) 90 ~ 160 kW (400V)

R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) N(-) U V W








Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R(L1),S(L2),T(L3) AC power supply input Connects normal AC input
P(+) (+)DC voltage ternimal (+)DC link voltage terminal
N(-) (-)DC voltage terminal (-)DC link voltage terminal
P(+), N(-)
External brake unit
connection
Voltage terminal connecting Dynamic brake
unit.
U,V,W Inverter output Connects the 3 phase induction motor.

Motor
Dynamic
brake unit
DBR Dynamic
brake resistor
3 Phase AC
Input

P N B1

B
2





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-10
4.1.8 Specifications of power terminal block and Exterior fuse

Cable
2)
mm² AWG
Exterior fuse

Inverter applied
Terminal
screw size
Screw
torque
1)
(Kgf·cm)
R,S,T U,V,W R,S,T U,V,W Current Voltage
0.75 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 10A 500V
1.5 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 15A 500V
2.2 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 20A 500V
3.7 kW M4 7.1~12 4 4 12 12 32A 500V
5.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 6 6 10 10 50A 500V
7.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 10 10 8 8 63A 500V
11 kW M6 30.6~38.2 16 16 6 6 80A 500V
15 kW M6 30.6~38.2 25 22 4 4 100A 500V
18.5 kW M8 61.2~91.8 35 30 2 2 125A 500V
200V
22 kW M8 61.2~91.8 35 30 2 2 160A 500V
0.75~1.5kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 10A 500V
2.2 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 15A 500V
3.7 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 20A 500V
5.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 4 2.5 12 14 32A 500V
7.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 4 4 12 12 35A 500V
11 kW M5 24.5~31.8 6 6 10 10 50A 500V
15 kW M5 24.5~31.8 16 10 6 8 63A 500V
18.5 kW M6 30.6~38.2 16 10 6 8 70A 500V
22 kW M6 30.6~38.2 25 16 4 6 100A 500V
30~37 kW M8 61.2~91.8 25 25 4 4 125A 500V
45 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 160A 500V
55 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 200A 500V
75 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 250A 500V
90 kW M12 182.4~215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 350A 500V
110 kW M12 182.4~215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 400A 500V
132 kW M12 182.4~215.0 150 150 300 300 450A 500V
400V
160 kW M12 182.4~215.0 200 200 400 400 450A 500V
1) : Apply the prescribed torque for the terminal screws. If the screws are loose, it might cause a failure.
2) : Use 600V 75℃ copper lines.
The entire cable length should be below 200m. In case of connection of the motor, the entire length should not exceed
200m because if a motor is connected from a remote location, the over current protection function might started by the
harmonics caused by the floating volume increase within the cables or a failure of the device connected to the
secondary side might occur. The entire cable length should be below 200m too when you connect more than one motor.
Do not use a triplex cable in case of distance wiring. (50m when below 3.7K)
In case of lengthy wiring, Use thick wire in order to reduce line voltage drop and decrease the carrier frequency or use a
micro surge filter.
Line Voltage Drop[V]=(√3 X wire resistance [mΩ/m]X wire length[m] X Current[A])/1000
Distance between inverter and motor Up to 50 m Up to 100 m Over 100 m
Permitted carrier frequency Below 15 kHz Below 5 kHz Below 2.5 kHz





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-11
4.1.9 Control terminal line diagram (Basic I/O terminal block)














1) How to set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source)

iS7 serves 2 sequence input terminal of control circuit: NPN mode (Sink mode) and PNP mode(Source mode). It is
possible to change the logic of input terminal with NPN mode (Sink mode) and PNP mode (Source mode) by using
NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) set terminal. Each mode connecting methods are follows.

(1) NPN mode(Sink mode)
Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into NPN. CM (24V GND) is common terminal of contact point input signal. Initial
set of Factory default is NPN mode (Sink mode).














I / PTC
set terminal
TR
NPN (Sink)
/PNP (Source)
set terminal
Inner source(24V)
CM(24G)
P1(FX)
P2(RX)

NPN PNP
NPN mode (Sink mode)





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-12
(2) PNP mode (Source mode) – When use inner source
Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into PNP. 24 (24V inner source) is common terminal of contact point input
signal. PNP mode (Source mode) – Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into PNP When use exterior source.
If you want try to use exterior 24V source, connect exterior source (-) terminal with CM (24V GND).


Inner source (24V)
24(24V)
P1(FX)
P2(RX)
NPN PNP
PNP mode (Source mode) – When using inner source
PNP mode (Source mode) – When using external source
External Source
(24V)
CM (24G)
P1(FX)
P2(RX)
-
+
NPN PNP





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-13

1) Example of Distribution






































TR terminal is RS485 communication terminal resistor (120 Ω).


S- C2
CM
S+ 5G P4 P3 P2 P1
CM 24 EG Q1
NC A2
AO1
C1
AO2 5G I1 V1 VR- VR+ CM P8 P7 P6 P5 B1 A1
R
S
4
8
5


P
o
r
t

0
~
1
0
V

O
u
t
p
u
t

0
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

4
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

Relay2
(Normal Open)
Relay1
(Normal Open)
Open Collector
Output
24V
power
supply
Digital contact point input
(NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support)
In case of analog
voltage input with
variable resistance
(-10V~+10V input)
In case of analog
current input
(4~20 mA input)
R
S
4
8
5

P
o
r
t

S- C2

CM S+ 5G P4 P3 P2 P1 CM 24 EG Q1 NC A2
AO1 C1

AO2 5G I1 V1 VR- VR+ CM P8 P7 P6 P5 B1
A1
0
~
1
0
V

O
u
t
p
u
t

0
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

4
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

Relay2
(Normal Open)
Relay1
(Normal Open)
Open Collector
Output
24V power
supply
Digital contact point input
(NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support)
In case of analog
voltage input with
variable resistance
(0V~+10V input)
In case of
analog current
input
(4~20 mA input)





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-14
4.1.10 Control terminal line diagram (Insulated I/O terminal block)















1) Example of Distribution





















NPN (Sink)/
PNP (Source)
Set terminal
I / PTC
Set terminal
TR
S- C2
5G
S+ CM P4 P3 P2 P1 CM
24 EG Q1
NC A2
AO1 C1 AO2 5G I1 V1 VR- VR+ CM P8 P7 P6 P5 B1 A1
R
S
4
8
5

P
o
r
t

0
~
1
0
V

O
u
t
p
u
t

0
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

4
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

Relay2
(Normal Open)
Relay1
(Normal Open)
Open Collector
Output
24V
power
supply
Digital contact point input
(NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support)
In case of analog
voltage input with
variable resistance
(-10V~+10V input)
In case of
analog
current
input
(4~20 mA
S- C2
5G
S+ CM P4 P3 P2 P1 CM
24 EG Q1
NC A2
AO1
C1
AO2 5G I1 V1 VR- VR+ CM P8 P7 P6 P5 B1 A1
R
S
4
8
5

P
o
r
t
0
~
1
0
V

O
u
t
p
u
t

0
~
2
0
m
A

O
u
t
p
u
t

4
~
2
0
m
A
O
u
t
p
u
t
Relay2
(Normal Open)
Relay1
(Normal Open)
Open Collector
Output
24V
power
supply
Digital contact point input
(NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support)
In case of analog
voltage input with
variable resistance
(0V~+10V input)
In case of
analog current
input
(4~20 mA
input)





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-15
4.1.11 Control circuit terminal

1) Contact point start function selection
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name Terminal Description
P1~P8
Multi-function
input1~8
Available by defining as multi-function input
Contact
point start
function
selection
CM
Sequence
common terminal
Common terminal of the contact point input terminal
(note: In case of Basic I/O, common terminal is different from the
5G common terminal)
VR(+)
Frequency setting
power(+) terminal
Power supply for analog frequency setting
Maximum output is +12V, 100mA.
VR(-)
Frequency setting
power(-) terminal
Power supply for analog frequency setting
Maximum output is -12V, 100mA.
V1
Frequency setting
(voltage)
Becomes set frequency with input of DC -10~10V.
Unipolar 0~+10[V]),Biopolar(-10[V] ~10[V]) input resistance 20kΩ
I1
Frequency setting
(current)
Becomes set frequency with input of DC 0~20mA
input resistance 249Ω














I
n
p
u
t

s
i
g
n
a
l

Analog
Frequency
5G
Frequency setting
common terminal
Common terminal of analog frequency setting signal and analog
voltage and current terminals
(note: In case Basic I/O, common terminal are different from the
CM common terminal)
A01
Multi-function
analog voltage
output terminal
Select the one among Output frequency, Output current, DC
voltage.
Ouput voltage: 0~10V
Maximum output voltage: 10V
Maximum output current: 10mA
Analog
A02
Multi-function
analog current
output terminal
Select the one among Output frequency, Output current, Output
voltage, DC voltage.
Output current: 4~20mA (0~20mA)
Maximum output current: 20mA
Q1
Multi-function
terminal
(open collector)
DC 26V, below 100mA
EG
Common terminal
for open collector
External power supply common earth terminal of the open
collector
24
Exterior 24V
power
Maximum output current: 150mA
A1,
B1, C1
Fault signal output
Protection function is activated to break output.
(below AC250V 1A, DV30V 1A)
Fault signal: A1-C1 electrified (B1-C1 unelectrified)
Normal signal: B1-C1 electrified (A1-C1 unelectrified)
A2, C2
Multi-function relay 2
output A contact
point
Output the signal while running. User defined multi-function output
terminal.
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A

























O
u
t
p
u
t

S
i
g
n
a
l

Contact
Point
S+,S-,
CM
RS-485 signal
input terminal
RS-485 signal line
(see Chapter 11 Communication Function of the manual.)





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-16
4.1.12 Specifications of signal terminal block distribution

Terminal Cable size
Type Name mm
2
AWG
Electric specifications
P1~P8 Multi-function input terminal -
CM
Contact point common terminal
(In case of Basic I/O,
CM is different from 5G)
Common earth for multi function input
terminal
VR+
Analog frequency setting
(+) power supply
Output voltage : +12V
Maximum output voltage : 100mA
VR-
Analog frequency setting
(-) power supply
Output voltage : -12V
Maximum output voltage : 100mA
V1
Multi-function analog voltage
input terminal
Input voltage : 0~12V or -12~12V
I1
Multi-function analog current
input terminal
0.33
~1.25

16~22
0~20mA input
Internal resistance : 249Ω
AO1
Multi-function analog voltage
output terminal
Maximum output voltage : 10V
Maximum output current : 10mA
AO2
Multi-function analog current
output terminal
Maximum output current : 20mA
5G
Frequency setting common
terminal
(In case of Basic I/O,
5G is different from CM)
Common terminal of analog frequency
setting signal and analog current and voltage
terminals
Q1
Multi-function terminal
(open collector)
0.33
~2.0
14~22
DC26V, below 100mA
EG
Earth terminal for external
power supply
24 External 24V power supply
0.33
~1.25
16~22 Maximum output current : 150mA
A1
Multi function relay 1
output A contact point
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A
B1
Multi function relay 1
output B contact point
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A
C1
Multi function relay 1
contact point common terminal
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A
A2
Multi function relay 2
output A contact point
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A
C2
Multi function relay 2
contact point common terminal
0.33
~2.0
14~22
AC250V, below 5A
DC30V, below 5A
S+,S- RS485 signal input terminal RS485 signal line
CM RS485 common terminal
0.75mm
2

(18AWG), Shield
Type Twisted-pare
Wire
For multi connection, RS485 power ground
(Shield) connection terminal

Caution
Do not use more than 3M remote cable for the keypad. Failure of the signals on the keypad might occur.
To prevent radiated emissions in the analogical and digital signals, you must put a ferrite in the wires of these signals.
Ex. Brand Würth Elektronik ref. 74271132





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-17
4.2 Operation Checking
IS7 provides EASY START MODE helping with the basic parameter setting using the keypad by distribution shown
above when power is first supplied.

4.2.1 Easy start
Easy Start gets started when power is first supplied after you purchase the product or power is re-supplied after the set
parameters are all initialized.
- Easy Start Mode gets started first even in case of an inverter trip.
- Easy Start Mode does not operate during the inverter running.

4.2.2 Easy start operation
It operates in the following sequence.






























* You can move to Monitor Mode by pressing ESC at any time while you set the Easy Start mode.



1. Select whether to choose Easy Start.
2. Select the language displayed on the KEYPAD.
(Only English is available now)
3. Set the motor capacity used. (EX: 0.75KW, 1.5KW)
4. Set the number of poles of the motor used.
5. Set the rated voltage of the motor used.
(Of the set values, 0V refers to the voltage equal to the inverter input voltage)
6. Set the rated frequency of the motor used.
7. Set the inverter input voltage.
8. Set the operation command method.
(EX:KEYPAD, FX/RX-1, FX-RX-2, etc.)
9. Set the command frequency. (EX: 50Hz, 60Hz, etc.)
Start Easy Set
CNF-01 Language Sel
DRV-14 Motor Capacity
BAS-11 Pole Number
BAS-15 Rated Volt
BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel
BAS19 AC Input Volt
DRV-06 Cmd Source
DRV-01 Cmd Frequency
You can go Monitor Mode if
select “No”





Chapter 4 Wiring




4-18
4.2.3 Checking for normal working

1) Motor forward/reverse direction and Normal working checking by KEYPAD operation
After setting Cmd Source of DRV-06 is 0: Keypad, Freq Ref Src of DRV-07 is 0: Keypad-1 and set DRV-01 : Cmd
Frequency into temporary speed, Command forward operation by pressing FWD please. At this time, shaft of motor at
the side of load rotates into counterclock wise direction. Otherwise, it must be changed 2 terminals among the inverter
output terminal U, V, W.


Forward direction
Operation






Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-1
5.1 Peripheral Devices
5.1.1 Composition of peripheral devices
It is required to connect the inverter correctly by selecting proper peripheral devices. Wrong system composition or
connection might impair normal operation or cause significant life span decrease. At worst, the inverter might be
damaged, so use the product properly according to the manual and cautions.
Power Supply
specification
Use within the power supply specification for
the inverter.
200V Class:200~230V(-15%~+10%)
400V Class:380~480V(-15%~+10%)
Distribution switch or
short circuit switch
High current flows in the inverter while power
is supplied. Be careful when you select the
switch because the inverter
Electric contactor
(Possible to Select)
This does not have to be necessarily installed,
but if you do, do not start or stop the inverter
frequently with the contactor. It might
decrease the life of the inverter.
AC and DC reactor
(Possible to Select)
The reactor is necessary for installation where
power factor improvement or input power
capacity is high(over 1000kVA, distribution
distance below 10m). Be careful when you
select.
Inverter installation
place and Wiring

The life of the inverter greatly affected by the
surrounding temperature, make sure the
temperature does not exceed the permitted
range. Wrong wiring might cause damage to
the product, therefore follow the installation
guide. Ground terminal must be grounded.
Inverter output
Do not connect static condenser, surge killer,
radio noise filter to output. It might cause
damage or failure. Ground terminal must be
grounded.

Ground
Ground






Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-2
5.1.2 Specifications of wiring switch, Electronic contactor and Reactor
1) Specifications of Wiring switch and Electronic contactor
Inverter
capacity
Wiring switch
Short circuit switch
(LS)
Electronic
contactor
Inverter
capacity
Wiring switch
Short circuit switch
(LS)
Electronic
contactor
0008iS7-2 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-12 008iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-12
0015iS7-2 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-12 0015iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-12
0022iS7-2 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-18 0022iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-22
0037iS7-2 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-22 0037iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-22
0055iS7-2 ABS53b,EBS53 GMC-22 0055iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-22
0075iS7-2 ABS103b,EBS103 GMC-32 0075iS7-4 ABS33b,EBS33 GMC-22
0110iS7-2 ABS103b,EBS103 GMC-50 0110iS7-4 ABS53b,EBS53 GMC-22
0150iS7-2 ABS203b,EBS203 GMC-65 0150iS7-4 ABS103b,EBS103 GMC-25
0185iS7-2 ABS203b,EBS203 GMC-85 0185iS7-4 ABS103b,EBS103 GMC-40
0220iS7-2 ABS203b,EBS203 GMC-100 0220iS7-4 ABS103b,EBS103 GMC-50
0300iS7-4 ABS203b,EBS203 GMC-65
0370iS7-4 ABS203b,EBS203b GMC-100
0450iS7-4 ABS203b,EBS203b GMC-125
0550iS7-4 ABS203b,EBS203b GMC-150
0750iS7-4 ABS403b/300A GMC-220
0900iS7-4 ABS403b/400A GMC-300
1100iS7-4 ABS603b/500A GMC-300
1320iS7-4 ABS603b/600A GMC-400
1600iS7-4 ABS603b/600A GMC-500








Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-3
2) AC Reactor Specifications
AC Reactor Specifications AC Reactor Specifications
INVERTER
mH A
INVERTER
mH A
0008iS7-2 1.20 10 0008iS7-4 4.81 4.8
0015iS7-2 0.88 14 0015iS7-4 3.23 7.5
0022iS7-2 0.56 20 0022iS7-4 2.34 10
0037iS7-2 0.39 30 0037iS7-4 1.22 15
0055iS7-2 0.28 40 0055iS7-4 1.14 20
0075iS7-2 0.20 59 0075iS7-4 0.81 30
0110iS7-2 0.15 75 0110iS7-4 0.61 38
0150iS7-2 0.12 96 0150iS7-4 0.45 50
0185iS7-2 0.10 112 0185iS7-4 0.39 58
0220iS7-2 0.07 160 0220iS7-4 0.287 80
0300iS7-4 0.232 98
0370iS7-4 0.195 118
0450iS7-4 0.157 142
0550iS7-4 0.122 196
0750iS7-4 0.096 237
0900iS7-4 0.081 289
1100iS7-4 0.069 341
1320iS7-4 0.057 420
1600iS7-4 0.042 558

Remark
If you want DC Reactor, Buy Built-in DC Reactor products.






Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-4
5.1.3 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors
1) Dynamic Breaking Unit type
Type Voltage Applied Motor DBU Dimensions
30 ~ 37 kW SV037DBH-4
45 ~ 55 kW

Non UL type
75 kW
SV075DBH-4
Group 1.
Refer to Dimensions
30 ~ 37 kW SV370DBU-4U
45 ~ 55 kW SV550DBU-4U
75 kW SV750DBU-4U
90 kW SV550DBU-4U, 2Set
110~132kW SV750DBU-4U, 2Set
UL type
400V Class
162kW SV750DBU-4U, 3Set
Group 2.
Refer to Dimensions

2) Terminal arrangement
Group 2:

Group 3:


Terminals Functions
G Ground Terminal
B2 Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
B1 Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
N Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
P Terminal for connection with P1 of Inverter
☞ Note: READ DBU User manual certainly when selecting DB resistors.
3) Dynamic Breaking (DB)Unit & DB resistor basic wiring
입력전원
50/60 Hz
U
V
W
G
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
φ 3
전동기
P2(+) P1(+)
P N B1 B2

N(-)
B2
B1
제동저항
제동유닛





DBU Terminals Description
B1,B2 Wire correctly referring to wiring diagram. DB Resistors connect with B1, B2 of DB Unit.
N B2 P/B1 G
B1 N P G B2
Input Power
DynamicBraking
Resistor
DynamicBraking
Unit
Motor






Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-5
4) Dimensions

- Group 1 - Group 2

























5) Display Functions
DB Resistors connect with B1, B2 of DB Unit. DBU has 3 LEDs. Red LED which is located in middle displays
supplying main power, one Green LED which is right side displays under breaking and another green LED which is
left side displays Over Heat Trip(OHT).

Displays Function description
POWER
(Red LED)
POWER LED is turned On when main power is supplied.
Generally, POWER LED is turn On while main power supplied because DBU is connected
with inverter.
RUN
(Green LED)
RUN LED is turned off while DBU is ON by regenerative energy of Motor.
OHT
(Green LED)
Under Breaking, if the temperature is exceeded over setting value due to over heat of
Heatsink, Cut the TURN ON signal of DBU and LED is turn on by working overheat protection
function.

^)·gEׯ¤]]4Ò)]e´E]g
^)·gEׯ¤]]4Ò)]e´E]g
^)· gEרޢ4ÒEEÒ¯¤]]4Ò)]e´E]g
IM
y n a m i c
R
T
S
U
N P
(P2) W
V
D
B1
1 · ^ª¨ª-
N
P
G
WIRING
B2
B2
B1
U r a k i n g B n i t
5.5
2
5
8

5

2
4
5

2-Ø5.5
80
80
123
Dynamic Braking Unit
RESET
POWER
RUN
OHT
OCT
2
3
1
.
5

1
2

15
27
130
7
5








Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices



5-6
6) DB Resistors
(1) Option type Dynamic Breaking Unit
Following table has reference that DC breaking torque: 150%, %ED: 5%. Rating Watt of DBU has to be doubled
when %ED is 10%.

150% Breaking Torque, 5%ED
Voltage Class
Inverter
Capacity (kW)
Type
Resistor
[ohm]
Watt
[W]
Appearance
0.75 BR0400W150J 150 150 TYPE 1
1.5 BR0400W060J 60 300 TYPE 1
2.2 BR0400W050J 50 400 TYPE 1
3.7 BR0600W033J 33 600 TYPE 2
5.5 BR0800W020J 20 800 TYPE 3
7.5 BR1200W015J 15 1200 TYPE 3
11 BR2400W010J 10 2400 TYPE 3
15 BR2400W008J 8 2400 TYPE 3
18.5 BR3600W005J 5 3600 TYPE 3





200V Class
22 BR3600W005J 5 3600 TYPE 3
0.75 BR0400W600J 600 150 TYPE 1
1.5 BR0400W300J 300 300 TYPE 1
2.2 BR0400W200J 200 400 TYPE 1
3.7 BR0600W130J 130 600 TYPE 2
5.5 BR1000W085J 85 1000 TYPE 3
7.5 BR1200W060J 60 1200 TYPE 3
11 BR2000W040J 40 2000 TYPE 3
15 BR2400W030J 30 2400 TYPE 3
18.5 BR3600W020J 20 3600 TYPE 3
22 BR3600W020J 20 3600 TYPE 3
30 - 12 5000 -
37 - 12 5000 -
45 - 6 10,000 -
55 - 6 10,000 -
75 - 6 10,000 -
90 - 4.5 15,000 -
110 - 3.5 17,000 -
132 - 3.0 20,000 -







400V Class
160 - 2.5 25,000 -

Caution
In case of iS7 90~160kW, Dynamic braking unit for 220kW (SV2200DB-4) needs above listed DB resistor. If Dynamic braking unit
(SV075DBH-4) is connected in parallel, use above listed DB resistor in parallel.






Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-1
6.1 How to Use Keypad
6.1.1 Standard KEYPAD appearance and description (Graphic keypad)

Standard Keypad is used in Inverter parameter setting, Monitor display and Inverter operations.

1) Dimensions





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-2
2) Key Functions


Section Buttons Key name Function Description

Mode Key - Change MODE

Program Key - Write, change and save data in parameter codes.
Up key
Down Key
- Used when writing data or move codes.
Left/Right Key
- Movement among groups.
- Movement of cursor in writing.
Multi Function
Key
- Register Jog or User codes.

Cancel Key
- In writing, it is possible to use saved data previously if
press this button before pressing Program Key.
- Move to first code when code moving is required in a
group.
- Move to Monitor mode when Mode moving.

Forward Key - Motor rotates Forward direction.

Reverse Key - Motor rotates Reverse direction.
KEY

Stop/Reset Key
- Stop Under operating.
- Trip release when a trip occurs.
1. Cancel(ESC)

13. PROGRAM set
5. Reverse operation
3. MODE selection
11. Multi-Function
8. Forward operation
14. Move to UP
10. Move to down
12. Move to Right
2. Move to Left
4.Reverse operation
LED
6. Stop Indication LED
7. STOP/RESET
9. Forward operation LED





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-3
3) Composition of Display
(1) Monitor Mode




















(2) Parameter change display





















Mode Display
Group Display
Multi-function Key Setting
Inverter Operating Status
Status display Item
Parameter Value
Settable Range
Currently Set Value
Initial Value at the time of
Product Delivery
Code No. and Name
Mode Display
Operating/Frequency
command
Multi-function Key
Inverter Operating Status
Status Display Item
Monitor Mode Display Item 1
Monitor Mode Display Item 2
Monitor Mode Display Item 3
Monitor Mode
Cursor
MON T/K N STP 0.00Hz
PAR DRV N STP 0.00Hz

01 Cmd Frequency 0.00Hz
0.50 ~ 60.00 Hz
D:0.00 C:10.00





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-4
4) Display Item List
(1) Mode Display Items : see “Mode shift” on Page 6-8.
(2) Group Display Items : see “Group shift” on page 6-10.
(3) Operation Command/Frequency Command Display Items (Type of Seq and number of steps are displayed
during auto sequence operation)
(4) Monitor Display Items
No Function Display Description
MON Monitor Mode
PAR Parameter Mode
U&M USR & Macro Mode
TRP Trip Mode
1
Mode
Display
CNF
Config Mode
K Keypad operation command
O FBus Option operation command
A Application Option operation command
R Built-in 485 operation command
2

Operating
Command
T Terminal block operation command
K Keypad frequency command
V V1 or (V1+I1) input frequency command
I I1 input frequency command
P Pulse input frequency command
U
Frequency command during UP operation
(Up-Down operation)
D
Frequency command during DOWN operation
(Up-Down operation)
S
Frequency command during STOP operation
(Up-Down operation)
O FBus Option frequency command
X V2, I2 frequency command of sub-terminal block
J Jog frequency command
R Internal 485 frequency command
3
Frequency
Command
1~9 A~F Sequential frequency command
JOG Key Used for shift to Keypad JOG mode
Local/Remote Used to select local or remote operation
4
Multi
Function
Key Setting UserGrp
SelKey
Used to register parameters as a user group in the parameter
mode or delete parameters in the user group.
5 Inverter STP Motor stopped





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-5
No Function Display Description
FWD Operating forward
REV Operating reversely
DC DC output
WAN Warning
STL Stalling
SPS Speed Search
OSS SW OC controlled
OSH HW OC controlled
TUN Auto Tuning

(7) Status Display Items: see “Operating status monitoring” on Page 6-17.
(8) Monitor Mode Display Items: see “Operating status monitoring” on Page 6-17.






Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-6
6.1.2 Menu composition
SV-iS7 series inverter consists of the following 5 modes. Each mode has its own function items suitable for the
properties and especially the parameter mode displays the functions necessary for inverter operation in groups.

























Mode Display Description
Monitor mode MON
Displays information on the operating status of the inverter. Can monitor
frequency setting, operating frequency display, output current and voltage, etc.
Parameter mode PAR
Can set functions necessary for operation. Divided into a total of 12 groups,
each suitable for the functional difficulty and objective.
User & Macro
mode
U&M
You can group only necessary functions by using user group and macro
group. This is not displayed when the user code is not registered or when the
user/macro mode shifts with the mode key unless the macro is not selected.
Trip mode TRP
In case of a failure during operation, the failure type and information on the
operating frequency/current/voltage at the time of the failure occurring are
displayed. You can also monitor the type of the trips that previously occurred.
Trip Mode is not displayed when there is no previous failure history during
normal operation.
Config mode CNF
You can set the use environment for the inverter itself that is not directly related
to operating functions such as keypad language selection, monitor mode
environment selection, display of the option card type mounted on the inverter,
parameter initialization and copying.


Config
Trip
User&Macro
Parameter
Monitor
User
Macro 1
Macro 2
Drive
Basic Function
Advanced Function
Control
Input Terminal
Output Terminal
Communication
Application
Application Option Card
Protection
AUT
M2
Group movable by MODE Key
Ex) Monitor->Parameter
Movable by left/right key in
Parameter Group
Ex) Drive->Basic Function





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-7
1) Parameter mode
Mode Display Description
Drive group DRV
Has functions necessary for operation including
frequency/acceleration/deceleration time setting and operation
command selection, etc.
Basic group BAS
Can set the basic functions such as the motor parameter and sequential
frequency, etc.
Advanced function group ADV
Can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern and frequency control
function, etc.
Control function group CON Can set functions related to sensorless and vector control.
Input terminal function
group
IN
Can set functions related to the inverter input terminal block including
multi-function digital input and analog input.
Output terminal function
group
OUT
Can set the inverter output terminal block functions such as the relay
and analog output.
Communication function
group
COM
Sets the functions related to built-in 485 communication and
communication option card in such a case.
Application function group APP Sets functions such as PID control and auto sequence operation.
Auto Sequence run group AUT
This group is displayed if Auto Sequence Group in APP is selected and
sets the functions necessary for auto sequence operation.
Application option group APO
Sets functions related to the encoder option and PLC option card, if
they are used.
Protection group PRT Can set functions for protecting the motor and inverter.
Motor 2 function group
(Motor 2)
M2
This group is displayed if you select Motor #2 among the multi-function
input terminal functions and sets functions related to Motor #2.

2) User& Macro mode
Group Display Description
User group USR
Of the function items of each group of the parameter mode, the items
that need to be monitored or that are frequently set by the user are
grouped and displayed. It is registered by using the multi-function key
of the keypad.
Macro group MCx
The functions necessary for the inverter according to the load type can
be grouped and selected at the time of delivery from the factory. If the
user selects a desired operation type, the groups displayed in MC1 or
MC2 are shown. You can select them in CNF Mode. For more details,
see 8-48 page, 8.1.31 Addition to Macro group.











Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-8
6.1.3 Mode shift















1) Mode Shift at the time of delivery

You can change the display as follows if you shift modes by using the mode key. The User/Macro Mode and Trip
Mode are not displayed at the time of the product being delivered. For detailed description on the two modes, see
page 8-47,48, 8.1.30 Additional to User Group (USR Grp) or 8.1.31 Addition to Macro Group.


- Power on, a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the
monitor mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Parameter Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Config Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You come back to Monitor Mode.



Monitor
Parameter
User&Macro
Config
Trip
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %

CNF N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
40 CODE
01 Language Sel
English
02 LCD Contrast


MON T/K N STP 0.00Hz






Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-9
2) Mode Shift with User/Macro Mode and Trip Mode
If the user registers the user code or sets the macro function using the multi-function key, the User/Macro Mode will
be displayed unlike the mode shift at the time of the product delivery. In addition, in case of a trip during operation, the
Trip Mode will be displayed and the trip information will be saved in the trip mode as past history if you withdraw the
trip using RESET function. The mode shift in the two modes is as follows.


- Power on, a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the
monitor mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Parameter Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to User/Macro Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Trip Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Config Mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You come back to Monitor Mode.


MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %

U&M

USR N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %

TRP Last-1

00 Trip Name ( 1)
External Trip
01 Output Freq
0.00 Hz
02 Output Current
0.0 A

CNF N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
40 CODE
01 Language Sel
English
02 LCD Contrast

MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz






Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-10
6.1.4 Group shift

You can make inter-group shift by using Left/Right keys after shift to Parameter Mode or User/Macro Mode using the
Mode key.












1) Group Shift in Parameter Mode
If you press Right key in the Parameter Mode, the display changes as follows. If you press Left key, the display order
will be reversed.


- Power on, a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the
monitor mode.
- Press Mode key once.

- You have shifted to Parameter Mode.
- The drive group of Parameter Mode is being displayed.
- Press Right key once.

- You shift to Basic Function Group(BAS).
- Press Right key once.

- You shift to Advanced Function Group(ADV).
- Press Right Shift key 7 times.
Drive
Basic Function
Advanced Function
Control
Input Terminal
Output Terminal
Communication
Application
Application Option Card
Protection
Parameter
User
Macro 1
Macro 2
User&Macro
Group Movable by MODE Key
Ex) Monitor->Parameter
Movable left/right Key in
Parameter Group
Ex) Drive->Basic Function
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


PAR

DRV N STP 0.
00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque


PAR

BAS N STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
20 CDE

01 Aux Ref Src
None
02 Cmd 2nd Src
Fx/ Rx-1

PAR

ADV N STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
24 CODE

01 Acc Pattern
Linear
02 Dec Pattern
Linear





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-11

- The group changed in sequence, PRT is displayed.
- Press Right Shift key once.

- You come back to the Drive Group(DRV) of Parameter Group.

2) Group shift in User/Macro Mode
To shift to User/Macro Mode, the user code should be registered or you select the macro function. For user code and
macro group registration, see page 8-47,48, 8.1.30 Addition to User Group (USR Grp) or 8.1.31 Addition to Macro
Group. If the user code is registered and you have selected the macro function, you can shift the group as follows.


- Power on, a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the
monitor mode.
- Press Mode key twice.

- You have shifted to User/Macro Mode(U&M).
- The User Group(USR) is being displayed.
- Press Right key.

- You have shifted to Macro Group(MC1).
- Press Right key.

- You come back to User Group(USR).




PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %


PAR

PRT N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
40 CODE
01 Load Duty
Heavy Duty
02 Phase Loss Chk

MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


U&M

USR U STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec

U&M

MC1 U STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
1 CODE

01 Acc Time
20.0 sec
02 Dec Time
30.0 sec

U&M

USR U STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-12
6.1.5 Code(Function Item) shift

1) Code shift in monitor mode
If you press Up and Down keys where the cursor is, names of frequency and current, etc. will be displayed.


- Power on, a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the
monitor mode.
- The cursor is at the front of Hz item.
- Press Down key.

- The output current is displayed in the second display item.
- Do not press any key for about 2 seconds after shift.

- The cursor shifts to the second display item after the output current display is
gone.
- Press Down key.

- The third display item displays the output voltage.
- Do not press any key for about 2 seconds after shift.

- The output voltage display gone, the cursor shifts to the third display item.
- Press Up key twice.

- The first item displays frequency.

- Frequency display gone, the cursor is in the first display item.


MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Frequency
0.00 Hz
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Output Current
0.0 A
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Output Voltage
0 V
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Frequency
0.00 Hz
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz







Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-13

2) Code shift (function Items) in other modes and groups
Using Up and Down keys: The following figures give an example of shifting the code by using Up and Down keys in
DRV and BAS of Parameter Mode. Code shift in other modes are the same.

- Power on, the display emerges as on the left. The present mode is Monitor
Mode(MON).
- Press Mode key once.

- The display shows DRV of Parameter Mode. If DRV is not displayed, press Mode
key until DRV emerges or press ESC once.

- If you press Down key, you will shift to code No. 0 in DRV of Parameter Mode as
shown on the left.
- Press Right key once.

- You shift to BAS of Parameter Mode.
- You can shift the code by using Up or Down key.

3) How to Shift in Jump Code
In groups of Parameter Mode and User/Macro Mode, there is Jump Code Entry item for shift to the code of each
group. If the code number is high, you can shift faster than by using Up and Down keys. The following figures give an
example of shift to code number 09 of DRV.


- Check that code number 00 is displayed in the initial display of DRV of
PAR(Parameter Mode).
- Press Program key(PROG).

- The cursor flashes so that you can enter the code number as on the left.
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


PAR

BAS N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
20 CODE
01 Aux Ref Src
None
04 Cmd 2nd Src
Fx/ Rx-1

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz
00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec
00 Jump Code
1

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz

02 Acc Time
20.0 sec





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-14

- Enter 9 using Up key and press PROG.

- You shift to Control Mode of code number 9.

- If you press ESC, you will shift to 00 of DRV.


PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
1~ 99 CODE
D: 9 C: 9

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

09 Control Mode
V/ F
10 Torque Control
----- No -----
11 JOG Frequency
10.00 Hz

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Acc Time
20.0 sec





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-15
6.1.6 Parameter setting

1) Parameter setting in monitor mode
You can set some parameters including frequency in Monitor Mode. The following is an example of frequency setting.


- Check whether the cursor is in frequency item and the 09 frequency
setting method in DRV is keypad.
- Press PROG.

- Detailed information of the item is displayed and the cursor flashed.
- You can shift to the desired place for frequency setting by using
Shift key.

- Set frequency at 10Hz using Up key.
- Press PROG.

- The desired frequency has been set at 10Hz.

















MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Frequency
0.00 Hz
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz

Frequency
10.00 Hz
MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


1





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-16
2) Parameter setting in other modes and groups
This gives an example of changing frequency in the Drive Group of Parameter Mode. You can do so too in other
modes or groups.


- This is the initial display of Parameter Mode.
- Press Down key.

- You have shifted to 01 frequency setting code.
- Press PROG.

- The cursor flashes so that you can enter frequency.
- If you want to set the frequency at 10Hz, move the cursor to the desired place
using Left/Right keys.

- Enter 10Hz using Up key and press PROG.

- The desired frequency has been changed to 10Hz.


PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
0.50 ~ 60.00 Hz
D: 0.00 C: 0.00

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

01 Cmd Frequency
10.00 Hz
0.50 ~ 60.00 Hz
D: 0.00 C: 0.00

PAR

DRV N STP 0.00Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency
10.00 Hz
02 Cmd Torque
0.0 %





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-17
6.1.7 Operating status monitoring

1) Using monitor mode
You can monitor 3 items at a time in Monitor Mode. Some items including frequency can be edited. Displayed items
can be selected by the user in Config Mode(CNF).

- This is the initial display of Monitor Mode.
- The frequency, current and voltage are set as the default monitor items at the
time of product delivery.
- Of the displayed items, for frequency, the goal frequency is displayed during
stop and operating frequency during operation.

- You can set the items to display in Monitor Mode in sequence at 21~23 in CNF.
- Move to 23 using Down key.

- Change the 23 item in Monitor Mode to output power.

- The third displayed item in Monitor Mode has been changed to output power.











MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


1

CNF N STP 0.00Hz

21 Monitor Line-1
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2
Output Current
23 Monitor Line-3
Output Voltage


CNF N STP 0.00Hz

21 Monitor Line-1
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2
Output Current
23 Monitor Line-3
Output Power

MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz
kW
A
Hz






Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-18
2) Possible to monitoring items

Mode Code
Function
Display
Setting Range Initial Value
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current 2:Output Current
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI State
8 DO State
9 V1 Monitor[V]
10 V1 Monitor[%]
11 I1 Monitor[mA]
12 I1 Monitor[%]
13 V2 Monitor[V]
14 V2 Monitor[%]
15 I2 Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%]
17 PID Output
18 PID ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
CNF
23 Monitor Line-3
20 Torque
3:Output Voltage







Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-19
3) How to use status display
The items displayed on the top right of the keypad are displayed in modes other than Monitor Mode as well. Thus if
you register a variable you are interested in the display, you can monitor it at any time regardless of the mode shift or
change.


- This is the initial display of Monitor Mode.
- At the time of product delivery, the status item displays frequency.

- Select the item to display in status display in code 20 of CNF.
- Select output current.
- The unit at the top of the display has changed from frequency to current.

- The status display now shows current in Monitor Mode as well.



MON T/ K N STP 0.00Hz


CNF N STP 0.00Hz

20 Anytime Para
Output Current
21 Monitor Line-1
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2
Output Current

MON T/ K N STP 0.0A






Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-20
6.1.8 Failure status monitoring

1) Failure during operation


- In case of a failure during operation, the mode automatically shifts to
Trip Mode and the type of the current failure is displayed.

- If you press Down key, the output frequency, current and operating
status at the time of the failure occurring are displayed.

- If the failure status is terminated by Reset, the keypad before the
failure comes back.

2) Multiple failures at a time


- In case of multiple failures, the number of failures is displayed next to
the failure type.
- Press PROG.

- The type of failures is displayed.
- Press PROG.

- The display mode before failure checking comes back.

TRP current
Over Voltage (01)
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
TRP Last-1
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
33.3 A
MON T/ K N STP 0.0A

TRP current
Over Voltage (02)
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
TRP current
00 Trip Name ( 2)

0 Over Voltage
1 Externa Trip
TRP current
Over Voltage (02)
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current





Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad







6-21
3) Saving and monitoring of failure history
Previous failures are saved in Trip Mode. Up to 5 failures can be saved.
Failure history is saved not only by Reset but also in case of a low voltage failure due to power off.
If the number of failure exceeds 5, the failures before the latest 5 ones are automatically deleted.


- In case of a failure during operation, the mode automatically shifts to Trip
Mode with the trip displayed.

- If you press Reset or the terminal is entered, the failure above is
automatically saved and the display goes back to the place before the
failure.
- Move to Trip Mode using Mode key.

- The most recent failure is saved in Last-1 code.
- Press Right key.

- A previous failure is saved in Last-2 code.
- If another failure occurs, what was in Last-2 moves to Last-3.



TRP current
Over Voltage (02)
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
33.3 A
MON T/ K N STP 0.0A

TRP current
00 Trip Name ( 2)
Over Voltage
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
33.3 A
TRP current
00 Trip Name ( 1)
External Trip
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current
33.3 A





Chapter 6 How to use Keypad


6-22
6.1.9 How to initialize parameter

You can initialize the parameter that has been changed by the user to the initial state at the time of delivery. Not only
the entire parameter but a group of the parameter mode can be selected and initialized.


- Monitor Mode is displayed.

- Shift to CNF by using Mode key.

- Shift to code 40 using Down key.
- Press PROG.

- Of the Parameter items to initialize, select All Groups and press
PROG.

- Initialization finished, you come back to the initialization selection
display.


MON T/ K N STP 0.0A

CNF N STP 0.0A
00 Jump Code
9 CODE
01 language Sel
English
02 I nv S/ W Ver
Version 1.00
CNF N STP 0.0A
31 Option-2 Type
None
32 Option-3 Type
None
40 Parameter I nit
----- No ------
CNF N STP 0.0A
40 Parameter I nit
------ No ------
1 All Groups
2 DRV
CNF N STP 0.0A
31 Option-2 Type
None
32 Option-3 Type
None
40 Parameter Init
----- No ------




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-1
7.1 Basic Functions
7.1.1 How to set frequency (When you want to set frequency)

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Display
0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
8 Fied Bus
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src
9 PLC

Select the frequency setting method in code 07 of DRV Group. Digital setting by using the keypad, analog setting by
using voltage (V1) and current (I1) input of the control terminal block and built-in RS485 port or communication option
are available for operating frequency setting from the external controller.

1) Frequency Setting Using Keypad 1 : KeyPad-1
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Setting Range Unit
01 Cmd Frequency - 0.00 0.00~Max Frequency Hz
DRV
07 Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad-1 0~9 -

You can change the frequency by changing the frequency using the keypad and pressing PROG.
Set DRV group 07 at KeyPad-1. The frequency changes is saved in the memory if you change the frequency at DRV
group 01 and press PROG.

2) Frequency Setting Using Keypad 2 : KeyPad-2
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
01 Cmd Frequency - 0.00 0.00~Max Frequency Hz
DRV
07 Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad-2 0~9 -

You can change the frequency using Up and Down keys on the keypad. Set DRV group 07 at KeyPad-2.
Frequency is changed if you press PROG in DRV Group 01 and then press Up or Down. If you press PROG, it will be
saved in the memory and if you press ESC, it will not be saved.






Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-2
3) Frequency setting by voltage input (V1 terminal) of the terminal block: V1
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 -
Enter 10~+10V or 0~+10V using the voltage (V1) input terminal of the terminal block. If you enter -10~+10V, you can
change the revolution direction of the motor according to the symbol of the voltage signals.

If you enter 0~+10V,
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Frequency Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 - -
01 Freq at 100% - 60.00 0.00~ Max Frequency Hz
05 V1 Monitor - 0.00 0~10 V
06 V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar Unipolar/Bipolar -
07 V1 Filter - 10 0~10000 msec
08 V1 volt x1 - 0.00 0~10 V
09 V1 Perc adj y1 - 0.00 0~100 %
10 V1 Volt x2 - 10.00 0~10 V
11 V1 Perc adj y2 - 100.00 0~100 %
16 V1 Inverting - No No/Yes -
IN
17 V1 Quantizing - 0.04 0.04~10 %

Set No.06 of the input terminal block group (IN) at Unipolar. Enter the volume resistance into the V1 terminal by using
the voltage output of the external voltage output or VR output terminal of the inverter control terminal block as follows.




When connecting external power source When connecting internal power source

(2) If you use 0~+10V of the external circuit,
If the volume resistance is connected to the terminal block (IN-01 Freq at 100%): set the operating frequency of the
maximum voltage input. Set the operating frequency of which the values set in the input terminal block function group
(IN) No. 11 or 15 is 100%.
E.g.1) When IN-01 is 40.00 and the default value is set to IN-16, if 10V is input into the V1 terminal, operation is at
40.00Hz.
E.g.2) When IN-11 is 50% and the default value is set between IN-01 and IN-16, if 10V is input into the V1 terminal,
operation is at 30.00Hz (50% of max 60Hz).

1 V
5G

V1
VR
5G




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-3
IN-05 V1 Monitor: displays the voltage input into the V1 terminal. This is used for monitoring the currently input voltage.
IN-07 V1 Filter: used when the set frequency value fluctuates greatly due to the environment such as noise. If you set the
filter time constant high, you can reduce the frequency fluctuation but the response gets slower. The higher the time
constant is, the time (t) becomes longer. The set time refers to the time it takes the frequency set in the inverter to increase
by up to about 63% when the voltage input is input by step as follows.







IN-08 V1 Volt X1 ~ IN-11 V1 Perc y2: You can set the slope and offset value for the input voltage.








IN-16 V1 Inverting: If you set at No. 1 Yes, you can reverse the present revolution direction.
IN-17 V1 Quantizing: used when there is a lot of noise in the analog signals input into the terminal. You can also reduce
noise to some extent by using the IN-07 low pass filter value but the higher the value is, the responsiveness becomes
slower and pulsation of a long cycle might occur. The resolving power of output frequency for analog input decreases but
the noise effect is reduced by the quantizing function in a system sensitive to noise. The set quantization value is the
percentage of the maximum analog input value. Therefore if the maximum input value is 10V and the quantization value
is set at 1%, the frequency changes by 0.06Hz (when the maximum frequency is 60Hz) at an interval of 0.1V. The output
frequency when the input value increases and decreases differs so that the effect of analog input value fluctuation is
removed. If the quantization value is quadrisected and the analog input value increases, when a value three fourths the
quantization value is input, the output frequency changes and from the next step it increases along with the quantization
value as follows. If the analog input value decreases by 1/4 of the quantization value, the output frequency changes.



V1 input
Set
F t
IN-08
IN-09
IN-11
Set Frequency
V1 Input
IN-10




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-4
V1
CM
-10 ~ +10 V













(3) If -10~+10V is input,
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 - -
01 Freq at 100% - 60.00 0.00~Max. Freq. Hz
05 V1 Monitor - 0.00 0~10V V
06 V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar Unipolar/ Bipolar -
12 V1 -volt x1’ - 0.00 0~10V V
13 V1 -Perc y1’ - 0.00 0~100% %
14 V1 -Volt x2’ - -10.00 0~10V V
IN
15 V1 -Perc y2’ - -100.00 0~100% %

Set IN-06 at Bipolar. Codes between 12 and 15 are displayed only when they are Bipolar and you can set the voltage
between 0 and 10V which is input into the V1 terminal. As follows, input into the V1 terminal in volume resistance by
using the voltage output of the external controller or the VR output terminal of the inverter control terminal block.





When -10~10V is used from the external circuit When connecting inner power source


Output
Frequency[Hz]
Analog Input[V]
10
9.975
9.925
0.075
0.025 0.1 0.2
0.175
60.00
59.94
0.12
0.06
V1
VR+
VR-




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-5
The output frequency of bipolar voltage input (-10~+10V) is as follows.










IN-12 V1 –volt x1’~ IN-15 V1 –Perc y2’: You can set the slope and offset value of the output frequency of (-) input
voltage as follows.
E.g.) If the minimum (-) input voltage if V1 is -2V, the output ratio of -2V is 10% and maximum voltage is -8V and then
you set the output ratio at 80%, the output frequency moves between 6Hz~48Hz.









For setting of 0~+10V, see IN-08 V1 Volt X1 ~ IN-11 V1 Perc y2.

The selection of keypad or terminal block directions and motor rotation by bipolar voltage input is shown in the following
table.

Voltage Input
0~10V -10~0V
FWD FWD REV Operating
Command
REV REV FWD





IN-12 IN-14
IN-13
IN-15
Set Frequency
V1 Input
-8V -2V
6Hz
48Hz
Forward Output
Frequency
Reverse Output
Frequency
Input
Voltage
0~10[V] -10~0[V]




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-6
4) Frequency setting by current input into terminal block (I1 Terminal)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 3 I1 - -
01 Freq at 100% - 60.00 0.00~ Max Freq Hz
20 I1 Monitor - 0.00 0~20 mA
22 I1 Filter - 10 0~10000 msec
23 I1 Curr x1 - 4.00 0~20 mA
24 I1 Perc y1 - 0.00 0~100 %
25 I1 Curr x2 - 20.00 0~20 mA
26 I1 Perc y2 - 100.00 0~100 %
31 I1 Inverting - No No/Yes -
IN

32 I1 Quantizing - 0.04 0.04~10 %

Select I1 in DRV Group 07. Input current of 0~20mA into the I1 terminal of the terminal block to set frequency.

IN-01 Freq at 100%: sets the operating frequency at the maximum current input. The operating frequency when the
value set in IN-26 is 100% is set.
E.g.1) If IN-01 is 40.00 and IN-23~26 is set at the default value, when 20mA is input into the I1 terminal, the operation
is at 40.00Hz.
E.g.2) If IN-26 is 50% and IN-01, 23~26 are set at the initial value, when 20mA is input into the I1 terminal, the
operation is at 30.00Hz.
IN-20 I1 Monitor: displays the current input into the I1 terminal. This is used for monitoring the current input at the
moment.
IN-22 I1 Filter: The set time refers to the time it takes the input current which has been step input to reach about 63% of
the I1 value that has been step input in the inverter.
IN-23 I1 Curr x1 ~ IN-26 I1 Perc y2: You can set the slope of the output frequency and offset value against the current
as follows.








IN-31 I1 Inverting: You can turn the direction of the rotation.
IN-32 I1 Qunatizing: the same as quantizing function of IN-17. See “IN-17 V1 Quantizing”on Page 7-3.

IN-23
IN-24
IN-26
Set Frequency
I1 Input
IN-25




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-7
5) Frequency command by advanced I/O option card
You can input the frequency command by using -10~+10V (V2 terminal) and 0~20mA (I2terminal) if you mount an
extended I/O card on the inverter option slot.

▶ -10~+10V Input
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 4 V2 - -
35 V2 Monitor - 0.00 0~20 mA
37 V2 Filter - 10 0~10000 msec
38 V2 Volt x1 - 0.00 0~10V V
39 V2 Perc y1 - 0.00 0~100 %
40 V2 Volt x2 - 10.00 0~10 V
41 V2 Perc y2 - 100.00 0~100 %
42 V2 -Volt x1’ - 0.00 0~10 V
43 V2 -Perc y1’ - 0.00 0~100 %
44 V2 -Volt x2’ - -10.00 0~10 V
45 V2 -Perc y2’ - -100.00 -100~0 %
46 V2 Inverting 0 No No/Yes -
IN

47 V2 Quantizing - 0.04 0.04~10 %
The voltage input of the extended I/O inputs bipolar voltage at -10V ~ +10V. Its operating method is the same as the
Bipolar input of the V1 terminal, which was described on Page 7-2.

▶0 ~ 20mA Input
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 5 I2 - -
50 I2 Monitor - 0.00 0~20 mA
52 I2 Filter - 15 0~10000 msec
53 I2 Curr x1 - 4.00 0~20 mA
54 I2 Perc y1 - 0.00 0~100 %
55 I2 Curr x2 - 20.00 4~20 mA
56 I2 Perc y2 - 100.00 0~100 %
57 I2 Volt x1’ - 0.00 -20~0 mA
58 I2 Perc y1’ - 0.00 -100~0 %
59 I2 Volt x2’ - -20.00 -20~0 mA
60 I2 Perc y2 - -100.00 -100~0 %
61 I2 Inverting - No No/Yes -
IN

62 I2 Quantizing - 0.04 0.04~10 %
For its operating method, see the description of the I1 terminal on Page 7-4.
▶-20~20mA Input
Its operating method is the same as the Bipolar, it also possible to Bipolar operation by -20~20mA Input.




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-8
6) Frequency setting by Encoder Option Card (If you want use pulse input to frequency command)
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Frequency Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 7 Encoder
-
-
IN 01 Freq at 100% - 60.00
0.00~Max. Freq.
Hz
01 Enc Opt Mode 2 Reference
0~2
-
04 Enc Type Sel 0 -
0~2
-
05 Enc Pulse Sel 2 A
0~2
-
06 Enc Pulse Num - -
10~4096
-
09 Pulse Monitor - -
-
kHz
10 Enc Filter - 10
0~10000
msec
11 Enc Pulse x1 - 0.0
0~100
kHz
12 Enc Perc Y1 - 0.00
0~100
%
13 Enc Pulse x2 - 100.0
0~100
kHz
APO

14 Enc Perc y2 - 100.00
0~100
%

If you mount the encoder option card on the main body of the inverter, the code is displayed from APO-01.
APO-01 Enc Opt Mode, APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: Select No.2 Reference for APO-01 in order to set the frequency with
the encoder. Set APO-05 at No.2 A.
APO-04 Enc Type Sel, APO-06 Enc Pulse Sel: inputs the output method and number of pulses in harmony with the
encoder specification.
APO-10 Enc Filter ~ APO-14 Enc Perc y2: sets the filter time constant and minimum and maximum input frequency of
the encoder input. The output frequency corresponding to the encoder input frequency is the same as that of voltage (V1)
or current (I1) input.
APO-09 Pulse Monitor: displays the frequency of the pulse which is input when APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is set as
Reference.

7) Frequency setting by RS-485 Communication: Int 485
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Frequency Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 - -
01 Int485 St ID - 1 0~250 -
0 ModBus RTU 0~2 -
1 ModBus ASCII 0~2 - 02 Int485 Proto
2 LS Inv 485 0~2 -
04 Int485 BaudR 3 9600 1200~38400 bps
0 D8 / PN / S1 0~3 -
1 D8 / PN / S2 0~3 -
2 D8 / PE / S1 0~3 -
COM

07 Int485 Mode
3 D8 / PO / S1 0~3 -




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-9
If you set DRV-07 Freq Ref Src at Int 485, you can control the inverter through communication with the higher controller
(PLC or PC) by using the RS485 (+S, -S) terminal of the terminal block. For details, see Communication Functions,
Chapter 11.
Note: Please refer to User manual for communication options such as Profibus, Device-net, and PLC options.

7.1.2 Analog command frequency fixation

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
0 Keypad-1
0~9
-
1 Keypad-2
0~9
-
2 V1
0~9
-
3 I1
0~9
-
4 V2
0~9
-
5 I2
0~9
-
6 Int 485
0~9
-
7 Encoder
0~9
-
8 Fied Bus
0~9
-
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src
9 PLC
0~9
-
IN 65~75 *Px Define 21 Analog Hold 65~75 -
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11 (option)
This is the function of fixing the operating frequency when the terminal selected as the Analog Hold among the multi-
function terminals if you set the frequency by using the analog input of the control terminal block.











7.1.3 Changing frequency to revolution

If you set the Hz/Rpm Sel value at “1: Rpm Display, the frequency will change into revolution.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 21 Hz/Rpm Sel 1 Rpm Display - rpm


Frequency
Px

Operating Command
Set Frequency




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-10
7.1.4 Sequential frequency setting

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src - - - -
BAS 50~64 Step Freq - x - - -- Hz
7 Speed-L - -
8 Speed-M - -
9 Speed-H - -
65~75 Px Define
10 Speed-X - -
IN
89 InCheck Time - 1 - msec
*Step Freq – x : Step Freq -1~15, Px: P1~P8, P9~P11 (Option)

Sequential operation is available by using the multi-function terminal. Speed 0 frequency uses the frequency
command selected in DRV Group No. 07.
Enter the desired step frequency in codes 50~64 of BAS.
Select the terminal to use as sequential input among multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set one of the sequential
functions (Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H, Speed-X) for each.
Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H and Speed-X are identified as binary codes and operation starts with the frequency set
in BAS-50 ~ BAS-64 selected.
If multi-function terminals P6, P7 and P8 are set at Speed-L, Speed-M and Speed-H respectively, you can operate it
as follows. In case of Speed-X being used, you can set up to Speed 16 when the highest bit is Speed-X.


















Speed FX or RX P8 P7 P6
0 9 - - -
1 9 - - 9
2 9 - 9 -
3 9 - 9 9
4 9 9 - -
5 9 9 - 9
6 9 9 9 -
7 9 9 9 9
Frequency
P6
P

7
8
FX
RX
0




1
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
P




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-11
[Example of speed-8]
If multi-function terminals P5, P6, P7 and P8 are set at Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H and Speed-X respectively, you can
operate it as follows.

















IN-89 In Check Time: If you use the multi-function terminal for sequential frequency setting, you can set the in check time
for the terminal block input within the inverter. For example, if you set the in check time at 100msec and input multi-function
terminal P6, it will be checked whether another terminal block input is input for 100msec. After 100msec, it is accelerated
or decelerated by the frequency corresponding to P6 terminal.

7.1.5 Operating command setting method

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Display
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
DRV 06 Cmd Source
5 PLC
Select the operating command setting method in DRV Group code 06. For operating command, other than the basic
operation using the keypad and multi-function terminal, you can also use the built-in RS485 communication, Fieldbus
and Application Option Card.

1) Keypad Operating Command: KeyPad
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Display Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 KeyPad -
If you set the DRV Group 06 with the keypad, operation starts using the FWD and REV keys on the inverter keypad
and stops using Stop key.
Speed FX or RX P8 P7 P6 P5
0 9 - - - -
1 9 - - - 9
2 9 - - 9 -
3 9 - - 9 9
4 9 - 9 - -
5 9 - 9 - 9
6 9 - 9 9 -
7 9 - 9 9 9
8 9 9 - - -
9 9 9 - - 9
10 9 9 - 9 -
11 9 9 - 9 9
12 9 9 9 - -
13 9 9 9 - 9
14 9 9 9 9 -
15 9 9 9 9 9




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-12
2) Terminal Block operating command 1 : Fx/Rx-1
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 - -
65~75 Px Define 1 FX - -
65~75 Px Define 2 RX - -
IN
88 Run On Delay - 1.00 0.00~100 sec
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11 (option)

Set DRV Group 06 at Fx/Rx-1. Select the terminal used for FX and RX operating commands among multi-function
terminals P1~P11 and set the function of the appropriate terminal of IN 65~75 at FX and RX. It stops if the FX and RX
terminals are ON or OFF at the same time.
IN-88 Run On Delay: Operation starts after the set time, too when the FX or RX terminal is input. It can be used where
operation start synchronization with an outside sequence is necessary.









3) Terminal Block operating command 2 : Fx/Rx-2
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source 2 Fx/Rx-2 - -
65~75 Px Define 1 FX - -
65~75 Px Define 2 RX - - IN
88 Run On Delay - 1.00 0.00~100 sec
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11 (option)
FX terminal is used for operating command and RX terminal is for selecting the rotation direction. Set DRV Group 06
at Fx/Rx-2. Select the terminal used for FX and RX operating commands among multi-function terminals P1~P11 and
set the function of the appropriate terminal of IN 65~75 at FX and RX.
IN-88 Run On Delay: Operation starts after the set time, too when the FX or RX terminal is input. It can be used
where operation start synchronization with an outside sequence is necessary.






FX
RX
Frequency
FX
RX
Frequency




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-13
4) Operating Command by RS-485 Communication: Int 485
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source 3 Int 485 - -
04 Int485 St ID - 1 0~250 -
05 Int485 Proto 0 ModBus RTU - -
06 Int485 BaudR 3 9600 1200~38400 bps
COM
07 Int485 Mode 0 D8 / PN / S1 - -
You can control the inverter through communication with a higher controller (PLC or PC) by using terminal RS485 (+S,
-S) on the terminal block if you set DRV-06 Cmd Src at Int 485. For details, see Communication Functions, Chapter
11.

7.1.6 Local/Remote by-pass operation using multi-function keys
(Checking the inverter operation or equipment without changing the existing parameter setting)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
CNF 42 Multi-Key Sel 1 Local/Remote -
DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 -

Caution
Local/remote By-pass operation might cause a problem with the device such as
interruption during operation if it is improperly used, so it is highly recommended that
you use it only when necessary.

In case of operation by other than using the keypad (terminal block or communication), you can use it when checking
the operation or body of the inverter or conducting manual switching operation using the keypad in the field in case of
an emergency.
1) Definition of Local: Local refers to the function of transforming all the operating, frequency and torque commands for
them to be operated by using the keypad in order to enable the keypad to carry out all operation. In such a case, JOG
command is ignored (When RUN Enable is set in the multi-function terminal, operation is possible with it on).
2) Definition of Remote: Remote refers to the operation of the inverter by the previously set operating and frequency
commands of the inverter in communication or sequence when it is set at communication or sequence respectively.
3) CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel: If you set at No. 1 Local/Remote, the signal R emerges on the keypad status display and the
multi-function keys operate in local/remote functions. When R is seen on the keypad status display, you are in the
Remote Operation Mode, which operates by the previously set parameters without any change in the operation. If you
want Local Operation Mode, with R displayed in the keypad status display, press the multi-function key and R turns
into L and you can operate the inverter with FWD and REV keys on the keypad setting. If you press the multi-function
key one more time, R is displayed and the inverter operates by the method selected in DRV-06 Cmd Source.




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-14
4) Shift from Remote to Local
In case of Shift from Remote to Local, the signal representing the command source and frequency source at the top of
MON Mode turns to K/K. The inverter stops if it has been operating in Remote status.
5) Shift from Local to Remote
In case of shift from Local to Remote, K/K at the top of MON Mode is represented by a different signal in conformity to
the previously set command source and frequency source.
Shift to Remote is available during Local operation but the movements might vary according to which source it is set at.
(1) When the Terminal Block is Command Source
Shift from Local to Remote during operation leads to operation by the command of the terminal block. That is, if RX
is in the terminal block and the motor is rotating forward in Local, shift to Remote makes the motor rotate in the
reverse direction.
(2) Digital Command Source
Digital command source refers to all the command sources except for the terminal block source, that is,
communication, PLC and keypad. In case of digital command source, the inverter stops and then starts when the
next command is given. The target frequency is set at the currently set frequency source.
6) Terminal in with Power on
When ADV-10 Power On Run is No, if the terminals of FX, RX, FWD_JOG, REV_JOG, PRE EXCITE are in, shift to
Local still enables the keypad to operate the inverter. However, re-shift to Remote disables operation. That is, one of the
5 aforementioned terminals is ON with power on, the motor does not work whether FX or RX. Therefore, with Power
On Run being No, terminal Run is available after the inverter is turned on and all the terminals off.
7) When Motor Stops Due to Trip during Operation
If the motor stops due to a trip during operation and is reset, in Local Mode, the inverter motor is operated by the keypad,
but in Remote Mode again, it does not operate no matter how many operating commands are given to the terminal
block. That is, the motor starts rotating after all the operating terminals is turned OFF and the operating command
terminal is turned ON.

7.1.7 Prevention of forward or reverse rotation: Run Prevent

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
ADV 09 Run Prevent 0 None 0~2 -
You can select a motor rotation direction to prevent.
None : Both forward and reverse are available.
Forward Prev : Forward operation is prevented.
Reverse Prev : Reverse operation is prevented.






Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-15
7.1.8 Run immediately with power On: Power-on Run

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source - 1 ~ 2 - -
ADV 10 Power-on Run 1 --- yes --- No/Yes -
With power supplied to the inverter and the terminal block operating command being ON, the inverter starts operating.
This is effective only when the DRV Group 06 command source is set at 1 (Fx/Rx-1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2). At this time, if load
(Fan load) is on the status of Free-Run, Trip may be occurred while operating. Change the bit 4 to 1 at CON-71 Speed
Search and it makes the inverter can start with Speed Search. If not, inverter will be accelerating normal V/F pattern
without Speed Search.
If this function is not selected, operation resumes after the operating commands is turned OFF and ON again.










Caution
Be careful with this function, which causes the motor to rotate as soon as the power is
supplied.

7.1.9 Restarts by reset after trip: RST Restart

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display default Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source -
FX/RX-1
or FX/RX-2
FX/RX-1 1~2 -
08 RST Restart 1 -- yes -- 0:No No(1)/Yes(1) -
09 Retry Number 1 0 0~10 - PRT
10 Retry Delay 1.0 1.0 0~60.0 sec
The inverter resumes if the terminal block operating command is ON when it is reset after a trip. Inverter cut the output
when inverter trip is occurred and motor run to Free-Run. At this time, inverter trip can be occurred. Change the bit 2
to 1 at CON-71 Speed Search and Inverter will be start with Speed Search when trip is released. If not, inverter will be
accelerating normal V/F pattern without Speed Search.
If this function is not used, operation resumes when the operating command is turned OFF and then ON again after
resetting.
Operating
command
Frequency
Power
When ADV-10=0 When ADV-10=1




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-16









Caution
When using this function, if you reset the inverter in the terminal block of loader after a
trip, the motor starts rotating. Be careful of an accident.

7.1.10 Setting of accelerating/decelerating time and pattern

1) Setting of accelerating/decelerating time on the basis of the maximum frequency
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
Below 75kW 20.0
03 Acc Time -
Above 90kW 60.0
0~600 sec
Below 75kW 30.0
04 Dec Time -
Above 90kW 90.0
0~600 sec
DRV
20 Max Freq - 60.00 0~400 Hz
08 Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq Max Freq/Delta Freq -
BAS
09 Time scale 1 0.1 0.01/0.1/1 sec

If you set BAS-08 at Max Freq, you can accelerate or decelerate at an equal slope on the basis of the maximum
frequency regardless of the operating frequency.
The acceleration time set in DRV-03 is the time it takes the frequency to reach the maximum value from 0 Hz and the
deceleration time of 04 is the time it takes the frequency to stop at 0 Hz from the maximum frequency.
E.g.) If you set the maximum frequency at 60.00 Hz, Acc/Dec time at 5 seconds and operating frequency at 30 Hz,
the time required is 2.5 seconds.









FX
Frequency
Accel Time Decel Time
Max Frequency
Operating
Command
Reset
Frequency
When PRT-08=0
When PRT-08=1




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-17
Caution
90 ~ 160 kW product’s acceleration initial value is 60.0sec and deceleration initial value is
90.0sec. Please do not confuse that displayed value at left bottom of keypad is D : 20.0, D : 30.0
it is applied for below 75kW product.

BAS-09 Time scale: Used when precise Acc/Dec time is required due to the load characteristics or it is necessary to
increase the maximum set time. It changes the units of all the functions related to time.

Setting Range of Acc/Dec Time Precision
0 0.01 sec 0.00 ~ 60.00 Settable to 0.01 second
1 0.1 sec 0.0 ~ 600.0 Settable to 0.1 second
2 1 sec 0 ~ 6000 Settable to 1 second

Caution
Be careful because change of the unit leads to change of maximum settable time. If
you change BAS-09 Time scale to 0(0.01sec) with Acc time set at 1000.0 seconds, the
Acc time becomes 600.00 seconds.

2) Setting of Acc/Dec Time Based on Operating Frequency
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
03 Acc Time - 20.0 0~600 sec
DRV
04 Dec Time - 30.0 0~600 sec
BAS 08 Ramp T Mode 1 Delta Freq Max Freq/Delta Freq -

If you set BAS-08 as Delta Freq, you can set the Acc/Dec time by the time it takes the current frequency during operation
at steady speed to reach the target frequency of the next step. If you set the Acc time at 5 seconds in case of step
operation between 10Hz and 30Hz while it is static, the Acc time is as follows.








Operating
Command

Operating
frequency
5 7 12
Time
[Sec]
5Sec 5 Sec
10Hz
30Hz




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-18
3) Setting of Acc/Dec Time Using Multi-Function Terminal
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
Below 75 kW 20.0
03 Acc Time -
Above 90 kW 60.0
0~600 sec
Below 75 kW 30.0
DRV
04 Dec Time -
Above 90 kW 90.0
0~600 sec
70~74 Acc Time-x - x.xx 0~600 sec
BAS
71~75 Dec Time-x - x.xx 0~600 sec
65~75 Px Define 11 XCEL-L - -
65~75 Px Define 12 XCEL-M - - IN
89 In Check Time - 1 1~5000 msec
* Acc Time-x : Acc Time-1~3, Dec Time-x: Dec Time-1~3
You can change the Acc/Dec time using the multi-function terminal.
Set the Acc/Dec time-0 I DRV-03 and 04 and set the Acc Time 1~3, Dec Time 1~3 in 70~75.
Select the terminal to use as sequential Acc/Dec time command among the multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set
each of the sequential Acc/Dec command (XCEL-L, XCEL-M). XCEL-L and XCEL-H are identified in binary codes and
the operation is based on the Acc/Dec time set in BAS-70 ~ BAS-75.
If you set multi-function terminals P7 and P8 at XCEL-L and XCEL-M respectively, the operation is shown as follows.











IN-89 In Check Time: You can set In Check Time within the inverter when you use the multi-function input terminal as
sequential Acc/Dec setting. For example, if you set the In Check Time at 100msec and input multi-function terminal P6,
check another terminal block input for 100msec. After 100msec, the Acc/Dec time corresponding to P6 terminal is set.

4) Change of Acc/Dec Time by Acc/Dec Time Switching Frequency Setting
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
03 Acc Time - 10.0 0~600 sec
DRV
04 Dec Time - 10.0 0~600 sec
70 Acc Time-1 - 20.0 0~600 sec
BAS
71 Dec Time-1 - 20.0 0~600 sec
ADV 60 Xcel Change Fr - 30.00 0~Max. Freq. Hz/RPM

Acc/Dec Time P8 P7
0 - -
1 - 9
2 9 -
3 9 9
Frequency
P7
P8
FX
Acc 0
Acc1
Acc2
Acc3 Dec0
Dec1
Dec2
Dec3




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-19
You can change the Acc/Dec slope without using the multi-function terminal. The inverter operates at the slope set at
BAS-70, 71 below the Acc/Dec switching frequency set at ADV-60 of the operating frequency. However, if the operating
frequency rises over the Acc/Dec switching frequency, the inverter runs at the Acc/Dec slope set at DRV-03 and 04.
If you set and input the function of the multi-function input terminal at sequential Acc/Dec (Xcel-L, Xcel-M[HZ]), the
inverter runs by Acc/Dec input regardless of the Acc/Dec switching frequency.









7.1.11 Acc/Dec pattern setting

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Range Unit
BAS 08 Ramp T mode 0 Max Freq
Max Freq/Delta
Freq
-
01 Acc Pattern 0 Linear 0~1 -
02 Dec Pattern 0 Linear 0~1 -
03 Acc S Start - 40 1~100 %
04 Acc S End - 40 1~100 %
05 Dec S Start - 40 1~100 %
ADV
06 Dec S End - 40 1~100 %

This sets the pattern of the Acc/Dec slope. There are 5 patterns, which have the following functions.
Type Function
0 Linear The output frequency is constant and increases or decreases linearly.
Used for applications requiring smooth Acc/Dec such as lift load and elevator
door. The curve rate of S-curve can be adjusted by using the functions of
03~06.
Caution
1 S-curve
Be careful when you set the Acc/Dec pattern at S-curve because it gets longer
than the set Acc/Dec time. For actual Acc/Dec time, see Page 7-21.





Frequency
FX
DRV-03
BAS-70
BAS-71
DRV-04
ADV-60




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-20








ADV-03 Acc S Start: You can adjust the slope of the curve when you set the Acc/Dec pattern as S-curve. This is used
to adjust the curvilinear ratio of S-curve when acceleration begins. The curve ratio sets the ratio of the curve
acceleration of the 1/2 frequency on the basis of a half of the target frequency. For example, if ADV-03 Acc S Start is
set at 50% and the target frequency, which equals the maximum frequency(m[Hz]ax Freq), is 60Hz, the frequency
which the curve acceleration accounts for when the S-curve accelerates to 30Hz is 0~15Hz and the 15Hz~30Hz
interval is linear acceleration.
ADV-04 Acc S End: You can adjust the slope of the curve when the operating frequency reaches the target
frequency. This is used to set the ratio accounted for by the curve acceleration of the remaining interval on the basis of
the 1/2 frequency of the target frequency as in case of Acc S Start. If set as in Acc S Start above, it accelerates in a
linear slope until 30~45Hz and then accelerates in a curve slope and operates at a steady speed for the remaining
45~60Hz interval.
ADV-05 Dec S Start ~ ADV-06 Dec S End: Sets the curve deceleration slope ratio during deceleration. The setting
method is as the acceleration ratio described above.

Acc/Dec Time in S-curve:
Acc Time = Set Acc Time + Set Acc Time x (ADV-03)/2 + Set Acc Time x (ADV-04)/2
Dec Time = Set Dec Time + Set Dec Time x (ADV-05)/2 + Set Dec Time x (ADV-06)/2
















Operating
Command
Frequency
Acc Time Dec Time
Linear
S-Curve
[ S-Curve Acc/Dec Pattern ]
Out Freq
(Hz)

Sstart
Time(sec)
Max Freq/2
Max Freq
Send
Linear
Variation of Delta
Frequency
Time(sec)
Sstart
Send
Linear




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-21
7.1.12 Acc/Dec Stop command

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 25 XCEL Stop -

You can stop acceleration or deceleration using the multi-function terminal and operate at steady speed. The following
figure illustrates use of multi-function terminal P8.











7.1.13 V/F Voltage control
You can set the voltage, slope and output pattern according to the output frequency. You can also adjust the torque
boost at a low speed.

1) Linear V/F pattern operation
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Range Unit
09 Cotrol Mode 0 V/F -
18 Base Freq - 60.00 30~400 Hz DRV
19 Start Freq - 0.50 0.01~10 Hz
BAS 07 V/F Pattern 0 Linear - -

The output voltage increases and decreases at a constant magnitude in proportion to the voltage/frequency (V/F) ratio
as the frequency rises and declines. This is used for constant torque (CT) load regardless of frequency.
DRV-18 Base Freq: sets the base frequency. This is the frequency where the rated voltage of the inverter is produced.
Enter the frequency shown in the motor plate.
DRV-19 Start Freq: sets the start frequency. This is the frequency where the inverter begins to produce voltage. The
inverter does not produce voltage when the target frequency is below the start frequency. However, in case of
decelerating stop during operation above the start frequency, it stops operating as follows.



Frequency
P8
Operating
Command




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-22












2) Double reduction V/F pattern operation (Using fan, pump load)
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
1 Square 1 -
BAS 07 V/F Pattern
3 Square 2 -

This is an operation pattern of which the starting characteristic such as the fan and pump is suitable for the load of
double reduction type. Choose from Square 1 and 2 according to the starting characteristic.
Square 1: Voltage is produced in proportion to 1.5 times the frequency.
Square 2: Voltage is produced in proportion to twice the frequency. This is used for variable torque(VT) load(fan,
pump) of the fan or pump.








3) User V/F operation (When you want to use a tailored V/F operation pattern)
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Frequency Unit
07 V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0~2 -
41 User Freq 1 - 15.00 0~ MaxFrequency Hz
42 User Volt 1 - 25 0~100% %
43 User Freq 2 - 30.00 0~ MaxFrequency Hz
44 User Volt 2 - 50 0~100% %
45 User Freq 3 - 45.00 0~ MaxFrequency Hz
46 User Volt 3 - 75 0~100% %
47 User Freq 4 - 60.00 0~ MaxFrequency Hz
BAS
48 User Volt 4 - 100 0~100% %


Operating
Command
Frequency
Start Frequency
Base Frequency
Voltage
Inverter
Rated
Frequency
Frequency
Base Frequency
100%
Voltage
Linear
Square




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-23
The user can set the pattern suitable for the V/F pattern and load characteristics of a special motor rather than a ordinary
induction motor. BAS-41 User Freq 1 ~ BAS-48 User Volt 4: Select a frequency between the start frequency and
maximum frequency, set the user frequency(User Freq x) and set the voltage corresponding to each frequency at the
user voltage(User Volt x).













Caution
In using an ordinary induction motor, if you set the pattern greatly out of the linear V/F pattern, the torque
might be insufficient or reversely the motor might be overheated.
When the user V/F pattern is being used, the forward torque boost (DRV-16 Fwd Boost) and reverse torque
boost (DRV-17 Rev Boost) do not operate.

7.1.14 Torque boost

1) Manual Torque Boost (When great start torque is necessary for elevator load, etc.)
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting range Unit
15 Torque Boost 0 Manual -
16 Fwd Boost
note1)
- 2.0 0~15 % DRV
17 Rev Boost
note1)
- 2.0 0~15 %
note1)
Default value of 90~160 kW is 1.0 [%].
This adjusts the output voltage of low speed operation or starting. It can improve the starting characteristic or raise the
low speed torque by increasing the output voltage in the low speed area.
DRV-16 Fwd Boost: adjusts the torque boost in forward rotation.
DRV-17 Rev Boost: adjusts the torque boost in reverse rotation.

Caution
Be careful not to set the torque boost too high because the motor might be overheated
by over excitation.
Frequency
Voltage
Start
Frequency
BAS-41 Base Frequency
100%
Linear
V/F
BAS-43
BAS-45
BAS-47
BAS-42
BAS-44
BAS-46
BAS-48




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-24













2) Automatic Torque Boost (Choosing automatic selection function for greater starting torque)
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
DRV 15 Torque Boost 1 Auto -
BAS 20 Auto Tuning 2 Rs+Lsigma -
The inverter automatically calculates the torque boost and produces voltage by using the motor parameter.
Because the stator resistance of the motor, inductance value and no load current value are necessary for the
automatic torque boost to function, do auto tuning (BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before use (Page 8-17).

7.1.15 Motor output voltage adjustment
(Adjusting motor voltage when input power specification differs from motor voltage specification)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
BAS 15 Rated Volt - 220 180~480 V
Inputs the voltage of the motor plate. The set voltage value is the output voltage value of the base frequency. Above
the base frequency, if the input voltage is higher than the set voltage, the output is in proportion to the set value but if
the input voltage is lower than the set voltage, the input voltage is produced. When 0 is set, the output voltage is
corrected according to the input voltage when the inverter is static. Above the base frequency, if the input voltage is
lower than the set voltage, the input voltage is produced.










FX
time
RX
Voltage
Forward Torque Boost
No Torque Boost
100 %
Reverse Torque Boost
Output Frequency
Output
Voltage
Base Frequency
480V
180V




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-25
7.1.16 Selection of starting method (When you want to change starting method)
If an operating command is input in the static state, you can select the inverter starting method.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Initial Setting Display Unit
0 Accel
07 Start mode
1 DC-Start
0: Accel -
12 Dc-Start Time - 0.00 -
0~60
ADV
13 Dc Inj Level - 50 -
0~200

1) Accelerating Start
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 07 Start mode 0 Accel -
This is a normal accelerating method, which directly accelerates to the target frequency if the operating command is
given when no particular function is selected.

2) Start after D.C. Braking
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
07 Start Mode 1 Dc-Start -
12 Dc-Start Time - 0.00 0~60 sec ADV
13 Dc Inj Level - 50 0~200 %






Accelerates after the D.C. voltage is supplied to the motor for the set period of time. It can be accelerated after
stopping revolution of the motor by D.C. Braking when the motor is revolving before voltage is output from inverter.
Also, it can be used in case of using machine braking to motor’s spindle and that some torque is needed after opening
machine braking.


Caution
Do not set over inverter rating current because DC break
depends on the motor rating current which is set. It may
cause overheating and malfunction.
Caution
When D.C. Braking is big or control time is too long, overheating and malfunction may occur.
Caution
Since D.C Braking is a standard of rating current for pre-set motor, please do not set over value of inverter’s
rating current. It may cause overheating and malfunction.
Frequency
Voltage
Operating
Command
ADV-12
t
ADV-13




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-26
7.1.17 Stop method selection (Changing stop method)
You can choose the method of stopping the motor when the inverter is given a stop command during operation.

1) Decelerating Stop
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 08 Stop Mode 0 Dec -
This is a normal decelerating method. If no particular function is selected, the inverter decelerates to 0Hz and stops as
follows.







7.1.18 Stop after D.C. braking
(in order to stop the motor when decelerating with direct current in pre-set frequency)
If frequency reaches the set one, D.C. Braking stops the motor.

1) How to stop by D.C. braking
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
08 Stop Mode 1 Dc-Brake 0~4 -
14 Dc-Block Time - 0.10 0~60 -
15 Dc-Brake Time - 1.00 0~200 -
16 Dc-Brake Level - 50 200~200 -
ADV

17 Dc-Brake Freq - 5.00 0~60 -
If the frequency reaches pre-set frequency during deceleration, the motor is stopped by D.C. braking. Start decelerating
with stop command and put direct voltage into the motor to stop if frequency reaches ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq.
ADV-14 Dc-Block Time : sets the time to block output of inverter before D.C. Braking. When inertia of load is big or
ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq is high, over current trips may occur due to current voltage to the motor. Therefore, it
prevents from over current trips by controlling this time.
ADV-15 Dc-Brake Time : sets the time to put current voltage to the motor.
ADV-16 Dc-Brake Level : controls D.C. Braking. Rating current of the motor is a standard.
ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq : sets frequency to start D.C. Braking. It starts D.C. Braking when reaching
pre-set frequency after inverter starts decelerating.

Notice
When setting lower than frequence of D.C. Braking using Dwell frequency, Dwell operation is not available. Only D.C. Braking
operates.
Operating
Command
Frequency
Dec Time




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-27










2) Free Run Stop
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode 2 Free-Run -
Operating command off, the inverter output is blocked. Be careful that the motor might continue rotating due to the
load inertia if the inverter output is blocked during high speed operation when the motor load has high inertia.









3) Flux Braking (Reducing decelerating time further without braking resistance or braking Unit)
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 08 Stop Mode 3 Flux Braking -
If the decelerating time is short, over voltage trip might be caused by the regenerative energy from the motor. If you
apply flux braking, the decelerating time can be shortened because the regenerative energy is consumed by the
motor. However, be careful that damage might occur because of overheat of the motor if flux braking is applied to
loads which frequently decelerates.









Caution
When D.C. Braking is big or control time is too long,
overheating and malfunction may occur.
Caution
Since D.C Braking is a standard of rating current for pre-set
motor, please do not set over value of current of inverter’s
rating current. It may cause overheating and malfunction.
Caution
Do not use this function in case of load with frequent deceleration. It may cause overheating of the
motor and malfunction.
Caution
Stall prevention and Flux Braking are available only in case of deceleration. And, Flux Braking has a
priority. That means that Flux Braking operates when BIT3 of PRT-50 and Flux Braking of BAS-08
are set. In case of that deceleration time is too short or inertia is too big, over voltage trips may
occur.
Operating
Command
Frequency, Voltage
Frequency
Operating
Command
Voltage
Current
ADV-17
ADV-14 ADV-15
ADV-16




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-28
4) Power Braking (Optimum deceleration without Over-Voltage Trip)
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 08 Stop Mode 4 Power Braking -
If the inverter D.C. voltage rises above a certain level due to the regenerative energy of the motor, the decelerating
slope is adjusted or re-acceleration occurs in order to reduce the regenerative energy. This can be applied when short
decelerating time is required without additional braking resistance and braking unit. However, be careful that the
decelerating time might be longer than the set decelerating time and damage might occur because of overheat of the
motor if applied to loads which frequently decelerates.










7.1.19 Frequency limit (Operation with limited frequency)
You can limit the operating frequency by using the maximum frequency and start frequency and by setting the
upper/lower limits on the frequency.

1) Frequency limit using maximum frequency and start frequency
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
19 Start Freq - 0.50 0.01~10 Hz
DRV
20 Max Freq - 60.00 40~400 Hz
DRV-19 Start Freq (Start Frequency): the lower limit to the parameter with speed-related units(Hz, rpm). If you set
the frequency below the start frequency, it is at 0.00.
DRV-20 Max Freq (Maximum Frequency): the upper limit to the parameter of all speed units(Hz, rpm) other than
the base frequency(DRV-18 Base Freq). You cannot set the frequency above the maximum frequency.

2) Frequency Limit Using Upper/Lower Limits
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Range Unit
24 Freq Liit 0 --- No ---- No/Yes
25 Freq Limit Lo - 0.50 0~Upper limit Hz ADV
26 Freq Limit Hi - 60.00 0.5~Max Frequency Hz

Caution
Do not use this function in case of load with frequent deceleration. It may cause overheating of the
motor and malfunction.
Caution
Stall prevention and Power Braking are available only in case of deceleration. And, Power Braking
has a priority. That means that Power Braking operates when BIT3 of PRT-50 and Power Braking of
BAS-08 are set. In case of that deceleration time is too short or inertia is too big, over voltage trips
may occur.




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-29
(1) ADV-24 Freq Limit: If you set the frequency as Yes with the initially set value being No, you can set the
frequency only between the upper limit(ADV-25) and lower limit(ADV-26). With frequency set as No, ADV-25 and
ADV-26 codes are not displayed.
(2) ADV-25 Freq Limit Lo, ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi: sets the upper and lower limits. The minimum set value of the
upper limit is the lower limit and the maximum value of the lower limit is the upper limit.












3) Frequency Jump (Avoiding mechanical resonant frequency)
Frequency jump is for prohibiting frequency setting so that the inverter does not operate in the resonant frequency
band which might occur to the user’s device system. The frequency passes through the frequency jump band when
the motor accelerates or decelerates and cannot be set within the set frequency jump band.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Range Unit
27 Jump Freq 0 --- No ---- No/Yes -
28 Jump Lo 1 10.00 0~Jump Freq Upper Limit 1 Hz
29 Jump Hi 1 15.00
Jump Freq Lower Limit 1
~Max Freq
Hz
30 Jump Lo 2 20.00 0~Jump Freq upper Limit 2 Hz
31 Jump Hi 2 25.00
Jump Freq Lower Limit 2
~Max Freq
Hz
32 Jump Lo 3 30.00 0~Jump Freq Upper Limit 3 Hz
ADV
33 Jump Hi 3 - 35.00
Jump Freq Lower Limit 3
~Max Freq
Hz
If you want to increase the frequency, if the set frequency(current, voltage, RS485 communication, keypad setting,
etc.) is within the jump frequency band, keep the frequency jump lower value and raise the frequency after the set
frequency goes out of the frequency jump band.




Frequency
V1(Voltage Input)
Max Frequency
0 20mA
10V
I (Current Input)
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
No Upper/Lower Limit
to Frequency




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-30












7.1.20 Selection of second operating method (By-pass operation)
You can enter the frequency, operating command and torque reference as the second set values by using the multi-
function input terminal. This can be applied in case of remote operation using the communication option or operation
in the main body of the inverter with the remote braking stopped.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 -
07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 - DRV
08 Trq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 -
04 Cmd 2
nd
Src 0 Keypad -
05 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 - BAS
06 Trq 2
nd
Src 0 Keypd-1 -
IN 65~75 Px Define 15 2nd Source -
Select one of the multi-function terminals between IN-65 ~ IN-75 of the terminal block input group.
BAS-04 Cmd 2nd Src, BAS-05 Freq 2nd Src: With the multi-function input terminal set as 2nd Source ON, the
inverter can operate with the values set at BAS-04 and 05 instead of the values set at DRV-06 and DRV-07.
BAS-06 Trq 2nd Src: With the multi-function input terminal ON, you can enter the torque reference in the method
selected in BAS-06 instead of the method chosen in DRV-08. DRV-08 and BAS-06 are displayed only after the control
mode(DRV-09) is set as sensorless vector or vector control mode and the torque mode(DRV-10) is set as Yes.

Caution
With the multi-function input terminal set as the 2
nd
source and turned ON, the operation status
changes because the frequency command, operating command and torque reference all turn into
2
nd
commands. Therefore make sure you check whether 2
nd
commands are rightly set before
inputting the multi-function terminal.

Operating
Command
Frequency
ADV-33
V1
(Voltage Input)
0
20mA
10V
I (Current Input)
:
Frequency
Declining


:
Frequency
Rising


ADV-32
ADV-31
ADV-30
ADV-29
ADV-28




Chapter 7 Basic Functions




7-31
7.1.21 Multi-function input terminal control
(Improving responsiveness of input terminal)
You can set the filter time constant and contact point type for the multi-function input terminal of the inverter terminal

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
85 DI On Delay - 0 0~10000 msec
86 DI Off Delay - 0 0~10000 msec
87 DI NC/NO Sel - 0000 0000 - -
IN
90 DI Status - 0000 0000 - -

1) IN-85 DI On Delay, IN-86 DI Off Delay: If the state of the input terminal does not change for a set period of time
after the terminal input, it is identified as ON or OFF.
2) IN-87 DI NC/NO Sel: The type of contact point of the input terminal can be selected. If you set the place of the dot
of the switch corresponding to each bit below, you can use it as A contact point(Normal Open) and if above, you can
use it as B contact point(Normal Close). The order is P1, P2…P8 from the right. Digital input will be added when
extended I/O is used so DINC/NO Sel 3 bits will be added. From the right, status of P1, P2, …, P11.
3) IN-90 DI Status: displays the status of the input terminal block. If extended I/O used, status display bit of input
terminal block will be added 3 bits. If the appropriate bit is set at A contact point in DRV-82, ON is displayed when the
Dot is above and OFF is displayed when below. If the appropriate bit is set at B contact point, it operates reversely.
From the right, status of P1, P2…P11 is shown.

7.1.22 Digital input and output control by extended I/O option card
If you mount an extended I/O card on the inverter option slot, you can use additional 3 digital inputs and 3 digital
outputs (relay output).

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
73 P9 Define 0 None -
74 P10 Define 0 None - IN
75 P11 Define 0 None -
34 Relay 3 2 FDT-2
35 Relay 4 3 FDT-3 OUT
36 Relay 4 4 FDT-4







Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-1
8.1 Applied Functions
8.1.1 Override frequency setting using auxiliary frequency command
(Setting frequency of various computation conditions using main and auxiliary speed such as Draw operation)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 0~9 -
01 AUX Ref Src 1 V1 0~4 -
02 AUX Calc Type 0 M + G * A 0~7 - BAS
03 AUX Ref Gain - 0.0 200~200 %
IN 65~75 Px Define 40 Dis Aux Ref 0~48 -
You can set operating frequency by simultaneously using two methods of frequency setting. Main speed is used to
set the operating frequency, and the auxiliary speed can be used for precise adjustment during main speed
frequency. For example, let’s assume that the inverter has been set as in the table above. During operation at 30.00
Hz with Keypad-1 the main speed, if you supply voltage of -10~+10V to V1 terminal and set the gain at 5%
(variables between IN-01 ~ IN-16 are the initial values and IN-06 V1 Polarity is set as Bipolar), precise adjustment is
possible up to 33.00~27.00 Hz.

BAS-01 AUX Ref Src : selects the type of input to be used as auxiliary speed.
Setting Type Function
0
None No auxiliary speed motion
1
V1
Selects the voltage input terminal of the control terminal block as the auxiliary
speed.
2
I1 Selects the current input as the auxiliary speed.
3
V2 Selects the voltage input of the extended IO option board as the auxiliary speed.
4
I2 Selects the current input of the extended IO option board as the auxiliary speed.

BAS-02 Aux Calc Type : The reflection ratio of the main speed can be set by four operations after setting the amount
of the auxiliary speed as gain (BAS-03 Aux Ref Gain).

Setting Type Expression
Final Command Frequency Computation
0 M + (G * A) M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) main speed command value + (BAS03 x BAS01 x IN01)
1 M * (G * A) M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) main speed command value x (BAS03 x BAS01)
2 M / (G * A) M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) main speed command value / (BAS03 x BAS01)
3 M+(M*(G*A)) M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]))
main speed command value + (main speed command value x
(BAS03 x BAS01))
4 M+G*2*(A-50) M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] main speed command value + BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50) x IN01
5 M*(G*2*(A-50)) M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) main speed command value x (BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50))






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-2
Setting Type Expression
Final Command Frequency Computation
6 M/(G*2*(A-50)) M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) main speed command value / (BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50))
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-
40[%])
main speed command value + main speed command value x BAS03
x 2 x (BAS01 – 50)

M : main speed frequency command[Hz or RPM] by DRV-07 setting,
G : auxiliary speed[Hz or RPM] or gain[%],
A : auxiliary speed frequency command[Hz or RPM] or gain[%]
Of the setting types, numbers higher than 4 can do (+) or (-) motions through only analog input.
BAS-03 Aux Ref Gain : adjusts the amount of the input(BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) set as auxiliary speed.
If the auxiliary speed is set as V1 or I1 and the parameter of the terminal input group(IN) No. 01 ~ 32 is the initial
value, the auxiliary speed frequency operates as follows.
IN-65~75 Px Define : If the terminal set as No. 40 dis Aux Ref among the multi-function input terminals, the auxiliary
speed command is not active but only the main speed command is effective.









Example 1) If the frequency keypad is set in main speed and V1 analog voltage is in auxiliary speed,
Conditions:
- main speed (M) setting (DRV-07): Keypad (frequency is set at 30Hz)
- maximum frequency (Max Freq) setting (DRV-20): 400Hz
- auxiliary speed (A) setting (A:BAS-01): V1
(expresses auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the computation setting condition)
- auxiliary speed gain (G) setting (BAS-03): 50% ,IN01~32: default value

Caution
If the maximum frequency is high, there might be an error of output frequency due to analog input and
computation error.

F(M,A,G)

Auxiliary speed command is OFF when the multi-function input
terminal is set as dis Aux Ref (IN65~75).
(frequency command by BAS-01 setting)

final command frequency
(frequency command by DRV-07 setting method)

Main Speed M

Auxiliary Speed A







Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-3
If 6V is being input into V1, the frequency corresponding to 10V is 60Hz, so the auxiliary speed A in the table below
is 36Hz(= 60[Hz]x(6[V]/10[V])) or 60%(=100[%]X(6[V]/10[V]) according to the condition.
Setting Type Final Command Frequency
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36Hz(A))=48Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100Hz
3 M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A)))=39Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60Hz=36Hz
5 M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%))=3Hz
6 M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–50%))=300Hz
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)= 33Hz
*If the set frequency is converted into rpm, Hz above changes into rpm.

Example 2) main speed (M) setting (DRV-07): Keypad (when the frequency command is set at 30Hz)
- maximum frequency (Max Freq)setting)DRV-20): 400Hz
- auxiliary speed (A)setting (BAS-01): I1
(expresses in auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the condition)
- auxiliary speed gain (G)setting(BAS-03): 50%, IN01~32: default value

If 10.4mA is being input into I1, the frequency corresponding to 20mA is 60Hz, so the auxiliary speed A in the table
below is 24Hz(=60[Hz]x((10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])) or 40%(=100[%]x((10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20 [mA]-4[mA])).
Setting Type Final Command Frequency
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M) + (50%(G) x 24Hz(A)) = 42Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
3 M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A)))=36Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz
5 M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%))= -3Hz(reverse)
6 M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–40%))= -300Hz(reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)= 27Hz

Example 3) main speed setting (DRV-07): V1 (if the frequency command is set at 5V and 30Hz)
- M[HZ]ax Freq (DRV-20): 400Hz
- auxiliary speed (BAS-01): I1 (expresses in auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the condition)
- auxiliary speed gain (BAS-03): 50% (represents G in the table below. The value is 0.5)
- IN01~32: default value






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-4
If 10.4mA is being input into I1, the frequency corresponding to 20mA is 60Hz, so the auxiliary speed A in the table
below is 24Hz(=60[Hz]x((10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])) or 40%(=100[%]x((10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20 [mA]-4[mA])).
Setting Type Final Command Frequency
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M) + (50%(G) x 24Hz(A)) = 42Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
3 M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A)))=36Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz
5 M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%))= -3Hz (reverse)
6 M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–40%))= -300Hz (reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)= 27Hz

8.1.2 Jog operation (If you want Jog operation)
Operation is also available using the terminal block and the multi keys of the keypad.

1) Jog Operation by Terminal Block 1

*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11 (Option)

Select the jog frequency setting terminal from the multi-function terminals P1 ~ P11 and set the function of the appropriate
terminal block of IN-65 ~ IN-75 at No. 6 JOG. If the jog terminal which has been set with the operating command input, the
operating frequency moves to the jog frequency, which is described below.
DRV-11 Jog Frequency (Jog Frequency) : sets the frequency necessary for jog operation. Jog operation is the highest
in the priority order except the dwell operation. Therefore, during sequential operation, up-down operation and 3-wire
operation at a certain speed, if the jog terminal is input, it operates at the jog frequency.
DRV-12 JOG Acc Time, DRV-13 JOG Dec Time : the deceleration and acceleration time during shift to jog frequency.











Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
11 JOG Frequency - 10.00
0.5~maximum frequency -
12 JOG Acc Time - 20.00
0~600
Sec
DRV
13 JOG Dec Time - 30.00
0~600
Sec
IN
65~75 Px Define 6 JOG
-
-






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-5









2) Jog Operation by Terminal Block 2
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
11 JOG Frequency - 10.00 0.5~maximum frequency Hz
12 JOG Acc Time - 20.00 0~600 Sec DRV
13 JOG Dec Time - 30.00 0~600 Sec
65~75 Px Define 46 FWD JOG - -
IN
65~75 Px Define 47 REV JOG - -
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11(Option)
Jog operation 1 is available when the operating command is input but jog operation 2 is available with only terminals
set as the forward jog (FWD JOG) or reverse jog (REV JOG).
The priority order of terminal input (dwell, 3-wire, up/down), frequency and Acc/Dec time and so on during jog
operation is the same as jog operation 1 and if an operating command is given during jog operation, operation
continues at the jog frequency.











3) Jog Operation by Keypad
Mode Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting range Unit
CNF - 42 Multi-Key Sel 1 JOG Key - -
PAR DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 Keypad 0~5 sec
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11(option)

Set code 42 of CNF mode at 1 JOG Key and DRV-06 of PAR mode at 0 Keypad. If you press multi key, the symbol J at
the top of the screen changes into J and then keypad jog operation becomes available. If you keep pressing FWD or
REV keys, it decelerates at jog frequency(DRV-11 JOG Frequency). Otherwise it stops.
The Acc/Dec time it takes to reach jog operation frequency is set in DRV-12 and DRV-13.

P1
P5
CM
FX
JOG

FWD key
REV key
DRV-13 (Dec time)
When setting
multi-key jog
DRV-12 (Acc time)
DRV-11 (Jog frequency)
DRV-11






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-6













8.1.3 Up-Down operation

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
ADV 65 U/D Save Mode 1 Yes 0~1 -
65~75 Px Define 17 Up 0~48 -
65~75 Px Define 18 Down 0~48 IN
65~75 Px Define 20 U/D Clear 0~48 -
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11(Option)

You can control deceleration and acceleration by using the multi-function terminal block. This can be used for the system
that uses the upper/lower limit switch output signals of a flow meter, etc. as the acceleration/deceleration command of the
motor.

Group Code No. Function Display Code description
ADV 65
U/D
Save Mode
- In case of operating command (FX or RX terminal) OFF or a trip
during steady speed operation of in case of power OFF, the
operating frequency is automatically saved in the memory.
- If operation command becomes ON or normal again, operation at
set frequency is available. If you want to delete saved frequency,
use the multi-function terminal block. Set one of the multi-function
terminals at 20 U/D Clear and input the terminal in stop or steady
speed operation, the frequency that was saved in up-down
operation is deleted.
IN 65~75 Px Define
- Sets the appropriate terminal function at 17 Up or 18 Down after
selecting the terminal to use for up-down operation.
- Acceleration follows Up signal during operation and when if is
OFF, acceleration stops and steady speed operation follows.
- Deceleration follows Down signal during operation and when if is
Off, deceleration stops and steady speed operation follows.
- If up and down signals are simultaneously given, acceleration and
deceleration both stop.

FWD key
REV key
DRV-13 (Dec time)
When setting
multi-key jog
DRV-12 (Acc time)
DRV-11 (Jog frequency)
DRV-11






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-7














8.1.4 3-Wire operation (if you want operation using Push button)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx - x 0~5 -
IN 65~75 Px Define 14 3-Wire 0~48 -
*Px : P1~P8, P9~P11 (Option)

This is the function of operation by saving (Latch) the input signals as follows.
Therefore, you can make simple configuration sequence circuit as shown below. For it to move, the minimum input time(t)
of the input terminal should continue for more than 1mSec. If forward and reverse operating commands are
simultaneously input, it stops.








FX
RX
Frequency
P8 (3-Wire)
t
P7(UP)
P6(CLEAR)
Output
frequency
Operation
command(FX)
Memorized
frequency
P2
P8
CM
RX : IN-66
3-Wire : IN-72
P1 FX : IN-65






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-8
8.1.5 Safe operation mode (if you want to limit operation through Terminal Input)

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
70 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent - -
71 Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0~2 -
ADV
72 Q-Stop Time - 5.0 0~600 sec
IN 65~75 Px Define 13 Run Enable 0~48 -

This is the function of setting the operating command for it to be effective by using the multi-function input terminal.
Group Code No. Function Display Code description
IN 65~75 Px Define
selects the terminal to operate at No. 13 Safe Operation Mode
Run Enable among the multi-function input terminals.
(if setting only multi-function terminals as Run Enable, Safe
Operation is not active)
70
Run
En Mode
if setting at No. 1 DI Dependent, the operating commands it
identified through the multi-function input terminal.
Set at No. 0 Always Enable, the safe operation mode is not active.
71
Run
Dis Stop
sets the motions of the inverter when the multi-function input
terminal set at safe operation mode is OFF.
0 : Free-Run
Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function terminal is OFF.
1 : Q-Stop
Decelerates at the decelerating time(Q-Stop Time) used in safe
operation mode. Operation resumes after the operation command
is input once again even if the multi-function terminal is ON.
2 : Q-Stop Resume
Decelerates at the decelerating time(Q-Stop Time) of safe
operation mode. Normal operation resumes when the multi-
function terminal is input again with the operating command ON.
ADV
72
Q-Stop
Time
If ADV-71 Run Dis Stop is set at No.1 Q-Stop or No.2 Q-Stop
Resume, the decelerating time is set.



ADV-71
(0:setting Free-Run)
n (P4)
ADV-71
(1:setting Q-Stop)
ADV-71
(1:setting Q-Stop Resume)
Operation
command (P1)






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-9
8.1.6 Dwell operation

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Value Setting Range Unit
20 Acc Dwell Freq - 5.00
Starting frequency ~
Maximum frequency
Hz
21 Acc Dwell Time - 0.0 0~10 Sec
22 Dec Dwell Freq - 5.00
Starting frequency ~
Maximum frequency
Hz
ADV
23 Dec Dwell Time - 0.0 0~10 Sec

If the operating command is input, the inverter operates at steady speed for the acceleration dwell time at the set
acceleration dwell frequency and resumes acceleration. If the stop command is input, inverter operates at steady speed for
the deceleration dwell time at the set deceleration dwell frequency after deceleration and then stops.
If control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode) is used as the V/F mode, it can be used for opening the brake after operation at
the dwell frequency before the mechanical brake is opened at the lifting load.













* Detailed description about Dwell operation
This function is useful in hoisting applications to get enough Torque before a releasing mechanical brake. Inverter
accelerates to Dwell frequency during set time after run command input. It operates as set speed after the lapse of the
Dwell acceleration run time (Acc Dwell Time) which is set in Dwell run frequency. If Stop command is input during run,
inverter will decelerate as Dwell run frequency and then it will stop as previous deceleration time after the set Dwell
deceleration run time (Dec Dwell Time). If the dwell time is set at ‘0’, this function is not available. Acc Dwell
command is effective only first command input so it is not available in case the frequency passes by Acc Dwell
frequency while resume the acceleration on stop. Dec Dwell operates when frequency passes by Dec Dwell
frequency on stop command input and it is not operated on simple deceleration of frequency. Dwell operation is not
operated when External brake control function is activated.
Caution
Be careful that dwell operation at a frequency higher than the rated slip of the motor with the load shown in
the case above might adversely affect the life of the motor or damage the motor due to over current through
the motor.
O u t p u t
F r e q u e n c y
P x ( S E Q - L )
P x ( S E Q -
M )
S e q u e n c e
1
S e q u e n c y
2
A u t o - A
P x ( S E Q - L )
P x ( G o -
S t e p )
A u t o - B
O u t p u t
F r e q u e n c y






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-10
* Acceleration Dwell
Acc Dwell command is effective only first command input so it is not available in case the frequency passes by Acc
Dwell frequency during re-acceleration on stop.











* Deceleration Dwell
Dec Dwell operates when frequency passes by Dec Dwell frequency on stop command input and it is not operated
on simple deceleration of frequency. Dwell operation is not operated when External brake control function is
activated.










FX
Frequency
Acc. Dwell
Freq.
Acc. Dwell time
Target Freq. change
FX
Frequency Dec. Dwell time Dec. Dwell time
Dec. Dwell
Freq.
Target Freq. change






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-11
8.1.7 Slip compensation operation
For an induction motor, the difference between the rotation speed of the motor and the set frequency varies according to
the load ratio. The slip compensation operation is used for the load that should compensation the speed difference(slip). If
the control mode is sensorless or vector or V/F PG, the speed difference is automatically compensation.


Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
09 Control Mode 2 Slip Compen -
DRV
14 Motor Capacity 2 0.75(0.75Kw base) kW
11 Pole Number - 4 -
12 Rated Slip - 90(0.75Kw base) rpm
13 Rated Curr - 3.6(0.75Kw base) A
14 Noload Curr - 1.6(0.75Kw base) A
16 Efficiency - 72(0.75Kw base) %
BAS
17 Inertia Rate - 0(0.75Kw base) -
DRV-09 Control Mode (control mode) : checks whether the control mode is set at No. 2 Slip Compen.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity (motor capacity) : sets the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter output.
BAS-11 Pole Number (pole number) : inputs the number of poles on the plate of the motor.
BAS-12 Rated Slip (rated slip) : input by using the rated revolution on the plate of the motor.
BAS-13 Rated Curr (rated current) : inputs the rated current on the plate of the motor.
BAS-14 Noload Curr (no-load current) : inputs the current measured when the motor operates at the rated frequency
after the load device connected to the motor axis is removed. If no-load current is hard to measure, input the current
30~50% of the current on the plate of the motor.
BAS-16 Efficiency (motor efficiency) : inputs the efficiency on the plate of the motor.
BAS-17 Inertia Rate (load inertia ratio) : selects the load inertia on the basis of the inertia of the motor.
(0: when it is less than 10 times of motor’s inertia, 1: when it is 10 times of motor’s inertia, 2~8: when it is more than 10
times of motor’s inertia)





⎛ ×
− =
120
P rpm
f f
r s
,
s
f =rated slip frequency,
r
f =rated frequency, rpm=rated revolution of motor, P =motor poles
ex) rated frequency: 60Hz, rated revolution: 1740rpm, pole numbers: 4. Hz f
s
2
120
4 1740
60 = ⎟




⎛ ×
− =

Synchroni
zed speed
Rotation
speed of
motor
Rotation
speed
Load
ratio
Slip offset
control






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-12
8.1.8 PID control
1) PID Basic Operation
This is a method commonly used among the ones of auto control. PID means P: Proportional, I: Integral, and D:
Differential. By combining these 3, better control is available.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
01 App Mode 2 Proc PID 0~4 -
16 PID Output - - - -
17 PID Ref Value - - - -
18 PID Fdb Value - - - -
19 PID Ref Set - 50.00 -100~100 %
20 PID Ref Source 0 Keypad-1 0~10 -
21 PID F/B Source 0 V1 0~10 -
22 PID P-Gain - 50.0 0~1000 %
23 PID I-Time - 10.0 0~32.0 Sec
24 PID D-Time - 0 0~1000 MSec
25 PID F-Gain - 0.0 0~1000 %
26 P Gain Scale - 100.0 0~100 %
27 PID Out LPF - 0 M0~10000 msec
29 PID Limit Hi - 60.00 0~300 Hz
30 PID Limit Lo - 0.00 0~300 Hz
31 PID Out Inv - No 0~1 -
32 PID Out Scale - 100.0 0.1~1000 %
34 Pre-PID Freq - 0.00 0~Max. Freq Hz
35 Pre-PID Exit - 0.0 0~100 %
36 Pre-PID Delay - 600 0~9999 Sec
37 PID Sleep DT - 60.0 0~999.9 Sec
38 PID Sleep Freq - 0.00 0~Max. Freq. Hz
39 PID WakeUp Lev - 35 0~100 %
40 PID WakeUp Mod 0 Below Level 0~2 -
42 PID Unit Sel 0 Hz 0~12 -
43 PID Unit Gain - 100.0 0~650 %
44 PID Unit Scale 2 X 1 0~2 -
APP
45 PID P2-Gain - 100.0 0~1000 %
65~75 Px Define 22 I-Term Clear 0~48 -
65~75 Px Define 23 PID Openloop 0~48 - IN
65~75 Px Define 24 P Gain2 0~48 -






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-13
The output frequency of the inverter goes through PID control in order to control the system process including the flow,
temperature and tension and so on.
APP-01 App Mode(application mode) : You can set the process PID functions by setting at No. 2 Proc PID(Process
PID).
APP-16 PID Output : Displays the present output value of the PID controller with the unit, gain and scale set in APP-42,
APP-43 and APP-44 reflected.
APP-17 PID Ref Value : Displays the currently set reference of the PID controller with the unit, gain and scale set in APP-
42, APP-43 and APP-44 reflected.
APP-18 PID Fdb Value : Displays the present feedback input of the PID controller with the unit, gain and scale set in
APP-42, APP-43 and APP-44 reflected.
APP-19 PID Ref Set : The reference value can be input if the reference type(APP-20) of PID control is set as
keypad(0:Keypad). If the reference type is set at values other than the keypad, the value set in APP-19 is ignored.
APP-20 PID Ref Source : Selects the reference input of PID control(the items marked in grey are supposed to be
provided soon in the future). If the V1 terminal is set as PID F/B Source, V1 cannot be set as the PID Ref Source. If F/B
Source is changed to another item, V1 can be set as Ref Source.

Setting Type Function PID F/B Source possibility
0 Keypad Inputs the PID reference on the inverter keypad. X
1 V1 -10~10V voltage input terminal of the terminal block O
2 I1 0~20mA current input terminal of the terminal block O
3 V2 Voltage input terminal of the extended I/O option card O
4 I2 Current input terminal of the extended I/O option card O
5 Int. 485 RS485 input terminal of the terminal block O
6 Encoder Pulse input of the encoder option card O
7 FieldBus
Communication command by communication option
card
O
8 PLC Command by PLC option card O
9 Synchro Command by synchronized operation option card O
10 Binary Type Command by BCD option card X

The set PID reference can be displayed in the monitor mode and APP-17 and monitored in the items set as No. 17 PID
Ref Value among CNF-06~08 of CNF.
APP-21 PID F/B Source : Selects the feedback input of PID control. This can be selected in the inputs other than the
keypad input(Keypad-1, Keypad-2) in the reference input type. The feedback cannot be set as the same input as selected
in the reference.







Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-14
For example, if APP-20 Ref Source is selected as No. 1 V1 terminal, the inputs other than V1 should be selected in APP-
21 PID F/B Source. Set as No. 18 PID Fdb Value of CNF-06~08, the feedback can be monitored.
APP-22 PID P-Gain, APP-26 P Gain Scale : Sets the output ratio of the difference(error) between the reference and
feedback. If P gain is set at 50%, 50% of the error is output. The setting range of P gain is 0.0~1000.0%. If a ratio lower
than 0.1% is necessary, use P Gain Scale of APP-26.
APP-23 PID I-Time : Sets the times for output of accumulated errors. This sets the time for 100% output when the error is
100%. If the integral time(PID I-Time) is set at 1 second, 100% is output after 1 second when the error is 100%. The
normal error can be reduced by the integral time. If the multi-function terminal block function is set at 21 I-Term Clear and
the terminal block is ON, all the accumulated integral amount is deleted.
APP-24 PID D-Time : Sets the output of the error change rate. If the differential time(PID D-Time) is set at 1mSec, 1% is
output per 10mSec when the error change rate per second is 100%.
APP-25 PID F-Gain : The set goal can be added to the PID output and the ratio is set. This can obtain a rapid response
characteristic.
APP-27 PID Out LPF : This is used when the entire system is instable because the PID controller output changes too fast
or there is too much oscillation. Normally the responsiveness is enhanced by using a low value(the initial value is 0) but the
stability can also be improved by using a higher value. The higher a value is used, the more stable the PID controller
output is but the responsiveness might be down.
APP-29 PID Limit Hi, APP-30 PID Limit Lo : Limits the output of the PID controller.
APP-32 PID Out Scale : Adjusts the size of the controller output.
APP-42 PID Unit Sel : Sets the unit of the control.
Setting Type Function
0 % - Displayed in percentage instead of a certain physical value.
1 Bar
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 kPa
Pressure Various pressure units are available.
5 Hz
6 Rpm
Speed Displays the inverter output frequency or motor revolution.
7 V Voltage
8 I Current
9 kW Electric power
10 HP Horse power
Displayed in voltage, current or consumed electricity.
11
o
C
12
o
F
Temperature In Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
APP-43 PID Unit Gain, APP-44 PID Unit Scale : Adjusts the size suited to the unit selected in APP-42 PID Unit Sel.
APP-45 PID P2-Gain : The gain of the PID controller can be changed by using the multi-function terminal. If the function
of the terminal block selected from IN-65~75 is set at No. 23 P Gain2 and then the selected terminal is input, the gain set in
APP-45 can be by passed instead of the gain set in APP-22 and APP-23.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-15

2) PID Control Block Diagram




























Notice
- If PID change operation (changes from PID operation to normal operation) comes into multi-function inputs
(P1~P11), the value of [%] is converted to the one of [Hz] and is output.
- Polarity of normal PID output PID OUT is unipolar and is limited by APP-29 (PID Limit Hi) and APP-30 (PID
Limit Lo).
- 100.0% is the standard of DRV-20 (maxFreq).

3) Pre-PID Operation
This is the function of normal acceleration to the set frequency without PID motion if an operating command is input and
starting PID operation when the control amount increases to a certain degree.
APP-34 Pre-PID Freq : The frequency to normal acceleration is input if normal acceleration is necessary without PID
control motion. For example, if Pre-PID Freq is set at 30Hz, normal operation continues at 30Hz until the control
amount(PID feedback amount) goes up above what is set in APP-35.
APP-35 Pre-PID Exit, APP-36 Pre-PID Delay : PID control operation starts if the input feedback amount(control amount)
of the PID controller is larger than the value set in APP-35. However, if an amount smaller than the value set in APP-35
continues for the period of time set in APP-36, the output is discontinued with a “Pre-PID Fail” trip.







Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-16










4) PID Sleep Mode(Sleep)
APP-37 PID Sleep DT, APP-38 PID Sleep Freq : If the inverter continues to operate for the time set in APP-37 PID Sleep
DT under the frequency set in APP-38 Sleep Freq, is stops operating and goes into Sleep Mode. For the threshold of shift
from PID Sleep Mode to PID operation mode back, see APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev.
APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev, APP-40 PID WakeUp Mod : Sets the threshold of starting PID operation from the PID sleep
mode described above. If you select 0(Below Level) in APP-40 and the feedback is smaller than set in APP-39 PID
WakeUp Lev, PID operation resumes. No. 1(Above Level) restarts operation when it is larger than the value set in APP-39.
No. 2(Beyond Level) restarts operation when the difference between the reference and feedback is larger than the value
set in APP-39.




















5) PID Operation by pass (PID Openloop)
If, among multi-function terminal blocks, the terminal set at No. 22 PID Openloop in IN-65~75 Px Define is input, PID
operation stops and changes to normal operation. The terminal OFF, PID operation resumes.

PI D Sl eep Fr eq ( APP-
3 8 )
PI D Wa k eUp Lev
( APP- 3 9 )
PI D
Feed b a ck
Ou t p u t
f r eq u en c
y
Fx
PI D
o p er a t i o n
sect i o n
PI D Sl eep DT( APP-
3 7 )
Sl ee p
sect i o n
Wak e Up
se ct i o n






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-17
8.1.9 Auto tuning
The motor parameter can be automatically measured. In addition, if the encoder option card is connected to the
main body of the inverter, you can test the operation of the encoder. The motor parameters measured through auto
tuning are used for auto torque boost, sensorless vector control and vector control and so on.

Ex) 0.75kW, 220V class Motor
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
DRV 14 Motor Capacity 1 0.75 kW
11 Pole Number - 4 -
12 Rated Slip - 40 rpm
13 Rated Curr - 3.6 A
14 Noload curr - 1.6 A
15 Rated Volt - 220 V
16 Efficiency - 72 %
20 Auto Tuning 0 None -
21 Rs - 26.00 Ω
22 Lsigma - 179.4 mH
23 Ls - 1544 mH
BAS
24 Tr - 145 msec
APO 04 Enc Opt Mode 0 None -



Input
voltage
Motor
capacity
[kW]
Rating
current
[A]
No load
current
[A]
Rating slip
frequency
[Hz]
Stator
resistance
[Ω]
Leakage
inductance
[mH]
0.2 1.1 0.8 3.33 14.0 40.4
0.4 2.4 1.4 3.33 6.70 26.9
0.75 3.4 1.7 3.00 2.600 17.94
1.5 6.4 2.6 2.67 1.170 9.29
2.2 8.6 3.3 2.33 0.840 6.63
3.7 13.8 5.0 2.33 0.500 4.48
5.5 21.0 7.1 1.50 0.314 3.19
7.5 28.2 9.3 1.33 0.169 2.844
200
11 40.0
12.4 1.00 0.120 1.488
Caution
Be sure to conduct auto tuning after the motor stops operating.
Before conducting auto tuning, make sure that you input the number of motor poles, rated slip, rated
current, rated voltage and efficiency shown on the motor plate. For the items not input, automatically
set values are used.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-18
Input
voltage
Motor
capacity
[kW]
Rating
current
[A]
No load
current
[A]
Rating slip
frequency
[Hz]
Stator
resistance
[Ω]
Leakage
inductance
[mH]
15 53.6 15.5 1.00 0.084 1.118
18.5 65.6 19.0 1.00 0.068 0.819
22 76.8 21.5 1.00 0.056 0.948
30 104.6 29.3 1.00 0.042 0.711
0.2 0.7 0.5 3.33 28.00 121.2
0.4 1.4 0.8 3.33 14.0 80.8
0.75 2.0 1.0 3.00 7.81 53.9
1.5 3.7 1.5 2.67 3.52 27.9
2.2 5.0 1.9 2.33 2.520 19.95
3.7 8.0 2.9 2.33 1.500 13.45
5.5 12.1 4.1 1.50 0.940 9.62
7.5 16.3 5.4 1.33 0.520 8.53
11 23.2 7.2 1.00 0.360 4.48
15 31.0 9.0 1.00 0.250 3.38
18.5 38.0 11.0 1.00 0.168 2.457
22 44.5 12.5 1.00 0.168 2.844
30 60.5 16.9 1.00 0.126 2.133
37 74.4 20.1 1.00 0.101 1.704
45 90.3 24.4 1.00 0.084 1.422
55 106.6 28.8 1.00 0.069 1.167
75 141.6 35.4 1.00 0.050 0.852
90 167.6 41.9 1.00 0.039 0.715
110 203.5 48.8 1.00 0.032 0.585
132 242.3 58.1 1.00 0.027 0.488
160 290.5 69.7 1.00 0.022 0.403
400
185 335.0 77.0 1.00 0.021 0.380

1) Motor Parameter Tuning (Rs, Lsigma, Ls, Tr, Noload curr)
BAS-20 Auto Tuning : Selects the type of auto tuning and implements auto tuning. Auto tuning starts if you select one of
the items below and press PROG.
0 : None
Displays the initial auto tuning item. After auto tuning is completed, that it is finished is displayed.
1 : ALL
The motor parameter is measured with the motor rotating. The stator resistance(Rs), leak inductance(Lsigma), stator
inductance(Ls), no-load current(Noload Curr) and rotor time constant(Tr) are all measured. When the encoder option card
is mounted, the encoder state is also measured. For encoder state measurement, the related functions of the encoder
should be rightly set. For setting the control mode at vector control, set the auto tuning item at No. 1 ALL. If load is
connected to the motor axis, the parameter might not be correctly measured because the motor measures the parameter
while rotating. Therefore, for correct measurement, remove the load attached to the motor axis before use. If Control
Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2, the rotor time constant(Tr) is tuned while it is static.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-19
2 : ALL (Stdstl)
Motor parameter is measured when motor is stopped. Measure stator resistance(Rs), leak inductance(Lsigma), and the
rotor time constant(Tr) all together at the same time. This mode is available when Control Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2.
3 : Rs+Lsigma
The parameter is measured with the motor not operating. The measured values are used for auto torque boost and
sensorless vector control. Because the motor is not rotating, the connection between the motor axis and load does not
affect the parameter measurement. However, be careful not to rotate the motor axis at the load side.
4 : Enc. Test
Connect the encoder option card to the main body of the inverter and connect the encoder cable attached to the motor to
the option card. The motor checks connection and misconnection of A and B pulses. Be sure to set related functions
correctly for encoder state measurement.
5 : Tr
When Control Mode(DRV-09) is Vector, the motor measures the rotor time constant(Tr) while rotating. If Control
Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2, the motor measures the rotor time constant(Tr) while static.
If Control Mode(DRV-09) shifts from Sensorless2 to Vector, you should conduct time constant(Tr) tuning again.
BAS-21 Rs ~ BAS-24 Tr, BAS-14 Noload Curr : Displays the motor parameter measured in auto tuning. Of the auto tuning
selected above, for the parameter missing from the measurement items, the default value is displayed.

2) Encoder Connection Status Measurement
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
BAS 20 Auto Tuning 3 Enc Test 0~4 -
01 Enc Opt Mode 1 Feed-back 0~2 -
04 Enc Type Sel 0 Line Driver 0~2 -
05 Enc Pulse Sel 0 (A+B) 0~2 -
06 Enc Pulse Num - 1024 10~4096 -
APO
08 Enc Monitor - 0 - -

APO-01 Enc Opt Mode : Set at No. 1 Feed-back.
APO-04 Enc Type Sel : Selects the encoder signal transmission method according to the encoder manual. One of Line
Driver(0), Totem or Com(1) and Open Collect(2) is selected.











Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-20














APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel : Sets the encoder output pulse direction. Forward operation in case of No. 0 (A+B) and reverse
operation in case of No. 2 –(A+B) are selected. No. 1 is selected for use as the frequency setting reference.
APO-06 Enc Pulse Num : Inputs the output pulse number per rotation.
APO-08 Enc Monitor : Convert encoder output in terms of motor revolution and displays it in terms of Hz and rpm.
BAS-20 Auto Tuning : Forward operation is carried out to 20Hz if you set the encoder related items described above and
set auto tuning at No. 3 Enc Test. After forward operation, it decelerates and accelerates back to 20Hz in the reverse
direction. In case of a failure of the encoder, the auto tuning item changes into None. In case of encoder misconnection,
Enc reversed is displayed. In such a case, change APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel or change 2 lines of the inverter output lines
connected to the motor with each other.

8.1.10 V/F operation using speed sensor

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control Mode 1 V/F PG 0~4 -
45 PG P-Gain - 3000 0~9999 -
46 PG I-Gain - 50 0~9999 - CON
47 PG Slip Max % - 100 0~200 %
APO 01 Enc Opt Mode 1 Feed-back 0~2 -
You can enhance the speed control precision of the V/F controller by mounting the encoder option card. Check the
encoder connection status before operation starts.
DRV-09 Control Mode : Sets the control mode at No. 2 V/F PG. Operation is carried out with the speed controller added
to No. 0 V/F control mode. The reference of the speed controller is the set frequency and the feedback is the encoder input.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-21
CON-45 PG P-Gain, CON-46 PG I-Gain : Sets the proportional gain of the speed controller(PG P-Gain) and integral
gain(PG I-Gain). The higher the proportional gain is set, the faster the responsive characteristic is, but if it is set too high,
the speed controller might be instable. For the integral, the lower it is set, the faster the response is. If it is set too low, the
speed controller might be instable.
CON-47 PG Slip Max % : The percentage value of the rated slip(BAS12:Rated Slip). The set value is used for the
maximum compensation slip. For example, if this function code is set at 90% and the rated slip(BAS12:Rated Slip) is
30rpm, the maximum compensation slip is 30*0.9=27rpm.

8.1.11 Sensorless (I) vector control

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
09 Control Mode 3 Sensorless-1 -
10 Torque Control 0 No - DRV
14 Motor Capacity x x.xx kW
11 Pole Number - 4 -
12 Rated Slip - 2.00 Hz
13 Rated Curr - 3.6 A
14 Noload curr - 0.7 A
15 Rated Volt - 220 V
16 Efficiency - 83 %
BAS
20 Auto Tuning 2 Rs+Lsigma -
21 ASR-SL P Gain1 - 100.0 %
CON
22 ASR-SL I Gain1 - 200 mSec


Before auto tuning, enter the items on the motor plate first.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity)
BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles)
BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip)
BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current)
Caution
The parameter of the motor connected to the output terminal of the inverter should be measured for high-
performance operation. Measure the parameter using auto tuning(BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before vector
operation. For high-performance control of sensorless(I) vector control, the inverter capacity should be equal
to that of the motor. If the motor capacity is lower than the inverter capacity by more than 2 phases, there
might be a problem with the control characteristic, so change the control mode to V/F control. In addition, in
case of sensorless(I) vector control operation, do not connect more than one motor to the inverter output.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-22
BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage)
BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency)
Auto tuning with motor static : If the load connected to the motor axis is hard to remove, set the auto tuning item(BAS-
20 Auto Tuning) at No. 2 Rs+Lsigma for the motor parameter to be measured with the motor static. For the no-load current
of the motor, the default value is used. When auto tuning finishes, the measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs)
and leak inductance(Lsigma) are saved in BAS-21 and BAS-22.
Auto tuning with motor rotating : If the load connected to the motor axis can be removed, set the auto tuning item at No.
1 All after separating the load for the motor to measure the parameter while rotating. When auto tuning finishes, the
measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs), leak inductance(Lsigma) and no-load current(Noload Curr) are saved.
CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1, CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 : The speed controller gain of the sensorless(I) vector control can
be changed. The controller gain is set according to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time.


DRV-10 Torque Control : Selects and uses the speed control mode and torque control mode from the sensorless(I)
vector control mode. If you set the torque control(DRV-10) at Yes, change into torque control mode occurs before
operation. For details on the torque control mode, see 8.1.14 Torque control.

Caution
The controller gain can be adjusted according to the load characteristic. However, motor overheat of
system instability might occur according to the controller gain setting.

Caution
Torque control is not available during low speed regeneration region and low speed light load. Please,
choose vector control.
When using torque control, do not switch over commands of forward and reverse rotation are during
operation. It may cause over current or deceleration error of reverse direction. When controlling with vector
control, please set Speed Search in case that there is possibility to operate during motor free run. (CON-71
Speed Search = set Speed Search during acceleration(0001))






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-23
8.1.12 Sensorless(II) vector control

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
09 Control Mode 3 Sensorless-2 -
10 Torque Control 0 No - DRV
14 Motor Capacity x Changeable according to capacity of the motor kW
11 Pole Number - 4 -
12 Rated Slip -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
Hz
13 Rated Curr -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
A
14 Noload curr -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
A
15 Rated Volt - 220/380/440/480 V
16 Efficiency - Changeable according to capacity of the motor %
BAS
20 Auto Tuning 2 Rs+Lsigma -
20 SL2 G View Sel 1 Yes -
21 ASR-SL P Gain1 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
%
22 ASR-SL I Gain1 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
Msec
23 ASR-SL P Gain2 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
%
24 ASR-SL I Gain2 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
%
26 Observer Gain1 - 10500 -
27 Observer Gain2 - 100.0 %
28 Observer Gain3 - 13000 -
29 S-Est P Gain 1 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
-
30 S-Est I Gain 1 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
-
31 S-Est P Gain 2 -
Changeable according to capacity of the motor
%
32 S-Est I Gain 2 - Changeable according to capacity of the motor %
48 ACR P-Gain - 1200 -
CON
49 ACR I-Gain - 120 -



Caution
The parameter of the motor connected to the output terminal of the inverter should be measured for
high-performance operation. Measure the parameter using auto tuning(BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before
vector operation. For high-performance control of sensorless(I) vector control, the inverter capacity
should be equal to that of the motor. If the motor capacity is lower than the inverter capacity by more
than 2 phases, there might be a problem with the control characteristic, so change the control mode to
V/F control. In addition, in case of sensorless(I) vector control operation, do not connect more than
one motor to the inverter output.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-24
Before auto tuning, enter the items on the motor plate first.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity)
BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles)
BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip)
BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current)
BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage)
BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency)
Separate the load connected to the motor shaft and set the auto tuning item at No. 1 All. The motor measures the
parameter while rotating. When auto tuning finishes, the measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs), leak
inductance(Lsigma), stator inductance(Ls), no-load current(Noload Curr) and rotor time constant(Tr) are saved in BAS-21,
BAS-22, BAS-23, BAS-14 and BAS-24 respectively.

CON-20 SL2 G View Sel : If you select No. 1 Yes, the user can set various gains(CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2, CON-24
ASR-SL I Gain2, CON-27 Observer Gain2, CON-28 Observer Gain3, CON-31 S-Est P Gain2, CON-32 S-Est I Gain2)
applied to rotation at higher than medium speed(about 1/2 of the base frequency). If you select No. 0 No, the related
parameter is not displayed.

1) Speed Controller Gain
CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1, CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 : The speed PI controller gain of the sensorless(II) vector control
can be changed. In PI speed controller, the speed controller PI gain is the proportional gain of the speed error and has a
characteristic of having higher torque output command as the speed error rises. That is why the higher the speed error is,
the faster speed variance decreases. The speed controller I gain is the integral gain of the speed error. When a constant
speed error continues, the speed controller I gain is the time(msec) it takes until the rated torque output command. The
lower the value is, the faster the speed variance decreases. The wave form of the speed controller gain can be improved
after observing the tendency of the speed change. If the speed variance is not rapidly reduced, the speed controller P gain
can be increased or I gain(time in terms of msec) can be decreased. However, if P gain is increased or I gain is decreased
too much, a lot of vibration might occur. In addition, in case of oscillation of the speed wave form, it can be adjusted by
increasing I gain or P gain.
CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2, CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 : Can be seen only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set as No. 1
Yes. The speed controller gain at higher than the medium speed of sensorless(II) vector control(about 1/2 of the base
frequency). CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is set as the percentage of the low speed gain CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain1. That is,
the lower P Gain2 is than 100.0%, the lower the responsiveness is. For example, if CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain1 is 50.0%
and CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is 50.0%, the speed controller P gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 25.0%.
CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is also set in percentage of the CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain1. For I gain, as well, the lower I Gain2 is,






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-25
the lower the responsiveness is. For example, if CON-23 ASR-SL I Gain1 is 100msec and CON-23 ASR-SL I Gain2 is
50.0%, the speed controller I gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 200msec. The controller gain is set according
to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time.

2) Magnetic Flux Observer Controller Gain
CON-26 Observer Gain1, CON-27 Observer Gain2, CON-28 Observer Gain3 : For sensorless(II) vector control, the
observer for estimating the stator current and rotor magnetic flux of the motor is essential. Observer Gain1(CON-26)
applies at low and medium aped and Observer Gain2(CON-27) applies at medium and high speed and Observer
Gain3(CON-28) applies in the torque mode. It is recommended that you do not change the observer gain from its default
value.
Observer Gain2(CON-27) and Observer Gain3(CON-28) can be see only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set at No. 1
Yes.

3) Speed Estimator Gain
CON-29 S-Est P Gain1, CON-30 S-Est I Gain1 : The speed estimator gain of sensorless(II) vector control can be
changed. The speed estimator P gain or I gain can be increased or decreased by a small amount for adjustment when the
displayed value of speed is not equal to the goal value in a normal state. These gains can be also adjusted when there is
great vibration in the motor or high current ripple with power ON. In such a case, you can conduct a test mostly by
decreasing the P gain or I gain of the speed estimator. The speed estimator gain is set according to the default motor
parameter and Acc/Dec time.
CON-31 S-Est P Gain2, CON-32 S-Est I Gain1 : Can be see only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set at No. 1 Yes.
The speed estimator gain can be changed at higher than the medium speed(about a/s of the base frequency) in
sensorless(II) vector control.
CON-31 S-Est P Gain2 and CON-32 S-Est I Gain1 are respectively set as the percentage of low speed gain CON-29 S-
Est P Gain1 and CON-30 S-Est I Gain1. For example, if CON-29 S-Est P Gain1 is 300 and CON-31 S-Est P Gain2 is
40.0%, the speed estimator P gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 120. The setting method is the same as the
low and medium speed gain setting method. The speed estimator gain is set according to the default motor parameter and
Acc/Dec time.
CON-34 SL2 OVM Perc : Output Voltage have a linearity for Input Voltage at non-overmodulation area which the ratio of
Output Voltage /Input Voltage is below 100%. At CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) can set the voltage range which is limited at
Sensorless-2 overmodulation area. In a application such as impact load (Press etc.; Torque limit<load), Tripless
operation can be possible by increasing the value of CON34 (SL2 OVM Perc) when load is applied. (Default value: 120
[%]) Also, Input Voltage is lower than nominal voltage at the area where supply a unstable input voltage so OC1 Trip is
occurred frequently when heavy reverse load such as impact load (Torque Limit<Load) is applied. The Trip caused by






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-26
lower Output Voltage. In this case, set the CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) to 140~150% and you can operate Tripless
operation in case heavy load is applied.
CON-48 ACR P-Gain, CON-49 ACR I Gain : Adjusts the P gain and I gain of the current PI controller.
DRV-10 Torque Control : The speed control mode and torque control mode are selected from the sensorless(II) vector
control mode and used. If the torque control(DRV-10) is set as Yes, operation is carried out in the torque control mode. For
details on the torque control mode, see 8.1.14 Torque control.


Guide on Various Gain Adjustment of Sensorless (II) Vector Control : Because the sensorless(II) vector control is
greatly influenced by the characteristics of the motor and load, it is sometimes necessary to adjust the controller gain. Let’s
assume that the sensorless(II) vector control is carried out in speed mode (DRV-10 torque control set at No. 0 No).
Firstly, if instable operation is observed at extremely low speed(below 2~3Hz) or the speed bounds during starting, adjust
the gain properly increasing CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 until it is twice the default value.
Secondly, where regenerative load is usually used, torque ripple might occur frequently in the motor with regenerative load
supplied. In such a case, try increasing CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1 to 50% of the default value to adjust the gain properly. If
it does not work, increase CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1 back to the default value and adjust the gain value decreasing CON-
30 S-Est I Gain 1 to 50% of the default value.
Caution
The controller gain can be adjusted according to the load characteristic. However, motor overheat of
system instability might occur according to the controller gain setting.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-27
8.1.13 Vector control
The motor operates at the vector control mode in which high precision control of speed and torque is provided with
the encoder option card mounted on the main body of the inverter.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
09 Control Mode 4 Vector -
DRV
21 Hz / rpm Sel 1 Rpm Display -
BAS 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes -
09 PreExTime - 1.0 Sec
10 Flux Force - 100.0 %
11 Hold Time - 1.0 Sec
12 ASR P Gain 1 - 50.0 %
13 ASR I Gain 1 - 300 MSec
15 ASR P Gain 2 - 50.0 %
16 ASR I Gain 2 - 300 mSec
18 Gain Sw Freq - 0.00 Hz
19 Gain Sw Delay - 0.10 Sec
51 ASR Ref LPF - 0 MSec
52 Torque Out LPF - 0 mSec
53 Torque Lmt Src 0 Keypad-1 -
54 FWD +Trq Lmt - 180 %
55 FWD –Trq Lmt - 180 %
56 REV +Trq Lmt - 180 %
57 REV –Trq Lmt - 180 %
58 Trq Bias Src 0 Keypad-1 -
59 Torque Bias - 0.0 %
CON
60 Trq BiasFF - 0.0 %
65~75 Px Define 36 Asr Gain 2 -
IN
65~75 Px Define 37 ASR P/PI -








Caution
For high performance operation of the vector control mode, correct data should be input on the
related functions including the motor parameter measurement and encoder and so on. Follow the
setting order below before vector control operation. For high-performance control of sensorless(I)
vector control, the inverter capacity should be equal to that of the motor. If the motor capacity is
lower than the inverter capacity by more than 2 phases, there might be a problem with the control
characteristic, so change the control mode to V/F control. In addition, in case of vector control
operation, do not connect more than one motor to the inverter output.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-28
1) Preparation before Starting
Separate the load connected to the motor axis.
Motor parameter input : enter the following values shown on the motor plate.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity)
BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles)
BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip)
BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current)
BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage)
BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency)

2) Check whether the encoder option card is mounted on the main body of the inverter.
Set the encoder option mode(APO-01) at No.1 feedback and input the following information according to the specification
of the encoder.
APO-04 Enc Type Sel: select signal delivery method of encoder. Set with instruction manual of encoder.
According to specifications of encoder, select one out of Line Driver(0), Totem or Com(1), and Open Collect(2).
APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: set the way of encoder output pulse.
In case of (A+B) of NO.0, select forward operation,
In case of –(A+B) of NO.2, select reverse operation. Select NO.1, select frequency reference for setting.
APO-06 Enc Pulse Num: input the number of pulse per rotation.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range
Unit
BAS 20 Auto Tuning 3 Enc Test
0~4
-
01 Enc Opt Mode 1 Feed-back
0~2
-
04 Enc Type Sel 0 Line Driver
0~2
-
05 Enc Pulse Sel 0 (A+B)
0~2
-
06 Enc Pulse Num - 1024
10~4096
-
APO
08 Enc Monitor - -
-
-
APO -01 Enc Opt Mode: Set as No. 1 feedback.
APO -04 Enc Type Sel: Set the method to deliver a signal. Set it right, referring to the manual. Select one out of Line
Driver(0), Totem or Com(1), Open Collect(2).
APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: set the way of encoder output pulse.
In case of (A+B) of NO.0, select forward operation,
In case of –(A+B) of NO.2, select reverse operation. Select NO.1, select frequency reference for setting.
APO-06 Enc Pulse Num: input the number of pulse per rotation.
APO-08 Enc Monitor: convert encoder output to the number of motor rotation and write in unit, Hz or rpm.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-29
BAS-20 Auto Tuning: forward operation is run upto 20Hz if setting Enc Test of NO.3 after setting related parts of encoder
explained above. After forward operation and deceleration, acceleration is run upto 20Hz. If encoder does not have any
problems, auto tuning part changes to None. In case of misconnection, indicates the sign, ‘Enc reversed’. In this case,
change APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel or change and connect 2 lines out of inverted output lines connected to motor.

3) Auto Tuning
Select No. 1 All in auto tuning item(BAS-20).

4) Initial Excitation
CON-09 PreExTime : Sets the initial excitation time. Operation can be started after excitation to the rated speed of the
motor.
CON-10 Flux Force : The initial excitation time can be reduced. The motor flux increases to the rated flux with the time
constant in the following figure. Therefore, to reduce the time it takes to reach the rated flux, by supplying the flux-oriented
value higher than the rated flux so that the actual flux approximates the rated value, an motion is taken to reduce the
supplied flux-oriented value.









5) Gain Setting
CON-12 ASR P Gain 1, CON-13 ASR I Gain 1 : Sets the proportional gain and integral gain of the speed controller(ASR).
The higher the proportional gain is, the faster the response is, which applied to high load. But if the gain is too high, the
speed of the motor might oscillate.
CON-15 ASR P Gain 2, CON-16 ASR I Gain 2 : A separate controller gain can be used according to the rotation speed of
the motor and the load system. The gain of the speed controller varies according to the set values of the gain change
frequency(CON-18) and change time(CON-19).
CON-51 ASR Ref LPF : Used in vector speed mode. The filter time constant of the speed controller reference input can
be adjusted.
CON-52 Torque Out LPF : Used in the vector speed or vector torque mode. In the vector speed, the filter time constant of
the speed controller output can be adjusted. In the vector torque, the filter time constant of the torque command can be
adjusted.
Motor flux
Excitation
current
FX-CM






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-30
CON-48 ACR P-Gain, CON-49 ACR I Gain : Used in sensorless speed/torque and vector speed/torque modes and
adjusts the P gain and I gain of the current PI controller.
IN-65~75 Px Define
36 : ASR Gain2
If the set terminal is input, the gain can be changed after the change time(CON-19).
37 : ASR P/PI
Moves during stop. If the set terminal is input, the integral controller is not active.

6) Torque Limit
The size of the torque reference is adjusted by limiting the speed controller output. As in the following figure, both reverse
and regenerative limits for forward and reverse operation can be set.
CON-53 Torque Lmt Src : Selects the type of torque limit setting. The torque limit can be set by using the keypad, analog
input of the terminal block(V1, I1) or communication option.
0 : Keypad-1, 1 : Keypad-2
Sets the torque limit using the keypad. Up to 200% can be set on the basis of the rated torque of the motor and the limits
on the rotation direction, reverse and regenerative limits are set in the following codes.
CON-33 FWD +Trq Lmt : forward motoring operation torque limit
CON-34 FWD –Trq Lmt : forward regeneration operation torque limit
CON-35 REV +Trq Lmt : reverse motoring operation torque limit
CON-36 REV –Trq Lmt : reverse regeneration operation torque limit
2 : V1, 3 : I1
The torque limit is set by using the analog input terminal of the inverter terminal block. The maximum torque is set by using
IN-02 Torque at 100% item. For example, if IN-02 is set at 200% and voltage input(V1) is used, the torque limit is 200%
when 10V is input(only when the V1 terminal function is set at the default function). When the torque limit setting method is
other than the keypad, the set value is confirmed in the monitor mode. No. 20 Torque Limit is selected in Config Mode
CNF-06~08.
3 : Int 485
Sets the torque limit using the communication terminal of the inverter terminal block.
Torque Bias Setting
CON-58 Trq Bias Src : Selects the type of setting of the offset value added to the torque reference.
0 : Keypad-1, 1 : Keypad-2
Setting by using the keypad is input in CON-38 Torque Bias. up to 120% of the rated current of the motor can be set.
2 : V1, 3 : I1, 6 : Int 485
The setting method is the same as the torque reference described above. The setting can be checked in MON mode and
select No. 21 Torque Bias among CNF-06 ~ 08.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-31
IN-65~75 Px Define : Although the multi-function input is set at 48 Trq Bias, if the multi-function input is not ON, the Torque
Bias values being input into the keypad, analog or communication are ignored.
CON-60 Trq BiasFF : This is added to the torque bias to compensate for the loss from the motor rotation direction. If a (-)
value is input, the torque bias decreases by the amount of the input.
Permanent Control in Stop : Hold Time
CON-11 Hold Time : Permanent operation continues for the set period of time when the motor decelerates and stops
according to the stop command and the output is blocked.


8.1.14 Torque control (When you want to control torque)
Torque control is controlling the motor for the torque output set at the torque command value.
The rotation speed of the motor stays constant when the output torque and load torque of the motor are in balance.
Therefore, the motor rotation speed in torque control is determined by the load.
If the output torque is larger than the motor load, the motor speed gradually goes up.
To prevent this, it is recommended you set the speed limit to the motor rotation speed.
(You cannot control the torque during limit speed operation)

1) Torque Control Setting
DRV-09 Control Mode should be set as Sensorless or Vector.
- DRV-09 Control Mode : Sets the control mode at No. 3 or 4 SensorlessNo.1,2 or 5 Vector.
- DRV-10 Torque Control : Sets torque control as No. 1 Yes.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
02 Cmd Torque - 0.0 %
08 Trq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 -
09 Control Mode 5 Vector -
DRV
10 Torque Control 1 Yes -
BAS 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes -
62 Speed Lmt Src 0 Keypad-1 -
63 FWD Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz
CON
64 REV Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-32
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
65 Speed Lmt Gain - 100 %
IN 65~75 Px Define 35 Speed/Torque -
31~33 Relay x or Q1 27 Torque Dect -
59 TD Level - 100 % OUT
60 TD Band - 5.0 %












2) Torque Reference Setting
Torque reference can be set in the same way as the frequency reference. The torque control mode set, the frequency
reference is not active.

DRV-08 Trq Ref Src : Selects the type to use as the torque reference.
0 : Keypad-1, 1 : keypad-2
Input the torque reference using the keypad. The torque can be set in CON-02 Cmd Torque and up to 180% of the motor
rated torque can be set.
2 : V1, 3 : I1
The torque reference can be input by using the voltage(V1) or current(I1) terminal block of the inverter. Set the maximum
torque by using the item of IN-02 Torque at 100%. For example, if IN-02 is set at 200% and the torque reference is set with
the current input(V1), you can check the setting in MON mode and select no. 19 Torque Ref from CNF-06 ~ 08.
6 : Int 485
Sets the torque limit by using the communication terminal of the inverter terminal block.

3) Speed Limit
During operation in the torque control mode, the operating speed can go up at the maximum operating speed
according to the load condition. Therefore the speed limit function is used to prevent such divergence of speed.



Caution
For operation in the torque control mode, the sensorless vector mode and the basic operation
conditions described in the vector control mode should be set in advance.
Torque control is not available during low speed regeneration region and low speed light load. Please,
choose vector control.
When using torque control, do not switch over commands of forward and reverse rotation are during
operation. It may cause over current or deceleration error of reverse way. When controlling with vector
control, please set Speed Search in case that there is possibility to operate during motor free run.
(CON-71 Speed Search = set Speed Search during acceleration(0001)






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-33
CON-62 Speed Lmt Src : Selects the type of speed limit setting.
0 : Keypad-1, 1 : keypad-2
The speed limit is set by using the keypad. The forward speed limit is set in CON-41 FWD Speed Lmt and the reverse
speed limit is set in CON-42 REV Speed Lmt.
2 : V1, 3 : I1, 6 : Int 485
Operates the same way as the frequency command setting method. The setting can be checked in MON mode and
select No.21 Torque Bias from CNF-06 ~ 08.

CON-65 Speed Lmt Gain : Sets the rate of reference decrease when the motor speed exceeds the speed limit. If No. 35
of the multi-function input terminal function items is selected and input during stop, the operation can shift from the torque
control mode to vector control mode(speed control).


8.1.15 Droop control
This can be used to prevent saturation of the speed controller in vector control or for load balancing when one load is
driven by multiple controllers.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
66 Droop Perc - 0.0 %
CON
67 Droop St Torque - 100.0 %

CON-66 Droop Perc : Sets the rate to be reflected in the speed command value on the basis of the motor rated torque.
CON-67 Droop St Torque : Sets the torque at which the droop control operation starts.
The motor speed is adjusted as follows according to the load torque on the basis of the set value.




8.1.16 Speed/Torque change function
This function is active only in vector control. You can shift from the speed mode to torque mode or shift from the torque
mode to speed mode by the multi-function input.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
68 SPD/TRQ Acc T - 20.0 Sec
CON
69 SPD/TRQ Dec T - 30.0 Sec
IN 65~75 P x Define 35 Speed/Torque -





que DroopStTor torque
que DroopStTor reference Torque
DroopPerc frequency Maximum speed Droop
- % 100
-
× × =






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-34
If the multi-function input, which is set as Speed/Torque, is ON during Vector Torque (DRV09:Vector, DRV10:Yes)
operation, the operation shifts to the vector speed mode according to the Acc/Dec time set in CON50, 51.
If the multi-function input, which is set as Speed/Torque, is ON during Vector Speed (DRV09:Vector, DRV10:No) operation,
the operation immediately shifts to the vector torque mode.


8.1.17 Kinetic energy buffering
If a power outage occurs, the DC link voltage goes down and a low voltage failure occurs blocking output. This function
maintains the DC link voltage by controlling the inverter output frequency during the outage, thereby helping maintain the
interval between the instantaneous outage and the low voltage failure for a longer time.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
77 KEB Select 1 Yes -
78 KEB Start Lev - 130 %
79 KEB Stop Lev - 135 %
CON
80 KEB Gain - 1000 -

CON-77 KEB Select : Selects Kinetic energy buffering operation with the input power OFF. If 0 Continue is selected,
normal decelerating operation is carried out until low voltage. If 1 KEB Select is selected, the inverter DC part is charged
with the regenerative energy that is generated from the motor by controlling the inverter output frequency.
CON-78 KEB Start Lev, CON-79 KEB Stop Lev : Sets the start and stop point of Kinetic energy buffering operation on
the basis of low voltage (Level 100%) so that the stop level (CON-79) is higher than the start level (CON-78).
CON-80 KEB Gain : This is the gain used for controlling the kinetic energy buffering operation by using the inertia moment
amount of the load. If the load inertia is high, a small gain amount is used. If the load inertia is low, a large gain amount is
used. In case the motor vibrates severely when KEB function operates because of input power cut off, set the gain (CON-
80: KEB Gain) to about a half value of previous set value . In this case do not lower the gain too much because low voltage
trip may happen during the kinetic energy buffering operation.






Caution
1. Depending on the instantaneous interruption time and the load inertia, kinetic energy buffering may
cause low voltage trip when it is decelerated.
2. When inverter operates Energy Buffering operation, the motor will vibrate except for the variable torque
load (Fan, Pump etc.)






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-35
8.1.18 Energy saving operation
Manual Energy Saving Operation

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
50 E-Save Mode 1 Manual -
ADV
51 Energy Save - 30 %

If the inverter output current is lower than the current set in BAS-14 Noload curr (no-load current of the motor), the output
voltage is reduced by the amount set at ADV-51.The standard value is the voltage before the energy saving operation
starts. This is not active during acceleration and deceleration.



Automatic Energy Saving Operation
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
ADV 50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto -

The output voltage is adjusted by automatically calculating the amount of the saved energy on the basis of the motor rated
current (BAS-13) and no-load current (BAS-14).



Caution
Be aware that the time required for acceleration or deceleration by a change of the operating
frequency or stop command during energy saving operation might be longer than the set period of
time for acceleration and deceleration because of the control time it takes the energy saving
operation to come back to normal operation.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-36
8.1.19 Speed search operation
This is used to prevent a failure that might occur when the inverter outputs voltage during the motor idling with the
output voltage of the inverter blocked.
It is not accurate speed detection since the rotation speed of the motor is easily judged on the basis of output current
of the inverter.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
71 Speed Search - 0000 Bit
Below 75 kW 150
72 SS Sup-Current -
Below 90 kW 100
%
73 SS P-Gain - 100 -
74 SS I-Gain - 200 -
CON
75 SS Block Time - 1.0 Sec
31~32 Relay 1, 2 19 Speed Search -
OUT
33 Q1 Define - -

CON-71 Speed Search : The following four types of speed search can be used. If the dot of the displayed switch is up,
the corresponding bit is set and if the dot of the displayed switch is down, it is not active.

Bit Set(ON) : Bit Not Set(OFF) :



Setting Function
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit 1 is on the far right of the display.
9 Speed search selection in acceleration
9 Reset starting after a trip
9 Re-starting after an instantaneous interruption
9 Simultaneous starting at the time of power ON

1) Speed Search Selection in Acceleration
If bit 1 is set at 1 and the inverter operating command is input, acceleration is carried out in the speed search operation. If
voltage is output with an operating command given to the inverter while the motor is rotating according to the load
environment, a trip might occur, thus overworking the motor. In such a case, acceleration can continue without a trip if you
use the speed search function.







Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-37




2) Reset Starting after a Trip
If bit 2 is set at 1 and PRT-08 RST Restart is set as Yes, acceleration is carried out to the frequency before the trip in
speed search motion when the reset key(or terminal block reset) is input.

3) Re-starting after an Instantaneous Interruption
If the inverter input power is OFF, low voltage trip occurs and power is recovered before the internal power of the inverter is
OFF, acceleration is carried out to the frequency before the low voltage trip in speed search motion.
Simultaneous Starting at the Time of Power ON, Bit 4 is set at 1 and ADV-10 Power-on Run is set as Yes. If inverter input
power is supplied with the inverter operating command ON, acceleration is carried out to the target frequency in speed
search motion.

E.g.) Speed search in case of power recovery after instantaneous interruption





















Notice
When input power is blocked due to the instantaneous interruption, inverter blocks output by making Low
voltage trip (Lvt).
If input power is recovered, frequency is output and voltage increases by PI control before Low voltage trip (Lvt)
occurs.
t1 : Current exceeds over the size set in ADV-61 code, voltage stops increasing and frequency decreases.
t2 : Current drops under the size set in ADV-61, voltage increases again and voltage stops decreasing.
Normal acceleration at the frequency before trip occurs in case of normal frequency and voltage.
Caution
For correct operation, please set speed search when accelerating in case of operation from the load to
sensorless II mode. It may cause over current trip or over load trip






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-38
ADV-61 SS Sup-Current : Controls the current during speed search motion on the basis of the motor rated current. The
gain of the controller is set at ADV-62 and 63.
ADV-64 SS Block Time : Blocks output for the set period of time and then starts operation before starting speed search.
Speed search operation is mostly used for loads with high inertia. In case of a load with high friction, it is recommended to
restart after stop.
The iS7 series is designed to conduct normal operation in case of an instantaneous interruption shorter than 15mSec
when being used within the rated output. The inverter with 200V input voltage and the inverter with 400V input voltage
guarantee the instantaneous interruption time when the input voltage supplied to the inverter is 200~230Vac and
380~460Vac respectively. The current is on the basis of the static torque load current(CT load).
The DC voltage inside the inverter might vary according to the output load. Therefore if the instantaneous interruption time
is longer than 15mSec or the output is higher than the rated output, a low voltage trip(Low Voltage) might occur.

8.1.20 Automatic Restart
1) Automatic Restart
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Range Initial Value Unit
08 RST Restart
0:n /Yes (1)
0: No/Yes(1) -
09 Retry Number 0 ~ 10 0~10 -
PRT
10 Retry Delay 0 ~ 60.0 1.0 Sec
CON 71~75 SS-Related Function - - -

This is used to prevent a system interruption with the inverter protective function in case of noise and so on.
PRT-08 RST Restart, PRT-09 Retry Number, PRT-10 Retry Delay : It operates when PRT-08 RST Restart set to
YES and The available number of automatic restart is set at PRT-09. In case of a trip during operation, the inverter
conducts automatic restart after the time set in PRT-10 Retry Delay. At each automatic restart, the number of
automatic restarts decreases by 1 inside the inverter and a set number of trips occur and if the number is 0,
automatic restart is not carried out even if a trip occurs.
If a trip does not occur within 60 seconds after automatic restart, the number of automatic restarts that was reduced
inside the inverter increases again. The maximum increase number is limited to the number of restarts.
Automatic restart is not carried out in case of a stop caused by low voltage, emergency stop (Bx), overheat or
hardware problem (HW Diag).
The acceleration of automatic restart is the same as speed search operation. Thus the functions of CON72~75 can
be set according to the load and for the speed search function, see Page 8-36.







Caution
In case of operation with the number of automatic restarts set, the reset is terminated and the motor
is rotated automatically by the inverter.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-39
The following figure illustrates setting the number of automatic restarts at 2.






















8.1.21 Operation sound selection

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display
Setting
Range
Unit
04 Carrier Freq - 5.0 0.7 ~ 15 kHz kHz
CON
05 PWM Mode 1 Normal PWM
Normal PWM
/Low Leakage PWM
-
CON-04 Carrier Freq : Selects the operation sound from the motor. The power device(IGBT) inside the inverter
generates high frequency switching voltage to supply to the motor. Here the high frequency is called carrier
frequency. The higher the carrier frequency is, the lower the operation sound generated from the motor is and the
lower the carrier frequency is, the higher the operation sound is.
CON-05 PWM Mode : The heat loss and leak current from the inverter can be reduced according to the load rate. If
you select Normal PWM, you can reduce heat loss and leak current more than when you select Low Leakage
PWM, but the motor sound increases.
The merits and demerits of each load rate and the carrier frequency are as follows.

Carrier Frequency
0.7 kHz 15kHz
Normal PWM LowLeakage PWM
Motor Noise Ç È
Heat È Ç
Noise È Ç
Leak Current È Ç
Operat ing
command
St eady speed
oper at ion
The number of
aut o- rest art
2 1 2 1 0 2
Frequency
volt age
reset
30s
ec
Speed search operat ion
Trip
H27






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-40
The carrier frequency according to the inverter capacity is as follows.

0.75~22kW 30~45 kW 55~75kW 90~110 kW 132~160kW
5kHz(Max 15KHz) 5kHz(Max 10KHz) 5kHz(Max 7KHz) 3kHz(Max 6KHz) 3kHz(Max 5KHz)














iS7 inverter can be used for two types of load rates. Medium load use has an over load rate of 150% per minute
and normal load has an over load rate of 110% per minute. Therefore the current rating varies according to the load
rate and limited according to the surrounding temperature.

1) Rated current degrading specification by temperature :
The following is the rated current limit according to the temperature in operation at the normal load rate(VT : Variable
Torque).







2) Rated current degrading specification by carrier :
The following is the rated current guarantee area according to the load and carrier frequency.

Inverter Capacity 0.75~7.5kW 11~22kW 30~75kW
Normal Temperature(25℃) 10kHz 10kHz 5kHz
High Temperature(40℃) 7kHz 7kHz 4kHz CT Load
High Temperature(50℃) 5kHz 5kHz 4kHz
Normal Temperature(25℃) 7kHz 7kHz 3kHz
VT Load
High Temperature(40℃) 2KHz 2KHz 2kHz
Caution
Carrier frequency default value of 90~160 kW is 3kHz. Please do not confuse with the value D: 5.0
which is displayed on the lower left part of the keypad as followed picture that the value is the default
value from the below 75kW product.






40
o
C 50
o
C
Rat ed current ( VT)
100%
80%
Fr am e 1,2






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-41
8.1.22 2
nd
Motor operation
(when you want to do change operation of 2 monitors with one inverter)
During change operation, connecting different 2 monitors with one inverter, 2
nd
operation is available when the terminal
defined as the 2
nd
function is 1 for the parameter of 2
nd
monitor.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 26 2nd Motor -
M2 04 M2-Acc Time - 5.0 Sec

IN 65~75 Px Define : If you set the function item of the multi-function input terminal to 26 2
nd
motor, PARÎM2 (2
nd

motor group) is displayed in the parameter mode.
If the multi-function terminal, which is set as 2
nd
motor, is input, operation is carried out in the codes set as below.
During operation, input of the multi-function terminal does not make the inverter operate in the 2
nd
motor parameter.
In M2-08(M2-Ctrl Mode), the operation modes of V/F PG, Vector are not available.
To use M2-28(M2-Stall Lev), you must set PRT50(Stall Prevent) at the value you want to use.
To use M2-29(M2-ETH 1min) and M2-30(M2-ETH Cont), you must set PRT40(ETH Trip Sel) at the value you want
to use.
Code No. Function Display Description
04 M2-Acc Time Acceleration time
05 M2-Dec Time Deceleration time
06 M2-Capacity Motor capacity
07 M2-Base Freq Rated frequency of the motor
08 M2-Ctrl Mode Control mode
10 M2-Pole Num Number of poles
11 M2-Rate Slip Rated slip
12 M2-Rated Curr Rated current
13 M2-Noload Curr No-load current
14 M2-Rated Volt Rated voltage of the motor
15 M2-Efficiency Motor efficiency
16 M2-Inertia Rt Inertia rate of load
17 M2-Rs Stator resistance
18 M2-Lsigma Lead inductance
19 M2-Ls Stator inductance
20 M2-Tr Rotor time constant
25 M2-V/F Patt Output voltage pattern
26 M2-Fwd Boost Forward torque boost
27 M2-Rev Boost Reverse torque boost






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-42
Code No. Function Display Description
28 M2-Stall Lev Stall level
29 M2-ETH 1min 1 minute electronic thermal incessant rated level
30 M2-ETH Cont Electronic thermal operation level
40 M2-LoadSpdGain Gain adjustment for load speed display
41 M2-LoadSpdScal Scale adjustment for load speed display
42 M2-LoadSpdUnit Unit adjustment for load speed display

Example: set as follows if you want to change to 3.7kW in previous 7.5kW motor by using P3 terminal with the
operation function of the second motor.

Croup Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 67 P3 Define 26 2
nd
Motor -
06 M2-Capacity 3.7kW kW
M2
08 Ctrl Mode 0 V/F -
















8.1.23 By pass operation

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 16 Exchange -
31~32 Relay1,2 17 Inverter Line -
OUT
33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line -

The load operating by the inverter can be exchanged with common power supply or a reverse sequence motion
can be carried out.
IN-65~75 Px Define : This is input when No. 15 Exchange is set and the motor is shifted from the inverter to the
common power source. If you want to shift the motor reversely, turn OFF the set terminal.


IS7

Motor

1
Motor
2
iS7
Inverter
P3
7.5kW
3.7kW






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-43
OUT-30 Realy 1 ~ OUT-32 MO1 Define : Sets the multi-function relay or multi-function output at No. 16 Inverter
Line and No. 17 Comm Line. For relay motion sequence, see the figure below.






















8.1.24 Cooling fan control

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display default Unit
0 During Run
1 Always On ADV 64 FAN Control
2 Temp Control
0:
During
Run
-
This if the function of On/Off control of the fan attached for cooling the heat-sink of the inverter. This is used for
frequently starting/stopping loads or for a quiet environment without the noise of the cooling fan when stopping. This
also helps lengthen the life of the cooling fan.
No. 0 During Run (active during operation only) : If an operating command is input with the power ON in the
inverter, the cooling fan starts operating. If the operating command is OFF and the inverter output is blocked, the
cooling fan stops. If the temperature of the inverter heat sink is higher than a certain degree, the cooling fan operates
regardless of the operating command.
No. 1 Always ON (always active) : The cooling fan is always active when power is supplied to the inverter.
No. 2 Temp Control (temperature check) : The cooling fan is not active even when power is supplied to the
inverter and an operating command is input. However, if the temperature of the inverter heat sink is higher than a
certain degree, cooling fan is active.

Caution
Though 11~75kW class sets ADV-64 as “During Run”, FAN could be active as In case of operation
above regular temperature of cooling fan by current input harmonics or noises.
Output
frequency
Operation
command
Inverter
operation
t t
t : 500 msec
Common
operation
Speed frequency interval
PX
(Comm Line)
PX
(Inverter Line)
PX
(Exchange)
Inverter
operation






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-44
8.1.25 Input power frequency selection

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
BAS 10 60/50 Hz Sel 0 60 Hz
Select the inverter input power frequency.
If changed from 60Hz to 50Hz, the items related to the frequency(or rpm) set higher than 60Hz are all changed into
50Hz.
If changed from 50Hz to 60Hz, the items related to the frequency(or rpm) set higher than 50Hz are all changed into
60Hz.


8.1.26 Inverter input voltage selection

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
BAS 19 AC Input Volt - 220 V
Sets the inverter input power voltage. The low voltage failure(Low Voltage) automatically changes on the basis of
the set voltage.

8.1.27 Parameter writing and reading

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
46 Parameter Read 1 Yes -
47 Parameter Write 1 Yes - CNF
48 Parameter Save 1 Yes -

This is the function of copying the parameter saved in the inverter to the keypad and copying the parameter saved
in the keypad to the inverter.
CNF-46 Parameter Read : Copies the parameter in the inverter to the keypad. The existing parameters saved in
the keypad are all deleted.
CNF-47 Parameter Write : Copies the parameter saved in the keypad to the inverter. The existing parameters in
the inverter are all deleted. In case of an error during parameter writing motion, the previously saved data can be
directly used. If there is no data saved in the keypad, a message reading “ EEP Rom Empty “ is displayed.
CNF-48 Parameter Save : Because the parameters set in communication are saved in the RAM area, they are all
gone if the inverter power is turned Off/On. If you set parameters in communication and select Yes in CNF-48
Parameter Save, the set parameters remain unchanged even if the inverter power is turned Off/On.










Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-45

8.1.28 Parameter initialization

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
CNF 40 Parameter Init 0 No -
The parameter changed by the user can be initialized to the default value set at the time of delivery. This function
can initialize the data of all groups or selected groups.
Initialization is not available in case of a trip or during inverter operation.
1 : All Groups
All the data are initialized. If you select No. 1 All Groups and press PROG, initialization starts and when initialization
finishes, No. 0 No is displayed.
2 : DRV ~ 13 : M2
Initialization of each individual group is available. If you select the desired group and press PROG, , initialization starts
and when initialization finishes, No. 0 No is displayed.


8.1.29 Parameter view lock and Key lock

1) Parameter Mode View Lock
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
50 View Lock Set - Unlocked -
CNF
51 View Lock PW - Password -
The user can set the PAR mode so that it is not viewed using a password on the keypad. In this case, all
modes(CNF mode, user mode, macro mode, trip mode) but the parameter mode(PAR) are always viewed.
CNF-51 View Lock PW : Registers the password to use for parameter mode view lock. For setting, see the
following procedure.
Procedure Description
1
- If you press PROG key in CNF-51 code, the previous password registration display is
viewed. The default value is 0. When you register for the first time, enter 0.
- If there is a previous password, register it.
- If the entered password is the same as the previous password, a display emerges in
which you can register a new password.
- If the entered password is different from the previous password, the previous password
registration display continues to viewed.
2 - Register a new password.
3 - When registration is completed, CNF-51 View Lock PW is displayed again.
CNF-50 View Lock Set : If you enter the registered password with the view lock unlocked, “Locked” is displayed
and the parameter group is not to be viewed on the keypad. If you enter the password again, “Unlocked” is viewed
and if you move with the mode key, the parameter mode is displayed.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-46
Caution
If the parameter group view lock function is active, you cannot change functions related to inverter operation.
Be sure to memorize the registered password.

2) Parameter Key Lock
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
52 Key Lock Set - Unlocked -
CNF
53 Key Lock PW - Password -
The user can make the parameter unchangeable using the registered password.
CNF-53 Key Lock PW : Registers the password to use for parameter key lock. Register your password in the
following procedure.

Procedure Description
1
- If you press PROG key in CNF-52 code, the previous password registration
display is viewed. The default value is 0. When you register for the first time,
enter 0.
- If there is a previous password, register it.
- If the entered password is the same as the previous password, a display emerges
in which you can register a new password.
- If the entered password is different from the previous password, the previous
password registration display continues to viewed.
2 - Register a new password.
3 - When registration is completed, CNF-53 Key Lock PW is displayed again.

CNF-52 Key Lock Set : If you enter the registered password with the key lock unlocked, “Locked” is displayed and
if you press PROG in the function code you want to change for parameter change on the keypad, you cannot shift to
the editor mode. If you enter the password one more time, “Unlocked” is gone and you get out of the parameter key
lock function.
Caution
If the parameter view lock function is active, you cannot change the functions related to inverter operation.
Be sure to memorize the registered password.

3) Display of Changed Parameter

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
CNF 41 Changed Para 0 View All -
This function if making only the parameters different from their default values displayed. This is used for tracing the
changed parameters. If you select No. 1 View Changed, only the changed parameters are displayed. If you select
No. 0 View All, all the previous parameters are displayed.








Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-47
8.1.30 Addition to User Group (USR Grp)

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
42 Multi-Key Sel 3 UserGrp SelKey -
CNF
45 UserGrp AllDel 0 No -
You can group data you have chosen from each group of the parameter group and change them. You can register
up to 64 parameters in the user group.
CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel : Selects No. 4 UserGrp SelKey among the functions of the multi-function keys.
If you do not register user group parameter, user group(USR Grp) will not appear even though multi-function key is
set to UserGrp SelKey.

1) How to Register Parameter in USR Grp
Procedure Description
1
If you select 4.UserGrp SelKey in CNF Mode Code 42, is
displayed at the top of the screen.
2
Go to the parameter you want to register in PAR Mode and press
MULTI Key. For example, If you press MULTI Key in Cmd Frequency,
which is DRV Group Code 1, you will see the following display.






Description of the Display
1 : The group and code number of the parameter to register
2 : Name of the parameter to register
3 : Code No. to register in the user group(if you press PROG/ENT Key
in 40, it will be registered in code 40 of the user group)
4 : Information on the parameter already registered in code 40 of the
user group
5 : Setting range of the user group (0 is for withdrawal of setting)
3
You can set No. 3 in the display above. You can register by selecting
the desired code no. and press PROG/ENT.
4
If the value changed at No. 3, the values displayed in No. 4 change
too. That is, No. 4 displays the information on the registered
parameters and if nothing is registered with the desired code number,
Empty Code is displayed. 0 is for withdrawal of setting.
5
The parameters registered as above are registered in the user group
of U&M Mode. (When necessary, parameters can be registered
redundantly. For example, a certain parameter can be registered in
Code 2, Code 11….and so on)







Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-48
2) How to Delete Individual Parameters Registered in User Group (USR Grp)
Procedure Description
1
If you select 4.UserGrp SelKey with the Multi-Key in CNF Mode Code
42, will be seen at the top of the display.
2
Move the cursor to the code you want to delete in U&M Mode USR
Group.
3
Press MULTI Key.
4
You are asked whether to delete.
5
Press YES and then PROG/ENT Key.
6
Deletion is completed.
CNF-25 UserGrp AllDel : If you select No. 1 Yes, all the parameters registered in the user group are deleted.


8.1.31 Addition to Macro Group

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
CNF 43 Macro Select 0 None -

If you select the application load, the related function is displayed so that the inverter selects it and it can be
changed in the macro group.
CNF-43 Macro Select : This is the function that enables you to easily set by combining various application
functions. MC1(DRAW function) or MC2(traverse function) group is displayed at User & Macro(U&M) on two
functions DRAW and traverse functions
This function is provided by the inverter. The user cannot add or delete the function items included in the macro but
data can be changed in the macro group.
Please refer to 8.1.37 Traverse operation function for trip bus.
Draw function is one of open loop tension controls to maintain tension of materials stuck, using speed difference of
motor which is operating by ration for main commands

For more details, please refer to chapter, 8.1.1, Override frequency setting using auxiliary frequency command

8.1.32 Easy start

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
CNF 61 Easy Start On 1 Yes -

CNF-61 Easy Start On : If you set this code at Yes, ‘All’ is selected in CNF-40 Parameter Init for all the parameters
of the inverter to be initialized and Easy Start is launched when power is Off/On first.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-49
How to Launch Easy Start
Procedure Description
1 Set CNF-61 Easy Start On as Yes.
2
Select All in CNF-40 Parameter Init and initialize all the parameters of
the inverter.
3
When the power of the inverter is first Off/On, Easy Start gets started.
Through the following displays on the digital loader, set proper values.
(If you press ESC on the digital loader, you can immediately get out of
Easy Start)
- Start Easy Set : select Yes.
- CNF-01 Language Sel : select the language you want.
- DRV-14 Motor Capacity : select the capacity of the motor.
- BAS-11 Pole Number : select the pole number of the motor.
- BAS-15 Rated Volt : select the rated voltage of the motor.
- BAS-10 60/50Hz Sel : select the rated frequency of the motor.
- BAS-19 AC Input Volt : set the input voltage.
- DRV-06 Cmd Source : selects the operating command method.
- DRV-01 Cmd Frequency : select the operating frequency.
Now you come back to the monitoring display. The minimum
parameter to drive the motor having been set, the motor is operated by
the operating command method set in DRV-06.

8.1.33 Other Config (CNF) mode parameters

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
2 LCD Contrast - - -
10 Inv S/W Ver - x.xx -
11 Keypad S/W Ver - x.xx -
12 KPD Title Ver - x.xx -
30~32 Option-x Type - None -
42 Changed Para 0 View All
44 Erase All Trip 0 No -
60 Add Title Del 0 No -
62 WH Count Reset 0 No -
74 Fan Time - 00:00:00 -
CNF
75 Fan Time Rst 0 No -

CNF-2 LCD Contrast : can adjust the LCD brightness of the digital loader.
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver, CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver : can check the OS version of the inverter and digital loader.
CNF-12 KPD Title Ver : can check the title version of the digital loader.
CNF-30~32 Option-x Type : can check the type of the option board inserted in slots 1~3.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-50
CNF-42 Changed Para: When setting as View Changed, changed parameter comparing to default value is
displayed.
CNF-44 Erase All Tip : deletes all the saved failure history.
CNF-60 Add Title Del : this is a function to set to enable added codes in previous version to display and operate
added functions when SW of inverter main body is updated with new coded. If you set this at Yes, extract the digital
loader from the main body and insert it again, the title of the digital loader is updated.
CNF-62 WH Count Reset : The accumulated electricity is cleared.
CNF-74 Fan Time, CNF-75 Fan Time Rst : displays the cumulative time for which the cooling fan has operated. If
you select Yes at CNF-75 Fan Time Rst, CNF-74 Fan Time is cleared.

8.1.34 Timer function

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 38 Timer In -
31~33 Relay1,2 / Q1 27 Timer Out -
55 TimerOn Delay - 3.00 Sec OUT
56 TimerOff Delay - 1.00 Sec

This is the timer function of the multi-function input terminal. You can turn the multi-function output(relay included)
after a certain period of time.
IN-65~75 Px Define : Set the terminal to operate as the timer among multi-function input terminals at No. 38 Timer
In. If you input the set terminal, the output set as Timer Out becomes active after the period of time set in OUT-55
TimerOn Delay. If the multi-function input terminal is turned off, the multi-function output(or relay) is turned off after
the period of time set in OUT-56 TimerOff Delay.



















Px( Timer I n)
Q1( Timer Out )
Out - 55
Out - 56






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-51
8.1.35 Auto sequence operation

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
APP 01 App Mode 4 Auto Sequenc -
65~75 Px Define 41 SEQ-1 -
65~75 Px Define 42 SEQ-2 -
65~75 Px Define 43 Manual -
65~75 Px Define 44 Go Step -
IN
65~75 Px Define 45 Hold Step -
31~32 Relay 1, 2 20 Step Pulse -
OUT
33 Q1 Define 21 Seq Pulse -

APP-01 App Mode : If you select No. 4 Auto Sequence, the auto sequence group(AUT) is displayed in the
parameter mode. you can set the type of the auto sequence, Acc/Dec time and frequency of each step and the
rotation direction.
IN-65~75 Px Define : Use the multi-function input terminal for auto sequence operation.
41 : SEQ-L, 42 : SEQ-M
The sequence type of the auto sequence operation is selected. Up to 2 sequence operations are available with
different data set for each. If the terminal selected as SEQ-1 is input, the operation is carried out with the data set in
sequence 1. If the terminal selected as SEQ-2 is input, the operation is carried out with the data set in sequence 2.
43 : Manual
If the terminal set as No. 43 Manual is input during stop in the auto sequence operation mode, the operating
command and frequency command respectively set in DRV06(Cmd Source) and DRV07(Freq Ref Src) will apply.
44 : Go Step
The auto sequence operating method is selected. If you select Auto-B in AUT-01 code, this is used as the command
of step shift.
45 : Hold Step
During operation with AUT-01 Auto Mode set at Auto-A, if Hold Step terminal is input, the last step can be maintained.
If you select No. 19 Step Pulse among the function items of OUT-31~33, the output signals are output in pulses
every time each step changes during auto sequence operation. The pulse width is 100mSec. If you select No. 20
Seq Pulse and the pulse is output at the last step where a cycle of sequence 1 or 2, the pulse width is 100mSec.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
01 Auto Mode 0 Auto-A -
02 Auto Check - 0.08 Sec
04 Step Number - 8 -
10 Seq 1/1 Freq - 11.00 Hz
11 Seq 1/1 XcelT - 5.0 Sec
12 Seq 1/1 StedT - 5.0 Sec
13 Seq 1/1 Dir 1 Forward -
AUT
14 Seq 1/2 Freq - 21.00 Hz
Displayed repeatedly as the number of set steps







Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-52
AUT-01 Auto Mode : selects the type of auto sequence operation.
0 : Auto-A
This is the operating method of proceeding with the automatically set steps if the terminal set at SEQ-L or SEQ-M is
input among the multi-function terminal function items.
1 : Auto-B
You can proceed with steps every time when a terminal set as Go-Step is input and the terminal set at SEQ-L or
SEQ-M is input. For the motions of each, see the figure below.
AUT-02 Auto Check : sets the time when the terminals set as SEQ-L and SEQ-M are simultaneously input. If one
of the two terminals is input, another terminal is waited for to be input for the set period of time. If another terminal is
input within the set period of time, they are treated as being input at the same time.
AUT-04 Step Number : sets the number of steps of sequence operation. The frequency, Acc/Dec, steady speed
and direction of each step are displayed according to the set number of steps.
AUT-10 Seq 1/1 Freq : displays the operating frequency of step 1. The first 1 of 1/1, which is displayed on the
message, shows the sequence type and the second 1 shows the number of steps. For example, if the terminal set
as No. 42 SEQ-2 among the multi-function input terminal functions is input, operation starts from the frequency set
at Seq 2/1 Freq.
AUT-11 Seq 1/1 XcelT : sets the Acc/Dec time and the time it takes to move to the frequency set at AUT-10.
AUT-12 Seq 1/1 StedT : sets the time of steady speed operation at the frequency set at AUT-10.
AUT-13 Seq 1/1 Dir : sets the direction of rotation.

























Ouput
Fr equency
AUT- 11 AUT- 12
AUT- 10
AUT- 13
AUT- 17
AUT- 14
AUT- 15 AUT- 16
AUT- 18
AUT- 19
AUT- 21
For war d
Rever se
O u t p u t
F r e q u e n c y
Px ( S E Q - L )
P x ( S E Q -
M )
S e q u e n c e
1
S e q u e n c y
2
A u t o - A
Px ( S E Q - L )
Px ( G o -
S t e p )
A u t o - B
O u t p u t
F r e q u e n c y






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-53
8.1.36 Traverse operation










APP-01 App Mode : sets the application mode at No. 1 Traverse.
The functions necessary for traverse operation are displayed.
APP-08 Trv Amplit % : selects the magnitude of the traverse operating frequency in percentage on the basis of the
operating frequency.

100
% *
.
TrvAmplit frequency Operation
Frequency Amp Trv =
APP-09 Trv Scramb % : selects the magnitude of the scramble operating frequency and the frequency jump as
shown below.

100
%) - (100 * .
- . .
TrvScramb frequency Amp Trv
frequency Amp Trv frequency Scr Trv =
PP-10 Trv Acc Time, APP-11 Trv Dec Time : sets the Acc/Dec time of traverse operation.
APP-12 Trv Offset Hi: If you select and input No. 28 Trv Offset Hi among the multi-function input terminal functions,
operation is carried out at the frequency pattern that has increased by the value set at APP-12.


100
*
.
i TrvOffsetH frequency Operation
frequency OffsetHi Trv =


APP-13 Trv Offset Lo : If you select and input No. 27 Trv Offset Lo among the multi-function input terminal
functions, operation is carried out at the frequency pattern that has decreased by the value set at APP-13.


100
*
.
o TrvOffsetL frequency Operation
frequency OffsetLo Trv =


Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Unit
01 App Mode 1 Traverse -
08 Trv Amplit % - 0.0 %
09 Trv Scramb % - 0.0 %
10 Trv Acc Time - 2.0 Sec
11 Trv Dec Time - 3.0 Sec
12 Trv Offset Hi - 0.0 %
APP
13 Trv Offset Lo - 0.0 %
65~75 Px Define 27 Trv Offset Lo -
IN
65~75 Px Define 28 Trv Offset Hi -






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-54
8.1.37 Brake control
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control Mode 0 V/F -
41 BR Rls Curr - 50.0 0~180% %
42 BR Rls Dly - 1.00 0~10.0 Sec
44 BR Rls Fwd Fr - 1.00 0~Maximum frequency Hz
45 BR Rls Rev Fr - 1.00 0~Maximum frequency Hz
46 BR Eng Dly - 1.00 0~10 Sec
ADV
47 BR Eng Fr - 2.00 0~Maximum frequency Hz
OUT 31~33 Relay x or Q1 35 BR Control - -
This is used for controlling the On/Off motions of the brake in the load system using the electronic brake. The
motion sequence varies according to the set value of the control mode(DRV-09). Before constructing the sequence,
check the control mode setting.
When the brake control is active, the starting DC braking(ADV-12) and dwell operation(ADV 20~23) are not active.
When torque control(DRV-10) is set, brake control is not active.

[When the Control Mode Is Not Vector : ]
1) Brake Open Sequence
If an operating command is given with the motor static, the inverter accelerates to the open frequency(ADV-44,45)
forward or reversely. When the current through the motor reaches the brake open current(BR Rls Curr) after reaching
the brake open frequency, the brake open signals are released with the output relay or multi-function output terminal
set for brake control. Acceleration starts after the frequency is maintained for the brake open delay time(BR Rls Dly).
2) Brake Closed Sequence
If a stop command is given during operation, the motor decelerates. When the output frequency reached the brake
closed frequency(BR Eng Fr), deceleration stops and the brake closed signal is released to the set output terminal.
After being maintained for the brake closed delay time(BR Eng Dly), the output frequency becomes 0. If the DC
braking time(ADV-15) or DC braking amount(ADV-16) is set, inverter output is blocked after DC braking. For DC
braking motion, see page 7-27.
[When the Control Mode Is Set at Vector[
1) Brake Open Sequence
If the operating command is input, the brake open signal is released with the output terminal set after the initial
excitation time. Acceleration starts after the brake open delay time(BR Rly Dly).
2) Brake Closed Sequence
If a stop command is given, deceleration is carried out until the speed reaches 0 and the brake closed signal is
released. Output is blocked after the set brake closed delay time(BR Eng Dly). This is not active in the torque control
mode.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-55












































Out put
fr equency
Oper at i on
command
CON- 10
CON- 12
Out put
cur r ent
Mot or speed
Br ake out put
t er mi nal
Br ake closed
int er val
Br ake open
int er val
Br ake closed
int er val
When Cont r ol Mode I n Not Set at Vect or
ADV- 42
Out put
frequency
Operat ion
command
ADV- 41
ADV- 42
ADV- 46
ADV- 15
ADV- 47
Out put
currency
Mot or speed
Brake Out put
t erminal
Brake closed
int erval
Brake open
int erval
When Cont rol Mode I s Not Set at Vect or
ADV- 44, 45
Brake closed
int erval






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-56
8.1.38 Multi-function output On/Off control

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
66 OnOff Ctrl Src 1 V1 - -
67 On-C Level - 90.00 10~100% %
ADV
68 Off-C Level - 10.00
0~Output contact on
level
%
OUT 31~33 Relay x or Q1 34 On/Off Control - -
If the analog input value is over the set value, the output relay or multi-function output terminal can be turned ON or
OFF.
Select the analog input to use for ON/OFF control at ADV-66 and set the levels at which the output terminal is ON
and OFF at ADV-67 and 68 respectively. If the analog input value is over the value set at ADV-67, the output
terminal is ON and if below ADV-68, it is OFF.

8.1.39 MMC function
This is used when multiple motors are controlled by one inverter in the fan or pump system. The motor connected to
the inverter output(main motor) controls speed by PID control and other motors(auxiliary motors), connected to the
common power source by the relay inside the inverter, conduct On/Off control.
For the relay for control of the auxiliary motors, the Relay 1 and 2 of the standard I/O card of the inverter and multi-
function output terminal Q1 are used. If the extended I/O option card is connected to the inverter option slot, up to 3
relay outputs are available.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
APP 01 App Mode 3 MMC - -
20 Aux Motor Run - 0 0~4 -
21 Starting Aux - 1 1~4 -
22 Auto Op Time - 0:00 xx:xx Min
23 Start Freq 1 - 49.99
0~60
Hz
24 Start Freq 2 - 49.99
0~60
Hz
25 Start Freq 3 - 49.99
0~60
Hz
26 Start Freq 4 - 49.99
0~60
Hz
27 Stop Freq 1 - 15.00
0~60
Hz
28 Stop Freq 1 - 15.00
0~60
Hz
29 Stop Freq 1 - 15.00
0~60
Hz
30 Stop Freq 1 - 15.00
0~60
Hz
31 Aux Start DT - 60.0
0~3600.0
Sec
APO

32 Aux Stop DT - 60.0
0~3600.0
Sec






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-57
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
33 Num of Aux - 4
0~4
-
34 Regul Bypass 0 No
No/Yes
-
35 Auto Ch Mode 0 Aux
None/Aux/Main
-
36 Auto Ch Time - 72:00
0~99:00
Min
38 Interlock 0 No
No/Yes
-
39 Interlock DT - 5.0
0.1~360.0
Sec
40 Actual Pr Diff - 2
0~100%
%
41 Aux Acc Time - 2.0
0.0~600.0
Sec
APO

42 Aux Dec Time - 2.0
0.0~600.0
Sec
31~33 Relay x or Q1 24 MMC
-
-
OUT
34~36 Qx Define 24 MMC
-
-

1) Basic Operation
APP-01 APP Mode : If you select No. 3 MMC as the applied function, the items related to the MMC function are
displayed in the option card function group(APO) and the PID control related functions are displayed in APP. In APP,
application functions group, functions such as PID control are displayed.
APO-20, 21, 33 : If the number of auxiliary motors is set at APO-33 and there are more than one auxiliary motor, the
number of the auxiliary motor first operated is input into APO-21. For example, if there are three auxiliary motors and
each of them is controlled by Relay 1,2 and Q1 control, the auxiliary motors operate in the sequence of Relay 2, Q1
and Relay 1 when 2 in input in APO-21. The auxiliary motors stop in the sequence of Relay 1, Q1 and Relay 2. In
the APO-20, the number of currently operating auxiliary motors can be monitored.
APO-23~26 Start Freq 1~4 : The starting frequency of auxiliary motors is set. As the main motor is operated by PID
control, its operating frequency is risen by the load change and the operation of an auxiliary motor is necessary. The
condition of the output terminal of the inverter(Relay or multi-function output(Qx)) being ON for the operation of an
auxiliary motor is as follows. The auxiliary motor can operate when 1) the speed of the main motor rises above the
starting frequency(APO-23~26) of the auxiliary motor, 2) the starting delay time(APO-13) of the auxiliary motor
passes and 3) the difference between the reference and the feedback of the main motor PID controller becomes
larger than the pressure difference of the auxiliary motor motion(APO-40).
APO-27~30 Stop Freq 1~4 : The stop frequency of the auxiliary motor is set. If the operating frequency of the main
motor goes down below a certain frequency while the auxiliary motor is running, the auxiliary motor should be
stopped. The condition of the auxiliary motor being stopped is as follows. The auxiliary motor can be stopped when
1) the speed of the main motor goes down below the stop frequency(APO-27~30) of the auxiliary motor, 2) the stop
delay time(APO-32) of the auxiliary motor passes and 3) the difference between the reference and the feedback of
the main motor PID controller becomes smaller than the pressure difference(APO-40) of the auxiliary motor motion.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-58
APO-41 Aux Acc Time, APO-42 Aux Dec Time : The main motor stops PID control and normal acceleration and
deceleration operation when the auxiliary motor runs or stops. When the auxiliary motor runs, the main motor
decelerates to the decelerating frequency of the auxiliary motor for the decelerating time set at APO-42. Inversely,
when the auxiliary motor stops, the main motor accelerates to the starting frequency for the accelerating time set at
APO-41. For details on the PID control of the main motor, see page 8-12.























2) Automatic Change of Motor(Auto Change)
The motion sequence of the main and auxiliary motors can be automatically changed. If only a particular motor
continues running, the life of the motor might be affected. Therefore the motion sequence can be reversed to keep
the use time of the motors equal.
APO-35 Auto Ch Mode : Selects the type of motions of the automatic change.
0 : None
The motion sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21(starting auxiliary motor
selection) and the automatic change function is not active.



St art ing frequency of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-23~26
Main
mot or
out put
frequency
Out put
t erminal
auxiliary mot or st art s
St art ing frequency of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-27~30
St op delay t ime of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-31
Main mot or accelerat ion t ime when t he pump number increases
APO-42
St art ing frequency of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-23~ 26
Main
mot or
ouput
frequency
Out put
t erminal
auxiliary mot or st ops
St op frequency of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-27~30
St op delay t ime of t he
auxiliary mot or
APO-32
Main mot or accelerat ion t ime when t he pump number decreases
APO- 41
st op sequence of t he auxiliary mot or following load increase
St op sequence of t he auxiliary mot or following load
decrease






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-59
1 : Aux
The motion sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21(starting auxiliary
motor selection). When the cumulative operating time of a main and auxiliary motor exceeds the auto change
time(APO-36), the auto change condition is met. If the main motor is stopped by a stop command or sleep operation
mode after in the auto change condition, the start sequence of the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21 is changed.
For example, if there are four auxiliary motors operating and No. 4 is selected in APO-21, the start sequence of the
auxiliary motor automatically changes to No. 1. Therefore, the previous start sequence of the auxiliary motor of
4,1,2,3 changes to 1,2,3,4 and if the condition goes back to the auto change condition, the sequence changed to
2,3,4,1.


















2 : Main
Automatic change is available without distinction between the main and auxiliary motors. The auto change condition
is met if the cumulative operating time of the motor connected to the inverter output exceeds the auto change
time(APO-36).
If the inverter is stopped by a stop command or sleep operation mode, the operating sequence of the motor
automatically changes. For example, if the starting auxiliary motor selection(APO-21) is set at 2, the inverter output
is connected to No. 2 motor. If there are four motors and the auxiliary motor operating condition is met, motors 3, 4
and 1 starts operating one after another in sequence. If the inverter stops in the auto change condition, motor No. 3
is connected to the inverter output in the next restart and the auxiliary motors operates in the sequence of 4, 1 and 2.






3 phase input
Main
motor
Inverter
U V W
R S T
KD1 KD2 KD3 KD4
Auxiliary
motor1
Auxiliary
motor2
Auxiliary
motor3
Auxiliary
motor4
St art ing sequence : auxiliary 1 - > auxiliary2 -> auxiliary3 -> auxiliary 4
St op sequence : auxiliary 4 - > auxiliary3 -> auxiliary2 -> auxiliary1
R S T
UV W






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-60



















3) Interlock
This is the function of stopping the motor operating and replacing it with another motor in case of a failure of the
motor. If the failure signal is input into the input terminal and the functions of the relevant terminals are set as
Interlock 1~4, it will be decided whether to operate the motor according to the terminal input status. The replacement
operation sequence varies according to the set values of the motor auto change mode selection(APO-35) described
above.
IN-65~75 Px Define : The terminal to use as the interlock among the IN 65~75(75 if there is extended I/O) is
selected and Interlock 1~4 are set according to the motor sequence. If the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is
set at 0(None) or 1(Aux) and if auxiliary motors 1, 2 and 3 are connected to inverter output terminals Relay1, 2 and
Q1 when a total of four motor including the main motor is operating, the interlock numbers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to
the motor connected to Relay1, 2 and Q1.However, if the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 2(Main)
and the main and auxiliary motors are connected to inverter output terminals Relay1, 2, Q1 and Q2(extended I/O
used) respectively, Interlock 1, 2, 3 and 4 correspond to the motors connected to Relay1, 2, Q1 and Q2.
APO-38 Interlock : Select No. 1 Yes.
1) If there are a total of 5 motors and the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 0(None) or 1(Aux), the
operation is as follows. If signals are input into the terminal block set at Interlock 3 with a failure of motor 3 when it is
static, the auxiliary motors operate in the sequence of 1, 2 and 4. (when the starting auxiliary motor selection APO-
21 is 1) If the terminal block signals are withdrawn, the motion sequence is 1, 2, 3 and 4. If signals are input to the
terminal of Interlock 3, the auxiliary motor 3 is stopped and the auxiliary motor 4 operates. If the interlock signal is
withdrawn, the auxiliary motor 4 is stopped and the auxiliary motor 3 operates again.



M1
Inverter
R S T
U V W
KM1
KM2
KM3
KM4

KD1 KD2
KD3 KD4
M2
M3 M4
3 phase input






Chapter 8 Applied Functions






8-61
2) If there are four motors in total and the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 2(Main), the operation is as
follows. If the starting auxiliary motor selection APO-21 is set at 1, motor 1 is operated by the inverter and the
remaining 2, 3 and 4 are operated by the auxiliary motors and interlock signals are input to the auxiliary motors, the
operation sequence is the same as the procedure described in 1) above. However if there is a problem with motor 1,
which is connected to the inverter, the output is immediately blocked and motor 2 gets connected to the inverter
output and the operation sequence of the auxiliary motor is 3, 4. If the interlock signal of motor 1 is withdrawn, the
operation sequence of the auxiliary motor is 3, 4, 1.

Bypass Operation (Regul Bypass)
The speed of the main motor can be controlled by the feedback without using the PID. The operation and stop of
the auxiliary motor is controlled according to the feedback amount.
APP-34 Regul Bypass : Select No. 1 Yes. If there are four main motors and auxiliary motors(APP-33) in total, the
operation is as follows. If the feedback input value is between 0~10V and operating frequency of the maximum input
value(10V) is 60Hz, the auxiliary motor 1 is started when the feedback amount is 2.5V(15Hz of main motor
operating frequency). If the feedback amount reaches 5V again, the auxiliary motor 2 is operated. At maximum 10V
input, all three auxiliary motors operated.


) 33 (
amount feedback Maximum
n motor auxiliary of level Operation

∗ =
APO motor auxiliary of number The
n

8.1.40 Regeneration evasion function for press
(To evade control operation in the status of regeneration during press)
This function is the one to prevent regeneration region, raising the speed of motor operation speed during press in the
status of motor regeneration.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display and Range Initial Value
Unit
0 No
74 RegenAvd Sel
1 Yes
0: No -
200V class: 300~400V 350V
75 RegenAvd Level
400V class: 600~800V 700V
V
76 CompFreq Limit 0~ 10.00Hz 1.00[Hz] Hz
77 RegenAvd Pgain 0 ~ 100.0% 50.0[%] %
ADV
78 RegenAvd Igain 20~30,000msec 500[msec] msec

ADV-74 RegenAvd Sel (select regeneration evasion function for press):
During constant speed operation of the motor, select when frequent regeneration voltage occurs, damage and short life of
DB Unit due to excessive DB Unit operation or DB Unit operation is evaded limiting DC Link voltage.






Chapter 8 Applied Functions


8-62
ADV-75 RegenAvd Level (set regeneration evasion level for press):
Set DB operation evasion voltage when DC Link voltage goes up by regeneration voltage.
ADV-76 CompFreq Limit (limit regeneration evasion compensation frequency for press):
Set changeable frequency range for real command frequency during regeneration operation region.
ADV-77 RegenAvd Pgain (P gain set for regeneration evasion compensation control machine function for press)
ADV-78 RegenAvd Igain (I gain set for regeneration evasion compensation control machine function for press):
Set P, I Gain of DC Link voltage limit PI control machine for regeneration operation region.













Caution
Regeneration evasion function for press is available only when motor operation status is constant speed section.
(not available in the section of acceleration/deceleration) Output frequency can change as much as frequency set
ADV-76 CompFreq Limit in spite of constant speed operation during evasion operation.
Direct voltage(Vdc)
Output
frequency(Hz)
ADV-76 compensation frequency limit
range
Command
frequency
ADV-75 regeneration evasion level voltage
Status during regeneration
evasion




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-1
9.1 Monitor Functions
9.1.1 Monitor in operation - Keypad
You can monitor the operating status using the keypad of the inverter. You can select the desired items to monitor in
the config mode(CNF), watch three items at a time in the monitor mode and select an item in the status display.

1) Selection of Monitor Mode Display
Mode Group Code No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
- 21 Monitor Line-1 0 Frequency Hz
- 22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current A
- 23 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage V
CNF
24 Mon Mode Init 0 No -

CNF-21~23 Monitor Line-x : Selects the items to display in the monitor mode. Monitor mode is displayed first when
the power is supplied and all three items of Monitor Line-1 ~ Monitor Line-3 can be displayed simultaneously.
Choose from the following items suited to the line you want to display. If you choose Yes in CNF-24 Mon Mode Init,
CNF-21~23 is initialized.
Setting Function
0 Frequency
During stop, the set frequency is displayed and during
operation, the currently output operating frequency is
displayed in Hz unit.
1 Speed The same as above(0) and displayed in rpm unit.
2 Output Current Displays the magnitude of the output current.
3 Output Voltage Displays the output voltage.
4 Output Power Displays the output power.
5
WHour
Counter
Displays the electricity consumed by the inverter.
6 DCLink Voltage
Displays the DC power voltage inside the inverter. During
stop, it represents the maximum value of the DC input
voltage.
7 DI Status
Displays the status of the input terminals of the inverter
terminal blocks. From the right, they are represented by
P1,P2…P11.
8 DO Status
Displays the status of the output terminals of the inverter
terminal blocks. From the right, they are represented by
Relay1, Relay2, Q1.
9 V1 Monitor[V]
Displays the values being input into V1, the voltage input
terminal of the inverter terminal block in the voltage term.
10 V1 Monitor[%]
Displays the voltage unit above in percentage. If -10 ~ 0
~ +10V is input, it is represented by -100 ~ 0 ~ 100%.
11 I1 Monitor[mA] Displays the magnitude of the current being input into I1




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-2
Setting Function
terminal of the inverter terminal block.
12 I1 Monitor[%]
Displays the current above in percentage. If the input
current is 0~20[mA], it is represented by 0~100%.
13 V2 Monitor[V]
Displays the voltage input of the V2 terminal of the I/O
option card when you use the extended I/O option.
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays the V2 input voltage in percentage.
15 I2 Monitor[mA]
The current input into the I2 terminal of the I/O option
card when you use the extended I/O option.
16 I2 Monitor[%]
Displays the input current of the I2 terminal in
percentage.
17 PID Output Displays the output of the PID controller.
18 PID Ref Value Displays the reference of the PID controller.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays the feedback of PID controller.
20 Torque
If the torque reference command method (DRV-08) is set
as methods other than the keypad (0 or 1), the torque
reference is displayed.
21 Torque Limit
If the torque limit setting method (CON-53) is set as
methods other than the keypad (0 or 1), the torque limit is
displayed.
22 Trq Bias Ref
If the torque bias setting method (CON-58) is set as
methods other than the keypad (0 or 1), the torque bias is
displayed.
23 Spd Limit
If the speed limiting method (CON-62) in the torque
control mode is set as methods other than the keypad (0
or 1), the speed limit amount is displayed.
24 Load Speed
Displays the load speed in the scale and unit which the
user wants. Displays the load speed in the values to
which ADV61 (Load Spd Gain) and ADV62 (Load Spd
Scale) are applied in the units of rpm or mpm set in
ADV63 (Load Spd Unit).

2) Output power display
Mode Group Code No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
PAR BAS 18
Trim
Power %
- 100.0 %
BAS-18 Trim Power % : selects No. 4 Output Power among the monitor items described above, raises this set
value properly when the output power displayed in the loader is lower than expected. If the output power displayed in
the loader is higher than expected, it decreases this set value properly. Output power display is calculated with
voltage and current and Output power can have a error when power factor is low.





Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-3
* WHour Counter: Describes for No.5 WHour Counter (electricity consumed by inverter) among the aforementioned
Monitor items. Electricity consumption is calculated with voltage and current, and it is accumulated the calculated
electricity every 1 second.

The way of Electricity consumption display is followed description.
1. Below 1000kW, the unit is kW and it is displayed like a 999.9 kW.
2. Between 1 ~ 99 MW, the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 99.99MWh.
3. Between 100 ~ 999 MW, the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 999.9 MWh.
4. Above 1000 MW, the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 9999 MWh and can be displayed to 65535 MW.
5. Above 65535 MW, it is initialized to 0 and the unit becomes to kW and displayed like 999.9 kW.
6. In case of CNF-62 WH Count Reset to YES, user can clear the electricity consumption.

3) Load Speed Display Selection
Mode Group
Code
No.
Function Display Initial Setting Unit
61 Load Spd Gain - 100.0 %
62 Load Spd Scale 0 X 1 - PAR ADV
63 Load Spd Unit 0 rpm -
ADV-61 Load Spd Gain : selects No. 24 Load Speed among the monitor items described above and displays the
actual number of rotations by computing the gear ratio when the motor axis and load are connected by a belt and so
on.
ADV-62 Load Spd Scale : selects to what place of decimals to display No. 24 Load Speed among the monitor
items(x1~x0.0001).
ADV-63 Load Spd Unit : selects the unit of No. 24 Load Speed among the monitor items. selects one of
RPM(Revolution Per Minute) and MPM(Meter Per Minute).
For example, if the speed is 300 [mpm] at 800[rpm] and if you want to display the value, set ADV-61(Load Spd Gain)
at“375%”. In addition, if you want it to be displayed to the first place of the decimals, set ADV-63(Load Spd Scale) at
“X 0.1”. Now “300.0 mpm” is displayed on the keypad display instead of “800rpm” for No. 24 Load Speed.


4) Hz / Rpm Display Selection
Mode Group Code No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
DRV 21 Hz / Rpm Sel 0 Hz -
PAR
BAS 11 Pole Number - 4 -
DRV-21 Hz / Rpm Sel : can convert all the parameters of which the unit is Hz into RPM or reversely. The Pole
Number of BAS-11 is applied.




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-4
* Warning
If you change the default value of Hz/Rpm Sel from Hz to Rpm display, all parameters will be changed to Rpm but it
is not changed automatically in monitor mode.
E.g) At CNF-21 Monitor Line-1 to Frequency (Fault value), if you change the value from Hz to Rpm Display at DRV-
21 Hz/Rpm Sel, Monitor Line-1 set value is not changed. To change the value to Rpm Display in Monitor mode,
CNF-21 set from Frequency to Speed.

5) Selection of Status Display

Mode
Code
No.
Function Display Initial Setting Unit
CNF 20 AnyTime Para 0 Frequency -
The variables to be displayed at the top of Keypad Display(LCD Display) can be selected. The items available are as
follows and the items not particularly described have the same functions described in the Monitor Mode Selection
Items above.

Setting Function
0 Frequency 13 V2 Monitor[V]
1 Speed 14 V2 Monitor[%]
2 Output Current 15 I2 Monitor[mA]
3 Output Voltage 16 I2 Monitor[%]
4 Output Power 17 PID Output
5 WHour Counter 18 PID Ref Value
6 DCLink Voltage 19 PID Fdb Value
7 - 20 Torque
8 - 21 Torque Limit
9 V1 Monitor[V] 22 Trq Bias Ref
10 V1 Monitor[%] 23 Speed Limit
11 I1 Monitor[mA] 24 Load Speed
12 I1 Monitor[%]




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-5
9.1.2 Failure status monitor – Keypad
The Trip Mode displays the present failure status in case of a trip during operation. The type, operating frequency
and current of the present trip can be monitored and last 5 trips can be saved.

1) Present Failure Status Monitor
If a failure occurs, the present failure type is displayed as follows in the keypad display.




For the type and description of the failure, see 10.1.20. Table of Failures/Warnings
The inverter operating status at the time of a failure can be monitored and the followings items are recorded.

Displayed Information Function
1 Output Freq
The operating frequency at the time of
the failure
2 Output Current
The output current at the time of the
failure
3 Inverter State
Displays acceleration, deceleration,
steady speed operation and stop
4 DCLink Voltage Inverter DC power voltage
5 Temperature Inverter temperature
6 Input State Displays the input terminal status
7 Output State Displays the output terminal status
8 Trip On Time
Displays the time from the inverter
power ON to the failure
9 Trip Run Time
Displays the time from the inverter Run
to the failure

If you enter press the Reset key on the keypad or input the reset terminal of the terminal block in order to terminal the
failure status, the information on the currently displayed failure is saved as part of the failure history. In this case, what
was saved in Failure History 1(Last-1) is shifted to Failure History 2(Last-2)
The number next to the failure name represents the number of simultaneously occurring failures. Therefore, if more
than one failure occurs, you can monitor the type of them by pressing PROG.


TRP current
Over Voltage (02)
01 Output Freq
48.30 Hz
02 Output Current




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-6
2) Failure History Monitor
Types of up to five previous failures can be saved and monitored. The lower the number of Last X is, the more recent
failure it represents. If more than 5 failures have occurred, those that occurred before the last 5 ones are
automatically deleted.
The items displayed in the failure history are as follows.

Displayed Information Function
0 Trip Names(1) Displays the type of the failure
1 Output Freq
The operating frequency at the time of
the failure
2 Output Current
The output current at the time of the
failure
3 Inverter State
Displays acceleration, deceleration,
steady speed operation and stop
4 DCLink Voltage Inverter DC power voltage
5 Temperature Inverter temperature
6 Input State Displays the input terminal status
7 Output State Displays the output terminal status
8 Trip On Time
Displays the time from the inverter
power ON to the failure
9 Trip Run Time
Displays the time from the inverter Run
to the failure
10 Trip Delete ?
Displays whether the currently saved
failure history is to be deleted

There are two ways to delete the failure history. One is deleting each failure history by selecting Yes for Trip mode
‘TRP-10 Trip Delete ?’ in the each failure history described above. The other is deleting all the failure history by
selecting Yes for CNF-24 Erase All Trip of the Config Mode.




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-7
9.1.3 Analog output

1) 0 ~ 10V Voltage Output
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
01 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency -
02 AO1 Gain - 100.0 %
03 AO1 Bias - 0.0 %
04 AO1 Filter - 5 msec
05 AO1 Const % - 0.0 %
OUT
06 AO1 Monitor - 0.0 %

The items to be output from AO1 (Analog Output 1) terminal of the inverter terminal block are selected and their size
is adjusted.
OUT-01 AO1 Mode : selects the type of the output items.

Setting Function
0 Frequency
Outputs the operating frequency. 10V is produced from the
frequency set at DRV-20 Max Freq.
1
Output
Current
10V is produced from 200% of the inverter’s rated current (CT :
based on the Constant Torque).
2
Output
Voltage
Outputs the output voltage. Outputs the 10V from set value of
BAS-15 Rated Volt.
In case of BAS-15 set to 0V, it outputs to 10V based on that 200V
class is 220V and 400V class is 440V.
3
DC Link
Volt
Outputs the DC power voltage of the inverter. 200V class produces
10V at 410Vdc and 400V at 820Vdc.
4 Torque
Outputs the produced torque of 10V at 250% of the motor’s rated
torque.
5
Output
Power
Monitors the output watt. 200% of the rated output is the maximum
nominal voltage(10V).
6 Idse Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of no-load current.
7 Iqse
Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of the rated torque current.
2 2
current load - Non - current rated current torque Rated − =
8
Target
Freq
Outputs the set frequency. Produces 10V at maximum frequency
(DRV-20)
9
Ramp
Freq
The frequency that has gone through acceleration and
deceleration functions and can be different from the actual output
frequency. It produces 10V at maximum frequency (DRV-20)







Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-8
Setting Function
10
Speed
Fdb
Displays the information on the speed of the input into the
encoder option card. It produces 10V at maximum
frequency(DRV-20)
11
Speed
Dev
Outputs the difference between the speed
reference(command) and the motor’s rotation speed that
inputs into the encoder option card. It produces 10V at twice
the rated slip frequency. It is valid only in the vector control
mode.
12
PID Ref
Value
Outputs the command values of the PID controller. It
produces 6.6V at 100% of the reference.
13
PID Fdb
Value
Displays the amount of the feedback of the PID controller. It
produces 6.6V at 100% of the reference.
14
PID
Output
Displays the output value of the PID controller. It produces
6.6V at 100% of the reference.
15 Constant Outputs the value of OUT-05 AO1 Const %.

OUT-02 AO1 Gain, OUT-03 AO1 Bias : The size and offset can be adjusted. The output items are selected as
frequency and the operation is as follows.
Bias AO Gain AO
MaxFreq
Frequency
AO 1 1 1 + × =
OUT-04 AO1 Filter : sets the filter time constant of the analog output.
OUT-06 AO1 Monitor : The analog output value can be monitored, which is represented in percentage on the basis
of the 10V of maximum output voltage.

2) 0 ~ 20mA Current Output
Group Code No. Function Display
Initial
Setting
Unit
07 AO2 Mode 0 Frequency -
08 AO2 Gain - 100.0 %
09 AO2 Bias - 0.0 %
10 AO2 Filter - 5 Msec
11 AO2 Const % - 0.0 %
OUT
12 AO2 Monitor - 0.0 %
Selects the items output from the AO2(Analog Output 2) terminal of the inverter terminal block and adjusts their size.
The function of each code are the same as the items of 0~10V voltage output described above and the output range
is 0~20mA.






Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-9
3) -10 ~ +10V Voltage Output of Extended I/O Option Card
If the extended I/O option card is mounted on the option slot of the inverter, the operating status can be monitored
using the bipolar voltage output of the extended I/O. Its output has a resolving power of 11bit.

Group
Code
No.
Function Display
Initial
Setting
Unit
14 AO3 Mode 0 Frequency -
15 AO3 Gain - 100.0 %
16 AO3 Bias - 0.0 %
17 AO3 Filter - 5 Msec
18 AO3 Const % - 0.0 %
OUT
19 AO3 Monitor - 0.0 %
The operation function is set equal to the 0~10V voltage output(AO1) described above. However, because bipolar
voltage output is possible for AO3, unipolar(0~+10V) or bipolar(-10~+10V) voltage can be produced according to the
type of the output variable.
The Example of both direction output voltage.









4) 0~20mA Current Output of Extended I/O Option Card
Connection of the extended I/O card to the inverter makes output of current of 0~20mA possible through terminals
AO3 and AO4. The selection of the function is the same as described in AO1 terminal of the inverter.

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
20 AO4 Mode 0 Frequency -
21 AO4 Gain - 100.0 %
22 AO4 Bias - 0.0 %
23 AO4 Filter - 5 msec
24 AO4 Const % - 0.0 %
OUT
25 AO4 Monitor - 0.0 %


Output Direction Related Functions
0:Frequency 9:Ramp Freq
10:Speed
Fdb
forward(+)/reverse(-)
12:PID Ref
Value
13:PID Fdb
Value
14:PID
Output
reverse(-)/
regenerative(-)
4:Torque 7:Iqss -




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-10
9.1.4 Selection of relay function and multi-function output terminal of terminal block

Group Code No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
30 Trip Out Mode - 010 bit
31 Relay 1 Trip Mode -
32 Relay 2 12 Run -
33 Q1 Define 1 FDT-1
34~36 Q2~Q4 Define - - -
OUT
41 DO Status - - bit

According to OUT-30 Failure output, Failure Relay will operate

Bit on status (ON) : Bit off status (OFF) :

Setting option Function
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Right end of the window is ‘ Bit 1’
9 It operates, when the Low voltage trip occurs
9 It operates under trip situations other than low voltage trip.
9
It operates under the final failure of automatic restart
repetition setting trials. (PRT-08~09).
Select the output items of the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(Relay1, 2) of the inverter terminal block.
Q1 is Open Collector TR output.
Extended I/O card mounted in the inverter body, you can use additional 3 relay outputs and function codes OUT-34,
35 and 36 are displayed.
Multi-function output can be monitored at OUT 41 DO Status.
Multi-function output can be monitored to 3 outputs without extended I/O and 6 outputs with extended I/O.

1) Multi-Function output Terminal & Relay setting Functions
0: None (I recommend it is more easily described)
It takes no action. If this multi-function output is set as None with the PLC option card inserted in Slot 1 and Slot 2, it
can be used as the contact point output of the PLC option card.
1: FDT-1
This inspects whether the output frequency of the inverter has reached the frequency set by the user. It begins to
operate when the following condition is met.
absolute value(set frequency – output frequency) < detected frequency width/2




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-11
The detected frequency width is set as follows and the illustration below shows the frequency width having been set
at 10Hz.
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
OUT 58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz










2 : FDT-2
Active when the frequency set by the user is equal to the FDT Frequency and the No. 0 FDT-1 condition above is
simultaneously met.
[absolute value(set frequency – detected frequency) < detected frequency width /2 ] & [ FDT-1 ]
This case assumes that the detected frequency width is 10Hz and the detected frequency is 30Hz.

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
57
FDT
Frequency
- 30.00 Hz
OUT
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz









3 : FDT-3
Active when the operating frequency meets the following condition.
absolute value(detected frequency – operating frequency) < detected frequency width /2


15Hz
Set
Frequency
Frequency
Q1
20Hz
20Hz
40Hz
35Hz
Operating
command
40Hz
25Hz
Set
Frequency
Frequency
Q1
30Hz
50Hz
Operating
command




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-12
Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Unit
57 FDT Frequency - 30.00 Hz
OUT
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz









4 : FDT-4
Can operate setting the conditions of acceleration and deceleration at the same time.
Acceleration : operating frequency >= detected frequency
Deceleration : operating frequency > (detected frequency - detected frequency/2)

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Unit
57 FDT Frequency - 30.00 Hz
OUT
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz









5 : Over Load (motor overload)
Active when the motor is given overload.
6 : IOL (inverter overload)
Active in case of a failure for inverse time characteristic protection against inverter overload.
7 : Under Load (underload warning)
Active in case of underload warning.
8 : Fan Warning (fan failure)
Set ‘8: Fan Warning’ at multi-function output and it will be Activated when there is a problem with the cooling fan.
9 : Stall (motor stall)
Active in case of a stall caused by the motor overload.
Frequency
Q1
Operating
command
25Hz
30Hz
35Hz
Frequency
Q1
Operating
command
25Hz
30Hz




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-13
10 : Over Voltage (over voltage failure)
Active if the inverter DC power voltage goes up above the protective action voltage.
11 : Low Voltage (low voltage failure)
Active if the inverter DC power voltage goes down below the low voltage protective action level.
12 : Over Heat (inverter cooling fan overheat)
Active if the inverter cooling fan is overheated.
13 : Lost Command (command loss)
Active in case of loss of the analog input terminal and RS485 communication command of the inverter terminal block.
The communication option and extended I/O option card are mounted and it operates also in case of loss of the
analog input terminal and communication command within the option.
14 : RUN (running)
Active while the inverter produces voltage with given operating command. It is not active during DC braking.






15 : Stop (stop)
Active when the operating command is OFF and there is no inverter output voltage.
16 : Steady (steady speed operation)
Active during steady speed operation.
17 : Inverter Line (inverter operation), 18 : Comm Line (normal power operation)
If normal exchange operation is necessary, they can be used as the signal sources for operation of the system
sequence relay or magnetic contactor. They use the auxiliary relay of the inverter terminal block(Aux Relay) and
multi-function output(MO1) and set one of the multi-function input terminals as the normal exchange. For details, see
Chapter8 Applied Functions 8.1.24 By pass operation.

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
IN 65~72 Px Define 16 Exchange -
32 Relay 2 15 Inverter Line -
OUT
33 Q1 Define 16 Comm Line -
19 : Speed Search (speed search)
Active while the inverter operates for speed search. For details about the speed search, see Chapter8 Applied
Frequency
Q1
Operating
command




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-14
Function 8.1.19 Speed search operation.
20 : Step Pulse, 21 : Seq Pulse (auto sequence operation)
Active after the advance step of the auto sequence operation and a cycle of the operating sequence.
22 : Ready (stand by for operating command)
Active when the inverter is normally operating and ready to operate waiting for operating command from outside.
23 : Trv ACC, 24 : Trv DEC
Trv ACC produces signals when the accelerating frequency is reached during traverse operation.
Trv DEC produces signals when the decelerating frequency is reached.
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
APP 01 App Mode 1 Traverse -
25 : MMC
This is used for multi-motor control. This takes necessary actions for multi-motor control if you set the relay 1 and 2
and multi-function output(Q1) at MMC and APP-01 App Mode at No. 3 MMC.
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
APP 01 App Mode 3 MMC -
26 : Zspd Dect
This is used where the motor rotation speed is 0(rpm) during operation with the control mode set as vector.
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
DRV 09 Control Mode 4 Vector -
70
ZSD
Frequency
- 2.00 Hz
CON
71 ZSD Band (Hz) - 1.00 Hz
OUT 33 Q1 Define
2
5
Zspd Dect -










The relay operating on the basis of the revolution of the motor(encoder signal), error might occur at the time of
ON/OFF due to the encoder signal noise or filter time constant.
Revolution of Motor
Q1(Zspd Dect)
CON-70+CON_71
CON-70 - CON-71




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-15
27 : Torque Dect
Active if the torque, with the control mode set as sensorless or vector, is below the following levels.

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
DRV 09 Control Mode
3
~
4
Sensorless-1,
Sensorless-2,
Vector
-
59 TD Level - 100.0 %
OUT
60 TD Band - 5.0 %
28 : Timer Out
This is a function of activating the contact point output after a certain period of time using the multi-function terminal
block input.

Group
Code
No.
Function Display Initial Setting Unit
IN 65~72 Px Define 39 Timer In -
55 TimerOn Delay - 0.00 Sec
OUT
56 TimerOff Delay - 0.00 Sec

32 : ENC Tune
Produces warning by releasing contact point output in case of auto tuning if there is no encoder board or APO-01
Enc Opt Mode is not set as Feed-back.
33 : ENC Dir
Produces warning by releasing contact point output in case of auto tuning if the encoder has misdistribution although
the encoder board has been mounted and APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is set as Feed-back.





















Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-16
9.1.5 Failure status output by relay and Multi-function output terminal of terminal block

The inverter failure status can be output using the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(relay 1 and 2).

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
30 Trip Out Mode - 010
31 Relay 1 29 Trip -
32 Relay 2 14 Run -
33 Q1 Define 1 FDT-1 -
53 TripOut On Dly - 0.00 Sec
OUT
54 TripOut OffDly - 0.00 sec
*The inverter failure status can be output by added OUT 34~36 when extended I/O is mounted.

OUT-30 Trip Out Mode : Select the No. 28 Trip Mode at OUT-31~33 after selecting the terminal and relay to use for
failure output. The terminal and relay gets active in case of a failure of the inverter. The activeness can be set as
follows according to the type of the failure.

Setting Item Function
bit3 bit2 bit1 Bit 1 is on the right of the display.
9 Active in case of Low Voltage failure
9 Active in case of a failure due to other than low voltage
9 Active in case of auto re-start failure(PRT-08, PRT-09)

OUT-53 TripOut On Dly, OUT-54 TripOut OffDly : The failure relay or multi-function output becomes active after the
period of time set in OUT-53 in case of a failure. With reset input, the contact point gets OFF after the period of time
set in OUT-54.


















Chapter 9 Monitor Functions

9-17
9.1.6 Output terminal delay time and type of contact point

The output terminal of the terminal block and the operating time of the relay can be adjusted. ON and OFF delay
time can be separately set and you can choose between A contact point(Normal Open) and B contact point(Normal
Closed).

1) Output Terminal Delay Time
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
50 DO On Delay - 0.00 Sec
OUT
51 DO Off Delay - 0.00 Sec
Operates as follows if OUT-32 Relay 2 is set as No.14 Run and ON delay time(DO On Delay) and OFF delay
time(DO Off Delay) are set at 1 sec and 2 sec respectively.
The delay time set at OUT-50 and 51 apply to both the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(Relay 1,2)
except for failure mode of the multi-function output function.

2) Selection of Type of Output Signal Contact Point
Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
OUT 52 DO NC/NO Sel 000 bit

Selects the type of the contact point of the relay and multi-function output terminal. If extended I/O is mounted, the
selecting 3 of bits for contact point type of terminal block will be added. If the appropriate bit is set at 0, it operates as
A contact point(NO) and if at 1, it operates as B contact point(NC). From the right bit, Relay1, Relay 2, Q1, Relay 3,
Relay 4, Relay 5.

9.1.7 Operating time monitor

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
70 On-time - 0/01/01 00:00 min
71 Run-time - 0/01/01 00:00 min
72 Time Reset 0 No -
74 Fan time - 0/00/00 00:00 min
CNF
75
Fan Time
Reset
0 No -
CNF-70 On-time : time is accumulated with the inverter supplied with power. The information on the display is as
follows.
yy:mm(month):dd:hh:mm(minute)
0 / 00 / 00 00 : 00




Chapter 9 Monitor Functions




9-18
CNF-71 Run-time : cumulatively displays the voltage output time from the inverter with the operating command
input. The information on the display is the same as the cumulative time(On-time).
CNF-72 Time Reset : If set at No. 1 Yes, the power ON cumulative time(On-time) and operating cumulative
time(Run-time) are both deleted and displayed as 0/00/00 00:00.
CNF-74 Fan time : It displays total On-time of inverter cooling fan. Information on the displayer is same as the total
On-time.
CNF-75 Fan Time Reset : If you set Number 1 “Yes”, both the total On-time and the total Running time are deleted
and will be displayed in the form of 0/00/00 00:00

9.1.8 Selection of keypad Language

Group
Code
No.
Function
Display
Initial Setting Unit
CNF 01 Language Sel 0 English -

Selects the language on the keypad display.





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-1
10.1 Protective Functions

The protective functions provided by the SV-iS7 series are broadly divided into two types. One is for overheat and
damage and the other is for protecting the inverter itself and preventing malfunction.

10.1.1 Motor protection

1) Electronic thermal (Preventing motor overheat)
The electronic thermal function is automatically predicting temperature rises using the inverter output current without
a temperature sensor and providing protection suited to the inverse time thermal characteristic of the motor.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
40 ETH Trip Sel 0 Yes No/Yes -
41 Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
42 ETH 1min - 150 120~200 %
PRT
43 ETH Cont - 120 50~180 %

PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel : You can select the inverter operation in case of electronic thermal protective operation. On the
keypad, the failure status is displayed as E-Thermal.
0 : None
The electronic thermal function is not active.
1 : Free-Run (Free Run)
The inverter output is blocked and the motor does free run.
2 : Dec (Deceleration)
Stop after deceleration.

PRT-41 Motor Cooling : selects the operating method of the cooling fan mounted on the motor.
0 : Self-cool
The cooling fan connected to the motor axis, the cooling effect varies according to the rotation speed. Most general
induction motors have such a structure.
1 : Forced-cool
This structure supplies separate power to the cooling fan. This applies to the load that should operate for a long time
at a low speed and the motor exclusively for the inverter has such a structure.

PRT-42 ETH 1min : inputs the amount of current that can flow continuously for a minute on the basis of the rated
current (BAS-13) of the motor.





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-2
PRT-43 ETH Cont : sets the magnitude of the current at which the electronic thermal protective function becomes
active. Incessant operation is available without protection below the set value.









10.1.2 Overload warning and troubleshooting (Trip)
This function is for releasing an warning and troubleshooting when the motor is supplied with overload in comparison
with the rated current of the motor. You can set the current magnitude for the warning and troubleshooting.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display
Setting Range
Unit
04 Load Duty 1
Heavy Duty
- -
17 OL Warn Select 1
Yes
No/Yes -
18 OL Warn Level -
150
30~180 %
19 OL Warn Time -
10.0
0~30 sec
20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
21 OL Trip Level -
180
30~200 %
PRT
22 OL Trip Time -
60.0
0~60.0 sec
31 Relay 1 -
32 Relay 2 - OUT
33 Q1 Define
5 Over Load
-
-
PRT-04 Load Duty : Select a load classification

0 : Nomal Duty
Set VT (Variable Torque) loads such as fan or pump (Overload endurance : 1min at 110% of VT rated current)
1 : Heavy Duty
Set CT (Constant Torque) loads such as hoist or crane (Overload endurance : 1min at 150% CT rated current)
PRT-20 OL Trip Select : selects the inverter operation in case of an overload failure.
0 : None
No action is taken to protect from overload.
1 : Free-Run
Inverter output is blocked in case of an overload failure. The motor does free run.
2 : Dec
Decelerating stop in case of a failure.
Continuously permitted current[%]
100
95
65
20 60
Frequency[Hz]
PRT-41=0
PRT-41=1
Current[%]
PRT-42
60 Electronic thermal time(sec)
PRT-43





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-3
PRT-21 OL Trip Level, PRT-22 OL Trip Time : The inverter output is blocked or stops decelerating according to the
method set in PRT-17 if the current flowing in the motor is higher than the value set at OL Trip Level and the current
continues to flow for the OL Trip Time.

PRT-17 OL Warn Select : Warning signal is released using the multi-function output terminal of the terminal block or
relay when a load of OL warning level is supplied. It gets active if 1 Yes is selected and not active if 0 No is selected.

PRT-18 OL Warn Level, PRT-19 OL Warn Time : The multi-function output(Relay 1, Relay2, Q1) releases the
warning signal if the current flowing in the motor is higher than the OL Warn Level and the current continues to flow for
the OL Warn Time. The multi-function output terminal and relay release signals if Over Load is selected at OUT-31~33.
The output of the inverter is not blocked.








10.1.3 Stall prevention

In case of a stall due to overload, over current flows in the motor possibly causing overhead or damage to the motor of
interrupting the system process of the motor load side. The output frequency of the inverter is automatically controlled in
order to prevent the motor stall due to overload.

Group Code No. Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Range Unit
50 Stall Prevent - 111
-
Bit
51 Stall Freq 1 - 60.00
Starting Freq ~ Stall Freq 1
Hz
52 Stall Level 1 - 180
30~ 250
%
53 Stall Freq 2 - 60.00
Stall Freq 1~ Stall Freq 3
Hz
54 Stall Level 2 - 180
30~ 250
%
55 Stall Freq 3 - 60.00
Stall Freq 2~ Stall Freq 4
Hz
56 Stall Level 3 - 180
30~ 250
%
57 Stall Freq 4 - 60.00
Stall Freq 3~ Max. Freq
Hz
PRT
58 Stall Level 4 - 180
30~ 250
%
OUT 31~33 Relay1,2, Q1 9 Stall
-
-


Current
Multi-Function Output
PRT-18
t : PRT-19
t t





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-4
PRT-50 Stall Prevent : Stall preventing action can be selected during acceleration/deceleration or steady speed
operation. If the dot of the switch is above, the appropriate bit is set and it below, it does not operate.

Bit set(ON) : Bit setting canceled(OFF) :


Setting Items Function
bit3 bit2 bit1 Bit 1 is the first on the right of the display.
9 Selection of stall preventing function during accelerating operation
9 Selection of stall preventing function during steady speed operation
9 Selection of stall preventing function during decelerating operation

001 : Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Acceleration stops and deceleration begins if the inverter output current during acceleration is higher than the set stall
level(PRT-52, 54…). If the current stays at higher than the stall level, it decelerates to the start frequency(DRV-19
Start Freq). Acceleration resumes if the current goes down below the set level during the stall preventing operation.

010 : Stall Prevention during Steady Speed
The output frequency is automatically reduced for deceleration if current is higher than the set stall level during steady
speed operation, as the stall preventing function during acceleration. Acceleration resumes if the load current goes
down below the set level.

100 : Stall Prevention during Deceleration
The DC voltage of the DC power part is kept below a certain degree and deceleration is conducted to prevent over
voltage trip during deceleration. Therefore the decelerating time might be longer than the set time according to the
load.

Caution
Be careful because the decelerating time might be longer than the set time according to the load
if the stall preventing function is set during deceleration.
The actual accelerating time becomes longer than the set acceleration time because deceleration
is interrupted if stall preventing function gets active during acceleration.






Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-5













PRT-51 Stall Freq 1 ~ PRT-58 Stall Level 4 : You can set the stall prevention level for each frequency band according
to the load type. In addition, you can set the stall level above the base frequency. The lower limit and upper limit are set
in the number sequence of the stall frequency. For example, the setting range of Stall Freq2 is between Stall Freq
1(lower limit) and Stall Freq 3(upper limit).













Caution
The start timing is determined by the stall level 1 regardless of the other stall setting levels if the
stall preventing function gets active during starting.

Current
Frequency
Stall level
acceleration
Steady speed
DC voltage
Frequency
Deceleration
Q1
Q1
Output
Frequency
Stall level
Stall level1
Stall level2
Stall level3
Stall level4
Stall Frequency1
Stall Frequency 2
Stall Frequency 3
Stall Frequency 4





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-6
10.1.4 Motor overheat sensor input

The overhead preventing sensor(PT100, PTC), which is attached to the motor, is connected to the analog input terminal of the
terminal block so that the protective function gets active when the motor is overheated.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
34 Thermal-T Sel 1 Free-Run
-
-
35 Thermal In Src 1 V1
-
-
36 Thermal-T Lev - 50.0
0~ 100
%
PRT

37 Thermal-T Area 0 Low
Low/ High
-
07 AO2 Mode 14 Constant
-
-
08 AO2 Const 11 100%
0~ 100
%
OUT

65~75 Px Define 39 Thermal In
-
-
IN 87 DI NC/NO Sel - -
-
-

PRT-34 Thermal-T Sel : The inverter operating status is set when the motor is overheat. If you set at Free-Run(1), the
inverter output is blocked. If you set at decelerating stop(Dec(2)), the inverter carried out decelerating stop if the
overheat sensor detects overheat.

PRT-35 Thermal In Src : The terminal type is selected when the motor overheat sensor is connected to the
voltage(V1) or current(I1) input terminal of the inverter terminal block. The voltage(V2) or current(I2) terminals in the
extended I/O option card are also available. When you use the current input terminal I1 by supplying constant current
to the temperature sensor with the analog current output(AO2) terminal, the switch in the I/O card should be where the
PTC is. Before use, check whether the switch is where the PTC is.

1) Use of temperature sensor such as PTC etc. by using the analog input terminal

Using voltage(V1) input terminal Using current(I1) input terminal













AO2 V1 5G
PTC
I1
5G
Switch
PTC
Measure by letting certain amount of current flow through
the A02 terminal and converting it into voltage according to
the resistance value change





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-7
IN-65~75 Px Define, IN-82 DI NC/NO Sel : You can set the overheat trip function input by using the multi-function
terminal block input when using bimetal type sensor relay. Connect PTC between the terminal block to use and CM
and select No. 39 Thermal In among the function items. Select the type of contact point of the terminal used in IN-87
as 1(NC).

Using multi-function input terminal (Px)





PRT-36 Thermal-T Lev : sets the action level of the motor overheat sensor. In case of voltage input terminal(V1), the
maximum input voltage is 10V and in case of current(I1), the maximum input voltage is 5V. For example, if you use the
current input terminal and set the failure level at 50%, the protective function gets active when the voltage supplied to
the I1 terminal is below 2.5V. For how to operate it above 2.5V, see PRT-37 Thermal-T Area.
PRT-37 Thermal-T Area : If voltage lower than the thermal failure level(PRT-36) when you set at No. 0 Low, the
protective function becomes active and if No. 1 High, and if voltage higher than the failure level is input, the protective
function starts.

10.1.5 Inverter and sequence protection

1) Input/Output phase open Protection
The input phase open protection function is used to prevent over current through the inverter input terminal by input power phase
open. If phase open occurs to the connection between the motor and inverter output, motor stall might happen due to torque
insufficiency and that is why the output phase open protective function is used.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
05 Phase Loss Chk - 11 - Bit
PRT
06 IPO V Band - 40 1~100V V
You can select input and output phase open respectively. If the dot mark of the switch is at the top, it represents setting
completed and if at the bottom, it does not operate (top:1, bottom:0).


bit setting(ON) : bit setting canceled(OFF) :

I
Px
CM
PTC





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-8
Setting Items Functions
bit2 bit1 On the far right of the display is bit 1.
9 Selects output phase open protective action.
9 Selects input phase open protective action.
9 9 Selects input/output phase open protective action.

01 : Output phase open protection
In case of phase open of one or more phase of U, V, W of the inverter output terminal block, the inverter blocks output and
displays Out Phase Open.

10 : Input phase open protection
In case of phase open of one or more phase of R, S, T of the inverter input terminal block, the inverter blocks output and
displays In Phase Open on the keypad. Protection against input phase open starts only when a certain amount of
current(70~80% of the inverter rated output current) flows through the motor.
PRT-06 : IPO V Band : In case of phase open of one or more phase of the inverter inputs, the ripple of the DC link
voltage gets too large. The band of the ripple voltage is set. If the band of the ripple voltage set in this function code is
exceeded, input phase open trip occurs.


10.1.6 External failure signal

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
65~75 Px Define 4 External Trip -
IN
87 DI NC/NO Sel - 000 0000000 -

By using No. 4 External Trip(external failure) among the multi-function input terminal functions, you can stop the
inverter operating in case of a problem with the system.
IN-87 DI NC/NO Sel : You can select the type of the input contact point. If the Dot mark of the switch is at the bottom, it
is A contact point(Normal Open) and if at the top, it operates as B contact point(Normal Closed). The terminals of each
bit are as follows.

bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Multi—
function
terminal
P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

Note
Make sure that you set the motor rated current (BAS-13 Rated Curr) rightly. If the motor rated current being actually
used differs from the value set at BAS-13, phase open protection might fail to operate.





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-9











10.1.7 Inverter overload

If more current than the rated inverter current flows, the protective function starts to protect the inverter according to the inverse
time characteristic.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
OUT 31~33 Relay 1,2, Q1 6 IOL -
Warning signals can be produced in advance by using the multi-function output terminal before the inverter overload
protective function(IOLT) starts. The warning signal is released when 60% of the inverter overload protective
action(150%, 1 minute) lapses.

10.1.8 Keypad command loss

If a problem occurs with the communication during operation or the connection between the keypad and the main body with the
operating command method being keypad, the inverter action is selected.


Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
PRT 11 Lost KPD Mode 2 Free-Run -
OUT 31~33 Relay1,2, Q1 30 Lost Keypad -
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 Keypad -
CNF 22 Multi Key Sel 0 JOG Key -

PRT-11 Lost KPD Mode : Set the operating command(DRV-06) at No. 0 keypad, No. 2 Free-Run or No. 3 DEC. In
case of a problem with the communication between the keypad and main body, the output is blocked or the inverter
conducts a decelerating stop according to the set method. Set at No. 0 None, it does nothing in case of keypad
command loss. Set at No. 1 Warning, a warning signal is released in case of a failure if No. 29 Lost Keypad, of the
multi-function output or relay functions, is selected. In case of decelerating stop, the deceleration occurs for the time set
at PRT-07 Trip Dec Time. The protective action is also available for the keypad command loss during jog key operation
when CNF-22 is set as JOG Key.

P7(A contact point)
Frequency
Operating
command
P8(B contact point)
External Trip A contact point

External Trip B contact point





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-10
1) Speed Command Loss
If the speed is set by analog input from the terminal block, communication option or the keypad, the action of the inverter can be
selected when the speed command is lost due to severance of the signal line and so on.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run - -
13 Lost Cmd Time - 1.0 0.1~120 Sec
14 Lost Preset F - 0.00 Starting Freq~Max. Freq Hz
PRT
15 AI Lost Level 1 Half of X1 - -
OUT 31~33 Relay1,2, Q1 13 Lost Command - -

PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode : Selects the action of the inverter in case of speed command loss.
Setting Items Functions
0 None
The speed command is directly operating frequency without protective
actions.
1 Free-Run
The inverter blocks output with the motor in free run.
2 Dec
Decelerating stop for the time set at PRT-07
3 Hold Input
Continues to operate at the average value of the input for the last 10 seconds
until the moment that the speed command loss was detected.
4 Hold Output
Continues to operate at the average value of the output for the last 10
seconds until the moment that the speed command loss was detected.
5 Lost Preset
Operates at the frequency set at PRT-14 Lost Preset F.

PRT-15 AI Lost Level, PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time : sets the criterion voltage of speed command loss and judgment
time for analog input.
1 : Half of X1
If the input signals remain the same for the time set at PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time) with them being a half of
the minimum set value of the analog input set as the speed command(DRV-07 Freq Ref Src), the protective action begins. The
standard value is what is set at IN-08, IN-12, IN-23 of the terminal block input group. For example, if the speed command is set as
No. 2 V1 at DRV-07 Freq Ref Src and IN-06 V1 Polarity is set as No. 0 Unipolar, the protective action starts when the voltage input
is below a half of the value set at , IN-08 V1 Volt x1.
2 : Below X1
If a signal lower than the minimum set vale of the analog input set as the speed command continues for the time set in PRT-13
Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time), the protective action starts. The standard values are IN-08, IN-12 and IN-23 of the
terminal block input group.







Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-11
PRT-14 Lost Preset F : If the operating method(PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) is set as No. 5 Lost Preset in case of loss of
the speed command, the protective action starts setting the frequency for continuance of operation.
If PRT-15 AI Lost Level is set as No. 2 Below x1, PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode is set as No. 2 Dec and PRT-13 Lost Cmd
Time is set at 5 seconds, the operation is as follows.









In case of speed command loss due to the option card or built-in 485, the protective action becomes active when there
is no speed command for the time set at PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time).

10.1.9 Braking resistance use rate setting

The iS7 series is divided into a model in which the braking circuit is built and the other in which a separate external braking unit
should be installed. 0.75~22kW belongs to the former(braking resistance unit excluded) and for those above 30kW, you should
install a braking unit on the exterior of the inverter. Therefore the function of limiting the braking resistance use rate is necessary for
only models below 22kW.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED - 10 0~30% -
OUT 31~33 Relay1,2, Q1 31 DB Warn%ED - -
.
PRT-66 DB Warn %ED : sets the use rate of the resistance unit(%ED : Enshalt Daur). The resistance unit use rate
sets the ratio of operation of the braking resistance within an operating cycle. Continuous braking resistance is
available up to 15 seconds and after 15 seconds lapses, the inverter does not release any braking resistance use
signal.

Caution
Be careful when you use the braking resistance above the consumed electric
power(Watt) of the braking resistance unit because it might cause a fire due to
overheated resistance. If you use a resistance unit with a heat sensor, you can use the
sensor output as the external failure signal of the multi-function input terminal.

Frequency
Q1
Operating
command
Set
Frequency
5 seconds





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-12
Example 1) [%] 100
_ _ _ _
_
% ×
+ + +
=
stop T dec T steady T acc T
dec T
ED

Where,
T_acc : Lead time which accelerate to its set frequency
T_steady : Time which drive under constant speed at its set frequency
T_dec : Time which reduce to lower frequencies than its constant speed frequency
Or Time which comes to a stop from its constant speed frequency.
T_stop : Time which stay idle until another start





Example 2) [%] 100
2 _ _ 1 _ _
_
% ×
+ + +
=
steady T acc T steady T dec T
dec T
ED








10.1.10 Underload warning and failure

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
04 Load Duty 0 Normal Duty
-
-
25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes
No/ Yes
-
26 UL Warn Time - 10.0
0~ 600.0
sec
27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run
-
-
28 UL Trip Time - 30.0
0~ 600.0
sec
29 UL LF Level - 30
10~ 30
%
PRT
30 UL BF Level - 30
10~ 100
%

PRT-27 UL Trip Sel : sets the operating method of the inverter in case of a underload failure. If set as No. 1 F ree Run,
it holds output in a situation of a underload failure. If set as No. 2 Dec, it stops after deceleration.
PRT-25 UL Warn Sel : sets the underload warning. If set as No. 6 UnderLoad for multi-function output terminal at
OUT-30~32, signals are released in underload warning conditions.
PRT-29 UL LF Level, PRT-30 UL BF Level : sets the range necessary for underload detection according to the
underload type.
Frequency
T_acc
T_steady1
T_dec
T_steady2
Frequency
T_acc T_steady T_dec T_stop





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-13
Set the underload ratio at an operating frequency twice the motor rated slip speed(BAS-12 Rated Slip) at PRT-27.
Set the underload ratio at the base frequency (DRV-18 Base Freq) at PRT-28. If variable torque is necessary like a fan
or pump, set the PRT-04 Load Duty at No. 0 Normal Duty. In case of No. 1 Heavy Duty, it is set at the load for constant
torque such as elevating devices or a conveyer.




















PRT-26 UL Warn Time, PRT-28 UL Trip Time : The protective function becomes activated if the underload level
condition described above continues for the warning time or failure time. This function is not activated during the
energy saving operation (ADV-50 E-Save Mode).

10.1.11 Overspeed error

This function is activated when the control mode(DRV-09 Control Mode) is Vector.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
70 Over SPD Level - 60.00 Hz
PRT
72 Over SPD Time - 0.01 Sec

If the motor rotates faster than the overspeed frequency(Over SPD Freq) for overspeed detection time(Over SPD
Time), the inverter blocks output.



Rated slipX2
Base Frequency
PRT-30
PRT-29
Output Current
Output
Frequency
Set at normal load(Normal duty:VT)
PRT-30
Rated Current X2 Output Frequency
Set at heavy load(Heavy duty:CT)
Output Current





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-14
10.1.12 Speed variation failure
This function is active when the control mode(DRV-09 Control Mode) is Vector.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
73 Speed Dev Trip 1 Yes -
74 Speed Dev Band - 20.00 Hz PRT
75 Speed Dev Time - 1.0 Sec
The inverter output is blocked when the motor rotates for the Speed Dev Time set at faster than the speed
variation(Speed Dev Band).

10.1.13 Speed sensor error detection
It can be detected whether the encoder option card is mounted on the inverter main body. With the encoder mounted,
an error is detected too when the encoder signal of the line drive method is a single line. In case of an error, a
message reading Encoder Trip is displayed.

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
77 Enc Wire Check 1 Yes -
PRT
78 Enc Check Time - 1.0 sec

10.1.14 Fan failure detection

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
PRT 79 FAN Trip Mode 0 Trip -
31~32 Relay 1,2 8 FAN Trip -
OUT
33 Q1 Define
If the cooling fan failure mode is set at No. 0 Trip and if a problem with the cooling fan is detected, the inverter output is
blocked and the fan failure is displayed. If you set at No. 1 Warning and select No. 8 FAN Warning as the multi-function
output terminal or relay, the fan failure signal is released and operation continues, However, if the temperature within
the inverter rises above a certain degree, the output is blocked due to overheat of the cooling fan and so on.

10.1.15 Selection of action in case of low voltage failure

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
PRT 81 LVT Delay - 0.0 sec
31~32 Relay 1,2 11 Low Voltage -
OUT
33 Q1 Define






Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-15
If the internal DC voltage goes down below a certain degree because of the inverter input voltage being blocked, the
inverter blocks output and displays low voltage failure(Low Voltage). If PRT-81 LVT Delay time has been set, in case of
a low voltage failure, the inverter output is blocked and it is handled as a failure after the set period of time.
A warning signal of a low voltage failure can be released using multi-function output or relay. However, in case of a
warning signal, the LVT Delay time does not apply.

10.1.16 Output blocking by multi-function terminal
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 5 BX -

If you set the function of the multi-function output terminal at No. 2 BX and input it during operation, the inverter blocks
output and displays BX on the keypad display. The information on the frequency and current at the time of BX input is
to be monitored.
Acceleration resumes when the BX terminal is OFF with an operating command input.

10.1.17 How to terminate failure state
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
IN 65~75 Px Define 3 RST -

To terminate the failure state, press the Reset key on the keypad or use the multi-function input terminal. The failure
state is terminated if you input the terminal in case of a failiure after setting the function of the multi-function input
terminal at No. 2 RST.

10.1.18 Selection of action in case of option card failure
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
0 None
1 Free-Run PRT 80 Opt Trip Mode
2 Dec
1:Free-Run

If there is a problem with the communication between the option card and the main body of the inverter or the option
card is separated from during operation, select the inverter action status. In case of No. 1 Free-Run, the inverter output
is blocked and the failure information is displayed on the keypad. In case of No. 2 Dec, it decelerates at the value set in
PRT-07.










Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-16
10.1.19 Detection of motor not connected to inverter output terminal

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
31 No Motor Trip 0 None
-
-
32 No Motor Level 7 10
1~ 100
% PRT
33 No Motor Time 0.5
0.1~ 10.0
sec

If an operating command is given with the motor not connected to the output terminal of the inverter, No Motor Trip is
released to protect the system. No Motor Trip occurs when the inverter’s output current against the rated
current(BAS13) continues to be below PRT32(No Motor Level) for PRT33(No Motor Time).

Caution
If BAS-07 V/F Pattern is set at 1 Square, set the PRT-32 No Motor Level lower than the value at the time
of delivery from the plant. Otherwise, No Motor Trip might occur because of low output current in its
initial starting.







Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-17
10.1.20 Table of failures/warnings
Category Loader Display Description(Trip)
Over Current1 Trip from over current
Over Voltage Trip from over voltage
External Trip Trip from exterior signals
NTC Open Trip from temperature sensors
Over Current2 Trip from ARM short current
Fuse Open Fuse open trip
Option Trip-x Option Trip
Over Heat Trip from Over heat
Out Phase Open Trip from output phase open
In Phase Open Trip from input phase open
Inverter OLT Trip from inverter overloads
Over Speed Trip from over speed
Ground Trip Trip from ground fault
Encorder Trip Trip from speed sensor
Fan Trip Fan trip
ParaWrite Trip Trip from parameter write
E-Thermal Trip from motor overheat
Thermal Trip Trip from temperature
Pre-PID Fail Trip from Pre-PID failures
IO Board Trip Trip from IO Board connection
Speed Dev Trip Trip from speed deviation
Ext-Brake Trip from exterior brake
Latch Type
No Motor Trip Trip from no motor
Low Voltage Trip from low voltage
BX Emergency stop trip
Lost Command Trip from lost command
Level Type
Lost Keypad Trip from lost-keypad
EEP Err Exterior Memory Error
ADC Off Set Analog Input Error
Watch Dog-1
Watch Dog-2
CPU Watchdog trip
Heavy Failure
Damage to Hardware
Gate Pwr Loss DRV operation power error





Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10-18
Category Loader Display Description(Trip)
Over Load Motor overload trip
Under Load Motor under load trip
Lost Command Trip from lost command
Minor Failure
Lost Keypad Trip from lost keypad
Lost Command Warning from lost command
Over Load Warning from overload
Under Load Warning from under load
Inverter OLT Warning from inverter overload
Fan Warning Warning from fan operation
DB Warn %ED Warning for braking resistance %
Enc Conn Check Warning for encoder connection error
Enc Dir Check Warning for rotating direction error
Lost Keypad Warning for lost keypad
Warning
Retry Tr Tune Warning for Tr tuning retrial




Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-1
11.1 Communication Functions
11.1.1 Introduction
This chapter is to explain SV-iS7 inverter serial communication’s standard, installation, and program with PC or FA
computers. The communication method was designed to drive or monitor SV- iS7 inverter series in long distance
through PC or FA computers.

1) Benefits under the communication method
It is easy to apply inverters into automations in factories, because inverters can be driven or monitored according to
user’s programs.
* possible to monitor or modify parameters through computers
(example: T_acc, T_dec, frequency, and lost command)
* Interface configuration regarding to RS-485 standard:
1) Possible to execute communications between the inverter and computers by numerous companies
2) Capable of controlling up to 16 inverters at a time with single computer due to the multi-drop link
system
3) Interface for noise immunity environment

Inverters can communicate through RS-232/485 converters with computers that are embedded with the RS-232 card.
The standard and performance of converters may vary by manufactures, but share basic functions. More details about
standard and guideline are advised to follow under the manual provided by specific manufactures.

Caution
Must understand this manual thoroughly before installation and operation.
By violating this manual may result in serious injury or damages to other components.



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-2
11.1.2 Specifications
Category Specifications
Communication method RS-485
Transfer form Bus type, Multi drop Link System
Inverter series SV-iS7 series
Converter Embedded with RS-232
Number of connected
inverters
Max. 16
Transfer distance Max. 1,200m (recommend within 700m)
Recommended cable for
communication
0.75mm
2
(18AWG), Shield Type Twisted-Pare Wire


Installation form Connect to S+,S-, CM of the terminal block
Communication Power
Use the power that are insulated from the inner part of inverter as
communication power(supplied from inverter)
Communication Speed Select out of 1,200/2,400/9,600/19,200/38,400 bps
Control procedure Unsynchronized communication system
Communication system Half duplex system
Letter system Modbus-RTU: BI NARY LS Bus: ASCI I
Stop bit length 1 bit/2 bit
Sum check 2 byte
Parity check None/Even/Odd

11.1.3 Composition of communication system








RS-485 terminal connection: connect to S+, S- of the terminal block (see Chapter 4 Wiring)
Number of connectable inverters: up to 16 units
Number of extendable addresses(St ID):1~250
Length of effective communication lines: possibly 1200m in total. Keep it below 700m for stable communication.
Please use communication Repeater to enhance the communication speed if you have to use communication cable
above 1200m or to connect additional inverter. It is effective to reduce the noise influence from communication by
environment.
PC



I nverter.# 1




I nverter.# 2




I nverter.# n

RS-232/ 485
Converter



Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-3
11.1.4 Basic setting
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range Unit
01 Int485 St ID - 1 0~250 -
02 Int485 Proto 0 ModBus RTU 0~3 -
03 Int485 BaudR 3 9600 0~5 bps
04 Int485 Mode 0 D8 / PN / S1 0~3 -
COM
05 Resp Delay - 5 0~48 mSec
COM-01 Int485 St ID: sets inverter address No.
COM-02 Int485 Proto: The default protocol is Modbus-RTU(0) / LS INV 485(2).

No. Display Description
0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
1 - Reserved - Not used
2 LS INV 485 Protocol exclusive for LS Inverter
COM-03 Int485 BaudR: sets the communication speed at up to 38400bps.
COM-04 Int485 Mode: selects the communication frame composition and sets the data length, parity confirmation
method and number of stop bits.

No. Display Description
0 D8 / PN / S1 8 bit data / parity not checked / 1 stop bit
1 D8 / PN / S2 8 bit data / parity not checked / 2 stop bits
2 D8 / PE / S1 8 bit data / even No. parity check / 1 stop bit
3 D8 / PO / S1 8 bit data / odd No. parity check / 1 stop bit
COM-05 Resp Delay: the 485 communication(Modbus-RTU or LS INV 485) built in iS7 acts as a slave. The slave
iS7 responds to the Master after the period of time set in this function code. The communication between the master
and slave can be kept smooth by setting this function code properly in a system in which the master is not able to
deal with the quick response of the slave.







Master
Slave
Request Response
COM-5 Resp Delay
Request Response
COM-5 Resp Delay



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-4
11.1.5 Operating command and Frequency setting

Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
06 Cmd Source 3 Int 485 -
DRV
07 Freq Ref Src 7 Int 485 -
DRV-06, 07: If you select Int 485 No. 3 and 7 as above, you can set the operating command and frequency in the
parameter located in the common area by using the communication function.

11.1.6 Command loss protection
Judgment standard and Protection in case of a problem with the communication for a certain period of time
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run -
13 Lost Cmd Time - 1.0 Sec PRT
14 Lost Preset F - 0.00 Hz
OUT 31~33 Relay1,2, Q1 12 Lost Command -

PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode, PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time: selects the movement of the inverter when there is a
communication problem with PRT-13 for more than an hour.
Setting Item Function
0 None
Speed command is directly the operating frequency without
protective movements.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor continues free run.
2 Dec Decelerating stop
3 Hold Input
Continues to operate at the entered speed command until before
speed loss
4 Hold Output
Continues to operate at the operating frequency until before speed
loss
5 Lost Preset Operates at the frequency set at PRT-14 Lost Preset F.




Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-5
11.1.7 Virtual multi-function input setting
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
70~85 Virtual DI x 0 None -
COM
86 Virt DI Status - - -
COM-70~85: You can control multi-function input by communication (common area h0385: see Page 11-28). The
function which is set will be operated at each bit after set the function at COM-70~85 and then set the bit which is set
the function wanted to 1 at 0h0322. Note that it should be set DRV-06, CMD source as Run command source.
Ex) If you want to send Fx command with controlling virtual multi-function input command area by Int485, Fx function
is triggered if 0h0001 is inputted in the 0h0322 after COM-70 (Virtual DI 1) is set to FX. It works without relation to
IN65~75 (Px Define) and impossible to overlap setting. You can check the status of virtual multi-function input at
COM-86.

11.1.8 Caution in parameter setting for communication
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
0 -No- -
CNF 48
Parameter
Save 1 -Yes- -
Set the common area parameter or keypad parameter by communication, start the inverter. Turn off and then on the
inverter, and the setting state goes back to the state before it was set by communication.
If you select Yes at CNF48 Parameter Save, all the currently set values are saved in the inverter and will remain
unchanged even if you turn off and on the unit.
If you set 0h03E0 address at 0 by communication and then at 1, all the currently set parameter values are saved in
the inverter and will remain unchanged even if you turn off and on the unit. However, if it is set at 1 and you switch it to
0, it’s not effective.

11.1.9 Communication frame monitoring.
You can easily check the state (normal, CRC/Checksum error, other errors, etc.) of the communication frame being
received from the master by using the digital loader.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
90 Comm Mon Sel 0 Int 485 -
91 Rcv Frame Num - - -
92 Err Frame Num - - -
93 NAK Frame Num - - -
0 -No-
COM
94 Comm Update
1 -Yes-
-




Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-6
COM-90 Comm Mon Sel: selects the communication channel to monitor.
COM-91 Rcv Frame Num: counts the number of communication frames received normally from the master.
COM-92 Err Frame Num: counts the number of CRC errors in the case of Modbus-RTU and Checksum errors in
the case of LS Inv 485.
COM-93 NAK Frame Num: counts the number of errors (communication address error, data range error, writing
prohibition error) in the communication frames received from the master.
COM-94 Comm Update: reconnect the communication after change of the initial status parameter as
communication speed (baud rate) etc,.

11.1.10 Special communication area setting
Entire iS7 communication memory map
Communication Area Memory Map Description
Common iS5 compatible
communication area
0h0000 ~ 0h00FF Area compatible with iS5
0h0100 ~ 0h01FF
Area registered in COM31~38,
COM51~58
0h0200 ~ 0h023F Area registered in User Group
0h0240 ~ 0h027F Area registered in Macro Group
Parameter registration type area
0h0280 ~ 0h02FF Reserved
0h0300 ~ 0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0380 ~ 0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0 ~ 0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400 ~ 0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 DRV Grp
0h1200 BAS Grp
0h1300 ADV Grp
0h1400 CON Grp
0h1500 IN Grp
0h1600 OUT Grp
0h1700 COM Grp
0h1800 APP Grp
0h1900 AUT Grp
0h1A00 APO Grp
0h1B00 PRT Grp
Common iS7 communication
area
0h1C00 M2 Grp



Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-7
11.1.11 Parameter group for periodical data transmission
Communication is available using the address registered in the Communication Function Group (COM).
This is convenient for communication of multiple parameters with one communication frame at a time.
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
31~38 Para Status-h - - Hex
COM
51~58 Para Control-h - - Hex
Address 0h0100 ~ 0h0107: can only read the parameter registered in COM-31~38 Status Para-h
Address 0h0110 ~ 0h0117: can both read and write the parameter registered in COM-51~58 Control Para-h

Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0100 Status Parameter #1 Parameter value registered at COM-31
0h0101 Status Parameter #2 Parameter value registered at COM-32
0h0102 Status Parameter #3 Parameter value registered at COM-33
0h0103 Status Parameter #4 Parameter value registered at COM-34
0h0104 Status Parameter #5 Parameter value registered at COM-35
0h0105 Status Parameter #6 Parameter value registered at COM-36
0h0106 Status Parameter #7 Parameter value registered at COM-37
0h0107 Status Parameter #8 Parameter value registered at COM-38
0h0110 Control Parameter #1 Parameter value registered at COM-51
0h0111 Control Parameter #2 Parameter value registered at COM-52
0h0112 Control Parameter #3 Parameter value registered at COM-53
0h0113 Control Parameter #4 Parameter value registered at COM-54
0h0114 Control Parameter #5 Parameter value registered at COM-55
0h0115 Control Parameter #6 Parameter value registered at COM-56
0h0116 Control Parameter #7 Parameter value registered at COM-57
0h0117 Control Parameter #8 Parameter value registered at COM-58









Caution
When you register parameter in Control Parameter, set the operating speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381) and operating
command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters behind the most in the Para Control Frame. That is, register the operating speed
and operating command at the highest number of Para Control-h. (E.g. If Para Ctrl Num is 5, register the operating speed
with Para Control-4 and operating command with Para Control-5.



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-8
11.1.12 Parameter group for transmission of Macro Grp and User at U&M Mode
You can carry out communication using the USR Grp. and MAC Grp. addresses registered with U&M mode.
U&M>USR->1~64 User Grp. Para h: Writing/Reading of the USR parameter registered by the keypad is available
through the addresses 0h0200~0h023F.
U&M>MAC->1 ~ 64 Macro Grp. Para h: Writing/Reading of the Macro parameter set by the keypad is available
through 0h2400 ~ 0h2A3.

0h200 ~ 0h23F: Currently Registered User Grp Parameter
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0200 User Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->1
0h0201 User Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0h023E User Grp. Code 63 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->1
0h023F User Grp. Code 64 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->2

0x240 ~ 0x2A3: Currently Registered Macro Grp Parameter
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0240 Macro Grp. Code 1 U&M>MC->1 Parameter value registered at
0h0241 Macro Grp. Code 2 U&M>MC->1 Parameter value registered at
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0h02A2 Macro Grp. Code 98 U&M>MC->98 Parameter value registered at
0h02A3 Macro Grp. Code 99 U&M>MC->99 Parameter value registered at





Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-9
11.2 Communication Protocol
11.2.1 LS INV 485 protocol
Computer and other hosts are the master and the inverter is the slave.
The slave inverter responds to the master’s request for writing/reading.

Basic Form
Request::
ENQ
Address
No.
CMD Data SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte

Normal Response:
ACK
Address
No.
CMD Data SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n * 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte

Error response:
NAK
Address
No.
CMD Error Code SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte

Description:
z Requests begin with ENQ and end with EOT.
z Normal responses begin with ACK and ends with EOT.
z Error responses begin with NAK and ends with EOT.
z Address No. refers to the inverter No. and represented by 2 byte ASCII-HEX.
(ASCII-HEX: hex representation consisting of ‘0’ ~ ‘9’, ‘A’ ~ ‘F’)
z CMD: in capitals (IF Error if in small letters)

Character ASCII-HEX Command
‘R’ 52h Read
‘W’ 57h Write
‘X’ 58h Monitor registration request
‘Y’ 59h Monitor registration implementation

z Data: represented in ASCII-HEX
E.g.) If data value is 3,000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h → 30h 42h 42h 38h



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-10
z Error code: two can be displayed ASCII (20h ~ 7Fh)
z Transmission/reception buffer magnitude: transmission = 39 byte, reception = 44 byte
z Monitor registration buffer: 8 Word
z SUM: inspection by making sum to check communication errors
SUM = ASCII-HEX form of the 8 lowest bits of (Address No. + CMD + data)
E.g.) Request for reading of one of 3000 address numbers as follows
ENQ Address No. CMD
Address
No.
Number of
Addresses
SUM EOT
05h “01” “R” “3000” “1” “AC” 04h
1 2 1 4 1 2 1
SUM = ‘0’ + ‘1’ + ’R’ + ‘3’ + ‘0’ + ‘0’ + ‘0’ + ‘1’
= 05h + 30h + 31h + 52h + 33h + 30h + 30h + 30h + 31h
= 1A7h (Control value excluded: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc.)
z BroadCast Function
used to give command to all the inverters bound by the network at a time
Method: give command at Address No. 255
Action: Each inverter receives and replies to it though it’s not their own set address No.

11.2.2 Detailed reading protocol
Reading Request: Request for reading of n number of Word data consecutive from xxxx address No.
ENQ Address No. CMD
Address
No.
Number of
Addresses
SUM EOT
05h “01” ~ “1F” “R” “XXXX” “1” ~ “8” = n “XX” 04h
1 2 1 4 1 2 1
Total byte = 12, quotation marks refers to characters.
Normal Reading Response:
ACK Address No. CMD Data SUM EOT
06h “01” ~ “1F” “R” “XXXX” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 N * 4 2 1
Total byte = 7 * n * 4 = 39 at maximum
Error Reading Response:
NAK Address No. CMD Error code SUM EOT
15h “01” ~ “1F” “R” “**” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 2 1
Total byte = 9





Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-11
11.2.3 Detailed writing protocol
Writing Request:
ENQ Address No. CMD
Address
No.
Number of
Addresses
Data SUM EOT
05h “01” ~ “1F” “W” “XXXX” “1” ~ “8” = n “XXXX…” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 4 1 n * 4 2 1
Total byte = 12 + n * 4 = 44 at maximum

Normal Writing Response:
ACK Address No. CMD Data SUM EOT
06h “01” ~ “1F” “W” “XXXX…” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 n * 4 2 1
Total byte = 7 + n * 4 = 39 at maximum

Error Writing Response:
NAK Address No. CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h “01” ~ “1F” “W” “**” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 2 1
Total byte = 9
11.2.4 Monitor registration detailed protocol
1) Monitor registration
Monitor Registration Request:
Monitor registration is the function of periodically updating data with designating the data in advance which need monitoring
continuously.
Request for registration of n number of address No. (not necessarily consecutive)
ENQ Address No. CMD
Number of
Addresses
Address No. SUM EOT
05h “01” ~ “1F” “X” “1” ~ “8”=n “XXXX…” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 1 n * 4 2 1
Total byte = 8 + n * 4 = Maximum 40

Monitor Registration Normal Response:
ACK Address No. CMD SUM EOT
06h “01” ~ “1F” “X” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 1
Total byte = 7




Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-12
Monitor Registration Error Response:
NAK Address No. CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h “01” ~ “1F” “X” “**” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 2 1
Total byte = 9
2) Monitor implementation
Request for Monitor Registration Implementation:
Request for reading the data of the address No. registered by monitor registration request.

ENQ Address No. CMD SUM EOT
05h “01” ~ “1F” “Y” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 1
Total byte = 7
Monitor Registration Implementation Normal Response:
ACK Address No. CMD Data SUM EOT
06h “01” ~ “1F” “Y” “XXXX…” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 n * 4 2 1
Total byte= 7 + n * 4 = maximum 39
Monitor Registration Implementation Error Response:
NAK Address No. CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h “01” ~ “1F” “Y” “**” “XX” 04h
1 2 1 2 2 1
Total byte = 9

Error Code
Code Abbreviation Description
01:ILLEGAL FUNCTION IF
When slave cannot implement the received function. That
is, when there is no appropriate function.
02:ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS IA
When the received address is not valid in the slave.
Parameter address, not the address No.
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE ID When the received data is not valid in the slave.
21: WRITE MODE ERROR WM Read Only or change prohibition during operation.
22: FRAME ERROR FE When the frame size or internal num or sum is different.






Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-13
11.2.5 Modbus-RTU protocol
1. Function Code and Protocol (unit: byte)
Function Code #03 (Read Holding Register)
<Query> <Response>
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi (Register 40108)
# of Points Hi Data Lo (Register 40108)
# of Points Lo Data Hi (Register 40109)
CRC Lo Data Lo (Register 40109)
CRC Hi Data Hi (Register 40110)
Data Lo (Register 40110)
CRC Lo
CRC Hi

Function Code #04 (Read Input Register)
<Query> <Response>
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi (Register 30009)
# of Points Hi Data Lo (Register 30009)
# of Points Lo CRC Lo
CRC Lo CRC Hi
CRC Hi









Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-14
Function Code #06 (Preset Single Register)
<Query> <Response>
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Register Address Hi Register Address Hi
Register Address Lo Register Address Lo
Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi
Preset Data Lo Preset Data Lo
CRC Lo CRC Lo
CRC Hi CRC Hi

Function Code #16 (hex 0x10) (Preset Multiple Register)
<Query> <Response>
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo
# of Register Hi # of Register Hi
# of Register Lo # of Register Lo
Byte Count CRC Lo
Data Hi CRC Hi
Data Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi




Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-15

< Exception Code >
Code
01:ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02:ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY

<Response>
Field Name
Slave Address
Function(note 1)
Exception Code
CRC Lo
CRC Hi

note 1) Function value is the set value of the highest bit of the query function value.





Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-16
11.2.6 Existing iS5/iG5/ iG5A compatible common area parameter
Address Parameter Scale unit R/W Allotment for Bits
0h0000 Inverter model - - R B: iS7
0: 0.75kW 1: 1.5kW 2: 2.2kW
3: 3.7kW 4: 5.5kW 5: 7.5kW
6: 11kW 7: 15kW 8: 18.5kW
9: 22kW 10: 30kW 11: 37kW
12: 45kW 13: 55kW 14: 75kW
15: 90kW 16: 110kW 17: 132kW
18: 160kW 19: 200kW 20: 220kW
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R
21: 280kW 22: 375kW 65535: 0.4kW
0: 220V class
0h0002 Inverter input voltage - - R
1: 400V class
(example) 0x0100: Version 1.00
0h0003 Version - - R
0x0101: Version 1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R/W
0h0005 Command frequency 0.01 Hz R/W
B15 Reserved
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
0: Keypad Freq 1: Keypad Torq
2~16: Terminal block sequential
17: Up 18: Down 19: STEADY
20: AUTO-A 21: AUTO-B 22: V1 23: 1
24: V2 25: I2 26: Reserved 27: Built-in485
28: Communication option 29: PLC option
30: JOG 31: PID
B8
B7
R
B6
0: Keypad 1: FX/RX-1 2: FX/RX-2
3: Built-in 485 4: Communication option
5: PLC option
B5 Reserved
B4 Emergency stop
B3 W: Trip reset (0->1) R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R)
B1 Forward operation (F)
0h0006
Operating command
(option)
* see additional
description
- -
R/W
B0 Stop (S)
0h0007 accelerating time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0008 decelerating time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0009 output current 0.1 A R -
0h000A output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC Link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D output power 0.1 kW R -
B15 0: Remote, 1: Keypad Local 0h000E status of Inverter - - -
B14 1: Frequency command by comm. (Built-in type, Option)



Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-17
Address Parameter Scale unit R/W Allotment for Bits
B13 1: Run command by comm. (Built-in type, Option)
B12 Reverse direction run command
B11 Forward direction run command
B10 Brake open signal
B9 Jog mode
B8 Stop
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
B3
Operates according to the set value of Fault (Trip)
*PRT-30 Trip Out Mode
B2 Reverse operation
B1 Forward operation
B0 Stop
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Level Type Trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
0h000F Trip information - - R
B0 Latch Type Trip
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 P11 (extended I/O)
B9 P10 (extended I/O)
B8 P9 (extended I/O)
B7 P8
B6 P7
0h0010 Input terminal
information
- - R
B5 P6



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-18
Address Parameter Scale unit R/W Allotment for Bits
B4 P5
B3 P4
B2 P3
B1 P2
B0 P1
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Relay 5(extended I/O)
B4 Relay 4(extended I/O)
B3 Relay 3(extended I/O)
B2 Q1
B1 Relay 2
0h0011
output terminal
information
- - R
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.01 % R V1 voltage input
0h0013 V2 0.01 % R V2 voltage input(extended I/O)
0h0014 I1 0.01 % R I1 current input
0h0015 Motor rotation speed 1 rpm R Current motor rotation speed displayed
0h0016
~0h0019
Reserved - - - -
0h001A Hz/rpm selection - - R
0: Hz unit
1: rpm unit
0h001B Motor poles displayed - - R Motor poles displayed



Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-19
11.2.7 iS7 extended common area parameter
1) Inverter Monitoring Area Parameter (Reading only)
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
0h0300 Inverter model - - iS7: 000Bh
0.75kW: 3200h
0h0301 Inverter capacity - -
1.5kW: 4015h, 2.2kW: 4022h, 3.7kW: 4037h,
5.5kW: 4055h, 7.5kW: 4075h, 11kW: 40B0h
15kW: 40F0h, 18.5kW: 4125h, 22kW: 4160h,
30kW: 41E0h, 37kW: 4250h, 45kW: 42D0h
55kW: 4370h, 75kW: 44B0h, 90kW: 45A0h
110kW: 46E0h, 132kW: 4840h, 160kW: 4A00h
185kW: 4B90h
200V single phase open air cooling: 0220h
200V 3 phase open air cooling: 0230h
200V single phase forced cooling: 0221h
200V 3 phase forced cooling: 0231h
400V single open air cooling: 0420h
400V 3 phase open air cooling: 0430h
400V single phase forced cooling: 0421h
0h0302
Inverter input voltage / power
supply type
(single phase, 3 phase)
/ cooling method
- -
400V 3 phase forced cooling: 0431h
(example) 0x0100: Version 1.00
0h0303 Inverter S/W version - -
0x0101: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
B15
B14
B13
B12
0: normal status
4: Warning status
8: Fault status (operates according to set value of
PRT-30 Trip Out Mode)
B11
B10
B9
B8
-
B7
B6
B5
B4
1: speed search 2:accelerating
3:steady speed 4:decelerating
5:decelerating stop 6:H/W OCS
7:S/W OCS 8:dwell operating
B3
B2
B1
0h0305 Inverter operating status - -
B0
0: stop
1: forward operating
2: reverse operating
3: DC operating(0 speed control)





Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-20

Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
Run command source
0: Keypad 1: Communication option
2:App/PLC 3. Built-in 485
4: Terminal Block 5:reserved
6:Auto 1 7:Auto 2
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
0h0306
Inverter run frequency command
source
- -
B0
Frequency command source
0: Keypad speed 1: Keypad torque
2~4:Up/Down run speed
5: V1 6: I1 7: V2 8: I2 9: Pulse
10: Built-in485 11: Communication option
12: App(PLC) 13: Jog 14: PID
15~22: Auto Step
25~39: Multi-step speed frequency
0h0307 Keypad S/W version (E.g) 0x0100: Version 1.00
0h0308 Keypad Title version 0x0101: Version 1.01
0h0309
~0h30F
reserved
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
0h0312 Output RPM 0 RPM -
0h0313 Motor feedback speed 0 RPM -32768rpm~32767rpm (Having a polarity.)
0h0314 Output voltage 0.1 V -
0h0315 DC Link voltage 0.1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0317 Output Torque 0.1 % -
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % -
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
0h031A Number of No.1 motor display - - Number of No.1 motor display
0h031B Number of No.2 motor display - - Number of No.2 motor display
0h031C Number of selected motor display - - Number of selected motor display
0h031D
Selection among Hz/rpm - -
0: Hz unit
1: rpm unit
0h031E
~0h031F
Reserved - -






Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-21
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 P11 (Extended I/O)
B9 P10 (Extended I/O)
B8 P9 (Extended I/O)
B7 P8 (Basic I/O)
B6 P7 (Basic I/O)
B5 P6 (Basic I/O)
B4 P5 (Basic I/O)
B3 P4 (Basic I/O)
B2 P3 (Basic I/O)
B1 P2 (Basic I/O)
0h0320 Digital input information
B0 P1 (Basic I/O)
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Relay 5 (Extended I/O)
B4 Relay 4 (Extended I/O)
B3 Relay 3 (Extended I/O)
B2 Q1 (Basic I/O)
B1 Relay 2 (Basic I/O)
0h0321 Digital output information - -
B0 Relay 1 (Basic I/O)











Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-22
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
B15 Virtual DI 16 (COM85)
B14 Virtual DI 15 (COM84)
B13 Virtual DI 14 (COM83)
B12 Virtual DI 13 (COM82)
B11 Virtual DI 12 (COM81)
BI0 Virtual DI 11 (COM80)
B9 Virtual DI 10 (COM79)
B8 Virtual DI 9 (COM78)
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM75)
B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM74)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM71)
0h0322 Virtual digital input information - -
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM70)
0h0323 Selected motor display - -
0: No.1 motor / 1: No.2 motor
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input1 (Basic I/O)
0h0325 AI2 0.01 % Analog input2 (Basic I/O)
0h0326 AI3 0.01 % Analog input3 (Extended I/O)
0h0327 AI4 0.01 % Analog input4 (Extended I/O)
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output1 (Basic I/O)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output2 (Basic I/O)
0h032A AO3 0.01 % Analog output3 (Extended I/O)
0h032B AO4 0.01 % Analog output4 (Extended I/O)
0h032C Reserved - -
-
0h032D Reserved - -
-
0h032E Reserved - -
-
0h032F Reserved
- -
-













Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-23
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
BI5 Fuse Open Trip
BI4 Overheat Trip
BI3 Arm Short
BI2 External Trip
BI1 Overvoltage Trip
BI0 Overcurrent Trip
B9 NTC Trip
B8 Overspeed Deviation
B7 Overspeed
B6 Input open-phase trip
B5 Output open-phase trip
B4 Ground Fault Trip
B3 E-Thermal Trip
B2 Inverter Overload Trip
B1 Underload Trip
0h0330 Latch type trip information-1 - -
B0 Overload Trip
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3
Inverter output cutoff by terminal block input on
Safety Option (applied to above 90kW)
BI2 Slot3 option board contact defectiveness
BI1 Slot2 option board contact defectiveness
BI0 Slot1 option board contact defectiveness
B9 No MotorTrip
B8 External Brake Trip
B7 Basic IO board contact defectiveness
B6 Pre PID Fail
B5 Error on Parameter Write
B4 Reserved
B3 FAN Trip
B2 PTC (Thermal sensor) Trip
B1 Encoder Error Trip
0h0331 Latch type trip information-2 - -
B0 MC Fail Trip










Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-24
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Keypad Lost Command
B2 Lost Command
B1 LV
0h0332 Level type trip information - -
B0 BX
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Gate Drive Power Loss
B3 Watchdog-2 error
B2 Watchdog-1 error
B1 EEPROM error
0h0333

H/W Diagnosis Trip information - -
B0 ADC error











Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-25
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Auto Tuning fail
B8 Keypad Lost
B7 Encoder miss-wiring
B6 Encoder miss-installation
B5 DB
B4 FAN operation
B3 Lost command
B2 Inverter Overload
B1 Underload
0h0334 Warning information - -
B0 Overload
0h0335~
0h033F
Reserved - - -
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day Total number date of inverter power On
0h0341 On Time minute 0 Min Total minute except for total date of inverter On Time
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day Total number day of inverter run
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min Total minute except for total day of Run Time
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day Total day of cooling fan run
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min Total minute except for total day of Fan time
0h0346 Reserved - - -
0h0347 Reserved - - -
0h0348 Reserved - - -
0h0349 Reserved - - -
0h034A Option 1 - -
0h034B Option 2 - -
0h034C Option 3
0: None 1: Reserved
2: Reserved 3: Profibus,
4: Reserved 5: Reserved
6: Reserved 7: RNet,
8: Reserved 9: Reserved
10: PLC,
20: External IO-1
23: Encorder



Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-26
2) Inverter Control Area Parameter (Reading and Writing Available)
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz command frequency setting
0h0381 RPM command 1 rpm command RPM setting
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 0Î1: free run stop
B2 0Î1: trip reset
B1 0:reverse command 1:forward command
B0 0:stop command 1:run command
0h0382 Operating command - -
Ex) forward operatingcommand:0003h,
reverse operatingcommand:0001h
0h0383 Accelerating time 0.1 sec accelerating time setting
0h0384 Decelerating timed 0.1 sec decelerating time setting
BI5 Virtual DI 16 (COM85)
BI4 Virtual DI 15 (COM84)
BI3 Virtual DI 14 (COM83)
BI2 Virtual DI 13 (COM82)
BI1 Virtual DI 12 (COM81)
BI0 Virtual DI 11 (COM80)
B9 Virtual DI 10 (COM79)
B8 Virtual DI 9 (COM78)
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM75)
B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM74)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM71)
0h0385
Virtual digital
input control
(0:Off, 1:On)
- -
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM70)
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Q4 (extended I/O, OUT36:None)
B4 Q3 (extended I/O, OUT35:None)
0h0386 Digital output
control
(0:Off, 1:On)
- -
B3 Q2 (extended I/O, OUT34:None)



Chapter 11 Communication Function




11-27
Address Parameter Scale unit Allotment for Bits
B2 Q1 (basic I/O, OUT33:None)
B1 Relay2 (basic I/O, OUT32:None)
B0 Relay1 (basic I/O, OUT31:None)
0h0387 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference command released
0h0389 PID feedback value 0.1 % PID feedback value
0h038A
~0h038F
Reserved - - -
0h0390 Torque Ref 0.1 % torque command
0h0391 Fwd Pos Torque Limit 0.1 % forward motor ring torque limit
0h0392 Fwd Neg Torque Limit 0.1 % forward regenerative torque limit
0h0393 Rev Pos Torque Limit 0.1 % reverse motor ring torque limit
0h0394 Rev Neg Torque Limit 0.1 % reverse regenerative torque limit
0h0395 Torque Bias 0.1 % torque Bias
0h0395
~0h399
Reserved - - -
0h039A Anytime Para - - CNF-20 value setting (see page 13-40)
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - - CNF-21 value setting (see page 13-40)
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - - CNF-22 value setting (see page 13-40)
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - - CNF-23 value setting (see page 13-40)

3) Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter(Reading and Writing Available)
In this area, if the parameter is set, it is not only reflected in the inverter but saved. Parameters of other areas, if set by
communication, are reflected in the inverter but not saved. If you turn off the inverter and turn it on again, the values set
by communication are all deleted and the pre-setting values are saved. Therefore you should save the parameter before
turning off the inverter after setting through communication. However, in this area, set parameter values are directly saved
in the inverter without the need to save the parameter values.














Chapter 11 Communication Function



11-28
Address Parameter Scale unit
Shift
during
operation
Function Page
0h03E0
note1)
Parameter saving - - X 0: No 1:Yes 8-44
0h03E1
note1)
Monitor mode initialization - - O 0: No 1:Yes 8-45
0h03E2
note1)
Parameter initialization - - X
0: No 1: All Grp
2: Drv Grp 3:BAS Grp
4: ADV Grp 5:CON Grp
6:IN Grp 7:OUT Grp
8: COM Grp 9:APP Grp
10:AUT Grp 11:APO Grp
12:PRT Grp 13:M2 Grp
*no setting during trip
8-45
0h03E3 Changed parameter displayed - - O 0: No 1:Yes 8-46
0h03E4 Macro function item - - X
0:None
1: Draw App
2: Traverse
8-48
0h03E5
note1)
All history of failure deleted - - O 0: No 1:Yes
0h03E6
note1)
User registration code deleted - - O 0: No 1:Yes 8-48
writing: 0 ~ 9999
0h03E7
note 2)
Parameter mode hidden 0 Hex O
reading: 0: Unlock 1:Lock
8-47
writing: 0 ~ 9999
0h03E8
note 2)
Parameter editing locked 0 Hex O
reading: 0: Unlock 1:Lock
8-47
0h03E9 Initial parameter easy setting - - O 0: No 1:Yes 8-48
0h03EA
note1)
Consumed power initialization - - O 0: No 1:Yes 9-19
0h03EB
note1)

Cumulative inverter operating time
initialization
- - O 0: No 1:Yes 9-19
0h03EC
note1)

Cumulative cooling fan operating
time initialization
- - O 0: No 1:Yes 8-49
note1) Be careful in setting parameters. Set parameters at 0 through communication and then set them at other values. If
you input a value other than 0 while it is set at a value other than 0, an error message will respond.
If you read this parameter through communication, you will know the previously set values.
**The time required might be longer because the data is saved in the inverter, thus possibly interrupting the communication.
Be careful when setting.
note 2) The parameters that input password. If you input password, the Lock status becomes Unlock status and the
Unlock status becomes Lock status. If you consecutively input the same password, only the first parameter is
implemented and the following values are not reflected. Therefore if you want to input the same value for another time,
change it to another value and input the previous value again.
E.g.) Follow the order below if you want to input 244 twice.
244 -> 0 -> 244





Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12-1
12.1 Checking and Troubleshooting
12.1.1 Protective functions

1) Protection from output current and input voltage
Type Category Details Remark
Over Load Latch
A failure occurs when you select the motor overload failure and the load
exceeds the set degree. Operation can resume after PRT-20 is set at values
other than 0.

Under Load Latch
A failure occurs when you select the underload protection function and the
motor load is within the set underload level. Operation can resume after PRT-
27 is set at values other than 0.

Over Current1 Latch A failure occurs when the inverter output exceeds 200% of the rated current.
Over Voltage Latch A failure occurs when the DC circuit voltage exceeds the prescribed amount.
Low Voltage Level
A failure occurs when the DC circuit voltage goes down below the prescribed
degree.

Ground Trip Latch
A failure occurs when current above the prescribed amount flows due to
earth in the inverter output part. The earth causing current varies according to
the capacity of the inverter.

E-Thermal Latch
A failure occurs in order to prevent overheat during overload operation
according to the inverse time thermal characteristic. Operation resumes if you
set PRT-40 at values other than 0.

Out Phase Open Latch
A failure occurs when one of the three phases output of the inverter is phase
open. Operation resumes if you set PRT-05 bit 1 at 1.

In Phase Open Latch
A failure occurs when one of the three phases input of the inverter is phase
open. Operation resumes if you set PRT-05 bit 2 at 1.

Inverter OLT Latch
This is the inverse time thermal characteristic protection against heat
between 150% 1 minute to 200% 0.5 second on the basis of the inverter
rated current. 200% 0.5 second might differ according to the inverter capacity.


2) Protection by internal circuit abnormality or external signals
Type Category Details Remark
Fuse Open Latch
A failure occurs when the inverter DC fuse responds to over current only
above 30kW.

Over Heat Latch
A failure occurs when the temperature of the inverter cooling fan rises
over the prescribed degree.

Over Current2 Latch
A failure occurs when the DC part in the inverter detects short circuit
current.

External Trip Latch
This is an external failure signal by function selection of the multi-function
terminal. Of the IN65~75 functions, No.3 External Trip is selected.

BX Level
The inverter output is blocked by function selection of the multi-function
terminal. Of the IN65~75 functions, No.4 BX is selected.

H/W-Diag Fatal
Trouble with the memory device within the inverter(EPP Rom), analog-
digital switch output(ADC Off Set) or CPU malfunction(Watch Dog-1,






Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12- 2
Type Category Details Remark
Watch Dog-2).
NTC Open Latch
A failure occurs when abnormality is detected with the temperature
detecting sensor of the power switch(IGBT).

Fan Trip Latch
A failure occurs when abnormality is detected with the cooling fan.
Operation resumes if PRT-79 is set at 0.
Only applied to
below 22 kW
IP54 FAN Trip Latch Detected when IP54 product has a fault of internal circulation at FAN.
Only applied to
IP54 product
toPTC Trip Latch
A failure occurs when resistance goes beyond the prescribed value after
the external temperature sensor is connected to the terminal block.
Operation resumes if PRT-34 is set at values other than 0.

ParaWrite Trip Latch
Trouble during parameter writing with the inverter’s main body from the
keypad.

Over Speed Trip Latch
A failure occurs when the motor speed goes up above the overspeed
detection level. The detection level is set in PRT-70.

Dev Speed Trip Latch
A failure occurs when the speed that got feedback from the encoder
goes up above the set variation value. Operation resumes if PRT-73 is
set at 1.

Encoder Trip Latch
A failure occurs when PRT-77 Enc Wire Check is set at 1 and
abnormality is detected for the set period of time.

Pre-PID Fail Latch
A failure occurs when the control amount(PID feedback) is continuously
input below the set value during Pre-PID operation by the function
setting between APP-34 ~36, which is regarded as an abnormal state of
the system.


3) Protection by KEYPAD and option
Type Category Details Remark
Lost Keypad Level
A failure occurs when operating commands come from the keypad or there is any
problem with the communication between the keypad and inverter’s main body in the
Keypad JOG Mode. Operation resumes if PRT-11 is set at values other than 0.
(occurs 2 seconds after the communication is interrupted)

Lost Command Level
When there is a problem with the command if frequency or operating commands are
given by the terminal block or communication command other than the keypad.
Operation resumes if PRT-12 is set at values other than 0.

Option Trip-1 Level
When the option gets out of the option slot No. 1 after it was inserted during power
supply or when communication is not available with the inverter

Option Trip-2 Level
When the option gets out of the option slot No. 2 after it was inserted during power
supply or when communication is not available with the inverter

Option Trip-3 Level
When the option gets out of the option slot No. 3 after it was inserted during power
supply or when communication is not available with the inverter

Note) Level : automatically terminates when the failure is solved. This is not saved in the failure history.
Latch : terminates when the reset signals are input after the failure is solved.
Fatal : The failure state terminates when you cut the power supply to the inverter and then supply power again with the internal
charging lamp is turned off after the failure is solved.





Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12-3
12.1.2 Alarm functions
Type Description
Over Load
An alarm signal is released in case of overload to the motor. Operation resumes if you set PRT-17 at 1. If
signals are necessary for the output contact point, No. 4 overload is selected among the functions of
OUT31~33.
Under Load
Set PRT-25 at 1 if an alarm is necessary for an underload situation. As the output signal, No. 6 Under Load
is selected among the functions of OUT31~33.
Inv Over Load
An alarm is released if time equal to 60% of the level at which the inverter IOLT functions is accumulated.
As the output signal, No. 5 IOL is selected among the functions of OUT31~33.
Lost Command
An alarm signal can be released as well when PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode is 0. The alarm is released in a
certain condition between PRT13~15. As the output signal, No. 12 Lost Command is selected among the
functions of OUT31~33.
Fan Warning
An alarm is released if a problem is detected with the cooling fan with PRT-79 FAN Trip Mode set at 1. As
the output signal, No.8 Fan Warning is selected among the functions of OUT31~33.
DB Warn %ED
An alarm is released if the DB resistance consumption rate is above the prescribed degree. The detection
level is set at PRT-66.
Enc Conn Check
An alarm is signified if No. 3 Enc Test is selected from BAS-20 Auto Tuning and no signal is input during the
encoder test. Signals are released if ENC Tune is set among the functions of OUT31~33.
Enc Dir Check
An alarm is signified if No. 3 Enc Test is selected from BAS-20 Auto Tuning and the setting is wrongly
changed between encoder phase A and B during the encoder test or the rotation direction is reverse.
Signals are released if ENC Dir is set among the functions of OUT31~33.
Lost Keypad
An alarm is signified if the operating command is keypad or any problem is detected with the
communication between the keypad and the main body of the inverter in Keypad JOG Mode with PRT-11
Lost KPD Mode set 0. As the output signal, No. 29 Lost Keypad is selected among the functions of
OUT31~33.






Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12- 4
12.1.3 Troubleshooting
Type Cause of Trouble Solution
Over Load
„ The load is higher than the rated load of the
motor.

„ The load set at the overload failure level (PRT-
21) is small.
☞ Raise the capacity of the motor and inverter.

☞ Increase the set value.

Under Load
„ There is a problem with the connection
between the motor and load.

„ The underload level(PRT-29,30) is lower than
the minimum system load.

☞ Raise the capacity of the motor and inverter.

☞ Increase the set value.


Over Current1

„ Acc/Dec time is too short compared with the
inertia of the load(GD2).

„ The load of the inverter is bigger than its rated
load.

„ Inverter output is ON during idling of the motor.

„ The braking of the motor is too fast.

☞ Raise the Acc/Dec time.


☞ Replace the inverter for one with bigger capacity.

☞ Operate the inverter after the motor stops or use
speed search(CON-60).

☞ Check the machine brake.
Over Voltage
„ Decelerating time is too short compared with
the inertia of the load(GD2).

„ Regenerative load is located at the inverter
output.

„ The supply voltage is too high.


☞ Set the decelerating time higher.


☞ Use a braking resistance device.


☞ Check whether the supply voltage is above the
prescribed degree.

Low Voltage

„ The supply voltage is too low.

„ Load larger than the power supply capacity is
connected(a welder or motor direct on line)

„ Nonconformity of the electronic contactor, etc.
on the power supply side.

☞ Check whether the supply voltage is below the
prescribed degree.

☞ Raise the power supply capacity.


☞ Replace the electronic contactor.

Ground Trip

„ Earth of the outlet cord of the inverter

„ Deterioration of the insulation of the motor

☞ Check the output terminal distribution of the
inverter.

☞ Replace the motor.





Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12-5

Type Cause of Trouble Solution
E-Thermal
„ The motor is overheated.
„ The load of the inverter is bigger than its
rated load.
„ The electronic thermal level is set too low.
„ The inverter has operated for a long time at
a low speed.
☞ Reduce the load or frequency.
☞ Raise the capacity of the inverter.

☞ Set the electronic thermal level properly.
☞ Replace the motor for one that can separately
supply power to the cooling fan.
Out Phase Open
„ Contact trouble of the electronic contactor of
the output side.
„ Bad distribution of output
☞ Check the electronic contactor of the output
side of the inverter.
☞ Check the output distribution.
In Phase Open
„ Contact trouble of the electronic contactor of
the input side
„ Bad distribution of input
„ The DC condenser of the inverter needs
replacing.
☞ Check the electronic contactor of the input
side of the inverter.
☞ Check the input distribution.
☞ You should replace the DC condenser of the
inverter. Get customer service from an agency.
Inverter OLT
„ The load of the inverter is bigger than it’s the
inverter rating.
„ Torque boost is too high.
☞ Raise the capacity of the inverter and motor.

☞ Reduce the torque boost amount.
Over Heat
„ There is a problem with the cooling system.

„ The inverter has been used longer than the
replacement cycle of the cooling fan.
„ The surrounding temperature is too high.
☞ Check whether there is any foreign substance
in the vent, air duct or outlet.
☞ Replace the inverter cooling fan.

☞ Keep the temperature around the inverter
below 50°C.
Over Current2
„ Earth of the output cord of the inverter

„ There is a problem with the inverter power
switch(IGBT).

☞ Check the output terminal distribution of the
inverter.
☞ Inverter operation is impossible. Contact a
near service provider.

NTC Open
„ The surrounding temperature is out of the
prescribed range.
„ There is a problem with the internal
temperature sensor of the inverter.
☞ Keep the temperature around the inverter
below the prescribed degree.
☞ Contact a near service provider.

FAN Trip
„ There is foreign substance in the inverter
vent where the fan is.
„ The cooling fan of the inverter needs
replacing.
☞ Check the vent or air outlet.

☞ Replace the cooling fan of the inverter.
IP54 FAN Trip
„ Internal fan connector is not connected.
„ Internal fan PCB board’s power connector is
not connected.
„ Inverter cooling fan become to change
period time.
☞Connect internal Fan connector.
☞Internal fan PCB board’s power connector is
connected.
☞Inverter cooling fan have to changed.










Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12- 6
12.1.4 Replacement of cooling fan
1) Replacement steps of the product below 7.5kW
Push the bracket on the bottom to the arrow direction and pull it forward. Disconnect the connector of the fan, then
you can replace the fan.

<below 3.7kW> <below 7.5 kW>

2) Replacement steps of product of 11~15kW 200V/400V, 18.5~22 kW 400V
Release the volts under the In-Out put terminals and disconnect the connector of the fan, then you can replace the
fan.







Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12-7

3) Replacement steps of product of 18.5~22 kW 200V, 30~75kW 400V (Check capacity.)
Release the volts upper of the product and disconnect the connector of the fan, then you can replace the fan.






Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12- 8
12.1.5 Daily and regular checkup list
Checkup cycle
Regular
(Year)
Checkup
Part
Checkup
items
Check up
daily
1 2
Way of Checkup Criterion decision
Counter
-plan
environment Check:
temperature,umidity,
dust, ETC.
Ο See warning No freezing under
temperature of
-10~+40.

No dew under humidity
of 50%
thermometer,
hygrometer,
recorder
Entire devices Is there any abnormal
vibration or sound?
Ο
By seeing or hearing If no matter
Total
Power Source
Voltage
Normal or not of the
Voltage of main
circuit?
Ο
Voltage check
among the terminal
R, S, T phase of the
inverter
Digital
multimeter/
tester
Total
1) Megger check
(between main circuit
terminals and
connecting terminals)
2) Are all of the fixed
parts on the
position?
3) Is there any
evidences of
overheating on each
parts?
4) cleaning

Ο



Ο


Ο
Ο 1) Disconnect the
inverter and short
terminals R,S,T,
U,V,W, and then
measure these
terminals and
connecting terminals
with Cycle megger
2) Screw up
3) Check by seeing.
1) over 5MΩ
2),3) no matter
DC 500V
Megger
Connected
conductors
/Wires
1)Is there any
corrosion on the
conductor
2) Is there any
damage on coverings
of the wire?

Ο


Ο

Check by seeing. If no matter
Terminals
Is there any
damaged?
Ο
Check by seeing. If no matter
Intermediate
Condenser
1) Is liquid leaking
inside?
2) Is the safety
apparatus on the
position? Is there any
protuberance?
3) Check the power
failure capacity
Ο

Ο






Ο

1), 2) Check by
seeing.




3) Check with
Capacity meter
1),2) If no matter





3) 85% Over than
Rated capacity
Capacity
meter
Relay
1) Is there any
chattering sound
under operation
2) Is there any
damage on contact
point?

Ο


Ο

1)check by hearing
2)check by seeing
If no matter
Main
circuit
Resistor
1) Is there any
damage on isolating
method of Resistor?
2) Check
disconnection

Ο


Ο

1) check by seeing
2) Disconnect one
side and check
with the tester
1) If no matter
2) within ±10% variation
of indicated resistance
value
Digital
multimeter/a
nalogue
tester





Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting

12-9

Checkup cycle
Regular
(Year)
Checkup
Part
Checkup
items
Checkup
daily
1 2
Way of
Checkup
Criterion decision
Counter
plan
Control
circuit
Protective
circuit
Operation
checking
1) Check the
imbalance of each
output voltage
during the
operation.
2) No abnormalities
on the display circuit
after executing
sequence
protection test

Ο




Ο

1) Check the
voltage of the
Inverter output
terminal among
U,V,W
2) short or open the
Inverter protection
circuit by force.
1) Voltage within
phases:
For balance 200V
(400V) - within
4V(8V)
2) Abnormal circuit is
on the operation
according to the
sequence.
Digital
multimeter/
rectification
voltmeter
Cooling
system
Cooling fan
1) Is there any
abnormal vibration
or sound?
2) Is there any
laxness on the
connecting parts?
Ο

Ο

1) Turn it with
hands under
condition of power
off
2) Fasten it Again.
1) It turns smoothly


2) No Abnormality
should be founded

Display Meter
Is the displayed
value normal?
Ο Ο
Check the
displayed value
on the surface of
panel
Check the regulational
and administrative
value
voltagemeter
/amperemeter
Total
1) Is there any
abnormal vibration
or sound?
2) Is there any
abnormal smell?
Ο

Ο

1)Check by ears,
eyes and hands
2)Check the
abnormality such
as overheating,
damage etc.
No Abnormality should
be founded
Motor
Isolation
resistance
Megger check
(Between the
output terminal
and conneting
terminal)
Ο
Disconnect the
connection of
U,V,W and
connect the moter
wires.
Over 5MΩ 500V class
Megger








Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-1
13.1 Table of Functions

13.1.1 Parameter mode – DRV group(ÎDRV)

DRV Group (PAR Î DRV)
Note1)
Control Mode
No.
Communi
-cation
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 9 O O O O O O
01 h1101 Cmd Frequency
target
frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
0.0 O 7-1 O O O X X
02 h1102 Cmd Torque
torque
command
-180~180[%] 0.0 O 8-31 X X X O O
Below 75kW 20.0
03 0h1103 Acc Time
accelerating
time
0~600[sec]
Above 90kW 60.0
O 7-20 O O O O O
Below 75kW 30.0
04 0h1104 Dec Time
decelerating
time
0~600[sec]
Above 90kW 90.0
O 7-20 O O O O O
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
06 0h1106 Cmd Source
operating
command
method
5 PLC
1:Fx/Rx-1 X 7-11 O O O O O
07 0h1107 Freq Ref Src
frequency
setting
method
0 Keypad-1 0:Keypad-1 X 7-1 O O O X X
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
08 0h1108 Trq Ref Src
torque
command
method
8 Fied Bus
0:Keypad-1 X 8-32 X X X O O
0 V/F 7-21
1 V/F PG 8-20
2 Slip Compen 8-11
3 Sensorless-1 8-21
4 Sensorless-2 8-23
09
Note1)
0h1109 Control Mode control mode
5 Vector
0:V/F X
8-27
O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 1)
Effectiveness of each code according to the Control Mode setting
V/F: V/Fmode (PG included), SL: Sensorless-1, 2 mode, VC: Vector mode, SLT: Sensorless-1, 2 Torque mode,
VCT: Vector Torque mode
Refer to Option manual for options.





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-2
DRV Group (PAR Î DRV)
Control Mode
No.
Communi-
cation No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
0 No
10 0h110A Torque Control
torque
control 1 Yes
0:No X 8-31 X X X O O
11 0h110B Jog Frequency
jog
frequency
0.5~maximum
frequency[Hz]
10.00 O 8-4 O O O O O
12 0h110C Jog Acc Time
jog
operation
Acc time
0~600[sec] 20.0 O 8-4 O O O O O
13 0h110D Jog Dec Time
jog
operation
Dec time
0~600[sec] 30.0 O 8-4 O O O X X
8-11
14 0h110E Motor Capacity
motor
capacity
0:0.2kW, 1:0.4kW
2:75kW, 3:1.5kW
4:2.2kW, 5:3.7kW
6:5.5kW, 7:7.5kW
8:11kW, 9:15kW
10:18.5kW,11:22kW
12:30kW,13:37kW
14:45kW,15:55kW
16:75kW, 17:90kW
18:110kW,
19:132kW
20:160kW,
21:185kW
depends on
inverter
capacity
X
8-17
O O O O O
0 Manual
15 0h110F Torque Boost
torque
boost
method
1 Auto
0:Manual X 7-23 O X X X X
Below 75kW 2.0
16
Note2)
0h1110 Fwd Boost
horward
torque
boost
0~15[%]
Above 90kW 1.0
X 7-23 O X X X X
Below 75kW 2.0
17 0h1111 Rev Boost
reverse
torque
boost
0~15[%]
Above 90kW 1.0
X 7-23 O X X X X
18 0h1112 Base Freq
base
frequency
30~400[Hz] 60.00 X 7-21 O O O O O
19 0h1113 Start Freq
starting
frequency
0.01~10[Hz] 0.50 X 7-21 O X X X X
20 0h1114 Max Freq
maximum
frequency
40~400 60.00 X 7-28 O O O O O
0 Hz Display
21 0h1115 Hz/Rpm Sel
speed unit
selection
1 Rpm Display
0:Hz O 9-4 O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 2)
DRV-16-17 code is displayed only when DRV-15 (Torque Boost) code value is “Manual”.






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-3
13.1.2 Parameter mode – Basic function group (ÎBAS)

BAS Group(PAR Î BAS)
Control Mode
No.
Communi
-cation
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 20 O O O O O O
0 None
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
01 0h1201 Aux Ref Src
auxiliary
command
Setting
method
4 I2
0:None X 8-1 O O O X X
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*(A-50%)
5 M*(G*(A-50%))
6 M/(G*(A-50%))
02
Note3)
0h1202
Aux Calc
Type
auxiliary
command
Movement
selection
7 M+M*G*(A-50%)
0: M+(G*A) X 8-1 O O O X X
03 0h1203 Aux Ref Gain
auxiliary
command
gain
-200.0~200.0[%] 100.0 O 8-2 O O O X X
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 FieldBus
04 0h1204 Cmd 2nd Src
2nd operation
command
method
5 PLC
1:Fx/Rx-1 X 7-30 O O O O O
05 0h1205 Freq 2nd Src
2nd
frequency
Setting
method
0 Keypad-1 0:Keypad-1 O 7-30 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 3)
BAS-02 code is displayed only when BAS-01 (Aux Ref Src) code has a value other than “NONE”.














Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-4
BAS Group (PAR Î BAS)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
8 FieldBus
9 PLC
10 Synchro
11 Binary Type
06 0h1206 Trq 2nd Src
2
nd
torque
command method
12 Keypad-2
0:
Keypad-1
O 7-30 X X X O O
0 Linear
1 Square
2 User V/F
07 0h1207 V/F Pattern V/F pattern
3 Square2
0:Linear X 7-22 O O X X X
0 Max Freq
08 0h1208 Ramp T Mode
Acc/Dec standard
frequency
1 Delta Freq
0:Max Freq X 7-16 O O O X X
0 0.01sec
1 0.1sec 09 0h1209 Time Scale time unit setting
2 1sec
1:0.1sec X 7-17 O O O X X
0 60Hz X
10 0h120A 60/50 Hz Sel
input power
frequency
1 50Hz
0:60Hz

8-44 O O O O O
11 0h120B Pole Number motor pole 2~48 X O O O O O
12 0h120C Rated Slip rated sleep speed 0~3000[rpm] X O O O O O
13 0h120D Rated Curr motor rated current 1~200[A] X O O O O O
14 0h120E Noload Curr
motor
no load current
0.5~200[A]
It depends
on inverter
capacity
X O O O O O
15 0h120F Rated Volt motor rated voltage 180~480[V] 0 X O O O O O
16 0h1210 Efficiency motor efficiency 70~100[%] X O O O O O
17 0h1211 Inertia Rate load inertial ratio 0~8 X
8-11
O O O O O
18 0h1212 Trim Power %
Power display
adjustment
70~130[%]
It depends
on inverter
capacity O 9-3 O O O O O
220V 220
19 0h1213
AC
Input Volt
input power voltage
200~230[V]
380~480[V]
440V 380
O 8-44 O O O O O
0 None
1 All
2 ALL(Stdstl)
3 Rs+Lsigma
4 Enc Test
20 -
Auto
Tuning
auto tuning
5 Tr
0:None X 8-17 X O O O O





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-5
BAS Group (PAR Î BAS)
Control Mode
No.
Commun
ication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 - Rs stator resistance It depends on motor - X 8-17 X O O O O
22 - Lsigma leak inductance It depends on motor - X 8-17 X O O O O
23 - Ls stator inductance It depends on motor - X 8-17 X O O O O
24
Note4)
- Tr rotor time constant 25~5000[msec] - X 8-17 X O O O O
41
Note5)
0h1229 User Freq 1 user frequency 1
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
15.00 X 7-22 O X X X X
42 0h122A User Volt 1 user voltage 1 0~100[%] 25 X 7-22 O X X X X
43 0h122B User Freq 2 user frequency 2
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
30.00 X 7-22 O X X X X
44 0h122C User Volt 2 user voltage 2 0~100[%] 50 X 7-22 O X X X X
45 0h122D User Freq 3 user frequency 3
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
45.00 X 7-22 O X X X X
46 0h122E User Volt 3 user voltage 3 0~100[%] 75 X 7-22 O X X X X
47 0h122F User Freq 4 user frequency 4
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 X 7-22 O X X X X
48 0h1230 User Volt 4 user voltage 4 0~100[%] 100 X 7-22 O X X X X
50
Note6)
0h1232 Step Freq-1
sequential
frequency 1
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
10.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
51 0h1233 Step Freq-2
sequential
frequency 2
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
20.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
52 0h1234 Step Freq-3
sequential
frequency 3
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
30.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
53 0h1235 Step Freq-4
sequential
frequency 4
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
40.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
54 0h1236 Step Freq-5
sequential
frequency 5
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
50.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
55 0h1237 Step Freq-6
sequential
frequency 6
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
56 0h1238 Step Freq-7
sequential
frequency 7
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
57 0h1239 Step Freq-8
sequential
frequency 8
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
55.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
58 0h123A Step Freq-9
sequential
frequency 9
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
50.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
59 0h123B Step Freq-10
sequential
frequency 10
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
45.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
60 0h123C Step Freq-11
sequential
frequency 11
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
40.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
61 0h123D Step Freq-12
sequential
frequency 12
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
35.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
62 0h123E Step Freq-13
sequential
frequency 13
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
25.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
63 0h123F Step Freq-14
sequential
frequency 14
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
15.00 O 7-10 O O O X X
64 0h1240 Step Freq-15
sequential
frequency 15
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
5.00 O 7-10 O O O X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-6
70 0h1246 Acc Time-1
sequential
accelerating time 1
0~600[sec] 20.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
71 0h1247 Dec Time-1
sequential
decelerating time 1
0~600[sec] 20.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
72
Note7)
0h1248 Acc Time-2
sequential
accelerating time 2
0~600[sec] 30.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
73 0h1249 Dec Time-2
sequential
decelerating time 2
0~600[sec] 30.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
74 0h124A Acc Time-3
sequential
accelerating time 3
0~600[sec] 40.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
75 0h124B Dec Time-3
sequential
decelerating time 3
0~600[sec] 40.0 O 7-18 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 4)
BAS-24 is shown only when DRV-09 Control Mode is “Sensorless-2” or “Vector”.
Note 5)
BAS-41~48 is displayed only when it is set as “User V/F” even if there is only one BAS-07 or M2-V/F Patt(M2-25).
Note 6)
IN-65~75 is displayed only when it is set as “sequential”(Speed –L.M.H,X) even if there is only one multi-function input.
Note 7)
displayed only when it is set as “sequential Acc/Dec”(Xcel-L,M,H) even if there is only one IN-72~75 multi-function input







































Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-7
13.1.3 Parameter mode – Parameter mode – Extended function group
(PARÎADV)

Extended Function Group (PAR Î ADV)
Control Mode
No.
Communi
cation
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 24 O - O O O O O
01 0h1301 Acc Pattern accelerating pattern 0 Linear X 7-19 O O O X X
02 0h1302 Dec Pattern decelerating pattern 1 S-curve
0:Linear
X 7-19 O O O X X
03 0h1303 Acc S Start
S accelerating starting
slope
1~100[%] 40 X 7-19 O O O X X
04 0h1304 Acc S End S accelerating end slope 1~100[%] 40 X 7-19 O O O X X
05 0h1305 Dec S Start
S decelerating starting
slope
1~100[%] 40 X 7-19 O O O X X
06 0h1306 Dec S End S decelerating end slope 1~100[%] 40 X 7-19 O O O X X
0 Acc
07 0h1307 Start Mode starting method
1 Dc-Start
0:Acc X 7-25 O O O X X
0 Dec
1 Dc-Brake
2 Free-Run
3 Flux Braking
08 0h1308 Stop Mode stop method
4 Powr Braking
0:Dec X 7-26 O O O X X
0 None
1 Forward Prev 09 0h1309 Run Prevent
rotation preventing
direction selection
2 Reverse Prev
0:Non
e
X 7-14 O O O X X
0 No
10 0h130A Power-on Run power input starting
1 Yes
0:No O 7-15 O O O X X
12
Note8) 0h130C Dc-Start Time starting DC braking time 0~60[sec] 0.00 X 7-25 O O O X X
13 0h130D Dc Inj Level DC supply 0~200[%] 50 X 7-25 O O O X X
14
Note9) 0h130E Dc-Block Time
Pre-DC braking output
block time
0~60[sec] 0.10 X 7-26 O O O X X
15 0h130F Dc-Brake Time DC braking time 0~60[sec] 1.00 X 7-26 O O O X X
16 0h1310 Dc-Brake Level DC braking 0~200[%] 50 X 7-26 O O O X X
17 0h1311 Dc-Brake Freq DC braking frequency
startingfrequency~
60[Hz]
5.00 X 7-26 O O O X X
20 0h1314 Acc Dwell Freq
Accelerating dwell
frequency
Starting frequency
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
5.00 X 8-9 O O O X X
21 0h1315 Acc Dwell Time
Accelerating dwell
operation time
0~60.0[sec] 0.00 X 8-9 O O O X X
22 0h1316 Dec Dwell Freq
Decelerating dwell
frequency
Starting frequency
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
5.00 X 8-9 O O O X X
23 0h1317 Dec Dwell Time
Decelerating dwell
operation time
0~60.0[sec] 0.00 X 8-9 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 8)
ADV-12 is displayed only when ADV-07 “Stop Mode” is set as “Dc-Start”.
Note 9)
ADV-14~17 is displayed only when ADV-08 “Stop Mode” is set as “DC-Brake”.






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-8
Extended Function Group (PAR Î ADV)
Control Mode
No.
Communication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Operation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
0 No
24 0h1318 Freq Limit frequency limit
1 Yes
0:No X 7-29 O O O X X
25
Note10) 0h1319 Freq Limit Lo
frequency lower
limit
0~upper limit[Hz] 0.50 O 7-29 O O O X X
26 0h131A Freq Limit Hi
frequency upper
limit
0.5~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 X 7-29 O O O X X
0 No
27 0h131B Jump Freq frequency jump
1 Yes
0:No X 7-29 O O O X X
28

Note 11) 0h131C Jump Lo 1
jump frequency
lower limit 1
0~jumpfrequencyupper
limit1[Hz]
10.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
29 0h131D Jump Hi 1
jump frequency
upper limit 1
Jump frequency lower
limit1
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
15.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
30 0h131E Jump Lo 2
jump frequency
lower limit 2
0~jumpfrequency
upper limit2[Hz]
20.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
31 0h131F Jump Hi 2
jump frequency
upper limit 2
Jump frequency lower
limit2
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
25.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
32 0h1320 Jump Lo 3
jump frequency
lower limit 3
0~jumpfrequency
upper limit3[Hz]
30.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
33 0h1321 Jump Hi 3
jump frequency
upper limit 3
Jump frequency lower
limit3
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
35.00 O 7-29 O O O X X
41
Note12)

0h1329 BR Rls Curr brake open current 0~180.0[%] 50.0 O 8-54 O O O X X
42 0h132A BR Rls Dly
brake open delay
time
0~10.00[sec] 1.00 X 8-54 O O O X X
44 0h132C
BR Rls Fwd
Fr
brake open
forward frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
1.00 X 8-54 O O O X X
45 0h132D
BR Rls Rev
Fr
brake open
reverse frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
1.00 X 8-54 O O O X X
46 0h132E BR Eng Dly
brake close delay
time
0~10[sec] 1.00 X 8-54 O O O X X
47 0h132F BR Eng Fr
brake close
frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
2.00 X 8-54 O O O X X
0 None
1 Manual
50 0h1332 E-Save Mode
energy saving
operation
2 Auto
0:None X 8-35 O O X X X
51
Note13)

0h1333 Energy Save
energy saving
amount
0~30[%] 0 O 8-35 O O O X X
60 0h133C
Xcel Change
Fr
Acc/Dec time
exchange
frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
0.00 X 7-18 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 10)
ADV-25~26 is displayed only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set as “Freq Limit”.
Note 11)
ADV-28~33 is displayed only when ADV-27 (Jump Freq) set as “Yes”.
Note 12)
ADV-41~47 is displayed only when a code of OUT-31~33 is set as “BR Control”.
Note 13)
ADV-51 is displayed only when ADV-50 (E-Save Mode) is set as values other than “None”.






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-9

Extended function Group (PAR Î ADV)
Control Mode
No.
Communication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Operation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
61 - Load Spd Gain
revolution
display gain
1~6000.0[%] 100.0 O 9-3 O O O X X
0 x 1
1 x 0.1
2 x 0.01
3 x 0.001
62 -
Load Spd
Scale
revolution
display scale
4 x 0.0001
0:x 1 O 9-3 O O O X X
0 rpm
63 0h133F Load Spd Unit
revolution
display unit
1 mpm
0:rpm O 9-3 O O O O O
0 During Run
1 Always ON 64 0h1340 FAN Control
cooling fan
control
2 Temp Control
0:During
Run
O 8-43 O O O X X
0 No
65 0h1341
U/D Save
Mode
up/down
Operation
frequency
saving
1 Yes
0:No O 8-6 O O O X X
0 None
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
66 0h1342 On/Off Ctrl Src
4 I2
0:None X 8-56 O O O O O
67 0h1343 On-C Level
Output contact
point ON level
10~100[%] 90.00 X 8-56 O O O O O
68 0h1344 Off-C Level
Output contact
point OFF level
-100.00~output
contact point ON
level[%]
10.00 X 8-56 O O O O O
0 Always Enable
70 0h1346 Run En Mode
safety
operation
selection
1 DI Dependent
0:Always
Enable
X 8-98 O O O O O
0 Free-Run
1 Q-Stop 71
Note14) 0h1347 Run Dis Stop
safety
operation stop
method
2
Q-Stop
Resume
0:Free-Run X 8-8 O O O O O
72 0h1348 Q-Stop Time
safety
operation
decelerating
time
0~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-8 O O O O O
0 No
74 0h134A RegenAvd Sel
Selection of
regeneration
and avoidance
function for
press
1 Yes
No X 8-61 O O O O O
200V: 300~400 350V
75 0h134B
RegenAvd
Level
Operational
Voltage level of
regeneration
anc avoidance
for press
400V: 600~ 800 700V
X 8-61 O O O X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-10
Control Mode
No.
Communication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Operation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
76

Note15)

0h134C
CompFreq
Limit
Restriction of
compensational
frequency of
regeneration
anc avoidance
for press
0~ 10.00Hz 1.00[Hz] X 8-61 O O O X X
77 0h134D
RegenAvd
Pgain
P-gain of
regeneration
anc avoidance
for press
0 ~ 100.0% 50.0[%] O 8-61 O O O X X
78 0h134E
RegenAvd
Igain
I-gain of
regeneration
anc avoidance
for press
20~30000[msec] 500[msec] O 8-61 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 14)
ADV-71~72 is displayed only when ADV-70 (Run En Mode) is set as “DI Dependent”.
Note15)
ADV-76~78 is displayed only when ADV-75 (RegenAvd Sel) is set as “Yes”.




































Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-11
13.1.4 Parameter mode – Control function group (ÎCON)

Control Function Group (PAR Î CON)
Control Mode
No.
Communication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Operation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 51 O O O O O O
Below 22kW 0.7~15[kHz] 5.0
30~45kW 0.7~10[kHz] 5.0
55~75kW 0.7~7[kHz] 5.0
90~110kW 0.7~6[kHz] 3.0
04 0h1404 Carrier Freq carrier frequency
132~160kW0.7~5[kHz] 3.0
O 8-42 O O O O O
0 Normal PWM
05 0h1405 PWM Mode switching mode
1 Lowleakage PWM
0:Normal
PWM
X 8-42 O O O O O
09 0h140A PreExTime Initial flux time 0~60[sec] 1.00 X 8-30 X X O O O
10 0h140B Flux Force
Initial flux power
supply
100~500[%] 100.0 X 8-30 X X O O O
11 0h140C Hold Time
permanent
operation
sustaining time
0~60[sec] 1.00 X 8-32 X X O X X
12 0h140D
ASR P
Gain 1
speed control
period
proportionalgain1
10~500[%] 50.0 O 8-25 X X O X X
13 0h140E
ASR I
Gain 1
speed control
period integral
calculus gain 1
10~9999[msec] 300 O 8-25 X X O X X
15 0h140F
ASR P
Gain 2
speed control
period
proportionalgain2
10~500[%] 50.0 O 8-25 X X O X X
16 0h1410
ASR I
Gain 2
speed control
period integral
calculusgain2
10~9999[msec] 300 O 8-25 X X O X X
18 0h1412
Gain SW
Freq
gain exchange
frequency
0~120[Hz] 0.00 X 8-30 X X O X X
19 0h1413
Gain Sw
Delay
gain exchange
time
0~100[sec] 0.10 X 8-30 X X O X X
0 No
20 0h1414
SL2 G
View Sel
sensorless2 2
nd

gain display
setting
1 Yes
0:No O 8-25 X X X X X
21 0h1415
ASR-SL P
Gain1
sensorless1,2
speed control
period
proportionalgain1
0~5000[%]
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-25 X O X X X
22 0h1416
ASR-SL I
Gain1
sensorless1,2
speed control
period integral
calculusgain1
10~9999[msec]
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-25 X O X X X
23
Note
0h1417
ASR-SL P
Gain2
sensorless2
speed control
1~1000[%]
Depends
on motor
O 8-25 X X X X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-12
Control Mode
No.
Communication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Operation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
16)
period
proportionalgain2
capacity
24 0h1418
ASR-SL I
Gain2
sensorless2
speed control
period integral
calculusgain2
1~1000[%]
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-25 X X X X X
26 0h141A
Observer
Gain1
sensorless2
measurer gain1
0~30000 10500 O 8-25 X X X X X
27 0h141B
Observer
Gain2
sensorless2
measurer gain2
1~1000[%] 100.0 O 8-25 X X X X X
28 0h141C
Observer
Gain3
sensorless2
measurer gain3
0~30000 13000 O 8-25 X X X X X
29 0h141D
S-Est P
Gain1
sensorless2
speed estimator
proportionalgain1
0~30000
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-25 X X X X X
30 0h141E
S-Est I
Gain1
sensorless2
speed estimator
integral
calculusgain1
0~30000
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-25 X X X X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 16)
CON-23~28, 31~32 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is “Sensorless2” and CON-20 (SL2 G View Sel) is set as
“YES”.





























Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-13
Control Function Group (PAR Î CON)
Control Mode
No.
Commun
ication
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
31 0h141F S-Est P Gain2
Sensorless2 speed
estimator
proportional gain2
1~1000[%]
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-23 X X X X X
32 0h1420 S-Est I Gain2
Sensorless2 speed
estimator integral
calculus gain2
1~1000[%]
Depends
on motor
capacity
O 8-23 X X X X X
34 0h1422 SL2 OVM Perc
Sensorless2
overvoltage
modulation range
adjustment
100~180[%] 120 X 8-25 X O X X X
45
Note17)

0h142D PG P Gain
PG operation
proportional gain
0~9999 3000 O 8-20 O X X X X
46 0h142E PG I Gain
PG operation
integral calculus
gain
0~9999 50 O 8-20 O X X X X
47 0h142F PG Slip Max%
PG operation
maximum sleep
0~200 100 X 8-20 O X X X X
48 - ACR P Gain
Current control
period P gain
0~10000 1200 O 8-21 X O O O O
49 - ACR I Gain
Current control
period I gain
0~10000 120 O 8-21 X O O O O
51 0h1433 ASR Ref LPF
speed control
period
reference filter
0~20000[msec] 0 X 8-21 X O O X X
52 0h1434 Torque Out LPF
Torque control
period
Output filter
0~2000[msec] 0 X 8-27 X X X O O
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
8 FiedBus
9 PLC
10 Synchro
53

0h1435

Torque Lmt Src

Torque limit
Setting method

11 Binary Type
0:Keypa
d-1

X

8-27
X

X

X

O

O

54

Note18)

0h1436 FWD +Trq Lmt
forward offsetting
Torque limit
0~200[%] 180.0 O 8-27 X X X O O
55 0h1437 FWD –Trq Lmt
forward
regenerative
torque limit
0~200[%] 180.0 O 8-27 X X X O O
56 0h1438 REV +Trq Lmt
reverse offsetting
torque limit
0~200[%] 180.0 O 8-27 X X X O O
57 0h1439 REV –Trq Lmt
reverse
regenerative
torque limit
0~200[%] 180.0 O 8-27 X X X O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-14
Note 17)
CON-45~47 are displayed when Encoder Board is inserted and Control mode is V/F PG.
Note 18)
CON-54~57 are displayed only when DRV-09(Control Mode) is set as “Sensorless-1, 2” or “Vector”.

Control Function Group (PAR Î CON)
1)Control Mode
No.
Communi-
cation No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FiedBus
58 0h143A
Trq Bias Src
torque bias
setting method
8 PLC
0:Keypad-1 X 8-27 X X O X X
59 0h143B
Torque Bias torque bias -120~120[%]
0.0 O 8-27 X X O X X
60 0h143C
Torque
Bias FF
torque bias
compensation
0~100[%]
0.0 O 8-27 X X O X X
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FiedBus
62 0h143D
Speed
Lmt Src
Speed limit setting
method
8 PLC
0:Keypad-1 O 8-31 X X X X O
63 0h143F
FWD Speed
Lmt
forward speed
limit
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 8-31 X X X X O
64 0h1440
REV Speed
Lmt
reverse speed
limit
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 8-31 X X X X O
65 0h1441
Speed Lmt
Gain
Speed limit
operation gain
100~5000[%]
500 O 8-32 X X X X O
66 0h1442
Droop Perc
droop operation
amount
0~100[%]
0.0 O 8-33 X X X X O
67
Note19)

0h1443
Droop St Trq droop start torque 0~100[%]
100.0 O 8-33 X X X X O
68 0h1444
SPD/TRQAcc T
torque
modeÆspeed
mode exchange
accelerating time
0~600[sec]
20.0 O 8-33 X X X X O
69 0h1445 SPD/TRQAcc T
torque
modeÆspeed
mode exchange
decelerating time
0~600[sec] 30.0 O 8-33 X X X X O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 19)
CON-67 is displayed only when Encoder option board is mounted.







Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-15
Control Function Group (PAR Î CON)
1)Control Mode
No.
Communi
cation No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Opera
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
Bit 0000~1111
1
accelerating speed
search selection
2 Reset start after trip
3
Re-start after
instantaneous
interruption
71 0h1447 Speed Search
Speed search
operation
selection
4
Start immediately
after power ON
0000 X 8-36 O O O X X
Below 75kW 150
72 0h1448 SS Sup-Current
speed search
standard current
80~200[%]
Above 90kW 100
O 8-36 O O X X X
73 0h1449 SS P-Gain
speed search
proportional gain
0~9999 100 O 8-36 O O X X X
74 0h144A SS I-Gain
speed search
integral calculus
gain
0~9999 200 O 8-36 O O X X X
75 0h144B
SS
Block Time
Pre-speed
search output
block time
0~60[sec] 1.0 X 8-36 O O X X X
0 No
77 0h144D KEB Select
energy buffering
selection 1 Yes
0:No X 8-34 O O O X X
78
Note20)

0h144E KEB Start Lev
energy buffering
start amount
110~140[%] 125.0 X 8-34 O O O X X
79 0h144F KEB Stop Lev
energy buffering
stop amount
130~145[%] 130.0 X 8-34 O O O X X
80 0h1450 KEB Gain
energy buffering
gain
1~2000 1000 O 8-34 O O O X X
82

Note21)

0h1452 ZSD Frequency
permanent
detection
frequency
0~10[Hz] 2.00 O 9-14 X X O X O
83 0h1453 ZSD Band
permanent
detection
frequency band
0~2[Hz] 1.00 O 9-14 X X O X O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 20)
CON-78~80 are displayed only when CON-77 (KEB Select) is set as “Yes”.
Note 21)
CON-82~83 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set as “Vector”.













Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-16
13.1.5 Parameter mode – Input terminal block function group (ÎIN)

Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î IN)
Control Mode
No.
Communi
cation No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Opera
tion
Pag
e
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 65 O - O O O O O
01 0h1501
Freq
at 100%
Analog maximum input
frequency
Starting
frequency~
maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 7-2 O O O X X
02 0h1502 Torque at100%
Analog maximum input
torque
0~200[%] 100.0 O 7-2 X X O O O
05 0h1505 V1 Monitor[V] V1 input amount display 0~10[V] 0.00 O 7-2 O O O O O
0 Unipolar
06 0h1506 V1 Polarity V1 input polar selection
1 Bipolar
0:
Unipolar
X 7-2 O O O O O
07 0h1507 V1 Filter
V1 input filter time
constant
0
~10000[msec]
10 O 7-2 O O O O O
08 0h1508 V1 Volt x1
V1input minimum
voltage
0~10[V] 0.00 O 7-2 O O O O O
09 0h1509 V1 Perc y1
V1minimum voltage
output %
0~100[%] 0.00 O 7-2 O O O O O
10 0h150A V1 Volt x2
V1input maximum
voltage
0~10[V] 10.00 O 7-2 O O O O O
11 0h150B V1 Perc y2
V1maximum voltage
output %
0~100[%] 100.00 O 7-2 O O O O O
12
Note22) 0h150C V1 (–)Volt x1’
V1(–)input minimum
voltage
-10~0[V] 0.00 O 7-4 O O O O O
13 0h150D V1(–)Perc y1’
V1(–)minimum voltage
output %
-100~0[%] 0.00 O 7-4 O O O O O
14 0h150E V1(–)Volt x2’
V1(–)input maximum
voltage
-10~0[V] -10.00 O 7-4 O O O O O
15 0h150F V1(–)Perc y2’
V1(–)maximum voltage
output %
-100~0[%] -100.00 O 7-4 O O O O O
0 No
16 0h1510 V1 Inverting rotation direction change
1 Yes
0: No O 7-2 O O O O O
17 0h1511 V1 Quantizing V1 quantization level 0.04~10[%] 0.04 X 7-2 O O O O O
20 0h1514
I1
Monitor[mA]
I1input amount display 0~20[mA] 0.00 O 7-6 O O O O O
22 0h1516 I1 Filter
I1input filter time
constant
0
~10000[msec]
10 O 7-6 O O O O O
23 0h1517 I1 Curr x1 I1input minimum current 0~20[mA] 4.00 O 7-6 O O O O O
24 0h1518 I1 Perc y1
Output at I1 minimum
current %
0~100[%] 0.00 O 7-6 O O O O O
25 0h1519 I1 Curr x2
I1input maximum
current
4~20[mA] 20.00 O 7-6 O O O O O
26 0h151A I1 Perc y2
Output at
I1maximumcurrent
0~100[%] 100.00 O 7-6 O O O O O
0 No
31 0h151F I1 Inverting rotation direction change
1 Yes
0: No O 7-6 O O O O O
32 0h1520 I1 Quantizing I1 quantization level 0.04~10[%] 0.04 O 7-6 O O O O O
Note 22)
IN-12~15 codes are displayed only when IN-06 (V1 Polarity) is set as “Bipolar”.






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-17
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î IN)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
35
Note 23)
0h1523 V2 Monitor[V]
V2 input amount
display
0~10[V] 0.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
0 Unipolar
36

0h1524 V2 Polarity
V1 input polarity
selection
1 Bipolar
1:
Bipolar
O 7-7 O O O O O
37 0h1525 V2 Filter
V2 input filter time
constant
0~10000
[msec]
10 O 7-7 O O O O O
38 0h1526 V2 Volt x1
V2input minimum
voltage
0~10[V] 0.00 O 7-7 X X O O O
39 0h1527 V2 Perc y1
output% at V2
minimum voltage
0~100[%] 0.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
40 0h1528 V2 Volt x2
V2 input maximum
voltage
0~10[V] 10.00 O 7-7 X X O O O
41 0h1529 V2 Perc y2
output% at V2
maximum voltage
0~100[%] 100.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
42 0h152A V2 –Volt x1’
V2 –input minimum
voltage
-10~0[V] 0.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
43 0h152B V2–Perc y1’
output% at V2–
minimum voltage
-100~0[%] 0.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
44 0h152C V2 –Volt x2’
V2 –input maximum
voltage
-10~0[V] -10.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
45 0h152F V2 –Perc y2’
output% at V2–
maximum voltage
-100~0[%] -100.00 O 7-7 O O O O O
0 No
46 0h1530 V2 Inverting
rotation direction
change
1 Yes
0:No O 7-7 O O O O O
47 0h1532 V2 Quantizing V2 quantization level 0.04~10[%] 0.04 O 7-7 O O O O O
50 0h1534 I2 Monitor[mA]
I2 input amount
display
0~20[mA] 0.00 O 7-8 O O O O O
52 0h1535 I2 Filter
I2 input filter time
constant
0~10000
[msec]
15 O 7-8 O O O O O
53 0h1536 I2 Curr x1
I2 input minimum
current
0~20[mA] 4.00 O 7-8 O O O O O
54 0h1537 I2 Perc y1
output% at I2
minimum current
0~100[%] 0.00 O 7-8 O O O O O
55 0h1538 I2 Curr x2
I2 input maximum
current
0~20[mA] 20.00 O 7-8 O O O O O
56 0h153D I2 Perc y2
output% at I2
maximum current
0~100[%] 100.00 O 7-8 O O O O O
0 No
61 0h153E I2 Inverting
rotation direction
change
1 Yes
0:No O 7-8 O O O O O
62 0h153F I2 Quantizing I2 quantization level 0.04~10[%] 0.04 O 7-7 O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 23)
IN-35~62 codes are displayed only when the extended IO board is mounted.









Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-18
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î IN)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
0 NONE
65 0h1541 P1 Define
P1 terminal function
setting
1 FX
1:FX X 7-12 O O O O O
66 0h1542 P2 Define
P2 terminal function
setting
2 RX 2:RX X 7-12 X X O O O
67 0h1543 P3 Define
P3 terminal function
setting
3 RST 5:BX X 10-15 O O O O O
68 0h1544 P4 Define
P4 terminal function
setting
4 External Trip 4:Ex.t X 10-8 O O O O O
69 0h1545 P5 Define
P5 terminal function
setting
5 BX 7:Sp-L X 10-15 O O O O O
70 0h1546 P6 Define
P6 terminal function
setting
6 JOG 8:Sp-M X 8-4 O O O O O
71 0h1547 P7 Define
P7 terminal function
setting
7 Speed-L 9:Sp-H X 7-10 O O O O O
72 0h1548 P8 Define
P8 terminal function
setting
8 Speed-M 6:JOG X 7-10 O O O O O
73
Note24)
0h1549 P9 Define
P9 terminal function
setting
9 Speed-H 0: NONE X 7-10 O O O O O
74 0h154A P10 Define
P10 terminal function
setting
10 Speed-X 0: NONE X 7-10
75 0h154B P11 Define
P11 terminal function
setting
11 XCEL-L 0: NONE X 7-18
O O O O O
12 XCEL-M 7-18
13 RUN Enable 8-8
14 3-Wire 8-7
15 2nd Source 7-30
16 Exchange 8-42
17 Up 8-6
18 Down 8-6
19 -reserved- -
20 U/D Clear 8-6
21 Analog Hold 7-10
22 I-Term Clear 8-12
23 PID Openloop 8-12
24 P Gain2 8-12
25 XCEL Stop 7-21
26 2nd Motor 8-41
27 Trv Offset Lo 8-53
28 Trv Offset Hi 8-53
29 Interlock 1 8-60
30 Interlock 2 8-60
31 Interlock 3 8-60

32 Interlock 4

8-60

* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 24)
IN73~75 codes are displayed only when the extended IO board is mounted.





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-19
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î IN)
Control Mode
No.
Commun
ication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera
-tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
33 -Reserved- -
34 Pre Excite 8-30
35 Speed/Torque 8-32
36 ASR Gain 2 8-27
37 ASR P/PI 8-27
38 Timer In 9-15
39 Thermal In 10-6
40 Dis Aux Ref 8-1
41 SEQ-1 8-51
42 SEQ-2 8-51
43 Manual 8-51
44 Go Step 8-51
45 Hold Step 8-51
46 FWD JOG 8-5
47 REV JOG 8-5
`
48 Trq Bias

8-31

85 0h1555 DI On Delay
multi-function input
terminal
ON filter
0~10000[msec] 10 O 7-31 O O O O O
86 0h1556 DI Off Delay
multi-function input
terminal
OFF filter
0~10000[msec] 3 O 7-31 O O O O O
P11 – P1
0
A contact point
(NO)
87 0h1557 DINC/NO Sel
multi-function input
contact point
selection

1
B contact point
(NC)
0000
0000
X 7-39 O O O O O
88 0h1558 RunOn Delay
operating command
delay time
0~100[sec] 0.00 X 7-12 O O O O O
89 0h1559 InCheck Time
sequential command
delay time
1~5000[msec] 1 X 7-10 O O O O O
P11 – P1
0 On 90 0h155A DI Status
multi-function input
terminal status
1 OFF
0000
0000
O 7-31 O O O O O












Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-20
13.1.6 Parameter mode – Output terminal block function group (ÎOUT)

Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î OUT)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - JumpCode jump code 0~99 30 O - O O O O O
0 Frequency
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PIDRef Value
13 PIDFdb Value
14 PID Output
01 0h1601 AO1 Mode analog output1 item
15 Constant
0:
Frequency
O 9-7 O O O O O
02 0h1602 AO1 Gain analog output1 gain -1000~1000[%] 100.0 O 9-7 O O O O O
03 0h1603 AO1 Bias analog output 1 bias -100~100[%] 0.0 O 9-7 O O O O O
04 0h1604 AO1 Filter analog output1 filter 0~10000[msec] 5 O 9-7 O O O O O
05 0h1606
AO1
Const %
analog constant output 1 0~1000[%] 0.0 O 9-7 O O O O O
06 0h1606
AO1
Monitor
analog output 1 monitor 0~1000[%]
0.0 -
9-7
O O O O O
0 Frequency
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PIDRef Value
13 PIDFdb Value
14 PID Output
07 0h1607 AO2 Mode analog output 2 item
15 Constant
0:
Frequency
O 9-8 O O O O O






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-21
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î OUT)
Control Mode
No.
Commun
ication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
08 0h1608 AO2 Gain analog output 2 gain -1000~1000[%] 100.0 O 9-8 O O O O O
09 0h1609 AO2 Bias analog output 2bias -100~100[%] 0.0 O 9-8 O O O O O
10 0h160A AO2 Filter analog output 2 filter 0~10000[msec] 5 O 9-8 O O O O O
11 0h160B AO2Const % analog constant output 2 0~100[%] 0.0 O 9-8 O O O O O
12 0h160C AO2 Monitor analog output 2 monitor 0~1000[%] 0.0 O 9-8 O O O O O
0 Frequency
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
14
Note25)
0h160E AO3 Mode analog output3 item
15 Constant
0:
Frequency
O
9-9
O O O O O
15 0h160F AO3 Gain analog output 3 gain -1000~1000[%] 100.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
16 0h1610 AO3 Bias analog output 3bias -100~100[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
17 0h1611 AO3 Filter analog output 3 filter 0~10000[msec] 5 O 9-9 O O O O O
18 - AO3 Const % analog constant output 3 0~100[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
19 0h1613 AO3 Monitor analog output 3 monitor -1000~1000[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
0 Frequency
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
20 0h1614 AO4 Mode analog output4 item
15 Constant
0:
Frequency
9-9 O O O O O





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-22
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î OUT)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Opera
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 0h1615 AO4 Gain analog output 2 gain -1000~1000[%] 100.0 - 9-9 O O O O O
22 0h1616 AO4 Bias analog output 2 bias -100~100[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
23 0h1617 AO4 Filter analog output 2 filter 0~10000[msec] 5 O 9-9 O O O O O
24 - AO4 Const %
analog constant output
4
0~100[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
25 0h1619 AO4 Monitor
analog output 2
monitor
0~1000[%] 0.0 O 9-9 O O O O O
Bit 000 ~ 111
1 low voltage
2
Failure other than
low voltage
30 0h161E
Trip
Out Mode
failure output item
3
Final failure of
automatic re-start
010 O
9-10
9-16
O O O O O
31
0h161F
Relay 1 multi-function
relay1item
0 NONE
28:Trip O
9-10 O O O O O
32 0h1620 Relay 2
multi-function relay 2
item
1 FDT-1 13:Run
O
9-10 O O O O O
33
0h1621
Q1 Define multi-function output 1
item
2 FDT-2
0:FDT-1 O
9-10 O O O O O
34
Note26)
0h1622
Q2 Define
multi-function output 2
item
3 FDT-3 0:FDT-2
O
9-10 O O O O O
35 0h1623
Q3 Define multi-function output 3
item
4 FDT-4 0:FDT-3
O
9-10 O O O O O
36 0h1624
Q4 Define multi-function output 4
item
5 Over Load 0:FDT-4
O
9-10 O O O O O
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
13 Lost Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
20 Step Pulse
21 Seq Pulse
22 Ready
23 Trv Acc
24 Trv Dec
25 MMC
26 Zspd Dect
27 Torque Dect



28 Timer Out



Note 25)
OUT 14~25 codes are displayed only when the extended IO board is mounted.
Note 26)
OUT 34~36 codes are displayed only when the extended IO board is mounted.





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-23
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR Î OUT)
Control Mode
No.
Communic
ation No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
29 Trip
30 Lost Keypad
31 DB Warn%ED
32 ENC Tune
33 ENC Dir
34 On/Off Control

35 BR Control

41 0h1629 DO Status
multi-function output
monitoring
000 X 9-10

50 0h1632 DO On Delay
multi-function output
ON delay
0~100[sec] 0.00 O 9-17
O O O O O
51 0h1633 DO Off Delay
multi-function output
OFF delay
0~100[sec] 0.00 O 9-17
O O O O O
Q1,Relay2,Relay1
0
A contact point
(NO) 52 0h1634
DO
NC/NO Sel
multi-function output
contact point selection
1
B contact point
(NC)
000 X
9-17 O O O O O
53 0h1635 TripOut OnDly failure output ON delay 0~100[sec] 0.00 O 9-16
O O O O O
54 0h1636 TripOut OffDly
failure output OFF
delay
0~100.00[sec] 0.00 O 9-16
O O O O O
55 0h1637 TimerOn Delay timer ON delay 0~100.00[sec] 0.00 O 9-15
O O O O O
56 0h1638 TimerOff Delay timer OFF delay 0~100.00[sec] 100.0 O 9-15
O O O O O
57 0h1639 FDT Frequency detection frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
30.00 O 9-10
O O O O O
58 0h163A FDT Band
detection frequency
width
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
10.00 O 9-10
O O O O O
59 0h163B TD Level
detection torque
amount
0~150[%] 100 O 9-15
X X O X O
60 0h163C TD Band detection torque width 0~10[%] 5.0 O 9-15
X X O X O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.

















Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-24
13.1.7 Parameter mode – Communication function group (ÎCOM)

Communication Function Group (PAR Î COM)
Control Mode
No.
Communic
ation No.
Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 20 O -
O O O O O
01 0h1701 Int485 St ID
built-in
communication
inverter ID
0~250 1 O 11-3
O O O O O
0 ModBus RTU
1 --Reserved -- 02 0h1702 Int485 Proto
built-in
communication
protocol
2 Serial Debug
0:
ModBus
RTU
O 11-3
O O O O O
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
03 0h1703 Int485 BaudR
built-in
communication
speed
5 38400 bps
3:
9600 bps
O 11-3
O O O O O
0 D8/PN/S1
1 D8/PN/S2
2 D8/PE/S1
04 0h1704 Int485 Mode
built-in
communication
frame setting
3 D8/PO/S1
0:
D8/PN/S1
11-3
O O O O O
05 0h1705 Resp Delay
Transmission delay
after reception
0~1000[ms] 5ms O 11-3
O O O O O
06
Note27)
- FBus S/W Ver
communication
option S/W version
- 0.00 O Option
O O O O O
07 0h171B FBus ID
communication
option inverter ID
0~255 1 O Option
O O O O O
08 0h1711
FBUS
BaudRate
FBus
communication
speed
- 12Mbps Option
O O O O O
09 0h171C FieldBus LED
communication
option LED status
- - O Option
O O O O O
30 0h171E ParaStatus Num 0~8 3 O 11-7
O O O O O
31 0h171F Para Stauts-1 output address 1 0000~FFFF Hex 000A O 11-7
O O O O O
32 0h1720 Para Stauts-2 output address 2 0000~FFFF Hex 000E O 11-7
O O O O O
33 0h1721 Para Stauts-3 output address 3 0000~FFFF Hex 000F O 11-7
O O O O O
34 0h1722 Para Stauts-4 output address 4 0000~FFFF Hex 0000 O 11-7
O O O O O
35 0h1723 Para Stauts-5 output address 5 0000~FFFF Hex 0000 O 11-7
O O O O O
36 0h1724 Para Stauts-6 output address 6 0000~FFFF Hex 0000 O 11-7
O O O O O
37 0h1725 Para Stauts-7 output address 7 0000~FFFF Hex 0000 O 11-7
O O O O O
38 0h1726 Para Stauts-8 output address 8 0000~FFFF Hex 0000 O 11-7
O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 27) COM 06~17 codes are displayed only when the communication option card is mounted.
Refer to Option manual for Option.











Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-25
Communication Function Group (PAR Î COM)
Control Mode
No
.
Commu
nication
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
a-tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
50
0h1732 Para Ctrl Num 0~8
2 O 11-7 O O O O O
51
0h1733 Para Control-1 input address 1 0000~FFFF Hex
0005 X 11-7 O O O O O
52
0h1734 Para Control-2 input address 2 0000~FFFF Hex
0006 X 11-7 O O O O O
53
0h1735 Para Control-3 input address 3 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
54
0h1736 Para Control-4 input address 4 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
55
0h1737 Para Control-5 input address 5 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
56
0h1738 Para Control-6 input address 6 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
57
0h1739 Para Control-7 input address 7 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
58
0h173A Para Control-8 input address 8 0000~FFFF Hex
0000 X 11-7 O O O O O
70
0h1746 Virtual DI 1
communication multi-
function input 1
0 None
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
71
0h1747 Virtual DI 2
communication multi-
function input 2
1 FX
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
72
0h1748 Virtual DI 3
communication multi-
function input 3
2 RX
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
73
0h1749 Virtual DI 4
communication multi-
function input 4
3 RST
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
74
0h174A Virtual DI 5
communication multi-
function input 5
4 External Trip
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
75
0h174B Virtual DI 6
communication multi-
function input 6
5 BX
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
76
0h174C Virtual DI 7
communication multi-
function input 7
6 JOG
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
77
0h174D Virtual DI 8
communication multi-
function input 8
7 Speed-L
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
78
0h174E Virtual DI 9
communication multi-
function input 9
8 Speed-M
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
79
0h174F Virtual DI 10
communication multi-
function input 10
9 Speed-H
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
80
0h1750 Virtual DI 11
communication multi-
function input 11
10 Speed-X
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
81
0h1751 Virtual DI 12
communication multi-
function input 12
11 XCEL-L
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
82
0h1752 Virtual DI 13
communication multi-
function input 13
12 XCEL-M
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
83
0h1753 Virtual DI 14
communication multi-
function input 14
13 RUN Enable
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
84
0h1754 Virtual DI 15
communication multi-
function input 15
14 3-Wire
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
85
0h1755 Virtual DI 16
communication multi-
function input 16
15 2nd Source
0:None O 11-5 O O O O O
16 Exchange
17/18 Up/Down
19 Reserved
20 U/D Clear
21 Analog Hold
22 I-Term Clear
23 PID Openloop
24 P Gain2












25 XCEL Stop
0:None O - O O O O O





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-26
26 2nd Motor
27 Trv Offset Lo
28 Trv Offset Hi
29 Interlock 1
30 Interlock 2
31 Interlock 3
32 Interlock 4
33 Reserved
34 Pre Excite
35 Speed/Torque
36 ASR Gain 2
37 ASR P/PI
38 Timer In
39 Thermal In
40 Dis Aux Ref
41 SEQ-1
42 SEQ-2
43 Manual
44 Go Step
45 Hold Step
46 FWD JOG
47 REV JOG
48 Trq Bias
86 0h1756 Virt DI Status
Comm. Multi-function
input monitoring
0 X 11-5
O O O O O
0 Int 485
1 Keypad 90 175A Comm Mon Sel monitor type selection
2 Field Bus
0:
Int 485
O 11-5
O O O O O
91 175B RcvFrame Num
Number of reception
frames
- 0 - 11-5
O O O O O
92 175C Err Frame Num
Number of error
frames
- 0 - 11-5
O O O O O
93 175D
Nak Frame
Num
Number of writing error
frames
- 0 - 11-5
O O O O O
0 No
94
note
27-2)

Comm Update
1 Yes
0 - 11-5
O O O O O
note27-2
) COM 94 is displayed when communication option board is inserted.















Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-27
3.1.8 Parameter mode – Applied function group (ÎAPP)

Applied Function Group (PAR Æ APP)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 20 O - O O O O O
0 None
1 Traverse
2 Proc PID
3 Reserved
01 0h1801 App Mode applied function selection
4
Auto
Sequence
0:
None
X - O O O X X
08
Note28)
0h1808 Trv Apmlit % traverse operating range 0~20[%] 0.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
09 0h1809 Trv Scramb %
traverse scramble
magnitude
0~50[%] 0.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
10 0h180A Trv Acc Time traverse accelerating time 0.1~600.0[sec] 2.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
11 0h180B Trv Dec Time
traverse decelerating
time
0.1~600.0[sec] 3.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
12 0h180C Trv Offset Hi traverse offset upper limit 0~20.0[%] 0.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
13 0h180D Trv Offset lo traverse offset lower limit 0~20.0[%] 0.0 O 8-53 O O O X X
16
Note 29)
0h1810 PID Output PID output monitor [%] 0.00 - 8-12 O O O X X
17

0h1811 PID Ref Value PID reference monitor [%] 50.00 - 8-12 O O O X X
18 0h1812 PID Fdb Value PID feedback monitor [%] 0.00 - 8-12 O O O X X
19 0h1813 PID Ref Set PID reference setting -100~100[%] 50% O 8-12 O O O X X
0 Keypad
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
4 I2
5 Int 485
6 Encoder
7 FieldBus
8 PLC
9 Synchro
20 0h1814
PID
Ref Source
PID reference selection
10 Binary Type
0:Key
pad
X 8-12 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 28)
APP 08~13 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “Traverse”.
Note 29)
APP 16~45 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “Proc PID” or APP-01(App Mode) is set as “MMC” and
Requl Bypass(APO-34) is set as “No”.










Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-28
Applied Function Group (PAR Î APP)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
0 V1
1 I1
2 V2
3 I2
4 Int 485
5 Encoder
6 FieldBus
7 PLC
8 Synchro
21
0h1815
PID
F/B Source
PID Feedback selection
9 Binary Type
0:V1 X 8-12 O O O X X
22
0h1816 PID P-Gain PID proportional gain 0~1000[%]
50.0 O 8-12 O O O X X
23
0h1817 PID I-Time PID integral calculus time 0~200.0[sec]
10.0 O 8-12 O O O X X
24
0h1818 PID D-Time PID differential time 0~1000[msec]
0 O 8-12 O O O X X
25
0h1819 PID F-Gain PID Feed forward gain 0~1000.0[%]
0.0 O 8-12 O O O X X
26
0h181A P Gain Scale Proportional gain scale 0~100.0[%]
100.0 X 8-12 O O O X X
27
0h181B PID Out LPF PID output filter 0~10000[ms]
0 O 8-12 O O O X X
29
0h181D PID Limit Hi PID upper limit frequency
PID lower limit
frequency[Hz]
~300[Hz]
60.00 O 8-12 O O O X X
30
0h181E PID Limit Lo PID lower limit frequency
-300 ~ PID upper
limit frequency[Hz]
-60 O 8-12 O O O X X
0 No
31
0h181F PID Out Inv PID output reversal
1 Yes
0:No X 8-12 O O O X X
32
0h1820 PID Out Scale PID output scale 0.1~1000[%]
100.0 X 8-12 O O O X X
34
0h1822 Pre-PID Freq
PID control period
movement frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
0.00 X 8-12 O O O X X
35
0h1823 Pre-PID Exit
PID control period
movement level
0~100[%]
0.0 X 8-12 O O O X X
36
0h1824 Pre-PID Delay
PID control period
movement delay time
0~9999[sec]
600 O 8-12 O O O X X
37
0h1825 PID Sleep DT
PID sleep mode delay
time
0~999.9[sec]
60.0 O 8-12 O O O X X
38
0h1826
PID Sleep
Freq
PID Sleep mode
frequency
0~maximum
frequency[Hz]
0.00 O 8-12 O O O X X
39
0h1827
PID WakeUp
Lev
PID Wake up level 0~100[%]
35 O 8-12 O O O X X
0 Below Level
1 Above Level
40
0h1828
PID WakeUp
Mod
PID Wake up mode
setting
2 Beyond Level
0:Below
Level
O 8-12 O O O X X
0 %
1 Bar
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 KPa
5 Hz
6 rpm
7 V
8 I
42 0h182A PID Unit Sel PID control period unit
selection
9 kW
0:% O 8-12 O O O X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-29
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
10 HP
11 ℃
12 ℉
43 0h182B PID Unit Gain PID unit gain 0~300[%] 100.00 O 8-12 O O O X X
0 X 0.01
1 X 0.1
2 X 1
3 X 0.1
44 0h182C PID Unit Scale PID unit scale
4 X 0.01
2:x 1 O 8-12 O O O X X
45 0h182D PID P2-Gain PID 2
nd
proportional gain 0~1000[%] 100.0 X 8-12 O O O X X


























Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-30
13.1.9 Parameter mode – Auto sequence operation group (ÎAUT)

Auto sequence operation Group (PAR Î AUT)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 10 O O O O X X
0 Auto-A
01 0h1901 Auto Mode auto operation type
1 Auto-B
0:Auto-A X 8-51 O O O X X
02
Note30) 0h1902 Auto Check
Auto operation
terminal delay time
0.02~2.00[sec] 0.10 X 8-51 O O O X X
03 0h1903 Seq Select
sequence type
selection
1~2 1 O 8-51 O O O X X
04
Note31) 0h1904 Step Number 1
Number of
sequence 1 steps
1~8 2 O 8-51 O O O X X
05
Note32) 0h1905 Step Number 2
Number of
sequence 2 steps
1~8 2 O 8-51 O O O X X
10
Note33) 0h190A Seq 1/1 Freq 1/1 step frequency
starting frequency
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
11.00 O 8-51 O O O X X
11 0h190B Seq 1/1 XcelT 1/1 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
12 0h190C Seq 1/1 SteadT
1/1 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
13 0h190D Seq 1/1 Dir
1/1 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
14 0h190E Seq 1/2 Freq 1/2 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
21.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
15 0h190F Seq 1/2 XcelT 1/2 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
16 0h1910 Seq 1/2 SteadT
1/2 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
17 0h1911 Seq 1/2 Dir
1/2 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
18 0h190E Seq 1/3 Freq 1/3 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
31.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
19 0h190F Seq 1/3 XcelT 1/3 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
20 0h1910 Seq 1/3 SteadT
1/3 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
21 0h1915 Seq 1/3 Dir
1/3 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
22 0h1906 Seq 1/4 Freq 1/4 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
41.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
23 0h1907 Seq 1/4 XcelT 1/4 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
24 0h1918 Seq 1/4 SteadT
1/4 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
25 0h1919 Seq 1/4 Dir
1/4 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
26 0h191A Seq 1/5 Freq 1/5 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
51.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X
27 0h191B Seq 1/5 XcelT 1/5 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
28 0h191C Seq 1/5 SteadT
1/5 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
1 Forward
29 0h191D Seq 1/5 Dir
1/5 operation
direction 1 Auto-B
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O
X X
30 0h191E Seq 1/6 Freq 1/6 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-31
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
31 0h191F Seq 1/6 XcelT 1/6 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
32 0h1920 Seq 1/6 SteadT
1/6 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
1 Forward
33 0h1921 Seq 1/6 Dir
1/6 operation
direction 1 Auto-B
1:Forward 8-59 8-52 O O O
X X
34 0h1922 Seq 1/7 Freq 1/7 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
51.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X
35 0h1923 Seq 1/7 XcelT 1/7 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
36 0h1924 Seq 1/7 SteadT
1/7 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
0 Reverse
37 0h1925 Seq 1/7 Dir
1/7 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O
X X
38 0h1926 Seq 1/8 Freq 1/8 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
21.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X
39 0h1927 Seq 1/8 XcelT 1/8 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
40 0h1928 Seq 1/8 SteadT
1/8 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
0 Reverse
41 0h1929 Seq 1/8 Dir
1/8 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O
X X
43
Note34) 0h192B Seq 2/1 Freq 2/1 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
12.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X
44 0h192C Seq 2/1 XcelT 2/1 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
45 0h192D Seq 2/1 SteadT
2/1 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
0 Reverse
46 0h192E Seq 2/1 Dir
2/1 operation
direction
1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O
X X
47 0h192F Seq 2/2 Freq 2/2 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
22.00 O 8-52 O O O
X X
48 0h1930 Seq 2/2 XcelT 2/2 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
49 0h1931 Seq 2/2 SteadT
2/2 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O
X X
0 Reverse
50 0h1932 Seq 2/2 Dir
2/2 operation
direction
1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O
X X
51 0h1933 Seq 2/3 Freq 2/3 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
32.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
52 0h1934 Seq 2/3 XcelT 2/3 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
53 0h1935 Seq 2/3 SteadT
2/3 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
1 Forward
54 0h1936 Seq 2/3 Dir
2/3 operation
direction
1 Auto-B
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
52 0h1937 Seq 2/4 Freq 2/4 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
42.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
56 0h1938 Seq 2/4 XcelT 2/4 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
57 0h1939 Seq 2/4 SteadT
2/4 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
1 Forward
58 0h193A Seq 2/4 Dir
2/4 operation
direction 1 Auto-B
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-32
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
59 0h193B Seq 2/5 Freq 2/5 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
52.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
60 0h193C Seq 2/5 XcelT 2/5 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
61 0h193D Seq 2/5 SteadT
2/5 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
62 0h193E Seq 2/5 Dir
2/5 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
63 0h193F Seq 2/6 Freq 2/6 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
60.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
64 0h1940 Seq 2/6 XcelT 2/6 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
65 0h1941 Seq 2/6 SteadT
2/6 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
66 0h1942 Seq 2/6 Dir
2/6 operation
direction 1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
67 0h1943 Seq 2/7 Freq 2/7 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
52.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
68 0h1944 Seq 2/7 XcelT 2/7 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
69 0h1945 Seq 2/7 SteadT
2/7 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
70 0h1946 Seq 2/7 Dir
2/8 operation
direction
1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
71 0h1927 Seq 2/8 Freq 2/8 step frequency
0.01~maximum
frequency[Hz]
22.00 O 8-52 O O O X X
72 0h1948 Seq 2/8 XcelT 2/8 Acc/Dec time 0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
73 0h1949 Seq 2/8 SteadT
2/8 steady speed
operation time
0.1~600.0[sec] 5.0 O 8-52 O O O X X
0 Reverse
74 0h194A Seq 2/8 Dir
2/8 operation
direction
1 Forward
1:Forward O 8-52 O O O X X
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.

Note 30)
AUT group is displayed only when APP-0 1(App Mode) is set as “Auto Sequence”.
Note 31)
AUT-04 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 Seq Select) is set as “1”.
Note 32)
AUT-05 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “2”.
Note 33)
AUT-10~41 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “1”.
Note 34)
AUT-43~74 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “2”.


















Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-33
13.1.10 Parameter mode – Option card function group (ÎAPO)

Option Card Function Group (PAR Î APO)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 20 O O O O O O
0 None
1 Feed-Back
01
Note35)
0h1A01
Enc
Opt Mode
encoder function item
2 Reference
0:None O 8-17 O O O O O
0 Line Driver
1
Totem or
Com 04 0h1A04
Enc
Type Sel
encoder type selection
2
Open
Collector
0:Line
Driver
X 8-19 O O O O O
0 (A+B)
1 -(A+B) 05 0h1A05
Enc
Pulse Sel
encoder pulse direction
2 A
0:
(A+B)
X 8-19 O O O O O
06 0h1A06
Enc
Pulse Num
Number of encoder pulses
10~4096 1024 X 8-19 O O O O O
08 0h1A08
Enc Monitor Feed Back monitor
- - O 8-19 O O O O O
09 0h1A09
Pulse Monitor Reference monitor
- - O - O O O O O
10 0h1A0A
Enc Filter encoder input filter
0~10000[msec] 3 O - O O O O O
11 0h1A0B
Enc Pulse x1 Enc input minimum pulse
0~100[kHz] 0.0 O - O X O X O
12 0h1A0C
Enc Perc y1
output% at Enc minimum
pulse
0~100[%] 0.00 O - O X O X O
13 0h1A0D
Enc Pulse x2 Enc input maximum pulse
0~200[kHz] 100 O - O X O X O
14 0h1A0E
Enc Perc y2
Enc maximum pulse시
output%
0~100[%] 100 O - O X O X O
20
Note36)
0h1A14
Aux Motor Run
display of number of
auxiliary motor movement
0~4 0 O 8-56 O O O X X
21 0h1A15
Starting Aux
starting auxiliary motor
selection
1~4 1 X 8-56 O O O X X
22 0h1A16
AutoOp Time auto change operation time
XX:XX[Min] 0:00 O 8-56 O O O X X
23 0h1A17
Start Freq 1
1st auxiliary motor starting
frequency
0~60[Hz] 49.99 O 8-56 O O O X X
24 0h1A18
Start Freq 2
2nd auxiliary motor starting
frequency
0~60[Hz] 49.99 O 8-56 O O O X X
25 0h1A19
Start Freq 3
3nd auxiliary motor starting
frequency
0~60[Hz] 49.99 O 8-56 O O O X X
26 0h1A1A
Start Freq 4
4thauxiliary motor starting
frequency
0~60[Hz] 49.99 O 8-56 O O O X X
27 0h1A1B
Stop Freq 1
1st auxiliary motor stop
frequency
0~60[Hz] 15.00 O 8-56 O O O X X
28 0h1A1C
Stop Freq 2
2nd auxiliary motor stop
frequency
0~60[Hz] 15.00 O 8-56 O O O X X
29 0h1A1D
Stop Freq 3
3ndauxiliary motor stop
frequency
0~60[Hz] 15.00 O 8-56 O O O X X
30 0h1A1E
Stop Freq 4
4thauxiliary motor stop
frequency
0~60[Hz] 15.00 O 8-56 O O O X X





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-34
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
31 0h1A1F Aux Start DT
auxiliary motor starting
delay time
0~3600.0[sec] 60.0 O 8-56 O O O X X
32 0h1A20 Aux Stop DT
auxiliary motor stop delay
time
0~3600.0[sec] 60.0 O 8-56 O O O X X
33 0h1A21 Num of Aux
auxiliary motor number
selection
0~4 4 X 8-57 O O O X X
0 No
34 0h1A22
Regul
Bypass
bypass selection
1 Yes
0:No X
8-57 O O O X X
0 None
1 Aux 35 0h1A23
Auto Ch
Mode
auto change mode
selection
2 Main
1: Aux X
8-57 O O O X X
36 0h1A24 Auto Ch Time auto change time 0~99:00[min] 72:00 O
8-57 O O O X X
0 No
38 0h1A26 Interlock interlock selection
1 Yes
0:No O
8-57 O O O X X
39 0h1A27 Interlock DT
interlock movement delay
time
0.1~360.0
[sec]
5.0 O
8-57 O O O X X
40 0h1A28 Actual Pr Diff
auxiliary motor movement
pressure difference
0~100[%] 2 O
8-57 O O O X X
41 0h1A29 Aux Acc Time
main motor accelerating
time when number of
pumps decreases
0~600.0[sec] 2.0 O
8-61 O O O X X
42 0h1A2A
Aux Dec
Time
main motor decelerating
time when number of
pumps increases
0~600.0[sec] 2.0 O
8-57 O O O X X
58
Note37)
0h1A3A
PLC LED
Status
PLC option LED status - - O Option O O O O O
59 0h1A3B PLC S/W Ver
PLC option card S/W
version
- 1.X O Option O O O O O
60 0h1A3C PLC Wr Data 1 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
61 0h1A3D PLC Wr Data 2 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
62 0h1A3E PLC Wr Data 3 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
63 0h1A3F PLC Wr Data 4 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
64 0h1A40 PLC Wr Data 5 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
65 0h1A41 PLC Wr Data 6 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
66 0h1A42 PLC Wr Data 7 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
67 0h1A43 PLC Wr Data 8 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
76 0h1A44 PLC Rd Data 1 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
77 0h1A45 PLC Rd Data 2 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
78 0h1A41 PLC Rd Data 3 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
79 0h1A42 PLC Rd Data 4 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-35
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
80 0h1A43 PLC Rd Data 5 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
81 0h1A44 PLC Rd Data 6 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
82 0h1A45 PLC Rd Data 7 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
83 0h1A46 PLC Rd Data 8 0~FFFF[Hex] 0000 O Option O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 35)
APO-01~14 codes are displayed only when the encoder board is mounted.
Note 36)
APO-20~42 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “MMC”.
Note 37)
APO-58~83 codes are displayed only when PLC option board is mounted.








































Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-36
13.1.11 Parameter mode – Protective function group (ÎPRT)

Protective Function Group (PAR Î PRT)
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00
- Jump Code jump code 0~99
40 O O O O O O
0 Normal Duty
04
0h1B04 Load Duty
Load amount
setting 1 Heavy Duty
1:Heavy
Duty
X 10-2 O O O O O
Bit 00~11
1
Output phase
open 05
0h1B05 Phase Loss Chk
input/output phase
open protection
2
Input phase
open
00 X 10-7 O O O O O
06
0h1B06 IPO V Band
input phase open
voltage band
1~100[V]
40 X 10-7 O O O O O
07
0h1B07 Trip Dec Time
decelerating time
in case of failure
0~600[sec]
3.0 O 10-9 O O O O O
0 No
08
0h1B08 RST Restart
starting selection
in case of failure
reset
1 Yes
0:No O 8-38 O O O O O
09
0h1B09 Retry Number
Number of auto
restarts
0~10
0 O 8-38 O O O O O
10
Note38)
0h1B0A Retry Delay
Auto restart delay
time
0~60.0[sec]
1.0 O 8-38 O O O O O
0 None
1 Warning
2 Free-Run
11
0h1B0B Lost KPD Mode
movement in case
of Keypad
command loss
3 Dec
0:None O 10-8 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run
2 Dec
3 Hold Input
4 Hold Output
12
0h1B0C Lost Cmd Mode
movement in case
of speed
command loss

5 Lost Preset
0:None O 10-9 O O O O O
13
Note39)
0h1B0D Lost Cmd Time
Speed command
loss judgment time
0.1~120[sec]
1.0 O 10-9 O O O O O
14
0h1B0E Lost Preset F
operation
frequency in case
of speed
command loss
starting frequency
~maximum
frequency[Hz]
0.00 O 10-9 O O O O O
0 Half of x1
15
0h1B0F AI Lost Level
Analog input
loss judgment
level
1 Below x1
0:Half of
x1
O 10-9
O O O O O
0 No
17
0h1B11 OL Warn Select
overload alarm
selection 1 Yes
0:No
O 10-2
O O O O O
18
0h1B12 OL Warn Level
overload alarm
level
30~180[%]
150 O 10-2 O O O O O
19
0h1B13 OL Warn Time
overload alarm
time
0~30.0[sec]
10.0 O 10-2 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run 20
0h1B14 OL Trip Select
movement in case
of overload failure
2 Dec
1:Free-Run O 10-2 O O O O O






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-37
Page
Control Mode
No.
Commu
nication
No.
Function
Display
Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
atio
n

V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
22 0h1B16 OL Trip Time
overload failure
time
0~60[sec] 60.0 O 10-2 O O O O O
0 No
25 0h1B19 UL Warn Sel
light load alarm
selection 1 Yes
0:No O 10-12 O O O O O
26 0h1B1A UL Warn Time
light load alarm
time
0~600.0[sec] 10.0 O 10-12 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run 27 0h1B1B UL Trip Sel
light load failure
selection
2 Dec
0:None O 10-12 O O O O O
28 0h1B1C UL Trip Time
light load failure
time
0~600[sec] 30.0 O 10-12 O O O O O
29 0h1B1D UL LF Level
light load lower
limit level
10~30[%] 30 O 10-12 O O O O O
30 0h1B1E UL BF Level
light load upper
limit level
10~100[%] 30 O 10-12 O O O O O
0 None
31 0h1B1F No Motor Trip
movement in case
of no motor
detection
1 Free-Run
0: None O 10-16 O O O O O
32
Note40)
0h1B20 No Motor Level
no motor
detection current
level
1~100[%] 5 O 10-16 O O O O O
33 0h1B21 No Motor Time
no motor
detection delay
0.1~10.0[sec] 3.0 O 10-16 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run
34 0h1B22
Thermal-T Sel

movement
selection after
motor overheat
detection sensor
detection
2 Dec
0:None O 10-6 O O O O O
0 None
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
35 0h1B23
Thermal In
Src
motor overheat
detection sensor
input selection
4 I2
0:None X 10-6 O O O O O
36 0h1B24 Thermal-T Lev
motor overheat
detection
sensor failure level
0~100[%] 50.0 O 10-6
0 Low
37 0h1B25 Thermal-T Area
motor overheat
detection
sensor failure area
1 High
0:Low O 10-6 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run 40 0h1B28 ETH Trip Sel
electric thermal
failure
selection 2 Dec
0:None O 10-1 O O O O O
0 Self-cool
41 0h1B29 Motor Cooling
motor
cooling fan type
1 Forced-cool
0:Self-cool O 10-1 O O O O O
42
0h1B2A ETH 1min
electric thermal 1
minute rating
120~200[%]
150 O 10-1 O O O O O
43
0h1B2B ETH Cont
electric thermal
consecutive rating
50~200[%]
120 O 10-1 O O O O O
Bit 000~111
1 Accelerating
2 Steady speed
50 0h1B32 Stall Prevent
stall preventing
movement
3 Decelerating
000 X 10-3 O O X O X






Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-38
Control Mode
No.
Communic
ation No.
Function
Display
Name
Setting Range

Initial
Value
Shift
in
Oper
atio
n
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
52 0h1B34 Stall Level 1 stall level 1 30~250[%] 180 X 10-3 O O X O X
53 0h1B35 Stall Freq 2 stall frequency 2
stall frequency 1
~stall frequency 2[Hz]
60.00 O 10-3 O O X O X
54 0h1B36 Stall Level 2 stall level 2 30~250[%] 180 X 10-3 O O X O X
55 0h1B37 Stall Freq 3 stall frequency 3
stall frequency 2
~stall frequency 4[Hz]
60.00 O 10-3 O O X O X
56 0h1B38 Stall Level 3 stall level 3 30~250[%] 180 X 10-3 O O X O X
57 0h1B39 Stall Freq 4 stall frequency 4
stall frequency 3
~maximum frequency
[Hz]
60.00 O 10-3 O O X O X
58 0h1B3A Stall Level 4 stall level 4 30~250[%] 180 X 10-3 O O X O X
66 0h1B42 DB Warn %ED
DB resistance
warning level
0~30[%] 0 O 10-11 O O O O O
70 0h1B46
Over SPD
Freq
overspeed
judgment
frequency
20~130[%] 120.0 O 10-13 X X O X O
72 0h1B48
Over SPD
Time
overspeed
judgment time
0.01~10.00[sec] 0.01 O 10-13 X X O X O
0 No
73 0h1B49
Speed Dev
Trip
speed error failure
1 Yes
0:No O 10-14 X X O X X
74 0h1B4A
Speed Dev
Band
speed error width
2~maximum
frequency[Hz]
20.00 O 10-14 X X O X X
75 0h1B4B
Speed Dev
Time
speed error
judgment time
0.1~1000.0[sec] 1.0 O 10-14 X X O X X
0 No
77 0h1B4D
Enc Wire
Check
Encoder option
connection check 1 Yes
0:No O 10-14 X X O X O
78 0h1B4E
Enc Check
Time
Encoder
connection check
time
0.1~1000.0[sec] 1.0 O 10-14 X X O X O
0 Trip
79 0h1B4F FAN Trip Mode
cooling fan failure
selection 1 Warning
0:Trip O 10-14 O O O O O
0 None
1 Free-Run 80 0h1B50 Opt Trip Mode
movement
selection in case
of option trip 2 Dec
1:Free-Run O 10-16 O O O O O
81 0h1B51 LVT Delay
low voltage failure
judgment delay
time
0~60.0[sec] 0.0 X 10-14 O O O O O
* The grey code refers to hidden code, emerging only in case of setting of the code.
Note 38)
PRT-10 codes are displayed only when PRT-09(Retry Number) is set above “0”.
Note 39)
PRT-13~15 codes are displayed only when PRT-12(Lost Cmd Mode) is not “NONE”.
Note 40)
PRT-32~33 codes are displayed only when PRT-31(No Motor Trip is set as “Free-Run”.













Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-39
3.1.12 Parameter mode – 2nd motor function Group (ÎM2)
2nd motor function Group (PAR Î M2)
Control Mode
No
.
Commu
nication
No.
Function Display Name
Setting
Range
Initial Value
Shift
in
Oper
ation
Page
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code jump code 0~99 14 O O O X O X
Below 75kW 20.0
04 0h1C04 M2-Acc Time accelerating time 0~600[sec]
Above 90kW 60.0
O 8-41 O O X O X
Below 75kW 30.0
05 0h1C05 M2-Dec Time decelerating time 0~600[sec]
Above 90kW 90.0
O 8-44 O O X O X
0~ 0.2kW
06 0h1C06 M2-Capacity motor capacity
21 185kW
- X 8-44 O O X O X
07 0h1C07 M2-Base Freq base frequency 30~400[Hz] 60.00 X 8-44 O O X O X
0 V/F
1 V/F PG
2
Slip
Compen
3
Sensorle
ss-1
08 0h1C08 M2-Ctrl Mode control mode
4
Sensorle
ss-2
0:V/F X 8-44 O O X O X
10 0h1C0A M2-Pole Num motor pole 2~48 X 8-44 O O X O X
11 0h1C0B M2-Rated Slip rated sleep speed 0~3000[rpm] X 8-44 O O X O X
12 0h1C0C M2-Rated Curr motor rated current 1~200[A] X 8-44 O O X O X
13 0h1C0D M2-Noload Curr
motor no load
current
0.5~200[A] X 8-44 O O X O X
14 0h1C0E M2-Rated Volt motor rated voltage 180~220[V] X 8-44 O O X O X
15 0h1C0F M2-Efficiency motor efficiency 70~100[%] X 8-44
16 0h1C10 M2-Inertia Rt load inertia ratio 0~8 X 8-44
17 - M2-Rs stator resistance 0~9.999[Ω] X 8-44
18 - M2-Lsigma leak inductance 0~99.99[mH] X 8-44
O O X O X
19 - M2-Ls stator inductance 0~999.9[mH] X 8-41 O O X O X
20 - M2-Tr rotor time constant
25~5000[mse
c]
Depends on
motor capacity
X 8-41 O O X O X
0 Linear
1 Square 25 0h1C19 M2-V/F Patt V/F pattern
2 User V/F
0:Linear X 8-41 O O X O X
26 0h1C1A M2-Fwd Boost forward torque boost 0~15[%] X 8-41 O O X O X
27 0h1C1B M2-Rev Boost reverse torque boost 0~15[%]
Below 75kW: 2.0
Above 90kW: 1.0
X 8-41 O O X O X
28 0h1C1C M2-Stall Lev stall preventing level 30~150[%] 150 X 8-41 O O X O X
29 0h1C1D M2-ETH 1min
electric thermal 1
minute rating
100~200[%] 150 X 8-42 O O X O X
30 0h1C1E M2-ETH Cont
electric thermal
consecutive rated
50~150[%] 100 X 8-42 O O X O X
40 0h1C28 M2-LoadSpdGain
revolution display
gain
0.1~6000.0% 100.0 O 8-42 O O O O O
0 x 1
1 x 0.1
2 x 0.01
3 x 0.001
41 0h1C29 M2-LoadSpdScal
revolution display
scale
4 x 0.0001
0:x 1 O 8-42 O O O O O
0 rpm
42 0h1C2A M2-LoadSpdUnit
revolution display
unit 1 mpm
0:rpm O 8-42 O O O O O





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-40
13.1.13 Trip mode (TRP current (or Last-x))

Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)
No. Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Trip Name ( x) failure type display - -
9-6
01 Output Freq
operation frequency in case of
failure
- -
9-6
02 Output Current output current in case of failure - -
9-6
03 Inverter State Acc/Dec status in case of failure - -
9-6
04 DCLink Voltage DC voltage - -
9-6
05 Temperature NTC temperature - -
9-6
06 DI State status of Input terminals - 0000 0000
9-6
07 DO State status of output terminals - 000
9-6
08 Trip On Time failure time since power on - 0/00/00 00:00 9-6
09 Trip Run Time failure time since start to run - 0/00/00 00:00
9-6
0 No
10 Trip Delete deletion of failure history
1 Yes
0:No
9-6

13.1.14 Config Mode (CNF)

Config Mode (CNF)
No. Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Jump Code jump code 0~99 1 -
01 Language Sel
keypad language
selection
English English
10-19
02 LCD Contrast
LCD brightness
adjustment
- -
8-49
10 Inv S/W Ver body S/W version - 1.XX 8-49
11 KeypadS/W Ver keypad S/W version - 1.XX 8-49
12 KPD Title Ver keypad S/W version - 1.XX 8-49
20
Note35)
Anytime Para status display item 0 Frequency 0: Frequency
6-18
9-4
21 Monitor Line-1
monitor mode
display item1
1 Speed 0: Frequency
6-18
9-1
22 Monitor Line-2
monitor mode
display item2
2 Output Current
2:Output
Current
6-18
9-1
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
23 Monitor Line-3 monitormodedisplayitem
3
7 DI State
3:Output
Voltage
6-18
9-1





Chapter 13 Table of Functions

13-41
8 DO State
9 V1 Monitor[V]
10 V1 Monitor[%]
11 I1 Monitor[mA]
12 I1 Monitor[%]
13 V2 Monitor[V]
14 V2 Monitor[%]
15 I2 Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%]
17 PID Output
18 PID ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
22 Trq Bias Ref
23 Speed Limit
24 Load Speed


0 No 24 Mon Mode Init monitor mode
initialization 1 Yes
0:No
9-1
30 Option-1 Type option slot 1 type display 0 None 0:None
Option
31 Option-2 Type option slot 2 type display 1 PLC 0:None
Option
2 Profi
3 Ext. I/O
32 Option-3 Type option slot 3 type display
4 Encoder
0:None
Option
0 No
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
3 BAS Grp
4 ADV Grp
5 CON Grp
6 IN Grp
7 OUT Grp
8 COM Grp
9 APP Grp
10 AUT Grp
11 APO Grp
12 PRT Grp
40 Parameter Init parameter initialization
13 M2 Grp
8-45
0 View All
41 Changed Para
changed parameter
display
1 View Changed
0:View All 8-46
0 None
1 JOG Key
42 Multi Key Sel multi-function key item
2 Local/Remote
0:None
8-47
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

We, the undersigned,

Representative: LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
Address: LS Tower, Hogye-dong, Dongan-gu,
Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do 1026-6,
Korea

Manufacturer: LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
Address: 181, Samsung-ri, Mokchon-Eup,
Chonan, Chungnam, 330-845,
Korea

Certify and declare under our sole responsibility that the following apparatus:

Type of Equipment: Inverter (Power Conversion Equipment)

Model Name: STARVERT-iS7 series

Trade Mark: LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.


conforms with the essential requirements of the directives:

2006/95/EC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the
harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to Electrical Equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits

2004/108/EC Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility

based on the following specifications applied:

EN 61800-3:2004
EN 50178:1997

and therefore complies with the essential requirements and provisions of the
2006/95/CE and 2004/108/CE Directives.

Place: Chonan, Chungnam,
Korea


__________________________________ (Signature /Date)

Mr. Dok Ko Yong Chul/Factory Manager dd
(Full name / Position)
ⅱ ⅲ
EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS
LS inverters, iS7 series
PR0062
FE SERIES ( Standard )
FILTER
INVERTER
MOTOR
SHIELDED CABLE
THE LS RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FF ( Footprint ) - FE ( Standard )
SERIES, HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH FREQUENCY LG INVERTERS.
THE USE OF LS FILTERS, WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP TO ENSURE
TROUBLE FREE USE ALONG SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO
CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY STANDARS TO EN 50081.
IN CASE OF A LEAKAGE CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY,
IT MAY BE FAULT AT POWER-ON OR OFF.
IN AVOID THIS CASE, THE SENSE CURRENT OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER
THAN VALUE OF LAKAGE CURRENT AT WORST CASE IN THE BELOW TABLE.
CAUTION
RFI FILTERS
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
To conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary that these instructions be followed as closely as possible. Follow the usual safety
procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter, inverter and motor must be made by a
qualified electrical technician.
1- ) Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current, voltage rating and part number are correct.
2- ) For best results the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains supply of the wiring enclousure, usually
directly after the enclousures circuit breaker or supply switch.
3- ) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be
taken to remove any paint etc... from the mounting holes and face area of the panel to ensure the best possible earthing of the
filter.
4- ) Mount the filter securely.
5- ) Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE, connect any earth cables to the earth stud provided. Connect
the filter terminals marked LOAD to the mains input of the inverter using short lengths of appropriate gauge cable.
6- ) Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core ( output chokes ) as close to the inverter as possible. Armoured or screened cable
should be used with the 3 phase conductors only threaded twice through the center of the ferrite core. The earth conductor
should be securely earthed at both inverter and motor ends. The screen should be connected to the enclousure body via and
earthed cable gland.
7- ) Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual.
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGHTS ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND THAT INCOMING MAINS AND
OUTGOING MOTOR CABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED.
H
D
Y
X
W
PR0062
FS SERIES ( output chokes )
iS7 series / Standard Filters
INVERTER POWER CODE CURRENT VOLTAGE
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
DIMENSIONS
L W H
MOUNTING
Y X
WEIGHT MOUNT FIG.
OUTPUT
CHOKES
THREE PHASE NOM. MAX.
SV0300iS7-4 30kW FE-T070-( x ) 70A 380VAC
1.3mA 150mA 350 x 180 x 90 338 x 146 7.5 Kg --- A FS – 3
SV0370iS7-4 37kW FE-T100-( x ) 100A 380VAC
1.3mA 150mA 425 x 200 x 130 408 x 166 13.8 Kg --- A FS – 3
SV0450iS7-4 45kW
SV0550iS7-4 55kW
FE-T120-( x ) 120A 380VAC
1.3mA 150mA 425 x 200 x 130 408 x 166 13.8 Kg --- A FS – 3
SV0750iS7-4 75kW FE-T170-( x ) 170A 380VAC 1.3mA 150mA 480 x 200 x 160 468 x 166 16 Kg --- A FS – 3
SV0900iS7-4 90kW FE-T230-( x ) 230A 380VAC
1.3mA 150mA 580 x 250 x 205 560 x 170 23.5 Kg --- A FS – 4
SV1100iS7-4 110kW
SV1320iS7-4 132kW
FE-T400-( x ) 400A 380VAC
1.3mA 150mA 392 x 260 x 116 240 x 235 10.3 Kg --- B FS – 4
SV1600iS7-4 160kW FE-T600-( x ) 600A 380VAC 1.3mA 150mA 392 x 260 x 116 240 x 235 10.3 Kg --- B FS – 4

( x ) ( 1 ) Industrial environment EN50081-2 (A class)
( 2 ) Domestic and industrial environment EN50081-1 (B class)
Vector Motor Control Ibérica S.L.
C/ Mar del Carib, 10
Pol. Ind. La Torre del Rector
08130 Santa Perpètua de Mogoda
(BARCELONA) ESPAÑA
Tel. (+34) 935 748 206
Fax (+34) 935 748 248
info@vmc.es
www.vmc.es
Y
L
X W
H
FE SERIES ( Standard )
X W
Y
L
FIG.A FIG.B
H
CODE D W H X Ø
FS – 3 48 150 110 125 x 30 5
FS – 4 58 200 170 180 x 45 5

Maker LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
Installation
(Start-up)
Date

Model No. SV-iS7
Warranty
Period

Name
Address
Customer
Information
Tel.
Name
Address
Sales Office
(Distributor)
Tel.

Warranty period is 12 months after installation or 18 months after manufactured when the
installation date is unidentified. However, the guarantee term may vary on the sales term.

IN-WARRANTY service information

If the defective part has been identified under normal and proper use within the guarantee term,
contact your local authorized LS distributor or LS Service center.

OUT-OF WARRANTY service information
The guarantee will not apply in the following cases, even if the guarantee term has not expired.

Damage was caused by misuse, negligence or accident .
Damage was caused by abnormal volt age and peripheral devices’ malfunct ion (failure).
Damage was caused by an eart hquake, f ire, flooding, light ning, or ot her nat ural calamit ies.
When LS nameplat e is not att ached.
When t he warranty period has expired.


War r ant y

Revision History
No Date Edition Version No. Changes
1 2007.11 First Edition 1.00 -
2 2009.02 2nd Edition 1.10 IP54 added/Contents revised

Thank you for purchasing LS Variable Frequency Drives!

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
To prevent injury and property damage, follow these instructions. Incorrect operation due to ignoring instructions will cause harm or damage. The seriousness of which is indicated by the following symbols. This symbol indicates the instant death or serious injury if you don’t follow instructions This symbol indicates the possibility of death or serious injury This symbol indicates the possibility of injury or damage to property

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

■ The meaning of each symbol in this manual and on your equipment is as follows. This is the safety alert symbol. Read and follow instructions carefully to avoid dangerous situation. This symbol alerts the user to the presence of “dangerous voltage” inside the product that might cause harm or electric shock. ■ After reading this manual, keep it in the place that the user always can contact easily. ■ This manual should be given to the person who actually uses the products and is responsible for their maintenance.

i

WARNING
Do not remove the cover while power is applied or the unit is in operation.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.

Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock due to high voltage terminals or charged capacitor exposure.

Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring, even if the input power is not applied.
Otherwise, you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock.

Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC link voltage is discharged with a meter (below DC 30V).
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Operate the switches with dry hands.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Do not use the cable when its insulating tube is damaged.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

ii

CAUTION
Install the inverter on a non-flammable surface. Do not place flammable material nearby.
Otherwise, fire could occur.

Disconnect the input power if the inverter gets damaged.
Otherwise, it could result in a secondary accident and fire.

Do not touch the inverter while the input power is applied or after removed. It will remain hot for a couple of minutes.
Otherwise, you may get bodily injuries such as skin-burn or damage.

Do not apply power to a damaged inverter or to an inverter with parts missing even if the installation is complete.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.

Do not allow lint, paper, wood chips, dust, metallic chips or other foreign matter into the drive.
Otherwise, fire or accident could occur.

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
(1) Handling and installation Handle according to the weight of the product. Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Install according to instructions specified in this manual. Do not open the cover during delivery. Do not place heavy items on the inverter. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact. Use the ground impedance of 100ohm or less for 200 V Class and 10ohm or less for 400V class. Take protective measures against ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) before touching the PCB for inspection or installation. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:

iii

Ambient temp. Environment Relative humidity Storage temp. Location Altitude, Vibration Atmospheric pressure

CT Load: - 10 ~ 50℃ (non-freezing) VT Load: -10 ~ 40℃(non-freezing) Note: Use below 80% of load when used under VT Load at 50℃ 90% RH or less (non-condensing) - 20 ~ 65 ℃ Protected from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust Max. 1,000m above sea level, Max. 5.9m/sec2 (0.6G) or less 70 ~ 106 kPa

(2)

Wiring Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or RFI filter to the output of the inverter. The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor. Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage. Reversing connection of the input/output terminals(R,S,T / U,V,W) could damage the inverter. Only authorized personnel familiar with LS inverter should perform wiring and inspections. Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or have bodily injury.

(3)

Trial run Check all parameters during operation. Changing parameter values might be required depending on the load. Always apply permissible range of voltage to the each terminal as indicated in this manual. Otherwise, it could lead to inverter damage.

(4)

Operation precautions When the Auto restart function is selected, stay away from the equipment as a motor will restart suddenly after an alarm stop. The Stop key on the keypad is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately. If an alarm reset is made with the reference signal present, a sudden start will occur. Check that the reference signal is turned off in advance. Otherwise an accident could occur. Do not modify or alter anything inside the inverter. Motor might not be protected by electronic thermal function of inverter. Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected. In case of input voltage unbalance, install AC reactor. Power Factor capacitors and generators may become overheated and damaged due to potential high frequency noise transmitted from inverter.

iv

(8) General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a circuit breaker. A micro surge voltage attributable to wiring constant is generated at motor terminals.Use an insulation-rectified motor or take measures to suppress the micro surge voltage when driving 400V class motor with inverter. a cover or partially open. Refer to Chapter 12 for periodic inspection (parts replacement). Verify capability of motor or machinery prior to operating unit. (6) Maintenance. Before operating unit and prior to user programming. Always place the cover with circuit breakers and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter. inspection and parts replacement Do not conduct a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter. Inverter can easily be set to high-speed operations. Stopping torque is not produced when using the DC-Break function. v . and may deteriorate insulation and damage motor. Install separate equipment when stopping torque is needed. (7) Disposal Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it. reset user parameters to default settings. Never run the inverter like this. (5) Fault prevention precautions Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.

Brief summarize of functions. It is recommended you read carefully this manual in order to use SV-iS7 series inverter properly and safely.Introduction to the Manual Introduction to the Manual This manual describes the specifications. Chapter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Basics Specifications Installation Wiring Peripheral Devices How To Use Keypad Basic Functions Applied Functions Monitor Functions Protective Functions Communication Functions Checking & Troubleshooting Table of Functions Title Contents Describes the precautions and basic items which should be learned before using the Inverter. i . Information on the operational status and troubles of the Inverter. Describes the protective functions for the motor and Inverter. The manual consists as follows. operation. Descriptions on the functions required for system application. The specifications of the RS-485 communication. Descriptions on the basic functions including frequency setting and operation command. The control specifications. ratings and types of the input and output Information on the use environment and installation method. Wiring information for the power supply and signal terminals. Descriptions on the failures and anomalies which may occur during operation. Peripheral devices which can be connected with the input and output terminals of the Inverter Descriptions on the display and operation keys on the main body of the Inverter. functions and maintenance of SV-iS7 series inverter and is for the users who have basic experience of using an inverter. installation.

3 1.1.2 1.1.1.1 2.1.2 1.4 1.2.75~22kW) Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V --------------------class (30~160kW) Other commons --------------------- 2.4 Names and Uses of Parts End product (not more than 75 kW) When the front cover is removed (not more --------------------than 75kW) End product (more than 90kW) --------------------- When the front cover is removed (more than --------------------90kW) Chapter 2 2.2.1.1 Specifications Specifications --------------------- 2-1 2-1 Rated Input and Output:: Input voltage of --------------------200V class (0.Contents Chapter 1 1.2 1.1.2.1 3.4 2-1 2-2 2-2 Chapter 3 3.1 1.1.2.3 2.75~22kW) Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V --------------------class (0.1.2 2.1.1 Installation Installation Cautions before installation ----------------------------------------- 3-1 3-1 i .5 Basics What You Should Know before Use Check of product Parts Preparation of device and Parts for operation Installation Distribution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1.1.1 1.1 1.3 1.

1 4.11 4.3 4. IP21 Type) Dimension and Weight of Frame (UL Enclosed Type 12.10 4. IP54 Type) Installation Guide (UL Enclosed Type12.8 4.1.1.1.1.Contents Exterior and Dimension (UL Enclosed Type 1.12 Wiring Wiring How to separate front cover when wiring (below 75kW) How to separate front cover when wiring (90~160 kW) Built-in EMC Filter Wiring precaution Grounding Terminal wiring diagram (Power terminal block) Terminals of main circuit ----------------------------------------- 4-1 4-1 4-3 4-4 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-14 4-15 4-16 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Specifications of power terminal block and --------------------Exterior fuse Control terminal line diagram (Basic I/O terminal block) Control terminal line diagram (Insulated I/O terminal block) Control circuit terminal Specifications of signal terminal block distribution --------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------- ii .4 --------------------- 3-3 3-9 3-13 --------------------- --------------------- 3.1.1 4. IP21 Type) External dimension (UL Enclosed Type12.1.3 3.1.5 4.4 4.9 4.5 3. IP54 Type) 3.2 4.6 --------------------- 3-14 3-15 --------------------- Chapter 4 4.6 4.7 4.1. IP54 Type) Dimension and Weight of frame (UL Enclosed Type 1.1.1.1.2 3.1.1.1.1.1.1.

1.1.1 6.2.Contents 4.1.3 6.1.1. Electronic --------------------contactor and Reactor Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors --------------------- Chapter 6 6.1 5.2.1 6.4 6.5 6.1.6 6.1 5.1.2 4.8 6.1.1.1.2 5.7 6.1.3 Operation Checking Easy start Easy start operation Checking for normal working --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-18 Chapter 5 5.2 6.9 How To Use Keypad How To Use Keypad Standard KEYPAD appearance and description (Graphic keypad) Menu composition Mode shift Group shift Code (Function item) shift Parameter setting Operating status monitoring Failure status monitoring How to initialize parameter --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-1 6-1 6-6 6-8 6-10 6-12 6-15 6-17 6-20 6-22 iii .1.2.2 4.3 Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices Composition of peripheral devices ----------------------------------------- 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-4 Specifications of wiring switch.1 4.

1.1.13 7.19 7.1. braking Frequency limit Selection of second operating method Multi-function input terminal control Digital input and output control by extended I/O option card ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- iv .1.1.C.15 7.12 7.20 7.1.1.7 7.1.1 7.8 7.1 7.21 7.1.1.2 7.1.1.1.3 7.Contents Chapter 7 7.14 7.1.1.5 7.9 7.1.4 7.22 Basic Functions Basic Functions How to set frequency Analog command frequency fixation Changing frequency to revolution Sequential frequency setting Operating command setting method Local/Remote by-pass operation using multifunction keys --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-1 7-1 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-19 7-21 7-21 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-26 7-28 7-30 7-31 7-31 Prevention of forward or reverse rotation: Run --------------------Prevent Run Immediately with power on: Power-on Run Restarts by reset after trip: RST Restart Setting of accelerating/decelerating time and pattern Acc/Dec pattern setting Acc/Dec stop command V/F voltage control Torque boost Motor output voltage adjustment Selection of starting method Stop method selection Stop after D.1.10 7.1.1.1.17 7.1.16 7.1.6 7.18 7.11 7.

23 Applied Functions Applied Functions --------------------- 8-1 8-1 8-4 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-11 8-12 8-17 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-27 8-31 8-33 8-32 8-34 8-35 8-36 8-38 8-39 8-41 8-42 v Override frequency setting using auxiliary --------------------frequency command Jog operation UP/DOWN operation 3-WIRE operation Safe operation mode Dwell operation Slip compensation operation PID control Auto tuning V/F operation using speed sensor Sensorless(I) vector control Sensorless(II) vector control Vector control Torque control Droop control Speed/Torque change function Kinetic energy buffering Energy saving operation Speed search operation Automatic restart Operation sound selection 2nd Motor operation By pass operation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- .4 8.20 8.1.1.9 8.1.6 8.7 8.1.15 8.1 8.1 8.13 8.1.8 8.14 8.3 8.1.1.1.1.Contents Chapter 8 8.10 8.17 8.1.1.5 8.16 8.1.1.1.2 8.22 8.18 8.1.1.19 8.11 8.1.1.1.21 8.1.1.1.1.12 8.

1.36 8.1.1.31 8.1.40 Cooling fan control Input power frequency selection Inverter input voltage selection Parameter writing and reading Parameter initialization Parameter view lock and Key lock Addition to User Group (USR Grp) Addition to Macro Group Easy start Other Config(CNF) mode parameters Timer function Auto sequence operation Traverse operation Brake control Multi-function output On/Off control MMC function Regeneration evasion function for press ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-43 8-44 8-44 8-44 8-45 8-45 8-47 8-48 8-48 8-49 8-50 8-52 8-53 8-54 8-56 8-56 8-61 Chapter 9 9.26 8.3 9.24 8.Contents 8.1.39 8.34 8.1.2 9.1.25 8.1.5 Monitor Functions Monitor Functions Monitor in operation .1.1.1 9.1.1.1.35 8.1.1.1.1.1.4 9.29 8.30 8.28 8.1.32 8.27 8.Keypad Failure status monitor – Keypad Analog output --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-1 9-1 9-5 9-7 9-10 Selection of relay function and multi-function --------------------output terminal of terminal block Failure status output by relay and multi--------------------function Output terminal of terminal block 9-16 vi .37 8.38 8.1 9.1.1.33 8.1.

1.1.13 10.16 10.9 10.4 10.20 Protective Functions Motor protection Overload warning and troubleshooting (Trip) Stall prevention Motor overheat sensor input Inverter and sequence protection External failure signal Inverter overload Keypad command loss Braking resistance use rate setting Underload warning and failure Overspeed error Speed variation failure Speed sensor error detection Fan failure detection Selection of action in case of low voltage failure Output blocking by multi-function terminal How to terminate failure state Selection of action in case of option card failure Detection of motor not connected to inverter output terminal Table of failures/warnings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-4 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-9 10-11 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-16 10-17 vii .1.14 10.10 10.1.17 10.2 10.11 10.1.1.7 10.7 9.8 10.12 10.3 10.6 10.1.1.6 9.1.1 10.1.8 Output terminal delay time and type of contact --------------------point Operating time monitor Selection of keypad language ----------------------------------------- 9-17 9-18 9-18 Chapter 10 Protective Functions 10.18 10.19 10.1.1.1.1.15 10.1.1.5 10.1.1.1.1.1.1 10.Contents 9.1.1.

7 11.1.1.2 11.4 11.3 11.1.1 11.Contents Chapter 11 Communication Functions 11.11 11.2.1 11.3 11.2.1.2.2.2.1.1.1.1 11.12 Communication Functions Introduction Specifications Composition of communication system Basic setting Operating command and frequency setting Command loss protection Virtual multi-function input setting Caution in parameter setting for communication Communication frame monitoring Special communication area setting Parameter group for periodical data transmission Parameter group for transmission of Macro Grp and U&M Mode User ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 11-1 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-5 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-9 11-10 11-11 11-11 11-13 11-16 11-19 11.5 11.1.7 Communication protocol LS INV 485 protocol Detailed reading protocol Detailed writing protocol Monitor registration detailed protocol Modbus-RTU protocol Existing iS5/iG5/iG5A compatible common area parameter iS7 extended common area parameter viii .2.10 11.2 11.8 11.4 11.5 11.1.9 11.1.1.6 11.1.2 11.6 11.2.

1.1 13.1.1.1.4 12.1.5 Checking and troubleshooting Protective functions Alarm functions Troubleshooting Replacement of cooling fan Daily and regular checkup list ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-1 12-1 12-3 12-4 12-6 12-8 Chapter 13 Table of Functions 13.1 13.10 Parameter mode – Option card function group --------------------( APO) 13-33 ix .Contents Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12.9 --------------------- 13-30 13.8 --------------------- 13-27 13.1.2 12.1.1 12.1.1.2 Table of Functions Parameter mode – DRV group ( DRV) Parameter mode – Basic function group ----------------------------------------- 13-1 13-1 13-3 --------------------- ( BAS) 13.1 12.5 --------------------- 13-16 13.1.1.6 --------------------- 13-20 13.7 --------------------- 13-24 13.1.1.1.1.3 13.3 12.4 Parameter mode – Parameter mode – Extended function group (PAR ADV) Parameter mode – Control function group ( CON) Parameter mode – Input terminal block function group ( IN) Parameter mode – Output terminal block function group ( OUT) Parameter mode – Communication function group ( COM) Parameter mode – Applied function group ( APP) Parameter mode – Auto sequence operation group ( AUT) --------------------- 13-7 13-11 --------------------- 13.

12 13.1.14 13.1.Contents 13.11 Parameter mode – Protective function group --------------------( PRT) Parameter mode – 2nd motor function group --------------------( M2) Trip mode (TRP Current (or Last-x)) Config mode (CNF) User/Macro mode – MC1 operation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13-36 13-39 13-40 13-40 13-43 13-44 13.1.1.1.15 13.1.16 User/Macro mode – Traverse function group ( MC2) x .13 13.

1. direction or surroundings in order to prevent decrease in the life and performance of the inverter.3 Preparation of device and Parts for operation Preparation for operation might slightly vary.7 [kW] 5. L S Inverter 0150 0185 0220 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750 0900 1100 1320 1600 Wide-Use Inverter 18. call our company’s branch offices(see the back cover of the manual).5 [kW] 2.2 [kW] 3.1.1.1.4 Installation Make sure you install the product correctly considering the place. 1. Check also whether the product has been damaged during delivery.2 Parts If you have any doubt about the product or found the product damaged. SV 008 Capacity of Applied Motor 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 0110 0.5 [kW] - 2: 3-Phase 200~230[V] 4: 3-Phase 380~480[V] Blank: Blank: Non.1 Check of product Take the inverter out of the box.Chapter 1 Basics 1. check the rating shown on a side of the product body and whether the inverter type and rated output are exactly what you ordered.5 [kW] 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] iS7 Series Name - 2 Input Voltage N Keypad O UL F D EMC DCR 1.5 [kW] 7. 1.NonS: GLCD E: Enclosed EMC DCR N: NON O:OPEN (Graphic Loader) UL Type1 F:EMC D:DCR P: Enclosed UL Type 12 110 [kW] 132 [kW] 160 [kW] 1-1 .75 [kW] 1.1 What You Should Know before Use 1. Prepare parts according to the use.

communication option connection part Wiring bracket I/O board & terminal Power terminal 1-2 .1 End product (not more than 75 kW) Keypad Front cover: removed when wiring Volt for front cover fix Wiring bracket Ground terminal Cooling FAN 1.Chapter 1 Basics 1.2 When the front cover is removed (not more than 75 kW) Keypad connection terminal Communication option connection part Encoder option Inverter condition display BAR PLC. electric motor and operating signals(control signals) to the terminal block.2 Names and Uses of Parts 1.1. extension I/O. 1.2.2. the inverter and peripheral devices might be damaged. If you fail to connect them correctly.5 Distribution Connect the power supply.

1-3 .Chapter 1 Basics 1. Communication option Connection part Shield plate Safety option board (Selectable function) Power Busbar (R/S/T..4 When the front cover is removed (more than 90kW) SCR snubber circuit Communication option board connection part Encoder option board Keypad connection terminal I/O board and terminal FAN SMPS circuit Main SMPS circuit Inverter condition display LED PLC.3 End Product (more than 90kW) Keypad Volt for upper front cover fix (left side) Volt for lower front cover fix (left side) Lower front cover Power input Cooling fan Upper front cover Volt for upper front cover fix (right side) Volt for lower front cover fix (right side) Signal input Ground 1.2. U/V/W.2. P/N) Remark Please refer to option board manual for option board relations. Extension I/O.

5 29.2 10.5 6.1.1 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 200V class (0.9 3.5 12.) [V] Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%) Rated CT 8.6 24 32.5 39 26 44 33 57 40 57 52 * Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only 2-1 .1 9.9 60 74 0185 25 18.5 [kW] 0.2 32 46 0110 15 11 17.9 Current [A] VT 7 10.1.75~22kW) Type : SV xxx iS7 – 4x 1) 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 10 7.75 1.9 3.3 7.6 15.5 12.8 13.5 2.0 4.4 42 58 52 69 60 88 75 96 107 * Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only 2.8 22.5 28.3 12.3 7.7 39 45 0220 30 22 34.2 74 88 0220 30 22 33.5 [kW] 0.3 24 30 0150 20 15 22.5 2.+10%.9 30 39 0185 25 18.5 88 124 Motor Applied [HP] 1 2 3 5 7.1 Specifications 2.5 5.5 4 6 8 12 Current[A] VT 4 6 8 12 16 Output Frequency 4) 0 ~ 400 [Hz] Output Voltage [V] 5) 3-phase 380 ~ 480V Available Voltage 3-phase 380 ~ 480 VAC (-15%~+10%) [V] Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%) Rated CT 4.6 14.1 [kVA] 3) Rated CT 2.2 16 24 0110 15 11 18.1 9.7 5.75~22kW) Type : SV xxx iS7 – 2x 1) 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 10 7.2 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V class (0.5 2) Rated Capacity 1.9 18.5 2) Rated Capacity 1.75 1.2 3.3 45 61 Motor Applied [HP] 1 2 3 5 7.8 21.4 21 Current [A] VT 3.Chapter 2 Specifications 2.1 [kVA] 3) Rated CT 5 8 12 16 24 Current[A] VT 8 12 16 24 32 Output 4) 0 ~ 400 [Hz] Frequency Output Voltage 5) 3-phase 200 ~ 230V [V] Available Voltage 3-phase 200 ~ 230 VAC (-15%.5 28 Rated Input Rated Output 41.0 4.7 5.5 6.2 3.8 Rated Input Rated Output 25.5 46 60 0150 20 15 22.3 10.

double reduction. slip compensation.4 Other commons 1) Control Control Method Frequency Setting Resolving Power Frequency Degree V/F Pattern Overload Capacity Torque Boost V/F control. VT current rating :110% for 1 minute Manual torque boost.1. Sensorless-2.+10%) [V] Input Frequency 50 ~ 60 [Hz] (±5%) Rated CT 57 69 83 113 154 195 239 286 Current[A] VT 90 109 123 162 195 237 282 350 Rated Input Rated Output 362 403 - * Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only 1) Motor Applied indicates the maximum capacity applied to use of a standard 4 pole standard motor. In case of Sensorless-2.3 Rated Input and Output : Input voltage of 400V class (30~160kW) Type : SV xxx iS7 – 4x 1) 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750 0900 1100 1320 1600 225 160 248 325 370 - Motor Applied [HP] 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 180 [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 2) Rated Capacity 46 57 69 84 116 139 170 201 [kVA] 3) Rated CT 61 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 Current[A] VT 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 325 Output Frequency 4) 0 ~ 400 [Hz] (Sensorless-1:0~300Hz. You can select the output voltage as you want below the supplied power voltage. you can set the frequency at up to 300Hz by selecting 3. The current rating is based on CT current. 4 as the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode). V/F PG.06Hz (maximum frequency : 60Hz) Digital command operation : 0. 3) The output of rated current is limited according to setting of the carrier frequency (CON-04). 2) Rated capacity : the input capacity of a 200V class is based on 220V and that of a 400V class is based on 440V. 4) In case of Sensorless-1.1. user V/F CT current rating :150% for 1 minute. 4 as the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode). you can set the frequency at up to 120Hz by selecting 3.1% of the maximum frequency Linear. sensorless vector-1.Chapter 2 Specifications 2. sensorless vector-2.01Hz Analog command : 0. 2.Vector:0~120Hz) Output Voltage [V] 5) 3-phase 380 ~ 480V Available Voltage 3-phase 380 ~ 480 VAC (-15%. Automatic torque boost * Non DCR products are provided warranty service when used in CT(Heavy duty) load rating only 2-2 . vector control Digital command : 0.01% of the maximum frequency Analog command operation : 0. 5) The maximum output voltage does not go up over the supplied power voltage.

Easy Start. N. UL enclosed type 1 (Option) Separate product (Below 22kW): sealed IP54 type. Vibration Below 1.10 ~ 50℃ (with no ice or frost) Surrounding Temperature VT (Normal Duty) load: . etc stall prevention. Energy buffering. Failure output and inverter operation output Below DC 24V 50mA Below (N.C. sequential frequency-high/medium/low.9m/sec2 (0. external break trip. cooling fan failure.. Auto restarting. overload protection. reset. UL enclosed type 12 CT (Heavy Duty) load: .O. Inverter By-pass. 3-wire operation. frequency decrease.10~ 40℃ (with no ice or frost) (It is recommended that you use less than 80% load when you use VT load at 50℃) Preservation Temperature -20°C ~ 65°C Surrounding Humidity Below 90% RH of relative humidity (with no dew formation) Altitude. Power breaking. Main inverter body operation during option operation. light load. Flux breaking. Frequency limit. control during stop. 2-3 .75~15kW (200/400V class). acceleration and deceleration stop selectable. voltage. hardware failure. current. direct current voltage 1) The Functions for Multi-function terminal available according to IN-65~75 parameter setting of IN Group. jog operation.6G) Cooling Method Environment There should be no corrosive gas. motor overheating. 0 ~ 20[mA] Digital: keypad PID control. frequency increase. no motor trip. overload. UL enclosed type 1 (Option) Protection Structure Above 90kW: Open type (IP 20). flammable gas. external trip. over current. speed command loss. oil mist or dust. multi . change to general operation during PID operation. below 5. D. rated output) Over CT class 15 msec (VT class 8 msec) : automatically restarts 2) Operation at the CT (Heavy Duty) current rating 4) Structure and Use Environment Forced air blast cooling: 0. NPN (Sink) / PNP (Source) selectable Multi-function terminal (8 points) P1 ~ P81) Function: forward operation. selection of a second motor. up-down operation. keypad command loss. -10 ~ 10[V]. Auto tunning Flying Start. Second function. encoder error.) AC250V 1A. Slip compensation.C. MMC. Leakage current reduction. pre-PID failure. low voltage. Below DC 30V 1A Input Output Multi-function open collector terminal Multi-function relay terminal Analog output 0 ~ 10 Vdc (below 20mA) : selectable from frequency. 3-wire operation. output imaging. inverter overheat. 3) Protective Function Trip Alarm Instantaneous Interruption2) over voltage. 30~160kW (400V class) Below 75 kW: Open type (IP 21).level acceleration and deceleration – high/medium/low. earth current detection. emergency stop.Chapter 2 Specifications 2) Operation Operating Method Frequency Setting Operating Function Selectable among keypad/terminal block/communication operation Analog: 0 ~ 10[V]. communication error. 22kW (400V class) Inhalation cooling: 22kW (200V class).000m. Frequency jump. DC break. fan failure. Reverse rotation prevention. frequency command loss. analog command frequency fixation. reverse operation. Below CT class 15 msec (VT class 8 msec) : operation continues (within rated input voltage.

1 Cautions before installation Be careful so that the plastic parts of the inverter may not be damaged. Life of the inverter greatly influenced by the surrounding temperatures. A: over 10cm Enough space is required for the distribution duct not cooling air B over 5cm B over 5cm to block the cooling air.Chapter 3 Installation 3. B : over 20cm is necessary when you install an inverter above 30kW 3-1 . a press or truck.1 Installation 3. Sufficient space is required to prevent heat saturation because the inverter emits heat. Do not install the product where there is vibration. Do not move the product holding the cover only. Inverter A: over10cm Built-in cooling fan Remark Over 50cm. make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the permitted temperature (-10 ~ 50°C). <Measurement Points of Surrounding Temperature> Install the inverter on an inflammable surface because its temperature rises high during operation.1.

3-2 . be careful about the location of the ventilation fan and inverter. Note Arrange the panels in order to the hot air generated by the heating of the inverter should be released. If you install two or more inverters inside the panel.Chapter 3 Installation Caution Avoid direct rays of light or a warm and humid place. See the figure below. Ventilation Ventilation Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Built-in cooling fan Acceptable (O) Unacceptable (X) Acceptable (O) Unacceptable (X) When two or more units are installed Where the ventilation fan is installed Install the inverter upright using screws or bolts so that the inverter does not move. Install the inverter in a closed panel or clean place free from foreign substances such as oil mist and fiber dust.

2 Exterior and Dimension (UL Enclosed Type 1. IP21 Type) 1) SV0008-0037iS7 (200V/400V) 2) SV0055-0075iS7 (200V/400V) 3-3 .Chapter 3 Installation 3.1.

Chapter 3 Installation 3) SV0110-0150iS7 (200V/400V) 4) SV0185-0220iS7 (200V/400V) 3-4 .

Chapter 3 Installation 5) SV0300-0450iS7 (400V) 3-5 .

Chapter 3 Installation 6) SV0550-0750iS7 (400V) 3-6 .

Chapter 3 Installation 7) SV0900-1100iS7 (400V) 3-7 .

Chapter 3 Installation 8) SV1320-1600iS7 (400V) 3-8 .

1.3 External dimension (UL Enclosed Type12.Chapter 3 Installation 3. IP54 Type) 1) SV0008-0037iS7 (200V/400V) 3-9 .

Chapter 3 Installation 2) SV0055-0075iS7 (200V/400V) 3-10 .

Chapter 3 Installation 3) SV0110-0150iS7 (200V/400V) 3-11 .

Chapter 3 Installation 4) SV0185-0220iS7 (200V/400V) 3-12 .

4 17.1.4 300.4 41 41 41 63 63 101 101 114 114 Non DCR Product weight[Kg] 4.6 461.8 23.5 10 10 20 20 30 30 27.5 4.4 300.5 28 28 28 45 45 Non EMC Product weight[Kg] 5.5 8.5 23.0 5.6 461.5 4.5 Non EMC&DCR Product weight[Kg] 4.Chapter 3 Installation 3. DCL.5 4.0 5.8 16.4 27.9 22.8 25. (excluding box packing) 30~160 kW products have only DCL option.4 784 784 861 861 200 200 200 200 225 225 284 284 298 298 298 298 300.0 5.5 5.5 4.2 17.9 25. 3-13 .4 8.5 4.0 9.9 23.6 594 594 594 663.5 5.1 28 28 28 45 45 - Note Weight[Kg] above indicates total weight including EMC FILTER.7 14 14 22.3 16.4 663.6 461.4 371 371 423 423 423 423 Weight [Kg] 5.7 20.9 19.5 5.3 9.5 7.2 27 25. IP 21 Type) Inverter Capacity SV0008iS7-2/4 SV0015iS7-2/4 SV0022iS7-2/4 SV0037iS7-2/4 SV0055iS7-2/4 SV0075iS7-2/4 SV0110iS7-2/4 SV0150iS7-2/4 SV0185iS7-2 SV0220iS7-2 SV0185iS7-4 SV0220iS7-4 SV0300iS7-4 SV0370iS7-4 SV0450iS7-4 SV0550iS7-4 SV0750iS7-4 SV0900iS7-4 SV1100iS7-4 SV1320iS7-4 SV1600iS7-4 W[mm] 150 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 280 280 280 280 300 300 300 370 370 510 510 510 510 H[mm] D[mm] 284 284 284 284 355 355 385 385 461.5 4.4 Dimension and Weight of frame (UL Enclosed Type 1.7 7.3 23.

6 19.7 34.1 27.8 23.Chapter 3 Installation 3.7 7.6 19.2 7.1.2 7.7 7.8 12.1 34.1 34.9 25.5 Dimension and Weight of Frame (UL Enclosed Type 12.75~22 kW products have only IP54 type product.5 9.1 Note Weight[Kg] above indicates total weight.9 7.2 10.2 34.7 6.9 29.9 27.7 6.2 8.6 25.9 38.1 12.9 29.2 12.1 31 31 6.3 38.2 8.7 6. IP54 Type) Inverter Capacity W[mm] H[mm] D[mm] SV0008iS7-2/4 SV0015iS7-2/4 SV0022iS7-2/4 SV0037iS7-2/4 SV0055iS7-2/4 SV0075iS7-2/4 SV0110iS7-2/4 SV0150iS7-2/4 SV0185iS7-2 SV0220iS7-2 SV0185iS7-4 SV0220iS7-4 204 204 204 204 254 254 313 313 343 343 343 343 419 419 419 419 461 461 591 591 751 751 751 751 208 208 208 208 232 232 294 294 316 316 316 316 EMC&DCR Non DCR Non EMC Non EMC&DCR Weight[Kg] Weight[Kg] Weight[Kg] Weight[Kg] 8. 3-14 .2 31 7.4 22.7 7. (excluding packing) 0.2 8.2 22.3 34.7 9.2 7.3 22.2 10.7 12.

Chapter 3 Installation 3.Release the upper/lower screw on the transparent keypad cover and then separate the transparent cover from the inverter.Separate the keypad from the inverter. .6 Installation Guide (UL Enclosed Type12. depending on the size of the frame) around the edge of the cover.1. 3-15 .Loosen the captive screws (nine or thirteen. . 2) How to separate IP54 front cover . IP54 Type) 1) How to separate IP54 keypad cover and keypad .Remove the cover.

Remove the four rubber packings on the corner. .Chapter 3 Installation 2) Mounting the inverter .Refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for the detailed wiring.Connects the input/output power cable as followed picture. . 3) Power cable wiring . .Place the four rubber packings to the each corner.Mount the inverter onto fixing hole on the panel and securely tighten the four screws or bolts. 3-16 .

Place the transparent keypad cover on the keypad and tighten the upper/lower screw. .Chapter 3 Installation 4) How to attach the IP54 front cover .Securely tighten the screw at the corner of front cover. . 3-17 . .Connect the cable to the keypad and then place the front cover on the inverter.Place the front cover matching with plate hole.

pull the upper part of keypad. Connection wire for Loader when keypad is disconnected.1 Wiring 4.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. 2) How to assemble plug when connecting Keypad As showing figures below.1. install the keypad after connecting the plug. 4-1 . 1) How to separate Keypad Under pressing the lower end of keypad.1 How to separate front cover when wiring Remove Keypad on the product and release fixed volt of the lower end of up cover.

Before wiring. I/O board control circuit Terminal Power circuit terminal [IP54 Type] Separate the transparent keypad cover releasing fixed bolt and then separate keypad. Separate the front cover releasing fixed bolt. Keypad fixed cover Keypad Keypad cover fixed bolt Front cover fixed bolt Wiring hole Built-in circulation fan 4-2 . IP54 product must be installed on the panel.Chapter 4 Wiring 3) How to separate front cover [IP21 Type] Separate front cover releasing the fixed bolt.

U/V/W) and signal cable (terminal block. communication operation. encoder option. 4-3 .2 How to separate front cover when wiring (90~160 kW) Releasing the right/left fixed bolt on the lower front cover and get down the lower front cover and then open it. P/N. Now. you can wire power part (R/S/T.1.Chapter 4 Wiring 4.). PLC option etc.

EMC filter OFF 2) How to remove EMC Filter ON/OFF connector (Less than 7. please use radio pincher or tweezers. It’s initial setting is OFF. When reinstalling. In case separate with connector.5kW Products) .Cut off plastic cover which marked below. EMC Filter works.) 4-4 . Connect please short pin on the EMC filter ON/OFF Connector.Chapter 4 Wiring 4.If short circuit connector is connected with SW1 which is inside. .3 Built-in EMC Filter iS7 inverter has built-in EMC Filter.1. (if it is hard to separate them. If you are to ON. It has effect in reducing air electric wave noise of inverter input part.5kW Product) EMC filter ON EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF Check the voltage by a tester in 10minute after cutting the power supply. 1) How to set EMC Filter functions (Less than 7. be sure to hook the hasp of the connector. pull the connector while pressing fixed hasp.

Do not use EMC filter when the input is asymmetrical way such as Delta connection. EMC filter is ON and EMC filter is OFF if it is connected in insulated connection terminal. Metal terminal for EMC filter ON Insulated terminal for EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter has effect in reducing air electronic wave while being used in power source of symmetrical ground method. Initial set is OFF. Caution Leakage current increases while EMC filter is ON.Chapter 4 Wiring 3) How to set EMC Filter functions (11~22kW Products) EMC filter ON/OFF set terminal is located in lower part of the 11~22KW Terminal as shown figure below. Asymmetrical Ground structure R(L1) 1 phase is grounded in Delta connection S(L2) T(L3) L Grounded in single phase end N Non-grounded 3 Phase connection Grounded middle tap of 1 phase in Delta connection R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) 4-5 . When the green wire is connected in upper metal connection terminal. Be sure to use EMC filter in symmetrical ground method such as Y connection. It may cause an electric shock.

Wire fragments can cause faults.5 8 14 22 38 60 100 4-6 . 8) Always check whether the LCD and the charge lamp for the power terminal are OFF before wiring terminals. and can hinder communication equipment near the inverter.5 ~ 22 kW 30 ~ 45 kW 55 ~ 75 kW 90 ~ 110 kW 132 ~ 160 kW Grounding wire size ( mm²) 200V class 3. 3) Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the inverter. the cable length should be less than 50m (164ft). 4) For input and output.4 Wiring precaution 1) The internal circuits of the inverter will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output terminals (U.5 Grounding 1) The inverter is a high switching device. 2) The ground impedance for 200V class is 100 ohm or less and 400V class 10ohm or less . Grounding wire should be as short as possible and should be connected to the ground point as near as possible to the inverter. use wires with sufficient size to ensure voltage drop of less than 2%.1.5 5.75 ~ 3. Doing so may damage these components. Motor torque may drop of operating at low frequencies and a long wire run between inverter and motor. 3) Do not leave wire fragments inside the inverter. 5) The cable length between inverter and motor should be less than 150m (492ft). To reduce noise. Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury.) 6) The main circuit of the inverter contains high frequency noise. overcurrent protective feature may operate or equipment connected to the output side may malfunction.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. It can cause the Trip or damage of inverter 4.7kW 5. V.5 ~ 7. 9) Do not connect with MC at output pare of inverter and make MC On/Off during operation. Ground the inverter to avoid electrical shock. 2) Use ring terminals with insulated caps when wiring the input power and motor wiring. 7) Do not use power factor capacitor. and malfunctions. Due to increased leakage capacitance between cables. breakdowns. W). Inverter Capacity 0. and leakage current may flow.5 kW 11 ~ 15 kW 18. 4) As a minimum. (But for products of less than 30kW. grounding wire should meet the specifications listed below.1. install line noise filters on the input side of the inverter. or RFI filters on the output side of the inverter.5 14 22 400V class 2 3. Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding. The charge capacitor may hold high-voltage even after the power is disconnected. surge killers.

Ground terminal must be grounded. If ground terminal of inverter is far from the inverter. 4-7 .Chapter 4 Wiring 4. Ground cable must be wire as short as possible. Do not use ground to command for ground cable.1. welding machine and power machine etc.75~160kW have built-in DC Reactor.5kW Ground terminal R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) External Fuse P(+) B N(-) U V W 3Phase 3Phase AC AC 3-phase AC input power supply Dynamic brake resistor IM IM Motor 2) Wiring of 11~22kW Product R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) B N(-) U V W 3) Wiring of 30~75kW Product R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P1(+) P2(+) N(-) U V W 4) Wiring of 90~160kW Product R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) N(-) U V W Note Products over 11kW have a linear arrangement of terminal blocks.electric potential of inverter terminal ground can be unstable because leakage current of inverter can be gernerated form inverter. Products for 0. so it does’t necessary any other DC Reactor connection.6 Terminal wiring diagram (POWER terminal block) 1) Wiring of Inverter below 7.

Connects dynamic brake resistor.V.S(L2).75 ~ 22 kW (200V/400V) R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) B N(-) U V W 3 Phase AC Input DBR Dynamic Brake Resistor Motor Terminal Symbol R(L1).W Terminal Name AC power supply input (+) AC voltage terminal (-) DC voltage terminal Dynamic brake resistor Inverter output Description Connects normal AC input (+) DC link voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. Connects the 3 phase induction motor 4-8 .T(L3) P1(+) P2.N(-) N(-) U. Connects the 3 phase induction motor 2) 30 ~ 75 kW (400V) R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P1(+) P2 N(-) U V W 3 Phase AC Input DBU P N B1 B2 Motor DBR Terminal Symbol R(L1).V.T(L3) P(+) N(-) P(+).S(L2).1.B U.7 Terminals of main circuit 1) 0.W Terminal Name AC power supply input (+)DC voltage terminal Dynamic brake unit connection (-)DC voltage terminal Inverter output Description Connects normal AC input (+)DC link voltage terminal Voltage terminal connecting Dynamic brake unit (-)DC link voltage terminal.

Chapter 4 Wiring

3) 90 ~ 160 kW (400V)
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) P(+) N(-) U V W

3 Phase AC Input

P N B1 B 2

Dynamic brake unit

Motor

DBR Dynamic brake resistor Terminal Symbol R(L1),S(L2),T(L3) P(+) N(-) P(+), N(-) U,V,W Terminal Name AC power supply input (+)DC voltage ternimal (-)DC voltage terminal External brake unit connection Inverter output Description Connects normal AC input (+)DC link voltage terminal (-)DC link voltage terminal Voltage terminal connecting Dynamic brake unit. Connects the 3 phase induction motor.

4-9

Chapter 4 Wiring

4.1.8 Specifications of power terminal block and Exterior fuse
Inverter applied Terminal screw size Screw torque1) (Kgf·cm) Cable2) mm² R,S,T U,V,W AWG R,S,T U,V,W Exterior fuse Current
10A 15A 20A 32A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A 160A 10A 15A 20A 32A 35A 50A 63A 70A 100A 125A 160A 200A 250A 350A 400A 450A 450A

Voltage
500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V

0.75 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 1.5 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 2.2 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 3.7 kW M4 7.1~12 4 4 12 12 5.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 6 6 10 10 200V 7.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 10 10 8 8 11 kW M6 30.6~38.2 16 16 6 6 15 kW M6 30.6~38.2 25 22 4 4 18.5 kW M8 61.2~91.8 35 30 2 2 22 kW M8 61.2~91.8 35 30 2 2 0.75~1.5kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 2.2 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 3.7 kW M4 7.1~12 2.5 2.5 14 14 5.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 4 2.5 12 14 7.5 kW M5 24.5~31.8 4 4 12 12 11 kW M5 24.5~31.8 6 6 10 10 15 kW M5 24.5~31.8 16 10 6 8 18.5 kW M6 30.6~38.2 16 10 6 8 400V 22 kW M6 30.6~38.2 25 16 4 6 30~37 kW M8 61.2~91.8 25 25 4 4 45 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 55 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 75 kW M8 61.2~91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 90 kW M12 182.4~215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 110 kW M12 182.4~215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 132 kW M12 182.4~215.0 150 150 300 300 160 kW M12 182.4~215.0 200 200 400 400 1) : Apply the prescribed torque for the terminal screws. If the screws are loose, it might cause a failure. 2) : Use 600V 75℃ copper lines.

The entire cable length should be below 200m. In case of connection of the motor, the entire length should not exceed 200m because if a motor is connected from a remote location, the over current protection function might started by the harmonics caused by the floating volume increase within the cables or a failure of the device connected to the secondary side might occur. The entire cable length should be below 200m too when you connect more than one motor. Do not use a triplex cable in case of distance wiring. (50m when below 3.7K) In case of lengthy wiring, Use thick wire in order to reduce line voltage drop and decrease the carrier frequency or use a micro surge filter. Line Voltage Drop[V]=(√3 X wire resistance [mΩ/m]X wire length[m] X Current[A])/1000 Distance between inverter and motor Permitted carrier frequency Up to 50 m Below 15 kHz Up to 100 m Below 5 kHz Over 100 m Below 2.5 kHz 4-10

Chapter 4 Wiring

4.1.9 Control terminal line diagram (Basic I/O terminal block)
NPN (Sink) /PNP (Source) set terminal I / PTC set terminal TR

1) How to set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source)
iS7 serves 2 sequence input terminal of control circuit: NPN mode (Sink mode) and PNP mode(Source mode). It is possible to change the logic of input terminal with NPN mode (Sink mode) and PNP mode (Source mode) by using NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) set terminal. Each mode connecting methods are follows.

(1) NPN mode(Sink mode) Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into NPN. CM (24V GND) is common terminal of contact point input signal. Initial set of Factory default is NPN mode (Sink mode).

NPN mode (Sink mode) PNP NPN

CM(24G)
Inner source(24V)

P1(FX) P2(RX)

4-11

Chapter 4 Wiring
(2) PNP mode (Source mode) – When use inner source Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into PNP. 24 (24V inner source) is common terminal of contact point input signal. PNP mode (Source mode) – Set NPN (Sink)/PNP (Source) switch into PNP When use exterior source. If you want try to use exterior 24V source, connect exterior source (-) terminal with CM (24V GND).

PNP

NPN

PNP mode (Source mode) – When using inner source

Inner source (24V)

24(24V) P1(FX)

P2(RX)

PNP

NPN

PNP mode (Source mode) – When using external source

CM (24G)

External Source + (24V)

P1(FX)

P2(RX)

4-12

Chapter 4 Wiring

1) Example of Distribution

Relay2 (Normal Open) A2 C2 A1 NC C1

24V Open Collectorpower Output supply Q1 P5 EG 24 P6 CM P7 P1 P8 P2 P3 P4 VR5G V1 I1

S+

RS485 Port SCM AO2 0~20mA Output 4~20mA Output

B1

CM VR+

5G AO1 0~10V Output

Relay1 (Normal Open) In case of analog In case of analog voltage input with current input Digital contact point input (NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support) variable resistance (4~20 mA input) (-10V~+10V input)

RS485 Port

Relay2 (Normal Open) A2 C2 A1 NC C1

Open Collector 24V power Output supply Q1 B1 P5 EG 24 P6 P4 5G VRV1 I1

CM P1 P7 P8

P2

P3

S+

S5G

CM AO1 AO2 0~10V Output 0~20mA Output 4~20mA Output

CM VR+

Relay1 (Normal Open) In case of analog voltage input with Digital contact point input (NPN/PNP, Sink/Source mode support) variable resistance (0V~+10V input) TR terminal is RS485 communication terminal resistor (120 Ω). In case of analog current input (4~20 mA input)

4-13

5G 5G AO1 AO2 0~20mA Output 4~20mA Output 0~10V Output CM VR+ VR- Relay1 (Normal Open) In case of analog Digital contact point input voltage input with (NPN/PNP.5G 5G AO1 AO2 0~20mA Output 4~20mA Output 0~10V Output B1 P6 CM VR+ VR- Relay1 (Normal Open) In case of analog Digital contact point input voltage input with (NPN/PNP.1. Sink/Source mode support) variable resistance (-10V~+10V input) In case of analog current input (4~20 mA 4-14 . Sink/Source mode support) variable resistance (0V~+10V input) In case of analog current input (4~20 mA input) RS485 Port 24V Open Collector power Relay2 (Normal Open) Output supply A2 C2 A1 NC C1 B1 Q1 P5 EG 24 P6 CM P1 P7 P8 P2 P3 P4 CM V1 I1 S+ S.10 Control terminal line diagram (Insulated I/O terminal block) NPN (Sink)/ PNP (Source) Set terminal TR I / PTC Set terminal 1) Example of Distribution 24V Open Collector power Output supply Q1 P5 EG 24 CM P1 P7 P8 P2 P3 P4 CM V1 I1 S+ RS485 Port Relay2 (Normal Open) A2 C2 A1 NC C1 S.Chapter 4 Wiring 4.

B1. 100mA. CM Multi-function relay 2 output A contact point RS-485 signal input terminal 4-15 .Biopolar(-10[V] ~10[V]) input resistance 20kΩ Becomes set frequency with input of DC 0~20mA input resistance 249Ω Common terminal of analog frequency setting signal and analog voltage and current terminals (note: In case Basic I/O. Power supply for analog frequency setting Maximum output is -12V. DV30V 1A) Fault signal: A1-C1 electrified (B1-C1 unelectrified) Normal signal: B1-C1 electrified (A1-C1 unelectrified) Output the signal while running. below 5A DC30V. Output current. below 100mA External power supply common earth terminal of the open collector Maximum output current: 150mA Protection function is activated to break output.11 Control circuit terminal 1) Contact point start function selection Terminal Type Terminal Name Symbol Multi-function P1~P8 input1~8 Contact point start function selection CM VR(+) VR(-) V1 Analog Frequency I1 Sequence common terminal Frequency setting power(+) terminal Frequency setting power(-) terminal Frequency setting (voltage) Frequency setting (current) Frequency setting common terminal Terminal Description Available by defining as multi-function input Common terminal of the contact point input terminal (note: In case of Basic I/O. Unipolar 0~+10[V]). (below AC250V 1A. common terminal are different from the CM common terminal) Select the one among Output frequency. Output current: 4~20mA (0~20mA) Maximum output current: 20mA DC 26V. DC voltage. Output current. C2 S+.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. common terminal is different from the 5G common terminal) Power supply for analog frequency setting Maximum output is +12V.S-. AC250V. C1 A2. DC voltage. Output voltage. below 5A RS-485 signal line (see Chapter 11 Communication Function of the manual. User defined multi-function output terminal.1. 100mA. Becomes set frequency with input of DC -10~10V.) Input signal Output Signal 5G A01 Analog A02 Multi-function analog voltage output terminal Multi-function analog current output terminal Multi-function terminal (open collector) Common terminal for open collector Exterior 24V power Fault signal output Q1 EG 24 Contact Point A1. Ouput voltage: 0~10V Maximum output voltage: 10V Maximum output current: 10mA Select the one among Output frequency.

Shield Type Twisted-pare Wire Caution Do not use more than 3M remote cable for the keypad. below 5A DC30V. RS485 power ground (Shield) connection terminal 0. below 5A AC250V. below 5A DC30V.0 14~22 0.0 14~22 Common terminal of analog frequency setting signal and analog current and voltage terminals DC26V.33 ~1.1. below 5A DC30V.75mm2 (18AWG). below 100mA 0.Chapter 4 Wiring 4.25 16~22 Maximum output current : 150mA AC250V. below 5A RS485 signal line For multi connection. Brand Würth Elektronik ref. you must put a ferrite in the wires of these signals.SCM Name Multi-function input terminal Contact point common terminal (In case of Basic I/O. Ex.12 Specifications of signal terminal block distribution Terminal Type P1~P8 CM VR+ VRV1 I1 AO1 AO2 5G Q1 EG 24 A1 B1 C1 A2 C2 S+.33 ~1. To prevent radiated emissions in the analogical and digital signals. below 5A AC250V. below 5A AC250V.25 16~22 Output voltage : +12V Maximum output voltage : 100mA Output voltage : -12V Maximum output voltage : 100mA Input voltage : 0~12V or -12~12V 0~20mA input Internal resistance : 249Ω Maximum output voltage : 10V Maximum output current : 10mA Maximum output current : 20mA 0. 74271132 4-16 . below 5A DC30V. 5G is different from CM) Multi-function terminal (open collector) Earth terminal for external power supply External 24V power supply Multi function relay 1 output A contact point Multi function relay 1 output B contact point Multi function relay 1 contact point common terminal Multi function relay 2 output A contact point Multi function relay 2 contact point common terminal RS485 signal input terminal RS485 common terminal mm Cable size 2 AWG Electric specifications Common earth for multi function input terminal 0. Failure of the signals on the keypad might occur.33 ~2.33 ~2. CM is different from 5G) Analog frequency setting (+) power supply Analog frequency setting (-) power supply Multi-function analog voltage input terminal Multi-function analog current input terminal Multi-function analog voltage output terminal Multi-function analog current output terminal Frequency setting common terminal (In case of Basic I/O. below 5A AC250V. below 5A DC30V.

Set the operation command method. Set the motor capacity used. Set the command frequency. Start Easy Set You can go Monitor Mode if select “No” 1. 1. 8. . 4. 4. (EX: 50Hz.5KW) DRV-14 Motor Capacity BAS-11 Pole Number 4. CNF-01 Language Sel 2. Set the rated frequency of the motor used.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. FX-RX-2. 4-17 .) 9.2.) DRV-06 Cmd Source DRV-01 Cmd Frequency * You can move to Monitor Mode by pressing ESC at any time while you set the Easy Start mode. 5. (EX:KEYPAD. Set the number of poles of the motor used.1 Easy start Easy Start gets started when power is first supplied after you purchase the product or power is re-supplied after the set parameters are all initialized. (Of the set values.Easy Start Mode does not operate during the inverter running. Select the language displayed on the KEYPAD. Set the inverter input voltage. (Only English is available now) 3. BAS-15 Rated Volt BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel BAS19 AC Input Volt 7. etc.Easy Start Mode gets started first even in case of an inverter trip. .2 Easy start operation It operates in the following sequence.2 Operation Checking IS7 provides EASY START MODE helping with the basic parameter setting using the keypad by distribution shown above when power is first supplied. 0V refers to the voltage equal to the inverter input voltage) 6.75KW.2. 60Hz. etc. FX/RX-1. Set the rated voltage of the motor used. Select whether to choose Easy Start. (EX: 0.

Forward direction Operation 4-18 . Otherwise. At this time.2. W.Chapter 4 Wiring 4. shaft of motor at the side of load rotates into counterclock wise direction. V. Command forward operation by pressing FWD please. it must be changed 2 terminals among the inverter output terminal U. Freq Ref Src of DRV-07 is 0: Keypad-1 and set DRV-01 : Cmd Frequency into temporary speed.3 Checking for normal working 1) Motor forward/reverse direction and Normal working checking by KEYPAD operation After setting Cmd Source of DRV-06 is 0: Keypad.

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices

5.1 Peripheral Devices
5.1.1 Composition of peripheral devices
It is required to connect the inverter correctly by selecting proper peripheral devices. Wrong system composition or connection might impair normal operation or cause significant life span decrease. At worst, the inverter might be damaged, so use the product properly according to the manual and cautions.

Use within the power supply specification for Power Supply specification the inverter. 200V Class:200~230V(-15%~+10%) 400V Class:380~480V(-15%~+10%) Distribution switch or short circuit switch High current flows in the inverter while power is supplied. Be careful when you select the switch because the inverter This does not have to be necessarily installed, Electric contactor (Possible to Select) but if you do, do not start or stop the inverter frequently with the contactor. It might decrease the life of the inverter. The reactor is necessary for installation where AC and DC reactor (Possible to Select) power factor improvement or input power capacity is high(over 1000kVA, distribution distance below 10m). Be careful when you select. The life of the inverter greatly affected by the Inverter installation place and Wiring surrounding temperature, make sure the temperature does not exceed the permitted range. Wrong wiring might cause damage to the product, therefore follow the installation Ground guide. Ground terminal must be grounded. Do not connect static condenser, surge killer, Inverter output radio noise filter to output. It might cause damage or failure. Ground terminal must be grounded. Ground
5-1

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices

5.1.2 Specifications of wiring switch, Electronic contactor and Reactor
1) Specifications of Wiring switch and Electronic contactor Inverter capacity 0008iS7-2 0015iS7-2 0022iS7-2 0037iS7-2 0055iS7-2 0075iS7-2 0110iS7-2 0150iS7-2 0185iS7-2 0220iS7-2 Wiring switch Short circuit switch (LS) ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS53b,EBS53 ABS103b,EBS103 ABS103b,EBS103 ABS203b,EBS203 ABS203b,EBS203 ABS203b,EBS203 Electronic contactor GMC-12 GMC-12 GMC-18 GMC-22 GMC-22 GMC-32 GMC-50 GMC-65 GMC-85 GMC-100 Inverter capacity 008iS7-4 0015iS7-4 0022iS7-4 0037iS7-4 0055iS7-4 0075iS7-4 0110iS7-4 0150iS7-4 0185iS7-4 0220iS7-4 0300iS7-4 0370iS7-4 0450iS7-4 0550iS7-4 0750iS7-4 0900iS7-4 1100iS7-4 1320iS7-4 1600iS7-4 Wiring switch Short circuit switch (LS) ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS33b,EBS33 ABS53b,EBS53 ABS103b,EBS103 ABS103b,EBS103 ABS103b,EBS103 ABS203b,EBS203 ABS203b,EBS203b ABS203b,EBS203b ABS203b,EBS203b ABS403b/300A ABS403b/400A ABS603b/500A ABS603b/600A ABS603b/600A Electronic contactor GMC-12 GMC-12 GMC-22 GMC-22 GMC-22 GMC-22 GMC-22 GMC-25 GMC-40 GMC-50 GMC-65 GMC-100 GMC-125 GMC-150 GMC-220 GMC-300 GMC-300 GMC-400 GMC-500

5-2

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices 2) AC Reactor Specifications AC Reactor Specifications INVERTER mH 0008iS7-2 0015iS7-2 0022iS7-2 0037iS7-2 0055iS7-2 0075iS7-2 0110iS7-2 0150iS7-2 0185iS7-2 0220iS7-2 1.20 0.88 0.56 0.39 0.28 0.20 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.07 A 10 14 20 30 40 59 75 96 112 160 0008iS7-4 0015iS7-4 0022iS7-4 0037iS7-4 0055iS7-4 0075iS7-4 0110iS7-4 0150iS7-4 0185iS7-4 0220iS7-4 0300iS7-4 0370iS7-4 0450iS7-4 0550iS7-4 0750iS7-4 0900iS7-4 1100iS7-4 1320iS7-4 1600iS7-4
Remark If you want DC Reactor, Buy Built-in DC Reactor products.

AC Reactor Specifications INVERTER mH 4.81 3.23 2.34 1.22 1.14 0.81 0.61 0.45 0.39 0.287 0.232 0.195 0.157 0.122 0.096 0.081 0.069 0.057 0.042 A 4.8 7.5 10 15 20 30 38 50 58 80 98 118 142 196 237 289 341 420 558

5-3

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices

5.1.3 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors
1) Dynamic Breaking Unit type
Type Non UL type Voltage Applied Motor 30 ~ 37 kW 45 ~ 55 kW 75 kW 30 ~ 37 kW 45 ~ 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 110~132kW 162kW DBU SV037DBH-4 SV075DBH-4 SV370DBU-4U SV550DBU-4U SV750DBU-4U SV550DBU-4U, 2Set SV750DBU-4U, 2Set SV750DBU-4U, 3Set Dimensions Group 1. Refer to Dimensions

400V Class UL type

Group 2. Refer to Dimensions

2) Terminal arrangement
Group 2: Group 3:
G P N N B2 G P/B1 B1 B2

Terminals G B2 B1 N P

Functions Ground Terminal Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU Terminal for connection with N of Inverter Terminal for connection with P1 of Inverter

☞ Note: READ DBU User manual certainly when selecting DB resistors.

3) Dynamic Breaking (DB)Unit & DB resistor basic wiring
Dynamic Braking 제동유닛 Unit
P N B1 B2

B2 B1

Dynamic Braking 제동저항 Resistor

P1(+)

P2(+)

N(-)


입력전원 Input Power

50/60 Hz

R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) G

U V W

Motor 전동기

DBU Terminals B1,B2

Description Wire correctly referring to wiring diagram. DB Resistors connect with B1, B2 of DB Unit.

5-4

Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices 4) Dimensions
- Group 1
80 2-Ø5.5

- Group 2

Dynamic Braking Unit

D y n a m ic B ra k in g U n it

RESET POWER OHT OCT RUN

231.5

245

258

W IR IN G
R S T (P 2) P N U V W

IM

B2 B1 B2 B1 G N P

5.5 80 123 130 27

5

12

15

5) Display Functions
DB Resistors connect with B1, B2 of DB Unit. DBU has 3 LEDs. Red LED which is located in middle displays supplying main power, one Green LED which is right side displays under breaking and another green LED which is left side displays Over Heat Trip(OHT). Displays POWER (Red LED) RUN (Green LED) OHT (Green LED) Function description POWER LED is turned On when main power is supplied. Generally, POWER LED is turn On while main power supplied because DBU is connected with inverter. RUN LED is turned off while DBU is ON by regenerative energy of Motor. Under Breaking, if the temperature is exceeded over setting value due to over heat of Heatsink, Cut the TURN ON signal of DBU and LED is turn on by working overheat protection function.

75

5-5

0 2.5 11 15 18.5 2.000 10.5 3.5 3.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200V Class 400V Class Caution In case of iS7 90~160kW.75 1. use above listed DB resistor in parallel.5 2. 5%ED Type BR0400W150J BR0400W060J BR0400W050J BR0600W033J BR0800W020J BR1200W015J BR2400W010J BR2400W008J BR3600W005J BR3600W005J BR0400W600J BR0400W300J BR0400W200J BR0600W130J BR1000W085J BR1200W060J BR2000W040J BR2400W030J BR3600W020J BR3600W020J Resistor [ohm] 150 60 50 33 20 15 10 8 5 5 600 300 200 130 85 60 40 30 20 20 12 12 6 6 6 4. Dynamic braking unit for 220kW (SV2200DB-4) needs above listed DB resistor.000 10.5 7.000 Appearance TYPE 1 TYPE 1 TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 1 TYPE 1 TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 TYPE 3 - Voltage Class Inverter Capacity (kW) 0. If Dynamic braking unit (SV075DBH-4) is connected in parallel.5 7.000 20.5 Watt [W] 150 300 400 600 800 1200 2400 2400 3600 3600 150 300 400 600 1000 1200 2000 2400 3600 3600 5000 5000 10.7 5.000 17.5 22 0.2 3.000 15.75 1. 150% Breaking Torque. %ED: 5%.5 11 15 18. Rating Watt of DBU has to be doubled when %ED is 10%.Chapter 5 Peripheral Devices 6) DB Resistors (1) Option type Dynamic Breaking Unit Following table has reference that DC breaking torque: 150%. 5-6 .7 5.000 25.2 3.

1.1 How to Use Keypad 6. 1) Dimensions 6-1 .Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 6.1 Standard KEYPAD appearance and description (Graphic keypad) Standard Keypad is used in Inverter parameter setting. Monitor display and Inverter operations.

Move to Left 3.Register Jog or User codes. Move to UP 13. Forward operation LED 8. . MODE selection 4. . STOP/RESET Section Buttons Key name Mode Key Program Key Up key Down Key Left/Right Key Multi Function Key Function Description .Stop Under operating. Move to down 9.Movement among groups. .Motor rotates Reverse direction.In writing.Reverse operation LED 5.Move to Monitor mode when Mode moving. . it is possible to use saved data previously if press this button before pressing Program Key. Reverse operation 6. Move to Right 11. change and save data in parameter codes.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 2) Key Functions 1. . . . Multi-Function 10.Motor rotates Forward direction.Move to first code when code moving is required in a group.Write. . Stop Indication LED 14. Cancel(ESC) 2. KEY Cancel Key Forward Key Reverse Key Stop/Reset Key 6-2 . Forward operation 7.Movement of cursor in writing.Used when writing data or move codes.Trip release when a trip occurs. . .Change MODE . PROGRAM set 12. .

and Name 0.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 3) Composition of Display (1) Monitor Mode Operating/Frequency command Mode Display MON T/K N STP Monitor Mode Cursor Multi-function Key Inverter Operating Status Status Display Item 0.00 Initial Value at the time of Product Delivery 6-3 .00 C:10.00 Hz D:0.00Hz Monitor Mode Display Item 1 Monitor Mode Display Item 2 Monitor Mode Display Item 3 (2) Parameter change display Group Display Mode Display PAR DRV N STP Code No.50 ~ 60.00Hz Parameter Value Settable Range Currently Set Value Inverter Operating Status Multi-function Key Setting Status display Item 01 Cmd Frequency 0.00Hz 0.

Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 4) Display Item List (1) Mode Display Items : see “Mode shift” on Page 6-8. Motor stopped 3 5 6-4 . (3) Operation Command/Frequency Command Display Items (Type of Seq and number of steps are displayed during auto sequence operation) (4) Monitor Display Items No Function Display MON PAR 1 Mode Display U&M TRP CNF K O 2 Operating Command A R T K V I P U Frequency Command D S O X J R 1~9 A~F JOG Key 4 Multi Function Key Setting Inverter Local/Remote UserGrp SelKey STP Description Monitor Mode Parameter Mode USR & Macro Mode Trip Mode Config Mode Keypad operation command FBus Option operation command Application Option operation command Built-in 485 operation command Terminal block operation command Keypad frequency command V1 or (V1+I1) input frequency command I1 input frequency command Pulse input frequency command Frequency command during UP operation (Up-Down operation) Frequency command during DOWN operation (Up-Down operation) Frequency command during STOP operation (Up-Down operation) FBus Option frequency command V2. I2 frequency command of sub-terminal block Jog frequency command Internal 485 frequency command Sequential frequency command Used for shift to Keypad JOG mode Used to select local or remote operation Used to register parameters as a user group in the parameter mode or delete parameters in the user group. (2) Group Display Items : see “Group shift” on page 6-10.

Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad No Function Display FWD REV DC WAN STL SPS OSS OSH TUN Description Operating forward Operating reversely DC output Warning Stalling Speed Search SW OC controlled HW OC controlled Auto Tuning (7) Status Display Items: see “Operating status monitoring” on Page 6-17. (8) Monitor Mode Display Items: see “Operating status monitoring” on Page 6-17. 6-5 .

This is not displayed when the user code is not registered or when the user/macro mode shifts with the mode key unless the macro is not selected.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6. Trip Mode is not displayed when there is no previous failure history during normal operation. In case of a failure during operation.2 Menu composition SV-iS7 series inverter consists of the following 5 modes. monitor mode environment selection. Each mode has its own function items suitable for the properties and especially the parameter mode displays the functions necessary for inverter operation in groups. parameter initialization and copying. each suitable for the functional difficulty and objective. the failure type and information on the operating frequency/current/voltage at the time of the failure occurring are displayed. Can set functions necessary for operation. You can set the use environment for the inverter itself that is not directly related to operating functions such as keypad language selection.1. You can group only necessary functions by using user group and macro group. operating frequency display. U&M Trip mode TRP Config mode CNF 6-6 . You can also monitor the type of the trips that previously occurred. etc. output current and voltage. Group movable by MODE Key Ex) Monitor->Parameter Parameter User&Macro Trip Config Monitor Movable by left/right key in Parameter Group Ex) Drive->Basic Function Drive User Basic Function Macro 1 Advanced Function Macro 2 Control Input Terminal Output Terminal Communication Application AUT Application Option Card Protection M2 Mode Monitor mode Parameter mode User mode & Macro Display MON PAR Description Displays information on the operating status of the inverter. display of the option card type mounted on the inverter. Can monitor frequency setting. Divided into a total of 12 groups.

User group USR Macro group MCx 6-7 . see 8-48 page. etc. Basic group Advanced function group Control function group Input terminal function group Output terminal function group Communication function group Application function group Auto Sequence run group Application option group Protection group Motor 2 function group (Motor 2) 2) User& Macro mode Group BAS ADV CON IN OUT COM APP AUT APO PRT M2 Display Description Of the function items of each group of the parameter mode. This group is displayed if you select Motor #2 among the multi-function input terminal functions and sets functions related to Motor #2. etc. Can set the inverter output terminal block functions such as the relay and analog output. Can set functions for protecting the motor and inverter. 8. You can select them in CNF Mode. Can set functions related to the inverter input terminal block including multi-function digital input and analog input. If the user selects a desired operation type.31 Addition to Macro group. if they are used. etc. the groups displayed in MC1 or MC2 are shown. The functions necessary for the inverter according to the load type can be grouped and selected at the time of delivery from the factory. For more details. Can set the basic functions such as the motor parameter and sequential frequency. This group is displayed if Auto Sequence Group in APP is selected and sets the functions necessary for auto sequence operation. It is registered by using the multi-function key of the keypad. Can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern and frequency control function. Sets functions such as PID control and auto sequence operation. Can set functions related to sensorless and vector control.1. Sets the functions related to built-in 485 communication and communication option card in such a case. the items that need to be monitored or that are frequently set by the user are grouped and displayed.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 1) Parameter mode Mode Drive group Display DRV Description Has functions necessary for operation including frequency/acceleration/deceleration time setting and operation command selection. Sets functions related to the encoder option and PLC option card.

6-8 . .Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6. MON T/K N STP 0.31 Addition to Macro Group.1. For detailed description on the two modes. CNF 40 CODE 01 Language Sel English 02 LCD Contrast 00 Jump Code .0 % N STP 0.48. a display emerges as shown on the left. The present mode is the monitor mode.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0.1. 8. PAR 00 01 02 DRV N Jump Code STP 0.You have shifted to Parameter Mode.3 Mode shift Monitor Config Parameter Trip User&Macro 1) Mode Shift at the time of delivery You can change the display as follows if you shift modes by using the mode key. see page 8-47.00Hz .1.You come back to Monitor Mode.Press Mode key once.00Hz 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0.00Hz . MON T/K N STP 0. .Press Mode key once.Power on.You have shifted to Config Mode. . The User/Macro Mode and Trip Mode are not displayed at the time of the product being delivered.Press Mode key once.30 Additional to User Group (USR Grp) or 8.00Hz .

in case of a trip during operation. The mode shift in the two modes is as follows.0 % USR N STP 0.00Hz . . 40 CODE 01 Language Sel English 02 LCD Contrast 00 Jump Code . 6-9 . MON T/K N STP 0.00Hz . The present mode is the monitor mode.You have shifted to Trip Mode.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 2) Mode Shift with User/Macro Mode and Trip Mode If the user registers the user code or sets the macro function using the multi-function key.0 % Jump Code . In addition.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0.Press Mode key once.00Hz Jump Code .00Hz .You have shifted to Parameter Mode.00Hz 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0. MON T/K N STP 0.00 Hz 02 Output Current 0.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0. TRP Last-1 00 Trip Name ( 1) External Trip 01 Output Freq 0.You have shifted to Config Mode.Press Mode key once. .Power on. the Trip Mode will be displayed and the trip information will be saved in the trip mode as past history if you withdraw the trip using RESET function.Press Mode key once. the User/Macro Mode will be displayed unlike the mode shift at the time of the product delivery. a display emerges as shown on the left.Press Mode key once.Press Mode key once.0 A CNF N STP 0.You come back to Monitor Mode. 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0.You have shifted to User/Macro Mode. . . . PAR 00 01 02 U&M 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0.

1. . If you press Left key.00Hz 00 Jump Code 24 CODE 01 Acc Pattern 02 Dec Pattern Linear Linear 01 Aux Ref Src .Press Mode key once. .00Hz .4 Group shift You can make inter-group shift by using Left/Right keys after shift to Parameter Mode or User/Macro Mode using the Mode key. . .The drive group of Parameter Mode is being displayed. 6-10 . Cmd Frequency Cmd Torque PAR BAS N STP 0.Press Right key once. The present mode is the monitor mode.You have shifted to Parameter Mode. the display order will be reversed. Group Movable by MODE Key Ex) Monitor->Parameter Macro 2 Macro 1 User&Macro User Communication Output Terminal Input Terminal Control Advanced Function Basic Function Parameter Drive Protection Application Option Card Application Movable left/right Key in Parameter Group Ex) Drive->Basic Function 1) Group Shift in Parameter Mode If you press Right key in the Parameter Mode.00Hz 00 Jump Code 20 CDE None 02 Cmd 2nd Src Fx/Rx-1 PAR ADV N STP 0. .00 Hz . MON T/K N STP 0. PAR DRV N 00 Jump Code 01 02 STP 0.Press Right Shift key 7 times.Press Right key once. . 9 CODE 0.You shift to Advanced Function Group(ADV).Power on.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6. a display emerges as shown on the left. the display changes as follows.You shift to Basic Function Group(BAS).

You have shifted to Macro Group(MC1). .Press Right key. see page 8-47. U&M USR U STP 0.00Hz . .Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad PAR 01 02 PRT N STP 0.30 Addition to User Group (USR Grp) or 8.Power on. If the user code is registered and you have selected the macro function.00 Hz 0.00Hz 00 Jump Code 40 CODE Load Duty Heavy Duty Phase Loss Chk .Press Right Shift key once. 8. 0.00Hz 00 Jump Code 1 CODE 01 Acc Time 02 Dec Time 20. .You come back to the Drive Group(DRV) of Parameter Group.0 sec 01 U&M MC1 U STP 0. For user code and macro group registration.You have shifted to User/Macro Mode(U&M). a display emerges as shown on the left.The User Group(USR) is being displayed. MON T/K N STP 0.The group changed in sequence. 6-11 .1.31 Addition to Macro Group.0 sec 30. PAR 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0.Press Right key.00 Hz 02 Acc Time 20.00 Hz 02 Acc Time 20. . .00Hz 00 Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0. you can shift the group as follows.1.0 sec 01 .0 % 2) Group shift in User/Macro Mode To shift to User/Macro Mode.Press Mode key twice.0 sec .00Hz 00 Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0. . PRT is displayed.00Hz 9 CODE Jump Code Cmd Frequency Cmd Torque . U&M USR U STP 0.48.You come back to User Group(USR). the user code should be registered or you select the macro function. The present mode is the monitor mode.

etc. The present mode is the monitor mode.00 Hz . will be displayed.5 Code(Function Item) shift 1) Code shift in monitor mode If you press Up and Down keys where the cursor is.Do not press any key for about 2 seconds after shift. the cursor shifts to the third display item.The third display item displays the output voltage. the cursor is in the first display item. a display emerges as shown on the left.00 Hz .The first item displays frequency. MON T/K N STP 0.00Hz 0.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6. Output Voltage 0 V MON T/K N STP 0.Press Down key.Press Down key. MON T/K N STP 0.1.00Hz Output Current 0.The output voltage display gone.Press Up key twice. names of frequency and current.00Hz .Power on.The output current is displayed in the second display item. .Frequency display gone. . .The cursor is at the front of Hz item. .The cursor shifts to the second display item after the output current display is gone.00Hz .00Hz 0. MON T/K Frequency N STP 0.00Hz . 6-12 . MON T/K N STP 0. . .0 A . MON T/K N STP 0.Do not press any key for about 2 seconds after shift.00Hz . MON T/K Frequency N STP 0.

00Hz 00 Jump Code 00 Jump Code 9 CODE 01 Cmd Frequency 1 0.You shift to BAS of Parameter Mode. press Mode key until DRV emerges or press ESC once. . PAR DRV N STP 0.00 Hz 02 Acc Time 20.00Hz Jump Code .Press Program key(PROG). PAR 00 DRV N STP 0.0 sec PAR(Parameter Mode).00 Hz 02 Acc Time 20. Code shift in other modes are the same.0 sec PAR 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0. Jump Code Aux Ref Src Cmd 2nd Src .The display shows DRV of Parameter Mode.0 sec . Jump Code Cmd Frequency Acc Time .00 Hz 20. 0 in DRV of Parameter Mode as 9 CODE 01 Cmd Frequency 01 Cmd Frequency 0.00 Hz 0.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 2) Code shift (function Items) in other modes and groups Using Up and Down keys: The following figures give an example of shifting the code by using Up and Down keys in DRV and BAS of Parameter Mode.00Hz 9 CODE 0. there is Jump Code Entry item for shift to the code of each group. you will shift to code No.If you press Down key.0 sec PAR 00 01 04 BAS N STP 0.00Hz .00 Hz 0.Check that code number 00 is displayed in the initial display of DRV of 9 CODE 01 Cmd Frequency 01 Cmd Frequency 0. 3) How to Shift in Jump Code In groups of Parameter Mode and User/Macro Mode.The cursor flashes so that you can enter the code number as on the left.Press Mode key once. you can shift faster than by using Up and Down keys. . .00 Hz 02 Acc Time 20. If the code number is high. PAR 00 DRV N STP 0.You can shift the code by using Up or Down key. .00Hz Jump Code . 6-13 . MON T/K N STP 0. the display emerges as on the left.00Hz 20 CODE None Fx/Rx-1 shown on the left. The following figures give an example of shift to code number 09 of DRV.Press Right key once. If DRV is not displayed.Power on. The present mode is Monitor Mode(MON).

0 sec . Control Mode V/F Torque Control ----.00Hz . you will shift to 00 of DRV.You shift to Control Mode of code number 9.00Hz Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0. PAR 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0.00 Hz Acc Time 20.Enter 9 using Up key and press PROG.00Hz 00 Jump Code 9 CODE D:9 PAR 09 10 11 1~99 CODE C:9 DRV N STP 0.00 Hz .No ----JOG Frequency 10. 6-14 .If you press ESC.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad PAR DRV N STP 0.

Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 6.00Hz 1 .00Hz .6 Parameter setting 1) Parameter setting in monitor mode You can set some parameters including frequency in Monitor Mode.Detailed information of the item is displayed and the cursor flashed.Set frequency at 10Hz using Up key.Check whether the cursor is in frequency item and the 09 frequency setting method in DRV is keypad. . MON T/K Frequency N STP 0. MON T/K N STP 0.Press PROG. The following is an example of frequency setting.00 Hz . . MON T/K N STP 0. 6-15 .00Hz 10. MON T/K Frequency N STP 0.The desired frequency has been set at 10Hz. .You can shift to the desired place for frequency setting by using Shift key.1.00Hz 0.Press PROG.00 Hz .

move the cursor to the desired place using Left/Right keys.00 PAR 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0.00Hz .00 C:0.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 2) Parameter setting in other modes and groups This gives an example of changing frequency in the Drive Group of Parameter Mode. .0 % .Press Down key.00Hz 01 Cmd Frequency 0.Enter 10Hz using Up key and press PROG.00 C:0.00 Hz D:0.0 % DRV N STP 0.00 Hz 0.0 % .The cursor flashes so that you can enter frequency.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0.00Hz . 01 Cmd Frequency 10. PAR DRV N STP 0. PAR 00 01 02 Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0.The desired frequency has been changed to 10Hz.50 ~ 60. .00 Hz D:0.00Hz . You can do so too in other modes or groups.If you want to set the frequency at 10Hz.Press PROG.You have shifted to 01 frequency setting code.00 PAR DRV N STP 0.00Hz Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 0. PAR 00 01 02 DRV N STP 0.00 Hz 0. . Jump Code 9 CODE Cmd Frequency 10.50 ~ 60.This is the initial display of Parameter Mode.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0.00 Hz Cmd Torque 0. 6-16 .

00Hz .Of the displayed items. CNF 21 22 23 N STP 0.7 Operating status monitoring 1) Using monitor mode You can monitor 3 items at a time in Monitor Mode. the goal frequency is displayed during stop and operating frequency during operation.1.This is the initial display of Monitor Mode. Displayed items can be selected by the user in Config Mode(CNF). 6-17 . .00Hz MON T/K 1 N STP 0.00Hz Monitor Line-1 Frequency Monitor Line-2 Output Current Monitor Line-3 Output Voltage N STP 0. Some items including frequency can be edited. .00Hz . CNF 21 22 23 Monitor Line-1 Frequency Monitor Line-2 Output Current Monitor Line-3 Output Power N STP 0.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 6.Move to 23 using Down key.Change the 23 item in Monitor Mode to output power.The frequency.The third displayed item in Monitor Mode has been changed to output power. current and voltage are set as the default monitor items at the time of product delivery. . MON T/K Hz A kW . .You can set the items to display in Monitor Mode in sequence at 21~23 in CNF. for frequency.

Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 2) Possible to monitoring items Mode CNF Code 20 21 22 23 Function Display Anytime Para Monitor Line-1 Monitor Line-2 Monitor Line-3 Setting Range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Frequency Speed Output Current Output Voltage Output Power WHour Counter DCLink Voltage DI State DO State V1 Monitor[V] V1 Monitor[%] I1 Monitor[mA] I1 Monitor[%] V2 Monitor[V] V2 Monitor[%] I2 Monitor[mA] I2 Monitor[%] PID Output PID ref Value PID Fdb Value Torque Initial Value 0: Frequency 0: Frequency 2:Output Current 3:Output Voltage 6-18 .

CNF 20 21 22 N STP 0. MON T/K N STP 0. 6-19 .At the time of product delivery. .Select output current.The status display now shows current in Monitor Mode as well. MON T/K .This is the initial display of Monitor Mode.Select the item to display in status display in code 20 of CNF.The unit at the top of the display has changed from frequency to current. Thus if you register a variable you are interested in the display.Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 3) How to use status display The items displayed on the top right of the keypad are displayed in modes other than Monitor Mode as well. the status item displays frequency.0A . . .00Hz Anytime Para Output Current Monitor Line-1 Frequency Monitor Line-2 Output Current N STP 0.00Hz . you can monitor it at any time regardless of the mode shift or change.

In case of multiple failures. 2) Multiple failures at a time TRP current Over Voltage (02) 01 Output Freq 48.8 Failure status monitoring 1) Failure during operation TRP current Over Voltage (01) 01 Output Freq 48.30 Hz 02 Output Current . .3 A Current .The display mode before failure checking comes back.The type of failures is displayed. the mode automatically shifts to Trip Mode and the type of the current failure is displayed. current and operating status at the time of the failure occurring are displayed.If the failure status is terminated by Reset. the keypad before the failure comes back.30 Hz 02 Output Current TRP current 00 Trip Name ( 2) 0 1 Over Voltage Trip .If you press Down key. Externa TRP current Over Voltage (02) 01 Output Freq 48.Press PROG. .Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6.30 Hz 02 Output Current . TRP Last-1 01 Output Freq 48.1.Press PROG. 6-20 . MON T/K N STP 0. . the output frequency. the number of failures is displayed next to the failure type.0A .In case of a failure during operation.30 Hz 02 Output 33.

TRP current Over Voltage (02) 01 Output Freq 48. .30 Hz 02 Output Current 33. Failure history is saved not only by Reset but also in case of a low voltage failure due to power off.A previous failure is saved in Last-2 code.If you press Reset or the terminal is entered.0A . the failures before the latest 5 ones are automatically deleted.Move to Trip Mode using Mode key.3 A . TRP current 00 Trip Name ( 2) Over Voltage 01 Output Freq 48.The most recent failure is saved in Last-1 code. the mode automatically shifts to Trip Mode with the trip displayed.3 A . If the number of failure exceeds 5.If another failure occurs. . 6-21 .Chapter 6 How to Use Keypad 3) Saving and monitoring of failure history Previous failures are saved in Trip Mode.In case of a failure during operation.3 A . MON T/K N STP 0. Up to 5 failures can be saved. TRP current 00 Trip Name ( 1) External Trip 01 Output Freq 48. what was in Last-2 moves to Last-3. the failure above is automatically saved and the display goes back to the place before the failure.Press Right key.30 Hz 02 Output Current 33.30 Hz 02 Output Current 33. .

.0A .Press PROG. you come back to the initialization selection display. CNF N STP 40 Parameter Init -----.No -----1 All Groups 2 DRV .0A Jump Code 9 CODE 01 language Sel English 02 Inv S/W Ver Version 1.0A Option-2 Type None 32 Option-3 Type None 40 Parameter Init ----.No -----0. CNF 00 N STP 0.Shift to CNF by using Mode key.Initialization finished.No ------ .Of the Parameter items to initialize. 6-22 . MON T/K N STP 0.00 N STP 0. Not only the entire parameter but a group of the parameter mode can be selected and initialized. CNF 31 N STP 0.Shift to code 40 using Down key.0A .0A Option-2 Type None 32 Option-3 Type None 40 Parameter Init ----.Monitor Mode is displayed. CNF 31 .1.9 How to initialize parameter You can initialize the parameter that has been changed by the user to the initial state at the time of delivery. select All Groups and press PROG.Chapter 6 How to use Keypad 6.

01 07 Function Display Cmd Frequency Freq Ref Src Initial Setting 0 0. 2) Frequency Setting Using Keypad 2 : KeyPad-2 Group DRV Code No.00~Max Frequency 0~9 Unit Hz - You can change the frequency by changing the frequency using the keypad and pressing PROG. Digital setting by using the keypad.00 KeyPad-1 Setting Range 0. Set DRV group 07 at KeyPad-2.1 Basic Functions 7.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7. 7-1 .1. 1) Frequency Setting Using Keypad 1 : KeyPad-1 Group DRV Code No. it will not be saved.1 How to set frequency (When you want to set frequency) Group Code No. analog setting by using voltage (V1) and current (I1) input of the control terminal block and built-in RS485 port or communication option are available for operating frequency setting from the external controller. 01 07 Function Display Cmd Frequency Freq Ref Src Setting Displayed 1 0. If you press PROG. Frequency is changed if you press PROG in DRV Group 01 and then press Up or Down. Set DRV group 07 at KeyPad-1.00 KeyPad-2 Setting Range 0. Function Display Initial Display 0 KeyPad-1 1 KeyPad-2 2 V1 3 I1 4 V2 5 I2 6 Int 485 7 Encoder 8 Fied Bus 9 PLC DRV 07 Freq Ref Src Select the frequency setting method in code 07 of DRV Group.00~Max Frequency 0~9 Unit Hz - You can change the frequency using Up and Down keys on the keypad. The frequency changes is saved in the memory if you change the frequency at DRV group 01 and press PROG. it will be saved in the memory and if you press ESC.

If the volume resistance is connected to the terminal block (IN-01 Freq at 100%): set the operating frequency of the maximum voltage input. 07 01 05 06 07 IN 08 09 10 11 16 17 Function Display Freq Ref Src Freq at 100% V1 Monitor V1 Polarity V1 Filter V1 volt x1 V1 Perc adj y1 V1 Volt x2 V1 Perc adj y2 V1 Inverting V1 Quantizing Setting Displayed 2 0 V1 60. Set the operating frequency of which the values set in the input terminal block function group (IN) No.00 10. 07 Function Display Freq Ref Src Setting Displayed 2 V1 Unit - Enter 10~+10V or 0~+10V using the voltage (V1) input terminal of the terminal block.00 No 0.04 Setting Frequency 0.2) When IN-11 is 50% and the default value is set between IN-01 and IN-16. Group DRV Code No.g.06 of the input terminal block group (IN) at Unipolar.00 0.00 and the default value is set to IN-16. V1 5G When connecting external power source (2) If you use 0~+10V of the external circuit.04~10 Unit Hz V msec V % V % % Set No. operation is at 30. Enter the volume resistance into the V1 terminal by using the voltage output of the external voltage output or VR output terminal of the inverter control terminal block as follows. VR V1 5G When connecting internal power source 7-2 . you can change the revolution direction of the motor according to the symbol of the voltage signals.00 0.00Hz (50% of max 60Hz). If you enter -10~+10V.g. if 10V is input into the V1 terminal.00 Unipolar 10 0. E. if 10V is input into the V1 terminal. If you enter 0~+10V.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 3) Frequency setting by voltage input (V1 terminal) of the terminal block: V1 Group DRV Code No.00Hz. E.00 100. operation is at 40.00~ Max Frequency 0~10 Unipolar/Bipolar 0~10000 0~10 0~100 0~10 0~100 No/Yes 0. 11 or 15 is 100%.1) When IN-01 is 40.

you can reverse the present revolution direction. 7-3 .Chapter 7 Basic Functions IN-05 V1 Monitor: displays the voltage input into the V1 terminal. 1 Yes.06Hz (when the maximum frequency is 60Hz) at an interval of 0.1V. If you set the filter time constant high. The set time refers to the time it takes the frequency set in the inverter to increase by up to about 63% when the voltage input is input by step as follows. the frequency changes by 0. the output frequency changes and from the next step it increases along with the quantization value as follows. The set quantization value is the percentage of the maximum analog input value. If the analog input value decreases by 1/4 of the quantization value. you can reduce the frequency fluctuation but the response gets slower. The output frequency when the input value increases and decreases differs so that the effect of analog input value fluctuation is removed. The resolving power of output frequency for analog input decreases but the noise effect is reduced by the quantizing function in a system sensitive to noise. Set Frequency IN-11 IN-09 V1 Input IN-08 IN-10 IN-16 V1 Inverting: If you set at No. This is used for monitoring the currently input voltage. the output frequency changes. the time (t) becomes longer. IN-07 V1 Filter: used when the set frequency value fluctuates greatly due to the environment such as noise. IN-17 V1 Quantizing: used when there is a lot of noise in the analog signals input into the terminal. the responsiveness becomes slower and pulsation of a long cycle might occur. Therefore if the maximum input value is 10V and the quantization value is set at 1%. when a value three fourths the quantization value is input. If the quantization value is quadrisected and the analog input value increases. V1 input Set F t IN-08 V1 Volt X1 ~ IN-11 V1 Perc y2: You can set the slope and offset value for the input voltage. The higher the time constant is. You can also reduce noise to some extent by using the IN-07 low pass filter value but the higher the value is.

0~10V Unipolar/ Bipolar 0~10V 0~100% 0~10V 0~100% Unit Hz V V % V % Set IN-06 at Bipolar. -10 ~ +10 V V1 CM VR+ V1 VR- When -10~10V is used from the external circuit When connecting inner power source 7-4 .00 59.025 0.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Output Frequency[Hz] 60.00 Bipolar 0.00 -10. Group DRV Code No.175 9.00 Setting Range 0.00 -100. Freq.075 0.975 (3) If -10~+10V is input.94 0.12 0.00 0.1 0.00 0. As follows. Codes between 12 and 15 are displayed only when they are Bipolar and you can set the voltage between 0 and 10V which is input into the V1 terminal.2 0.06 Analog Input[V] 0. 07 01 05 06 IN 12 13 14 15 Function Display Freq Ref Src Freq at 100% V1 Monitor V1 Polarity V1 -volt x1’ V1 -Perc y1’ V1 -Volt x2’ V1 -Perc y2’ Setting Displayed 2 1 V1 60.00~Max. input into the V1 terminal in volume resistance by using the voltage output of the external controller or the VR output terminal of the inverter control terminal block.925 10 9.

g.Chapter 7 Basic Functions The output frequency of bipolar voltage input (-10~+10V) is as follows. see IN-08 V1 Volt X1 ~ IN-11 V1 Perc y2. Voltage Input 0~10V Operating FWD FWD REV -10~0V REV FWD Command REV 7-5 .) If the minimum (-) input voltage if V1 is -2V. the output frequency moves between 6Hz~48Hz. V1 Input IN-14 IN-12 -2V IN-13 6Hz -8V 48Hz IN-15 Set Frequency For setting of 0~+10V. the output ratio of -2V is 10% and maximum voltage is -8V and then you set the output ratio at 80%. E. The selection of keypad or terminal block directions and motor rotation by bipolar voltage input is shown in the following table. Forward O utput Frequency -10~0[V] 0~10[V] Input Voltage Reverse O utput Frequency IN-12 V1 –volt x1’~ IN-15 V1 –Perc y2’: You can set the slope and offset value of the output frequency of (-) input voltage as follows.

10 .1) If IN-01 is 40.04 Setting Range 0.00Hz. E. E.00Hz. IN-01 Freq at 100%: sets the operating frequency at the maximum current input.0.00 . Set Frequency IN-26 IN-24 I1 Input IN-23 IN-25 IN-31 I1 Inverting: You can turn the direction of the rotation.g.00~ Max Freq 0~20 0~10000 0~20 0~100 0~20 0~100 No/Yes 0.00 .20.No . the operation is at 40.2) If IN-26 is 50% and IN-01. This is used for monitoring the current input at the moment.g.00 and IN-23~26 is set at the default value. when 20mA is input into the I1 terminal. when 20mA is input into the I1 terminal.00 . IN-20 I1 Monitor: displays the current input into the I1 terminal. The operating frequency when the value set in IN-26 is 100% is set.00 . See “IN-17 V1 Quantizing”on Page 7-3.100. 07 01 20 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 Function Display Freq Ref Src Freq at 100% I1 Monitor I1 Filter I1 Curr x1 I1 Perc y1 I1 Curr x2 I1 Perc y2 I1 Inverting I1 Quantizing Setting Displayed 3 I1 .0.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 4) Frequency setting by current input into terminal block (I1 Terminal) Group DRV Code No. 23~26 are set at the initial value.4.00 .04~10 Unit Hz mA msec mA % mA % % IN Select I1 in DRV Group 07.00 .0.60. IN-23 I1 Curr x1 ~ IN-26 I1 Perc y2: You can set the slope of the output frequency and offset value against the current as follows. IN-22 I1 Filter: The set time refers to the time it takes the input current which has been step input to reach about 63% of the I1 value that has been step input in the inverter. 7-6 . the operation is at 30. Input current of 0~20mA into the I1 terminal of the terminal block to set frequency. IN-32 I1 Qunatizing: the same as quantizing function of IN-17.

00 0.00 No 0.00 -100. Its operating method is the same as the Bipolar input of the V1 terminal. ▶0 ~ 20mA Input Group DRV Code No.00 10.00 0.00 100. 7-7 .00 No 0.00 10 0.00 -100. 07 35 37 38 39 40 IN 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Function Display Freq Ref Src V2 Monitor V2 Filter V2 Volt x1 V2 Perc y1 V2 Volt x2 V2 Perc y2 V2 -Volt x1’ V2 -Perc y1’ V2 -Volt x2’ V2 -Perc y2’ V2 Inverting V2 Quantizing Setting Displayed 4 0 V2 0.00 -20.04~10 Unit mA msec mA % mA % mA % mA % % For its operating method.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 5) Frequency command by advanced I/O option card You can input the frequency command by using -10~+10V (V2 terminal) and 0~20mA (I2terminal) if you mount an extended I/O card on the inverter option slot.04 Setting Range 0~20 0~10000 0~10V 0~100 0~10 0~100 0~10 0~100 0~10 -100~0 No/Yes 0. ▶-20~20mA Input Its operating method is the same as the Bipolar. which was described on Page 7-2.00 -10. see the description of the I1 terminal on Page 7-4.00 15 4.00 0.04~10 Unit mA msec V % V % V % V % % The voltage input of the extended I/O inputs bipolar voltage at -10V ~ +10V. ▶ -10~+10V Input Group DRV Code No.04 Setting Range 0~20 0~10000 0~20 0~100 4~20 0~100 -20~0 -100~0 -20~0 -100~0 No/Yes 0.00 0.00 0.00 0. it also possible to Bipolar operation by -20~20mA Input.00 100.00 20. 07 50 52 53 54 55 IN 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Function Display Freq Ref Src I2 Monitor I2 Filter I2 Curr x1 I2 Perc y1 I2 Curr x2 I2 Perc y2 I2 Volt x1’ I2 Perc y1’ I2 Volt x2’ I2 Perc y2 I2 Inverting I2 Quantizing Setting Displayed 5 I2 0.

APO-01 Enc Opt Mode. APO-10 Enc Filter ~ APO-14 Enc Perc y2: sets the filter time constant and minimum and maximum input frequency of the encoder input.00 Reference A 10 0.0 100. 07 01 01 04 05 06 APO 09 10 11 12 13 14 Function Display Freq Ref Src Freq at 100% Enc Opt Mode Enc Type Sel Enc Pulse Sel Enc Pulse Num Pulse Monitor Enc Filter Enc Pulse x1 Enc Perc Y1 Enc Pulse x2 Enc Perc y2 Setting Displayed 7 2 0 2 Encoder 60. APO-09 Pulse Monitor: displays the frequency of the pulse which is input when APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is set as Reference. 0~2 0~2 0~2 10~4096 0~10000 0~100 0~100 0~100 0~100 Unit Hz kHz msec kHz % kHz % If you mount the encoder option card on the main body of the inverter. APO-06 Enc Pulse Sel: inputs the output method and number of pulses in harmony with the encoder specification.0 0.1 0 ModBus RTU 02 Int485 Proto 1 ModBus ASCII 2 LS Inv 485 COM 04 Int485 BaudR 3 9600 0 D8 / PN / S1 1 D8 / PN / S2 07 Int485 Mode 2 D8 / PE / S1 3 D8 / PO / S1 Setting Frequency 0~250 0~2 0~2 0~2 1200~38400 0~3 0~3 0~3 0~3 Unit bps 7-8 .00 100. Function Display Setting Displayed DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 01 Int485 St ID . Freq. Set APO-05 at No.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 6) Frequency setting by Encoder Option Card (If you want use pulse input to frequency command) Group DRV IN Code No. the code is displayed from APO-01. 7) Frequency setting by RS-485 Communication: Int 485 Group Code No.00~Max.2 Reference for APO-01 in order to set the frequency with the encoder. APO-04 Enc Type Sel. The output frequency corresponding to the encoder input frequency is the same as that of voltage (V1) or current (I1) input. APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: Select No.00 Setting Frequency 0.2 A.

-S) terminal of the terminal block.3 Changing frequency to revolution If you set the Hz/Rpm Sel value at “1: Rpm Display. For details. you can control the inverter through communication with the higher controller (PLC or PC) by using the RS485 (+S. and PLC options. 7. Keypad-1 Keypad-2 V1 I1 V2 I2 Int 485 Encoder Fied Bus PLC Analog Hold Setting Range 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 0~9 65~75 Unit - Set Frequency Frequency Px Operating Command 7. the frequency will change into revolution.1. see Communication Functions. Device-net. Note: Please refer to User manual for communication options such as Profibus.1. Chapter 11.2 Analog command frequency fixation Group Code No. Function Display Setting Displayed 0 1 2 3 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 4 5 6 7 8 9 IN 65~75 *Px Define 21 *Px : P1~P8. P9~P11 (option) This is the function of fixing the operating frequency when the terminal selected as the Analog Hold among the multifunction terminals if you set the frequency by using the analog input of the control terminal block. Group DRV Code No.Chapter 7 Basic Functions If you set DRV-07 Freq Ref Src at Int 485. 21 Function Display Hz/Rpm Sel Setting Displayed 1 Rpm Display Setting Range Unit rpm 7-9 .

P7 and P8 are set at Speed-L. you can operate it as follows. In case of Speed-X being used.4 Sequential frequency setting Group DRV BAS Code No. Speed-X) for each. Enter the desired step frequency in codes 50~64 of BAS. Px: P1~P8. 07.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7. If multi-function terminals P6.1.x Setting Displayed 7 IN 65~75 Px Define 8 9 10 89 InCheck Time Speed-L Speed-M Speed-H Speed-X 1 Setting Range -Unit Hz msec *Step Freq – x : Step Freq -1~15. P9~P11 (Option) Sequential operation is available by using the multi-function terminal. you can set up to Speed 16 when the highest bit is Speed-X. 07 50~64 Function Display Freq Ref Src Step Freq . Speed-H and Speed-X are identified as binary codes and operation starts with the frequency set in BAS-50 ~ BAS-64 selected. Select the terminal to use as sequential input among multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set one of the sequential functions (Speed-L. 2 1 0 Frequency Speed 3 4 7 8 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FX or RX P8 - P7 - P6 - 5 P6 P7 8 P FX RX - - 7-10 . Speed-M. Speed-M and Speed-H respectively. Speed-M. Speed 0 frequency uses the frequency command selected in DRV Group No. Speed-L. Speed-H.

Speed 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FX or RX P8 P7 P6 P5 - IN-89 In Check Time: If you use the multi-function terminal for sequential frequency setting. other than the basic operation using the keypad and multi-function terminal. For example. you can operate it as follows. Function Display Initial Display 0 Keypad 1 Fx/Rx-1 2 Fx/Rx-2 3 Int 485 4 Field Bus 5 PLC DRV 06 Cmd Source Select the operating command setting method in DRV Group code 06. 7-11 . 1) Keypad Operating Command: KeyPad Group DRV Code No. Speed-M.Chapter 7 Basic Functions [Example of speed-8] If multi-function terminals P5. After 100msec. 7. operation starts using the FWD and REV keys on the inverter keypad and stops using Stop key. P6. Speed-H and Speed-X respectively.1. you can set the in check time for the terminal block input within the inverter. P7 and P8 are set at Speed-L. it will be checked whether another terminal block input is input for 100msec. you can also use the built-in RS485 communication. if you set the in check time at 100msec and input multi-function terminal P6. Fieldbus and Application Option Card. it is accelerated or decelerated by the frequency corresponding to P6 terminal. For operating command. 06 Function Display Cmd Source Initial Display 0 KeyPad Unit - If you set the DRV Group 06 with the keypad.5 Operating command setting method Group Code No.

P9~P11 (option) Set DRV Group 06 at Fx/Rx-1.00~100 Unit sec *Px : P1~P8. Frequency FX RX 7-12 . 06 65~75 65~75 Function Display Cmd Source Px Define Px Define Setting Display 1 1 2 Fx/Rx-1 FX RX 1. It stops if the FX and RX terminals are ON or OFF at the same time.00 Setting Range 0. P9~P11 (option) FX terminal is used for operating command and RX terminal is for selecting the rotation direction. Select the terminal used for FX and RX operating commands among multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set the function of the appropriate terminal of IN 65~75 at FX and RX.00~100 Unit sec 88 Run On Delay *Px : P1~P8. 06 65~75 65~75 88 Function Display Cmd Source Px Define Px Define Run On Delay Setting Display 2 1 2 Fx/Rx-2 FX RX 1. IN-88 Run On Delay: Operation starts after the set time.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 2) Terminal Block operating command 1 : Fx/Rx-1 Group DRV IN Code No.00 Setting Range 0. Set DRV Group 06 at Fx/Rx-2. It can be used where operation start synchronization with an outside sequence is necessary. too when the FX or RX terminal is input. Select the terminal used for FX and RX operating commands among multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set the function of the appropriate terminal of IN 65~75 at FX and RX. Frequency FX RX 3) Terminal Block operating command 2 : Fx/Rx-2 Group DRV IN Code No. It can be used where operation start synchronization with an outside sequence is necessary. IN-88 Run On Delay: Operation starts after the set time. too when the FX or RX terminal is input.

In such a case. frequency and torque commands for them to be operated by using the keypad in order to enable the keypad to carry out all operation. you can use it when checking the operation or body of the inverter or conducting manual switching operation using the keypad in the field in case of an emergency. 3) CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel: If you set at No. 2) Definition of Remote: Remote refers to the operation of the inverter by the previously set operating and frequency commands of the inverter in communication or sequence when it is set at communication or sequence respectively. R is displayed and the inverter operates by the method selected in DRV-06 Cmd Source. so it is highly recommended that you use it only when necessary. Chapter 11. with R displayed in the keypad status display. 7. For details.6 Local/Remote by-pass operation using multi-function keys (Checking the inverter operation or equipment without changing the existing parameter setting) Group CNF DRV Code No. JOG command is ignored (When RUN Enable is set in the multi-function terminal. -S) on the terminal block if you set DRV-06 Cmd Src at Int 485. 7-13 . If you want Local Operation Mode. 42 06 Function Display Multi-Key Sel Cmd Source Setting Display 1 1 Local/Remote Fx/Rx-1 Unit - Caution Local/remote By-pass operation might cause a problem with the device such as interruption during operation if it is improperly used. operation is possible with it on). 06 04 COM 05 06 07 Function Display Cmd Source Int485 St ID Int485 Proto Int485 BaudR Int485 Mode Setting Display 3 0 3 0 Int 485 1 ModBus RTU 9600 D8 / PN / S1 Setting Range 0~250 1200~38400 Unit bps - You can control the inverter through communication with a higher controller (PLC or PC) by using terminal RS485 (+S.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 4) Operating Command by RS-485 Communication: Int 485 Group DRV Code No. press the multi-function key and R turns into L and you can operate the inverter with FWD and REV keys on the keypad setting. you are in the Remote Operation Mode. When R is seen on the keypad status display. 1 Local/Remote. the signal R emerges on the keypad status display and the multi-function keys operate in local/remote functions.1. 1) Definition of Local: Local refers to the function of transforming all the operating. which operates by the previously set parameters without any change in the operation. If you press the multi-function key one more time. see Communication Functions. In case of operation by other than using the keypad (terminal block or communication).

K/K at the top of MON Mode is represented by a different signal in conformity to the previously set command source and frequency source.1. The inverter stops if it has been operating in Remote status. In case of digital command source. the motor starts rotating after all the operating terminals is turned OFF and the operating command terminal is turned ON. FWD_JOG. shift to Local still enables the keypad to operate the inverter. (1) When the Terminal Block is Command Source Shift from Local to Remote during operation leads to operation by the command of the terminal block. 7-14 . 7. That is. PRE EXCITE are in.7 Prevention of forward or reverse rotation: Run Prevent Group ADV Code No. That is. 6) Terminal in with Power on When ADV-10 Power On Run is No. (2) Digital Command Source Digital command source refers to all the command sources except for the terminal block source. it does not operate no matter how many operating commands are given to the terminal block. 09 Function Display Run Prevent Setting Display 0 None Setting Range 0~2 Unit - You can select a motor rotation direction to prevent. re-shift to Remote disables operation. with Power On Run being No. 5) Shift from Local to Remote In case of shift from Local to Remote. None : Both forward and reverse are available.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 4) Shift from Remote to Local In case of Shift from Remote to Local. RX. That is. that is. if RX is in the terminal block and the motor is rotating forward in Local. the motor does not work whether FX or RX. Reverse Prev : Reverse operation is prevented. Shift to Remote is available during Local operation but the movements might vary according to which source it is set at. the signal representing the command source and frequency source at the top of MON Mode turns to K/K. but in Remote Mode again. the inverter motor is operated by the keypad. the inverter stops and then starts when the next command is given. terminal Run is available after the inverter is turned on and all the terminals off. one of the 5 aforementioned terminals is ON with power on. However. 7) When Motor Stops Due to Trip during Operation If the motor stops due to a trip during operation and is reset. shift to Remote makes the motor rotate in the reverse direction. The target frequency is set at the currently set frequency source. Forward Prev : Forward operation is prevented. REV_JOG. Therefore. in Local Mode. communication. if the terminals of FX. PLC and keypad.

Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7. inverter will be accelerating normal V/F pattern without Speed Search.8 Run immediately with power On: Power-on Run Group DRV ADV Code No. 06 08 PRT 09 10 Function Display Cmd Source RST Restart Retry Number Retry Delay Setting Display 1 1 1. operation resumes after the operating commands is turned OFF and ON again. Change the bit 4 to 1 at CON-71 Speed Search and it makes the inverter can start with Speed Search.yes --Setting Range No/Yes Unit - With power supplied to the inverter and the terminal block operating command being ON. Trip may be occurred while operating. This is effective only when the DRV Group 06 command source is set at 1 (Fx/Rx-1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2). If not.1. inverter will be accelerating normal V/F pattern without Speed Search. which causes the motor to rotate as soon as the power is supplied. If this function is not selected.0 Setting Range 1~2 No(1)/Yes(1) 0~10 0~60.yes -default FX/RX-1 0:No 0 1. operation resumes when the operating command is turned OFF and then ON again after resetting.0 FX/RX-1 or FX/RX-2 -. 7-15 . If not. At this time. At this time. if load (Fan load) is on the status of Free-Run. If this function is not used. Power Frequency Operating command When ADV-10=0 When ADV-10=1 Caution Be careful with this function. 06 10 Function Display Cmd Source Power-on Run Setting Display 1 1~2 --.1.9 Restarts by reset after trip: RST Restart Group DRV Code No. inverter trip can be occurred.0 Unit sec The inverter resumes if the terminal block operating command is ON when it is reset after a trip. Change the bit 2 to 1 at CON-71 Speed Search and Inverter will be start with Speed Search when trip is released. 7. the inverter starts operating. Inverter cut the output when inverter trip is occurred and motor run to Free-Run.

03 DRV 04 20 BAS 08 09 Function Display Acc Time Dec Time Max Freq Ramp T Mode Time scale Setting Display 0 1 Below 75kW Above 90kW Below 75kW Above 90kW 60.1/1 Unit sec sec Hz sec If you set BAS-08 at Max Freq.g. Max Frequency Frequency FX Accel Time Decel Time 7-16 .) If you set the maximum frequency at 60.5 seconds.0 60.0 90. 7. Acc/Dec time at 5 seconds and operating frequency at 30 Hz.10 Setting of accelerating/decelerating time and pattern 1) Setting of accelerating/decelerating time on the basis of the maximum frequency Group Code No. the motor starts rotating.0 30.0 Setting Range 0~600 0~600 0~400 Max Freq/Delta Freq 0.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Frequency Reset Operating Command When PRT-08=0 When PRT-08=1 Caution When using this function.00 Hz. Be careful of an accident. The acceleration time set in DRV-03 is the time it takes the frequency to reach the maximum value from 0 Hz and the deceleration time of 04 is the time it takes the frequency to stop at 0 Hz from the maximum frequency. if you reset the inverter in the terminal block of loader after a trip.1. the time required is 2.00 Max Freq 0.01/0. E. you can accelerate or decelerate at an equal slope on the basis of the maximum frequency regardless of the operating frequency.1 20.

0.0sec and deceleration initial value is 90. 2) Setting of Acc/Dec Time Based on Operating Frequency Group DRV BAS Code No.0sec.01 second Settable to 0.1 second Settable to 1 second Be careful because change of the unit leads to change of maximum settable time. you can set the Acc/Dec time by the time it takes the current frequency during operation at steady speed to reach the target frequency of the next step.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Caution 90 ~ 160 kW product’s acceleration initial value is 60. 03 04 08 Function Display Acc Time Dec Time Ramp T Mode Setting Display 1 20.00 seconds. BAS-09 Time scale: Used when precise Acc/Dec time is required due to the load characteristics or it is necessary to increase the maximum set time. If you change BAS-09 Time scale to 0(0.0 it is applied for below 75kW product.0 30. It changes the units of all the functions related to time.0 seconds.01sec) with Acc time set at 1000.1 sec 1 sec Range of Acc/Dec Time 0. If you set the Acc time at 5 seconds in case of step operation between 10Hz and 30Hz while it is static.0 0 ~ 6000 Caution Precision Settable to 0. Operating frequency 10Hz 5 7 12 Time [Sec] 30Hz Operating Command 5 Sec 5 Sec 7-17 .0 ~ 600. Please do not confuse that displayed value at left bottom of keypad is D : 20. the Acc time becomes 600. the Acc time is as follows. D : 30. Setting 0 1 2 0.01 sec 0.0 Delta Freq Setting Range 0~600 0~600 Max Freq/Delta Freq Unit sec sec - If you set BAS-08 as Delta Freq.00 0.00 ~ 60.

Freq.0 0~600 DRV 04 Dec Time 10. the operation is shown as follows. XCEL-L and XCEL-H are identified in binary codes and the operation is based on the Acc/Dec time set in BAS-70 ~ BAS-75.xx BAS 71~75 Dec Time-x x.0 90. If you set multi-function terminals P7 and P8 at XCEL-L and XCEL-M respectively. After 100msec. Select the terminal to use as sequential Acc/Dec time command among the multi-function terminals P1~P11 and set each of the sequential Acc/Dec command (XCEL-L. check another terminal block input for 100msec.0 30. For example.0 60. Unit sec sec sec sec Hz/RPM 7-18 . Function Display Setting Display Below 75 kW 03 Acc Time Above 90 kW DRV Below 75 kW 04 Dec Time Above 90 kW 70~74 Acc Time-x x. XCEL-M). Setting Range 20.0 0~600 70 Acc Time-1 20.0 0~600 ADV 60 Xcel Change Fr 30.00 0~Max.xx 65~75 Px Define 11 XCEL-L IN 65~75 Px Define 12 XCEL-M 89 In Check Time 1 * Acc Time-x : Acc Time-1~3. 4) Change of Acc/Dec Time by Acc/Dec Time Switching Frequency Setting Group Code No.0 0~600 BAS 71 Dec Time-1 20. Function Display Setting Display Setting Range 03 Acc Time 10.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 3) Setting of Acc/Dec Time Using Multi-Function Terminal Group Code No. Acc3 Acc 2 Acc 1 Acc 0 Frequency Dec0 Dec1 Dec2 Dec3 Acc/Dec Time 0 1 P8 - P7 - P7 P8 FX 2 3 IN-89 In Check Time: You can set In Check Time within the inverter when you use the multi-function input terminal as sequential Acc/Dec setting.0 0~600 0~600 0~600 0~600 1~5000 Unit sec sec sec sec msec Set the Acc/Dec time-0 I DRV-03 and 04 and set the Acc Time 1~3. the Acc/Dec time corresponding to P6 terminal is set. Dec Time-x: Dec Time-1~3 You can change the Acc/Dec time using the multi-function terminal. Dec Time 1~3 in 70~75. if you set the In Check Time at 100msec and input multi-function terminal P6.

For actual Acc/Dec time. If you set and input the function of the multi-function input terminal at sequential Acc/Dec (Xcel-L. 08 01 02 ADV 03 04 05 06 Function Display Ramp T mode Acc Pattern Dec Pattern Acc S Start Acc S End Dec S Start Dec S End Initial Setting Display 0 0 0 Max Freq Linear Linear 40 40 40 40 Setting Range Max Freq 0~1 0~1 1~100 1~100 1~100 1~100 Freq/Delta Unit % % % % This sets the pattern of the Acc/Dec slope. Type 0 Linear Function The output frequency is constant and increases or decreases linearly. 71 below the Acc/Dec switching frequency set at ADV-60 of the operating frequency.1. There are 5 patterns.Chapter 7 Basic Functions You can change the Acc/Dec slope without using the multi-function terminal. 1 S-curve Caution Be careful when you set the Acc/Dec pattern at S-curve because it gets longer than the set Acc/Dec time. if the operating frequency rises over the Acc/Dec switching frequency. 7-19 . see Page 7-21. The inverter operates at the slope set at BAS-70. which have the following functions. The curve rate of S-curve can be adjusted by using the functions of 03~06. the inverter runs at the Acc/Dec slope set at DRV-03 and 04.11 Acc/Dec pattern setting Group BAS Code No. Xcel-M[HZ]). the inverter runs by Acc/Dec input regardless of the Acc/Dec switching frequency. Used for applications requiring smooth Acc/Dec such as lift load and elevator door. DRV-03 BAS-70 Frequency DRV-04 ADV-60 BAS-71 FX 7. However.

the frequency which the curve acceleration accounts for when the S-curve accelerates to 30Hz is 0~15Hz and the 15Hz~30Hz interval is linear acceleration. This is used to adjust the curvilinear ratio of S-curve when acceleration begins. The curve ratio sets the ratio of the curve acceleration of the 1/2 frequency on the basis of a half of the target frequency. If set as in Acc S Start above. ADV-05 Dec S Start ~ ADV-06 Dec S End: Sets the curve deceleration slope ratio during deceleration.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Linear S-Curve Frequency Operating Command Acc Time Dec Time ADV-03 Acc S Start: You can adjust the slope of the curve when you set the Acc/Dec pattern as S-curve. This is used to set the ratio accounted for by the curve acceleration of the remaining interval on the basis of the 1/2 frequency of the target frequency as in case of Acc S Start. Acc/Dec Time in S-curve: Acc Time = Set Acc Time + Set Acc Time x (ADV-03)/2 + Set Acc Time x (ADV-04)/2 Dec Time = Set Dec Time + Set Dec Time x (ADV-05)/2 + Set Dec Time x (ADV-06)/2 Max Freq Out Freq (Hz) Max Freq/2 Time(sec) Variation of Delta Sstart Frequency Linear Send Linear Sstart Send Time(sec) [ S-Curve Acc/Dec Pattern ] 7-20 . is 60Hz. ADV-04 Acc S End: You can adjust the slope of the curve when the operating frequency reaches the target frequency. For example. The setting method is as the acceleration ratio described above. it accelerates in a linear slope until 30~45Hz and then accelerates in a curve slope and operates at a steady speed for the remaining 45~60Hz interval. which equals the maximum frequency(m[Hz]ax Freq). if ADV-03 Acc S Start is set at 50% and the target frequency.

The following figure illustrates use of multi-function terminal P8. DRV-18 Base Freq: sets the base frequency. 09 18 19 BAS 07 Function Display Cotrol Mode Base Freq Start Freq V/F Pattern Initial Setting Display 0 0 V/F 60. However.13 V/F Voltage control You can set the voltage. Enter the frequency shown in the motor plate. This is the frequency where the inverter begins to produce voltage.1. This is the frequency where the rated voltage of the inverter is produced. 65~75 Function Display Px Define Setting Display 25 XCEL Stop Unit - You can stop acceleration or deceleration using the multi-function terminal and operate at steady speed. 7-21 . You can also adjust the torque boost at a low speed.01~10 Hz Hz Unit The output voltage increases and decreases at a constant magnitude in proportion to the voltage/frequency (V/F) ratio as the frequency rises and declines.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7. Frequency P8 Operating Command 7.00 0. in case of decelerating stop during operation above the start frequency.50 Linear Setting Range 30~400 0. 1) Linear V/F pattern operation Group DRV Code No.1.12 Acc/Dec Stop command Group IN Code No. it stops operating as follows. This is used for constant torque (CT) load regardless of frequency. DRV-19 Start Freq: sets the start frequency. The inverter does not produce voltage when the target frequency is below the start frequency. slope and output pattern according to the output frequency.

00 0~ MaxFrequency BAS 44 User Volt 2 .00 0~ MaxFrequency 48 User Volt 4 . Square 2: Voltage is produced in proportion to twice the frequency.15.00 0~ MaxFrequency 42 User Volt 1 . This is used for variable torque(VT) load(fan.45.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Base Frequency Start Frequency Frequency Inverter Rated Frequency Voltage Operating Command 2) Double reduction V/F pattern operation (Using fan. pump load) Group BAS Code No.50 0~100% 45 User Freq 3 .100 0~100% Unit Hz % Hz % Hz % Hz % 7-22 . Function Display Initial Setting Display Setting Frequency 07 V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0~2 41 User Freq 1 .60.25 0~100% 43 User Freq 2 .00 0~ MaxFrequency 46 User Volt 3 . 07 Function Display V/F Pattern Initial Setting Display 1 3 Square 1 Square 2 Unit - This is an operation pattern of which the starting characteristic such as the fan and pump is suitable for the load of double reduction type.75 0~100% 47 User Freq 4 . Voltage 100% Linear Square Frequency Base Frequency 3) User V/F operation (When you want to use a tailored V/F operation pattern) Group Code No. pump) of the fan or pump.30. Square 1: Voltage is produced in proportion to 1.5 times the frequency. Choose from Square 1 and 2 according to the starting characteristic.

DRV-16 Fwd Boost: adjusts the torque boost in forward rotation. if you set the pattern greatly out of the linear V/F pattern. BAS-41 User Freq 1 ~ BAS-48 User Volt 4: Select a frequency between the start frequency and maximum frequency. the forward torque boost (DRV-16 Fwd Boost) and reverse torque boost (DRV-17 Rev Boost) do not operate. 7-23 . This adjusts the output voltage of low speed operation or starting. It can improve the starting characteristic or raise the low speed torque by increasing the output voltage in the low speed area. etc. When the user V/F pattern is being used.0 2. 15 16 17 note1) Function Display Torque Boost Fwd Boost note1) Setting Display 0 Manual 2.Chapter 7 Basic Functions The user can set the pattern suitable for the V/F pattern and load characteristics of a special motor rather than a ordinary induction motor. the torque might be insufficient or reversely the motor might be overheated.) Group DRV Code No. set the user frequency(User Freq x) and set the voltage corresponding to each frequency at the user voltage(User Volt x).14 Torque boost 1) Manual Torque Boost (When great start torque is necessary for elevator load.0 Setting range Unit - 0~15 0~15 % % Rev Boost note1) Default value of 90~160 kW is 1. 7.0 [%]. DRV-17 Rev Boost: adjusts the torque boost in reverse rotation.1. Caution Be careful not to set the torque boost too high because the motor might be overheated by over excitation. Voltage 100% BAS-48 BAS-46 Linear V/F BAS-44 BAS-42 Start BAS-41 Frequency Frequency Base Frequency BAS-45 BAS-43 BAS-47 Caution In using an ordinary induction motor.

the input voltage is produced. the output voltage is corrected according to the input voltage when the inverter is static. Because the stator resistance of the motor. the input voltage is produced. do auto tuning (BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before use (Page 8-17). The set voltage value is the output voltage value of the base frequency. if the input voltage is lower than the set voltage. 480V Output Voltage 180V Base Frequency Output Frequency 7-24 .1. Above the base frequency. Above the base frequency. 7. 15 Function Display Rated Volt Setting Display 220 Setting Range 180~480 Unit V Inputs the voltage of the motor plate. the output is in proportion to the set value but if the input voltage is lower than the set voltage.15 Motor output voltage adjustment (Adjusting motor voltage when input power specification differs from motor voltage specification) Group BAS Code No. if the input voltage is higher than the set voltage. 15 20 Function Display Torque Boost Auto Tuning Setting Display 1 2 Auto Rs+Lsigma Unit - The inverter automatically calculates the torque boost and produces voltage by using the motor parameter. inductance value and no load current value are necessary for the automatic torque boost to function.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Voltage 100 % No Torque Boost Forward Torque Boost time Reverse Torque Boost FX RX 2) Automatic Torque Boost (Choosing automatic selection function for greater starting torque) Group DRV BAS Code No. When 0 is set.

00 50 Initial Setting Display 0: Accel Unit 0~60 0~200 This is a normal accelerating method. Caution When D. It can be accelerated after stopping revolution of the motor by D.00 50 Setting Range Unit - 0~60 0~200 Caution sec % Frequency t Voltage Operating Command ADV-13 Do not set over inverter rating current because DC break depends on the motor rating current which is set. 2) Start after D. Group Code No.C.16 Selection of starting method (When you want to change starting method) If an operating command is input in the static state. Also. 07 ADV 12 13 1) Accelerating Start Group ADV Code No.1. Braking when the motor is revolving before voltage is output from inverter. voltage is supplied to the motor for the set period of time. please do not set over value of inverter’s rating current. 07 Function Display Start mode Setting Display 0 Accel Unit Function Display Start mode Dc-Start Time Dc Inj Level Setting Display 0 1 Accel DC-Start 0.C.C Braking is a standard of rating current for pre-set motor. Accelerates after the D. you can select the inverter starting method. Caution Since D. which directly accelerates to the target frequency if the operating command is given when no particular function is selected. It may cause overheating and malfunction.C. overheating and malfunction may occur. it can be used in case of using machine braking to motor’s spindle and that some torque is needed after opening machine braking.C. 7-25 . Braking is big or control time is too long. It may cause overheating and malfunction.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7. 07 12 13 ADV-12 Function Display Start Mode Dc-Start Time Dc Inj Level Setting Display 1 Dc-Start 0. Braking Group ADV Code No.

D. 1) How to stop by D. Braking. Only D. It starts D. ADV-14 Dc-Block Time : sets the time to block output of inverter before D.C. it prevents from over current trips by controlling this time. Braking operates.00 Setting Range 0~4 0~60 0~200 200~200 0~60 Unit - If the frequency reaches pre-set frequency during deceleration.00 50 5.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7.C. Therefore. 08 Function Display Stop Mode Setting Display 0 Dec Unit - This is a normal decelerating method.C.10 1. ADV-15 Dc-Brake Time : sets the time to put current voltage to the motor. Start decelerating with stop command and put direct voltage into the motor to stop if frequency reaches ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq.C.C.1. ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq : sets frequency to start D. Braking using Dwell frequency.1. the motor is stopped by D. Braking when reaching pre-set frequency after inverter starts decelerating. 7-26 . 1) Decelerating Stop Group ADV Code No.18 Stop after D. Braking. Braking. Notice When setting lower than frequence of D.C. the inverter decelerates to 0Hz and stops as follows. Braking stops the motor. braking.C. 08 14 ADV 15 16 17 Function Display Stop Mode Dc-Block Time Dc-Brake Time Dc-Brake Level Dc-Brake Freq Setting Display 1 Dc-Brake 0.C. braking Group Code No.17 Stop method selection (Changing stop method) You can choose the method of stopping the motor when the inverter is given a stop command during operation. If no particular function is selected. over current trips may occur due to current voltage to the motor. Rating current of the motor is a standard. Dwell operation is not available. ADV-16 Dc-Brake Level : controls D. When inertia of load is big or ADV-17 Dc-Brake Freq is high. Frequency Operating Command Dec Time 7.C.C. braking (in order to stop the motor when decelerating with direct current in pre-set frequency) If frequency reaches the set one.

be careful that damage might occur because of overheat of the motor if flux braking is applied to loads which frequently decelerates. Caution Stall prevention and Flux Braking are available only in case of deceleration. Be careful that the motor might continue rotating due to the load inertia if the inverter output is blocked during high speed operation when the motor load has high inertia. If you apply flux braking.Chapter 7 Basic Functions ADV-14 ADV-15 Frequency ADV-17 Caution When D. overheating and malfunction may occur. the decelerating time can be shortened because the regenerative energy is consumed by the motor. Voltage Operating Command 3) Flux Braking (Reducing decelerating time further without braking resistance or braking Unit) Group ADV Code No. Caution Voltage Current Operating Command ADV-16 Since D.C. please do not set over value of current of inverter’s rating current. Braking is big or control time is too long. It may cause overheating and malfunction. That means that Flux Braking operates when BIT3 of PRT-50 and Flux Braking of BAS-08 are set.C Braking is a standard of rating current for pre-set motor. Flux Braking has a priority. over voltage trip might be caused by the regenerative energy from the motor. And. 7-27 . In case of that deceleration time is too short or inertia is too big. Caution Do not use this function in case of load with frequent deceleration. However. It may cause overheating of the motor and malfunction. 2) Free Run Stop Group ADV Code No. Frequency. 08 Function Display Stop Mode Setting Display 3 Flux Braking Unit - If the decelerating time is short. 08 Function Display Stop mode Setting Display 2 Free-Run Unit - Operating command off. the inverter output is blocked. over voltage trips may occur.

the decelerating slope is adjusted or re-acceleration occurs in order to reduce the regenerative energy. Caution Do not use this function in case of load with frequent deceleration. voltage rises above a certain level due to the regenerative energy of the motor. In case of that deceleration time is too short or inertia is too big. 1) Frequency limit using maximum frequency and start frequency Group DRV Code No. It may cause overheating of the motor and malfunction. You cannot set the frequency above the maximum frequency. 24 25 26 Function Display Freq Liit Freq Limit Lo Freq Limit Hi Initial Setting Display 0 --. it is at 0.00 Setting Range No/Yes 0~Upper limit 0.50 60. However.19 Frequency limit (Operation with limited frequency) You can limit the operating frequency by using the maximum frequency and start frequency and by setting the upper/lower limits on the frequency. DRV-20 Max Freq (Maximum Frequency): the upper limit to the parameter of all speed units(Hz. be careful that the decelerating time might be longer than the set decelerating time and damage might occur because of overheat of the motor if applied to loads which frequently decelerates. rpm) other than the base frequency(DRV-18 Base Freq). 2) Frequency Limit Using Upper/Lower Limits Group ADV Code No. 08 Function Display Stop Mode Setting Display 4 Power Braking Unit - If the inverter D.No ---0. Power Braking has a priority. This can be applied when short decelerating time is required without additional braking resistance and braking unit. over voltage trips may occur. Caution Stall prevention and Power Braking are available only in case of deceleration. If you set the frequency below the start frequency.01~10 40~400 Unit Hz Hz DRV-19 Start Freq (Start Frequency): the lower limit to the parameter with speed-related units(Hz. 19 20 Function Display Start Freq Max Freq Setting Display 0. And.1. rpm).Chapter 7 Basic Functions 4) Power Braking (Optimum deceleration without Over-Voltage Trip) Group ADV Code No.00.50 60. That means that Power Braking operates when BIT3 of PRT-50 and Power Braking of BAS-08 are set.5~Max Frequency Hz Hz Unit 7-28 .C.00 Setting Range 0. 7.

00 15. you can set the frequency only between the upper limit(ADV-25) and lower limit(ADV-26). (2) ADV-25 Freq Limit Lo. RS485 communication. With frequency set as No. 7-29 . keypad setting.00 30. Group Code No. ADV-25 and ADV-26 codes are not displayed.No ---10.00 20.Chapter 7 Basic Functions (1) ADV-24 Freq Limit: If you set the frequency as Yes with the initially set value being No. The minimum set value of the upper limit is the lower limit and the maximum value of the lower limit is the upper limit. Frequency No Upper/Lower Limit to Frequency Max Frequency Upper Limit Lower Limit 10V V1(Voltage Input) 0 20mA I (Current Input) 3) Frequency Jump (Avoiding mechanical resonant frequency) Frequency jump is for prohibiting frequency setting so that the inverter does not operate in the resonant frequency band which might occur to the user’s device system.00 Setting Range No/Yes 0~Jump Freq Upper Limit 1 Jump Freq Lower Limit 1 ~Max Freq 0~Jump Freq upper Limit 2 Jump Freq Lower Limit 2 ~Max Freq 0~Jump Freq Upper Limit 3 Jump Freq Lower Limit 3 ~Max Freq Unit Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz If you want to increase the frequency. voltage.) is within the jump frequency band. etc. 27 28 29 ADV 30 31 32 33 Function Display Jump Freq Jump Lo 1 Jump Hi 1 Jump Lo 2 Jump Hi 2 Jump Lo 3 Jump Hi 3 Initial Setting Display 0 --. keep the frequency jump lower value and raise the frequency after the set frequency goes out of the frequency jump band.00 35. if the set frequency(current. ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi: sets the upper and lower limits. The frequency passes through the frequency jump band when the motor accelerates or decelerates and cannot be set within the set frequency jump band.00 25.

7-30 . you can enter the torque reference in the method selected in BAS-06 instead of the method chosen in DRV-08. Group DRV Code No. DRV-08 and BAS-06 are displayed only after the control mode(DRV-09) is set as sensorless vector or vector control mode and the torque mode(DRV-10) is set as Yes.Chapter 7 Basic Functions Frequency ADV-33 ADV-32 ADV-31 ADV-30 ADV-29 ADV-28 0 Operating Command Frequency : Declining Frequency : Rising 10V V1 (Voltage Input) 20mA I(Current Input) 7. BAS-06 Trq 2nd Src: With the multi-function input terminal ON. Caution With the multi-function input terminal set as the 2nd source and turned ON. BAS-04 Cmd 2nd Src.1. operating command and torque reference all turn into 2nd commands. BAS-05 Freq 2nd Src: With the multi-function input terminal set as 2nd Source ON. 06 07 08 04 BAS 05 06 IN 65~75 Function Display Cmd Source Freq Ref Src Trq Ref Src Cmd 2nd Src Freq 2nd Src Trq 2nd Src Px Define Setting Display 1 2 0 0 0 0 15 Fx/Rx-1 V1 Keypad-1 Keypad KeyPad-1 Keypd-1 2nd Source Unit - Select one of the multi-function terminals between IN-65 ~ IN-75 of the terminal block input group. operating command and torque reference as the second set values by using the multifunction input terminal. This can be applied in case of remote operation using the communication option or operation in the main body of the inverter with the remote braking stopped. Therefore make sure you check whether 2nd commands are rightly set before inputting the multi-function terminal.20 Selection of second operating method (By-pass operation) You can enter the frequency. the inverter can operate with the values set at BAS-04 and 05 instead of the values set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. the operation status changes because the frequency command.

P2. Group IN Code No. P2…P8 from the right. IN-86 DI Off Delay: If the state of the input terminal does not change for a set period of time after the terminal input.21 Multi-function input terminal control (Improving responsiveness of input terminal) You can set the filter time constant and contact point type for the multi-function input terminal of the inverter terminal Group Code No. P11. From the right.Chapter 7 Basic Functions 7.1. If the appropriate bit is set at B contact point. it is identified as ON or OFF. ON is displayed when the Dot is above and OFF is displayed when below. status of P1. 73 74 75 34 OUT 35 36 Function Display P9 Define P10 Define P11 Define Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 4 Setting Display 0 0 0 2 3 4 None None None FDT-2 FDT-3 FDT-4 Unit - 7-31 . it operates reversely. If the appropriate bit is set at A contact point in DRV-82. The order is P1.22 Digital input and output control by extended I/O option card If you mount an extended I/O card on the inverter option slot. status display bit of input terminal block will be added 3 bits. Digital input will be added when extended I/O is used so DINC/NO Sel 3 bits will be added.1. If extended I/O used. If you set the place of the dot of the switch corresponding to each bit below. 2) IN-87 DI NC/NO Sel: The type of contact point of the input terminal can be selected. status of P1. you can use additional 3 digital inputs and 3 digital outputs (relay output). 85 Function Display DI On Delay DI Off Delay DI NC/NO Sel DI Status Setting Display 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 Setting Range 0~10000 0~10000 - Unit msec msec - IN 86 87 90 1) IN-85 DI On Delay. …. From the right. 7. P2…P11 is shown. you can use it as A contact point(Normal Open) and if above. you can use it as B contact point(Normal Close). 3) IN-90 DI Status: displays the status of the input terminal block.

00~27. For example.00 Hz with Keypad-1 the main speed.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. let’s assume that the inverter has been set as in the table above. Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 None V1 I1 V2 I2 Function No auxiliary speed motion Selects the voltage input terminal of the control terminal block as the auxiliary speed. precise adjustment is possible up to 33.1 Applied Functions 8.1 Override frequency setting using auxiliary frequency command (Setting frequency of various computation conditions using main and auxiliary speed such as Draw operation) Group DRV BAS IN Code No. if you supply voltage of -10~+10V to V1 terminal and set the gain at 5% (variables between IN-01 ~ IN-16 are the initial values and IN-06 V1 Polarity is set as Bipolar).00 Hz. Selects the current input of the extended IO option board as the auxiliary speed. Selects the current input as the auxiliary speed. During operation at 30.1. Final Command Frequency Computation main speed command value + (BAS03 x BAS01 x IN01) main speed command value x (BAS03 x BAS01) main speed command value / (BAS03 x BAS01) main speed command value + (main speed command value x (BAS03 x BAS01)) main speed command value + BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50) x IN01 main speed command value x (BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50)) 8-1 Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 M + (G * A) M * (G * A) M / (G * A) M+(M*(G*A)) M+G*2*(A-50) M*(G*2*(A-50)) Expression M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) . and the auxiliary speed can be used for precise adjustment during main speed frequency. Main speed is used to set the operating frequency. BAS-01 AUX Ref Src : selects the type of input to be used as auxiliary speed. Selects the voltage input of the extended IO option board as the auxiliary speed.0 Dis Aux Ref Setting Range 0~9 0~4 0~7 200~200 0~48 Unit % - You can set operating frequency by simultaneously using two methods of frequency setting. 07 01 02 03 65~75 Function Display Freq Ref Src AUX Ref Src AUX Calc Type AUX Ref Gain Px Define Setting Display 0 1 0 40 Keypad-1 V1 M + G *A 0. BAS-02 Aux Calc Type : The reflection ratio of the main speed can be set by four operations after setting the amount of the auxiliary speed as gain (BAS-03 Aux Ref Gain).

G : auxiliary speed[Hz or RPM] or gain[%].auxiliary speed (A) setting (A:BAS-01): V1 (expresses auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the computation setting condition) . Conditions: . (frequency command by DRV-07 setting method) Main Speed M (frequency command by BAS-01 setting) Auxiliary Speed A F(M. BAS-03 Aux Ref Gain : adjusts the amount of the input(BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) set as auxiliary speed.maximum frequency (Max Freq) setting (DRV-20): 400Hz .A. IN-65~75 Px Define : If the terminal set as No.G) final command frequency Auxiliary speed command is OFF when the multi-function input terminal is set as dis Aux Ref (IN65~75). there might be an error of output frequency due to analog input and computation error. 01 ~ 32 is the initial value.auxiliary speed gain (G) setting (BAS-03): 50% . 7 M+M*G*2*(A-50) M : main speed frequency command[Hz or RPM] by DRV-07 setting.IN01~32: default value 8-2 . 40 dis Aux Ref among the multi-function input terminals. the auxiliary speed frequency operates as follows.main speed (M) setting (DRV-07): Keypad (frequency is set at 30Hz) . Example 1) If the frequency keypad is set in main speed and V1 analog voltage is in auxiliary speed. A : auxiliary speed frequency command[Hz or RPM] or gain[%] Of the setting types. the auxiliary speed command is not active but only the main speed command is effective. If the auxiliary speed is set as V1 or I1 and the parameter of the terminal input group(IN) No. numbers higher than 4 can do (+) or (-) motions through only analog input.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Setting Type 6 M/(G*2*(A-50)) Expression M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]40[%]) Final Command Frequency Computation main speed command value / (BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50)) main speed command value + main speed command value x BAS03 x 2 x (BAS01 – 50) Caution If the maximum frequency is high.

so the auxiliary speed A in the table below is 24Hz(=60[Hz]x((10. the frequency corresponding to 20mA is 60Hz.Chapter 8 Applied Functions If 6V is being input into V1. IN01~32: default value If 10. The value is 0. Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) Final Command Frequency 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36Hz(A))=48Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9Hz 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100Hz 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A)))=39Hz 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60Hz=36Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%))=3Hz 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–50%))=300Hz 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)= 33Hz *If the set frequency is converted into rpm.IN01~32: default value 8-3 .maximum frequency (Max Freq)setting)DRV-20): 400Hz .auxiliary speed (A)setting (BAS-01): I1 (expresses in auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the condition) .auxiliary speed gain (G)setting(BAS-03): 50%.4mA is being input into I1. the frequency corresponding to 10V is 60Hz. so the auxiliary speed A in the table below is 36Hz(= 60[Hz]x(6[V]/10[V])) or 60%(=100[%]X(6[V]/10[V]) according to the condition. Hz above changes into rpm.auxiliary speed (BAS-01): I1 (expresses in auxiliary speed[Hz] or percentage[%] according to the condition) . Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) Final Command Frequency 30Hz(M) + (50%(G) x 24Hz(A)) = 42Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A)))=36Hz 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%))= -3Hz(reverse) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–40%))= -300Hz(reverse) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)= 27Hz Example 3) main speed setting (DRV-07): V1 (if the frequency command is set at 5V and 30Hz) .auxiliary speed gain (BAS-03): 50% (represents G in the table below.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20 [mA]-4[mA])).4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])) or 40%(=100[%]x((10.M[HZ]ax Freq (DRV-20): 400Hz .5) . Example 2) main speed (M) setting (DRV-07): Keypad (when the frequency command is set at 30Hz) .

during sequential operation. DRV-13 JOG Dec Time : the deceleration and acceleration time during shift to jog frequency.2 Jog operation (If you want Jog operation) Operation is also available using the terminal block and the multi keys of the keypad.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20 [mA]-4[mA])). so the auxiliary speed A in the table below is 24Hz(=60[Hz]x((10. if the jog terminal is input. DRV-12 JOG Acc Time.00 30.00 JOG Setting Range 0. which is described below. P9~P11 (Option) Select the jog frequency setting terminal from the multi-function terminals P1 ~ P11 and set the function of the appropriate terminal block of IN-65 ~ IN-75 at No. the frequency corresponding to 20mA is 60Hz. 6 JOG. DRV-11 Jog Frequency (Jog Frequency) : sets the frequency necessary for jog operation. it operates at the jog frequency.5~maximum frequency 0~600 0~600 Unit Sec Sec - *Px : P1~P8.00 20.4mA is being input into I1. 8-4 . Therefore. If the jog terminal which has been set with the operating command input. up-down operation and 3-wire operation at a certain speed. the operating frequency moves to the jog frequency. Jog operation is the highest in the priority order except the dwell operation. 11 12 13 IN 65~75 Function Display JOG Frequency JOG Acc Time JOG Dec Time Px Define Setting Display 6 10.1.Chapter 8 Applied Functions If 10. 1) Jog Operation by Terminal Block 1 Group DRV Code No.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])) or 40%(=100[%]x((10. Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) M[Hz]+(M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])) M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] M[HZ]*(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]/(G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])) M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) Final Command Frequency 30Hz(M) + (50%(G) x 24Hz(A)) = 42Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz 30Hz(M)+(30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A)))=36Hz 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%))= -3Hz (reverse) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x2x(60%–40%))= -300Hz (reverse) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)= 27Hz 8.

8-5 . it decelerates at jog frequency(DRV-11 JOG Frequency). P9~P11(option) Function Display Multi-Key Sel Cmd Source Setting Display 1 JOG Key 0 Keypad Setting range 0~5 Unit sec Set code 42 of CNF mode at 1 JOG Key and DRV-06 of PAR mode at 0 Keypad. Function Display 11 DRV 12 13 IN 65~75 JOG Frequency JOG Acc Time JOG Dec Time Px Define Setting Display 46 47 10. Otherwise it stops. DRV-12 (Acc time) DRV-11 (Jog frequency) REV key FWD key When setting multi-key jog DRV-13 (Dec time) DRV-11 3) Jog Operation by Keypad Mode Group Code No. If you press multi key.00 FWD JOG REV JOG Setting Range 0. P9~P11(Option) Jog operation 1 is available when the operating command is input but jog operation 2 is available with only terminals set as the forward jog (FWD JOG) or reverse jog (REV JOG). The Acc/Dec time it takes to reach jog operation frequency is set in DRV-12 and DRV-13. frequency and Acc/Dec time and so on during jog operation is the same as jog operation 1 and if an operating command is given during jog operation. 3-wire.Chapter 8 Applied Functions P1 P5 CM FX JOG 2) Jog Operation by Terminal Block 2 Group Code No.00 20. The priority order of terminal input (dwell. operation continues at the jog frequency. CNF 42 PAR DRV 06 *Px : P1~P8.5~maximum frequency 0~600 0~600 - Unit Hz Sec Sec - 65~75 Px Define *Px : P1~P8. the symbol J at the top of the screen changes into J and then keypad jog operation becomes available. up/down).00 30. If you keep pressing FWD or REV keys.

. etc. ADV 65 U/D Save Mode IN 65~75 Px Define 8-6 . Function Display Code description .Sets the appropriate terminal function at 17 Up or 18 Down after selecting the terminal to use for up-down operation. Group Code No. .In case of operating command (FX or RX terminal) OFF or a trip during steady speed operation of in case of power OFF.If operation command becomes ON or normal again. Set one of the multi-function terminals at 20 U/D Clear and input the terminal in stop or steady speed operation. If you want to delete saved frequency.Chapter 8 Applied Functions When setting multi-key jog DRV-12 (Acc time) DRV-11 (Jog frequency) DRV-13 (Dec time) DRV-11 REV key FWD key 8. acceleration and deceleration both stop. deceleration stops and steady speed operation follows. This can be used for the system that uses the upper/lower limit switch output signals of a flow meter. . 65 65~75 65~75 Function Display U/D Save Mode Px Define Px Define Px Define Setting Display 1 17 18 20 Yes Up Down U/D Clear Setting Range 0~1 0~48 0~48 0~48 Unit - 65~75 *Px : P1~P8. as the acceleration/deceleration command of the motor. P9~P11(Option) You can control deceleration and acceleration by using the multi-function terminal block. the frequency that was saved in up-down operation is deleted. .Acceleration follows Up signal during operation and when if is OFF. operation at set frequency is available.Deceleration follows Down signal during operation and when if is Off.If up and down signals are simultaneously given. acceleration stops and steady speed operation follows.3 Up-Down operation Group ADV IN Code No. . the operating frequency is automatically saved in the memory.1. use the multi-function terminal block.

4 3-Wire operation (if you want operation using Push button) Group DRV Code No. For it to move. P1 P2 P8 CM FX : IN-65 RX : IN-66 3-Wire : IN-72 Frequency t FX RX P8 (3-Wire) 8-7 . you can make simple configuration sequence circuit as shown below. Therefore. 06 Function Display Cmd Source Setting Display 1 14 Fx/Rx .x 3-Wire Setting Range 0~5 0~48 Unit - IN 65~75 Px Define *Px : P1~P8.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Memorized frequency Output frequency P6(CLEAR) P7 (UP) Operation command(FX) 8. it stops. If forward and reverse operating commands are simultaneously input.1. the minimum input time(t) of the input terminal should continue for more than 1mSec. P9~P11 (Option) This is the function of operation by saving (Latch) the input signals as follows.

13 Safe Operation Mode Run Enable among the multi-function input terminals. Operation resumes after the operation command is input once again even if the multi-function terminal is ON. the operating commands it identified through the multi-function input terminal. If ADV-71 Run Dis Stop is set at No. Normal operation resumes when the multifunction terminal is input again with the operating command ON. 1 DI Dependent. 2 : Q-Stop Resume Decelerates at the decelerating time(Q-Stop Time) of safe operation mode.2 Q-Stop Resume. IN 65~75 Px Define 70 Run En Mode 72 Q-Stop Time ADV-71 (0:setting Free-Run) ADV-71 (1:setting Q-Stop) ADV-71 (1:setting Q-Stop Resume) n (P4) Operation command (P1) 8-8 . Group Code No.0 Run Enable Setting Range 0~2 0~600 0~48 Unit sec - This is the function of setting the operating command for it to be effective by using the multi-function input terminal. Safe Operation is not active) if setting at No. 1 : Q-Stop ADV 71 Run Dis Stop Decelerates at the decelerating time(Q-Stop Time) used in safe operation mode. Set at No. the decelerating time is set. (if setting only multi-function terminals as Run Enable. 0 : Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function terminal is OFF. the safe operation mode is not active.1. sets the motions of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal set at safe operation mode is OFF. 0 Always Enable.5 Safe operation mode (if you want to limit operation through Terminal Input) Group ADV Code No.1 Q-Stop or No. 70 71 72 IN 65~75 Function Display Run En Mode Run Dis Stop Q-Stop Time Px Define Setting Display 1 0 13 DI Dependent Free-Run 5.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. Function Display Code description selects the terminal to operate at No.

L - y ) S e q u 1 e n c e S e q u 2 e n c y ( S M A u t o - A O F P u t p u t r e q u e n x P S ( x S E Q c . Dec Dwell operates when frequency passes by Dec Dwell frequency on stop command input and it is not operated on simple deceleration of frequency. If the stop command is input.1. inverter will decelerate as Dwell run frequency and then it will stop as previous deceleration time after the set Dwell deceleration run time (Dec Dwell Time). O F P u t p u t r e q u e n x P ( x S E Q E ) Q c .0 5. Caution Be careful that dwell operation at a frequency higher than the rated slip of the motor with the load shown in the case above might adversely affect the life of the motor or damage the motor due to over current through the motor. the inverter operates at steady speed for the acceleration dwell time at the set acceleration dwell frequency and resumes acceleration.00 0.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.00 0. inverter operates at steady speed for the deceleration dwell time at the set deceleration dwell frequency after deceleration and then stops. this function is not available. 20 ADV 21 22 23 Function Display Acc Dwell Freq Acc Dwell Time Dec Dwell Freq Dec Dwell Time Initial Value 5. it can be used for opening the brake after operation at the dwell frequency before the mechanical brake is opened at the lifting load. Inverter accelerates to Dwell frequency during set time after run command input. It operates as set speed after the lapse of the Dwell acceleration run time (Acc Dwell Time) which is set in Dwell run frequency. 8-9 . Dwell operation is not operated when External brake control function is activated.L y ) ( G o t e p ) A u t o - B * Detailed description about Dwell operation This function is useful in hoisting applications to get enough Torque before a releasing mechanical brake. If the dwell time is set at ‘0’.0 Setting Range Starting frequency ~ Maximum frequency 0~10 Starting frequency ~ Maximum frequency 0~10 Unit Hz Sec Hz Sec If the operating command is input. If control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode) is used as the V/F mode.6 Dwell operation Group Code No. Acc Dwell command is effective only first command input so it is not available in case the frequency passes by Acc Dwell frequency while resume the acceleration on stop. If Stop command is input during run.

Chapter 8 Applied Functions * Acceleration Dwell Acc Dwell command is effective only first command input so it is not available in case the frequency passes by Acc Dwell frequency during re-acceleration on stop. Acc. FX 8-10 . Dwell time Dec. Dwell time FX * Deceleration Dwell Dec Dwell operates when frequency passes by Dec Dwell frequency on stop command input and it is not operated on simple deceleration of frequency. Dwell Freq. change Dec. Frequency Dec. Dwell operation is not operated when External brake control function is activated. Frequency Target Freq. Dwell Freq. change Acc. Dwell time Target Freq.

rpm =rated revolution of motor. DRV-14 Motor Capacity (motor capacity) : sets the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter output. the difference between the rotation speed of the motor and the set frequency varies according to the load ratio. the speed difference is automatically compensation.75Kw base) Unit kW rpm A A % - BAS 13 14 16 17 DRV-09 Control Mode (control mode) : checks whether the control mode is set at No. f r =rated frequency.75Kw base) 0(0.75Kw base) 3. BAS-17 Inertia Rate (load inertia ratio) : selects the load inertia on the basis of the inertia of the motor.6(0. The slip compensation operation is used for the load that should compensation the speed difference(slip).75Kw base) 4 90(0. pole numbers: 4.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. BAS-14 Noload Curr (no-load current) : inputs the current measured when the motor operates at the rated frequency after the load device connected to the motor axis is removed.75Kw base) 1. (0: when it is less than 10 times of motor’s inertia. 2~8: when it is more than 10 times of motor’s inertia) ⎛ rpm × P ⎞ fs = fr − ⎜ ⎟ . If the control mode is sensorless or vector or V/F PG. Rotation speed Synchroni zed speed Slip offset control Rotation speed of motor Load ratio Group DRV Code No.75(0. BAS-11 Pole Number (pole number) : inputs the number of poles on the plate of the motor. If no-load current is hard to measure. P =motor poles ⎝ 120 ⎠ ex) rated frequency: 60Hz. BAS-12 Rated Slip (rated slip) : input by using the rated revolution on the plate of the motor. input the current 30~50% of the current on the plate of the motor. f s = 60 − ⎜ ⎛ 1740 × 4 ⎞ ⎟ = 2 Hz ⎝ 120 ⎠ 8-11 . f s =rated slip frequency. 1: when it is 10 times of motor’s inertia.75Kw base) 72(0. 09 14 11 12 Function Display Control Mode Motor Capacity Pole Number Rated Slip Rated Curr Noload Curr Efficiency Inertia Rate Setting Display 2 2 Slip Compen 0. rated revolution: 1740rpm.7 Slip compensation operation For an induction motor.6(0. BAS-13 Rated Curr (rated current) : inputs the rated current on the plate of the motor. 2 Slip Compen.1. BAS-16 Efficiency (motor efficiency) : inputs the efficiency on the plate of the motor.

0 0~1000 0~1000 0~100 M0~10000 0~300 0~300 0~1 0. PID means P: Proportional.00 35 Below Level Hz 100.0 10. and D: Differential. Group Code No.0 I-Term Clear PID Openloop P Gain2 Setting Range 0~4 -100~100 0~10 0~10 0~1000 0~32.9 0~Max.0 0 0. Freq.0 100.0 X1 100.1~1000 0~Max.00 No 100.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.0 0 60.0 0.00 Keypad-1 V1 50.1.8 PID control 1) PID Basic Operation This is a method commonly used among the ones of auto control. Freq 0~100 0~9999 0~999.0 600 60. better control is available. I: Integral. 0~100 0~2 0~12 0~650 0~2 0~1000 0~48 0~48 0~48 Unit % % Sec MSec % % msec Hz Hz % Hz % Sec Sec Hz % % % - . 01 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 APP 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 65~75 IN 65~75 65~75 8-12 Function Display App Mode PID Output PID Ref Value PID Fdb Value PID Ref Set PID Ref Source PID F/B Source PID P-Gain PID I-Time PID D-Time PID F-Gain P Gain Scale PID Out LPF PID Limit Hi PID Limit Lo PID Out Inv PID Out Scale Pre-PID Freq Pre-PID Exit Pre-PID Delay PID Sleep DT PID Sleep Freq PID WakeUp Lev PID WakeUp Mod PID Unit Sel PID Unit Gain PID Unit Scale PID P2-Gain Px Define Px Define Px Define Setting Display 2 0 0 0 0 2 22 23 24 Proc PID 50.00 0. By combining these 3.00 0.0 0.

APP-21 PID F/B Source : Selects the feedback input of PID control. gain and scale set in APP-42. APP-43 and APP-44 reflected. APP-16 PID Output : Displays the present output value of the PID controller with the unit. APP-19 PID Ref Set : The reference value can be input if the reference type(APP-20) of PID control is set as keypad(0:Keypad). the value set in APP-19 is ignored. temperature and tension and so on. If the V1 terminal is set as PID F/B Source. 17 PID Ref Value among CNF-06~08 of CNF.Chapter 8 Applied Functions The output frequency of the inverter goes through PID control in order to control the system process including the flow. If F/B Source is changed to another item. APP-43 and APP-44 reflected. 485 Encoder FieldBus PLC Synchro Binary Type Function Inputs the PID reference on the inverter keypad. -10~10V voltage input terminal of the terminal block 0~20mA current input terminal of the terminal block Voltage input terminal of the extended I/O option card Current input terminal of the extended I/O option card RS485 input terminal of the terminal block Pulse input of the encoder option card Communication command by communication option card Command by PLC option card Command by synchronized operation option card Command by BCD option card PID F/B Source possibility X O O O O O O O O O X The set PID reference can be displayed in the monitor mode and APP-17 and monitored in the items set as No. V1 cannot be set as the PID Ref Source. 8-13 . gain and scale set in APP-42. Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Keypad V1 I1 V2 I2 Int. The feedback cannot be set as the same input as selected in the reference. APP-18 PID Fdb Value : Displays the present feedback input of the PID controller with the unit. 2 Proc PID(Process PID). APP-01 App Mode(application mode) : You can set the process PID functions by setting at No. gain and scale set in APP42. V1 can be set as Ref Source. APP-43 and APP-44 reflected. APP-20 PID Ref Source : Selects the reference input of PID control(the items marked in grey are supposed to be provided soon in the future). This can be selected in the inputs other than the keypad input(Keypad-1. APP-17 PID Ref Value : Displays the currently set reference of the PID controller with the unit. If the reference type is set at values other than the keypad. Keypad-2) in the reference input type.

F In Fahrenheit or Centigrade. If the function of the terminal block selected from IN-65~75 is set at No. Displayed in voltage. the gain set in APP-45 can be by passed instead of the gain set in APP-22 and APP-23. APP-24 PID D-Time : Sets the output of the error change rate. current or consumed electricity. APP-32 PID Out Scale : Adjusts the size of the controller output.0%. 1 V1 terminal. if APP-20 Ref Source is selected as No. If P gain is set at 50%. the feedback can be monitored.0~1000. If a ratio lower than 0. the more stable the PID controller output is but the responsiveness might be down. Normally the responsiveness is enhanced by using a low value(the initial value is 0) but the stability can also be improved by using a higher value. APP-42 PID Unit Sel : Sets the unit of the control. APP-43 PID Unit Gain. APP-29 PID Limit Hi. 50% of the error is output. This sets the time for 100% output when the error is 100%. the inputs other than V1 should be selected in APP21 PID F/B Source. Various pressure units are available. 1% is output per 10mSec when the error change rate per second is 100%. If the multi-function terminal block function is set at 21 I-Term Clear and the terminal block is ON. This can obtain a rapid response characteristic. 8-14 . APP-23 PID I-Time : Sets the times for output of accumulated errors. APP-25 PID F-Gain : The set goal can be added to the PID output and the ratio is set. APP-44 PID Unit Scale : Adjusts the size suited to the unit selected in APP-42 PID Unit Sel. The normal error can be reduced by the integral time. APP-30 PID Limit Lo : Limits the output of the PID controller. Speed Voltage Current Electric power Horse power Temperature Displays the inverter output frequency or motor revolution. 100% is output after 1 second when the error is 100%. APP-27 PID Out LPF : This is used when the entire system is instable because the PID controller output changes too fast or there is too much oscillation. 23 P Gain2 and then the selected terminal is input. all the accumulated integral amount is deleted. The setting range of P gain is 0. APP-26 P Gain Scale : Sets the output ratio of the difference(error) between the reference and feedback. The higher a value is used. If the integral time(PID I-Time) is set at 1 second. Set as No. use P Gain Scale of APP-26. Setting Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 % Bar mBar Pa kPa Hz Rpm V I kW HP o C o Function Pressure Displayed in percentage instead of a certain physical value.Chapter 8 Applied Functions For example. APP-45 PID P2-Gain : The gain of the PID controller can be changed by using the multi-function terminal. 18 PID Fdb Value of CNF-06~08. APP-22 PID P-Gain.1% is necessary. If the differential time(PID D-Time) is set at 1mSec.

. .Chapter 8 Applied Functions 2) PID Control Block Diagram Notice .100. 8-15 . the value of [%] is converted to the one of [Hz] and is output. the output is discontinued with a “Pre-PID Fail” trip.0% is the standard of DRV-20 (maxFreq). normal operation continues at 30Hz until the control amount(PID feedback amount) goes up above what is set in APP-35. APP-36 Pre-PID Delay : PID control operation starts if the input feedback amount(control amount) of the PID controller is larger than the value set in APP-35. APP-35 Pre-PID Exit. 3) Pre-PID Operation This is the function of normal acceleration to the set frequency without PID motion if an operating command is input and starting PID operation when the control amount increases to a certain degree. For example.If PID change operation (changes from PID operation to normal operation) comes into multi-function inputs (P1~P11). if an amount smaller than the value set in APP-35 continues for the period of time set in APP-36.Polarity of normal PID output PID OUT is unipolar and is limited by APP-29 (PID Limit Hi) and APP-30 (PID Limit Lo). However. if Pre-PID Freq is set at 30Hz. APP-34 Pre-PID Freq : The frequency to normal acceleration is input if normal acceleration is necessary without PID control motion.

among multi-function terminal blocks. the terminal set at No.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 4) PID Sleep Mode(Sleep) APP-37 PID Sleep DT. If you select 0(Below Level) in APP-40 and the feedback is smaller than set in APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev. 22 PID Openloop in IN-65~75 Px Define is input. No. PID operation resumes. The terminal OFF. PID operation resumes. 1(Above Level) restarts operation when it is larger than the value set in APP-39. see APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev. APP-40 PID WakeUp Mod : Sets the threshold of starting PID operation from the PID sleep mode described above. P I D S le e p F re q (A P P 38) P ID Feedback P ID W a k e U p L e v ( A P P -3 9 ) O u tp u t fre q u e n c y Fx P ID o p e ra tio n s e c tio n P I D S le e p D T ( A P P 37) S le e p s e c tio n W akeUp s e c tio n 5) PID Operation by pass (PID Openloop) If. is stops operating and goes into Sleep Mode. For the threshold of shift from PID Sleep Mode to PID operation mode back. 8-16 . APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev. No. APP-38 PID Sleep Freq : If the inverter continues to operate for the time set in APP-37 PID Sleep DT under the frequency set in APP-38 Sleep Freq. 2(Beyond Level) restarts operation when the difference between the reference and feedback is larger than the value set in APP-39. PID operation stops and changes to normal operation.

rated current.3 5.29 6.75 1.4 0. For the items not input.00 2. rated voltage and efficiency shown on the motor plate.0 28.75kW.7 5. The motor parameters measured through auto tuning are used for auto torque boost.00 179. make sure that you input the number of motor poles.169 0. Ex) 0.0 No load current [A] 0.33 3.19 2.500 0.4 6.2 3.8 1. if the encoder option card is connected to the main body of the inverter.33 2.600 1. In addition.488 8-17 .0 7.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.5 7.120 Leakage inductance [mH] 40.5 2.00 Stator resistance [Ω] 14.840 0.4 Rating slip frequency [Hz] 3.8 21.4 8.0 6.1 9. Before conducting auto tuning. you can test the operation of the encoder.9 Auto tuning The motor parameter can be automatically measured.6 13.6 220 72 None 26.4 3. sensorless vector control and vector control and so on. 220V class Motor Group Code No.314 0.4 1.33 3. Input voltage 200 Motor capacity [kW] 0.33 1.9 17.4 1544 145 None Unit kW rpm A A V % Ω mH mH msec - Be sure to conduct auto tuning after the motor stops operating.70 2.33 1.50 1.170 0. automatically set values are used.6 1.48 3. DRV 14 11 12 13 14 15 BAS 16 20 21 22 23 24 APO 04 Function Display Motor Capacity Pole Number Rated Slip Rated Curr Noload curr Rated Volt Efficiency Auto Tuning Rs Lsigma Ls Tr Enc Opt Mode Caution Setting Display 1 0 0 0.2 40.844 1.75 4 40 3.63 4.3 12.2 0.6 3.7 2.67 2.4 26.5 11 Rating current [A] 1. rated slip.94 9.1.1 2.

084 0.022 0.4 2.3 23.00 1.3 0.00 1.5 16. remove the load attached to the motor axis before use.1 16.0 1.042 28.069 0.00 1.6 167.8 53. For setting the control mode at vector control.33 1.500 0.520 0.7 5. 1 : ALL The motor parameter is measured with the motor rotating.9 48.126 0.403 0. the parameter might not be correctly measured because the motor measures the parameter while rotating.9 20. leak inductance(Lsigma).133 1. the rotor time constant(Tr) is tuned while it is static.5 0.7 1.0 38.4 28.00 2.457 2. After auto tuning is completed.62 8.844 2.00 Stator resistance [Ω] 0.67 2.45 9.4 90. The stator resistance(Rs).4 0.0 12.5 7.00 1.2 80. the encoder state is also measured.5 19.00 1. 1 ALL.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Input voltage Motor capacity [kW] 15 18.8 35.6 65.5 60.0 Rating slip frequency [Hz] 1.039 0.1 24. for correct measurement.032 0. Tr.48 3.8 104.948 0.5 335.81 3.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 Rating current [A] 53.00 1.9 4.422 1. When the encoder option card is mounted.3 290.2 31.00 1.488 0.2 3. For encoder state measurement.8 1.00 1.050 0.5 242. If load is connected to the motor axis.027 0.7 77.00 1.33 2.101 0.4 41.819 0.00 14. 8-18 .2 0. Lsigma.380 400 1) Motor Parameter Tuning (Rs.168 0.715 0.068 0.9 27. that it is finished is displayed.6 76.5 1.0 44.940 0. set the auto tuning item at No.52 2.00 1.5 22 30 0. If Control Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2.167 0.00 1.6 0.084 0.00 3.00 1.5 29.9 19. stator inductance(Ls).33 1.168 0. Ls.95 13.75 1.0 8.1 5.0 3.0 21.0 12.7 5.33 3.38 2. Auto tuning starts if you select one of the items below and press PROG.00 1.520 1.0 No load current [A] 15.4 7.50 1.360 0.585 0. the related functions of the encoder should be rightly set.852 0.0 7.00 1.0 11. 0 : None Displays the initial auto tuning item.53 4.5 2.250 0.118 0.2 9. Noload curr) BAS-20 Auto Tuning : Selects the type of auto tuning and implements auto tuning.8 58. no-load current(Noload Curr) and rotor time constant(Tr) are all measured.5 11 15 18.00 1.1 69.00 1.704 1.6 141.021 Leakage inductance [mH] 1.33 3.056 0.711 121.9 2.6 203. Therefore.3 106.5 74.

you should conduct time constant(Tr) tuning again. the default value is displayed. 4 : Enc. APO-04 Enc Type Sel : Selects the encoder signal transmission method according to the encoder manual. the motor measures the rotor time constant(Tr) while static. Because the motor is not rotating. This mode is available when Control Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2. The measured values are used for auto torque boost and sensorless vector control. Test Connect the encoder option card to the main body of the inverter and connect the encoder cable attached to the motor to the option card. Measure stator resistance(Rs). Totem or Com(1) and Open Collect(2) is selected. 20 01 04 APO 05 06 08 Function Display Auto Tuning Enc Opt Mode Enc Type Sel Enc Pulse Sel Enc Pulse Num Enc Monitor Setting Display 3 1 0 0 Enc Test Feed-back Line Driver (A+B) 1024 0 Setting Range 0~4 0~2 0~2 0~2 10~4096 Unit - APO-01 Enc Opt Mode : Set at No. One of Line Driver(0). the motor measures the rotor time constant(Tr) while rotating. 3 : Rs+Lsigma The parameter is measured with the motor not operating. If Control Mode(DRV-09) is Sensorless-2. 2) Encoder Connection Status Measurement Group BAS Code No. Be sure to set related functions correctly for encoder state measurement. BAS-14 Noload Curr : Displays the motor parameter measured in auto tuning. If Control Mode(DRV-09) shifts from Sensorless2 to Vector.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 2 : ALL (Stdstl) Motor parameter is measured when motor is stopped. 1 Feed-back. The motor checks connection and misconnection of A and B pulses. However. and the rotor time constant(Tr) all together at the same time. leak inductance(Lsigma). 8-19 . BAS-21 Rs ~ BAS-24 Tr. 5 : Tr When Control Mode(DRV-09) is Vector. for the parameter missing from the measurement items. be careful not to rotate the motor axis at the load side. Of the auto tuning selected above. the connection between the motor axis and load does not affect the parameter measurement.

3 Enc Test. In case of a failure of the encoder. 2 V/F PG. In case of encoder misconnection. In such a case. Check the encoder connection status before operation starts.1. BAS-20 Auto Tuning : Forward operation is carried out to 20Hz if you set the encoder related items described above and set auto tuning at No. 09 45 46 47 APO 01 Function Display Control Mode PG P-Gain PG I-Gain PG Slip Max % Enc Opt Mode 1 1 Setting Display V/F PG 3000 50 100 Feed-back Setting Range 0~4 0~9999 0~9999 0~200 0~2 Unit % - You can enhance the speed control precision of the V/F controller by mounting the encoder option card. change APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel or change 2 lines of the inverter output lines connected to the motor with each other. Enc reversed is displayed. it decelerates and accelerates back to 20Hz in the reverse direction. The reference of the speed controller is the set frequency and the feedback is the encoder input. After forward operation.10 V/F operation using speed sensor Group DRV CON Code No. 8. the auto tuning item changes into None. DRV-09 Control Mode : Sets the control mode at No.Chapter 8 Applied Functions APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel : Sets the encoder output pulse direction. Forward operation in case of No. 8-20 . No. 1 is selected for use as the frequency setting reference. APO-06 Enc Pulse Num : Inputs the output pulse number per rotation. 0 V/F control mode. Operation is carried out with the speed controller added to No. APO-08 Enc Monitor : Convert encoder output in terms of motor revolution and displays it in terms of Hz and rpm. 2 –(A+B) are selected. 0 (A+B) and reverse operation in case of No.

xx 4 2. the faster the responsive characteristic is.11 Sensorless (I) vector control Group DRV Code No.7 220 83 Rs+Lsigma 100. In addition. the faster the response is.Chapter 8 Applied Functions CON-45 PG P-Gain. so change the control mode to V/F control.0 200 Unit kW Hz A A V % % mSec Caution The parameter of the motor connected to the output terminal of the inverter should be measured for highperformance operation. 8. The set value is used for the maximum compensation slip. DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity) BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles) BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip) BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current) 8-21 . For high-performance control of sensorless(I) vector control.00 3. Before auto tuning. the inverter capacity should be equal to that of the motor. If it is set too low. the lower it is set. the speed controller might be instable. if this function code is set at 90% and the rated slip(BAS12:Rated Slip) is 30rpm.6 0.9=27rpm. in case of sensorless(I) vector control operation. but if it is set too high. For the integral. do not connect more than one motor to the inverter output.1. Measure the parameter using auto tuning(BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before vector operation. 09 10 14 11 12 13 BAS 14 15 16 20 CON 21 22 Function Display Control Mode Torque Control Motor Capacity Pole Number Rated Slip Rated Curr Noload curr Rated Volt Efficiency Auto Tuning ASR-SL P Gain1 ASR-SL I Gain1 Setting Display 3 0 x 2 Sensorless-1 No x. If the motor capacity is lower than the inverter capacity by more than 2 phases. the speed controller might be instable. For example. the maximum compensation slip is 30*0. enter the items on the motor plate first. there might be a problem with the control characteristic. CON-47 PG Slip Max % : The percentage value of the rated slip(BAS12:Rated Slip). The higher the proportional gain is set. CON-46 PG I-Gain : Sets the proportional gain of the speed controller(PG P-Gain) and integral gain(PG I-Gain).

do not switch over commands of forward and reverse rotation are during operation. However. The controller gain is set according to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time. (CON-71 Speed Search = set Speed Search during acceleration(0001)) 8-22 . set the auto tuning item(BAS20 Auto Tuning) at No. Caution Torque control is not available during low speed regeneration region and low speed light load. When controlling with vector control. For details on the torque control mode. Please. leak inductance(Lsigma) and no-load current(Noload Curr) are saved. If you set the torque control(DRV-10) at Yes. CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 : The speed controller gain of the sensorless(I) vector control can be changed. DRV-10 Torque Control : Selects and uses the speed control mode and torque control mode from the sensorless(I) vector control mode. motor overheat of system instability might occur according to the controller gain setting. When auto tuning finishes. For the no-load current of the motor. 2 Rs+Lsigma for the motor parameter to be measured with the motor static.1. Caution The controller gain can be adjusted according to the load characteristic. set the auto tuning item at No. please set Speed Search in case that there is possibility to operate during motor free run. When auto tuning finishes. When using torque control. the default value is used. 1 All after separating the load for the motor to measure the parameter while rotating. CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1. the measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs).Chapter 8 Applied Functions BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage) BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency) Auto tuning with motor static : If the load connected to the motor axis is hard to remove. see 8. the measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs) and leak inductance(Lsigma) are saved in BAS-21 and BAS-22.14 Torque control. change into torque control mode occurs before operation. choose vector control. Auto tuning with motor rotating : If the load connected to the motor axis can be removed. It may cause over current or deceleration error of reverse direction.

09 10 14 11 12 13 BAS 14 15 16 20 20 21 22 23 24 26 CON 27 28 29 30 31 32 48 49 Function Display Control Mode Torque Control Motor Capacity Pole Number Rated Slip Rated Curr Noload curr Rated Volt Efficiency Auto Tuning SL2 G View Sel ASR-SL P Gain1 ASR-SL I Gain1 ASR-SL P Gain2 ASR-SL I Gain2 Observer Gain1 Observer Gain2 Observer Gain3 S-Est P Gain 1 S-Est I Gain 1 S-Est P Gain 2 S-Est I Gain 2 ACR P-Gain ACR I-Gain Setting Display 3 0 x 2 1 Sensorless-2 No Changeable according to capacity of the motor 4 Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor 220/380/440/480 Changeable according to capacity of the motor Rs+Lsigma Yes Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor 10500 100. Measure the parameter using auto tuning(BAS-20 Auto Tuning) before vector operation. do not connect more than one motor to the inverter output.0 13000 Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor Changeable according to capacity of the motor 1200 120 Unit kW Hz A A V % % Msec % % % % % - Caution The parameter of the motor connected to the output terminal of the inverter should be measured for high-performance operation. For high-performance control of sensorless(I) vector control. in case of sensorless(I) vector control operation. In addition.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. If the motor capacity is lower than the inverter capacity by more than 2 phases.12 Sensorless(II) vector control Group DRV Code No. so change the control mode to V/F control. the inverter capacity should be equal to that of the motor. there might be a problem with the control characteristic.1. 8-23 .

CON-28 Observer Gain3. the measured values of the motor stator resistance(Rs). CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is also set in percentage of the CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain1. the speed controller P gain can be increased or I gain(time in terms of msec) can be decreased. When auto tuning finishes. When a constant speed error continues. the user can set various gains(CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2. The wave form of the speed controller gain can be improved after observing the tendency of the speed change. In PI speed controller. CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is set as the percentage of the low speed gain CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain1.0%. CON-32 S-Est I Gain2) applied to rotation at higher than medium speed(about 1/2 of the base frequency). the lower I Gain2 is. The motor measures the parameter while rotating. The speed controller I gain is the integral gain of the speed error.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Before auto tuning. BAS-23. 1 Yes. the related parameter is not displayed. the lower P Gain2 is than 100. For example. the faster speed variance decreases. 1 All. the speed controller I gain is the time(msec) it takes until the rated torque output command. enter the items on the motor plate first. CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2. a lot of vibration might occur.0%. 0 No. CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 : Can be seen only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set as No. as well. the speed controller PI gain is the proportional gain of the speed error and has a characteristic of having higher torque output command as the speed error rises. 8-24 . the lower the responsiveness is.0%. if P gain is increased or I gain is decreased too much. DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity) BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles) BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip) BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current) BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage) BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency) Separate the load connected to the motor shaft and set the auto tuning item at No. If you select No. CON-20 SL2 G View Sel : If you select No. That is. the faster the speed variance decreases. For I gain. CON-27 Observer Gain2. 1) Speed Controller Gain CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1. However. the speed controller P gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 25. The lower the value is. The speed controller gain at higher than the medium speed of sensorless(II) vector control(about 1/2 of the base frequency). If the speed variance is not rapidly reduced. CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 : The speed PI controller gain of the sensorless(II) vector control can be changed. In addition. That is why the higher the speed error is. stator inductance(Ls). BAS-14 and BAS-24 respectively. it can be adjusted by increasing I gain or P gain. no-load current(Noload Curr) and rotor time constant(Tr) are saved in BAS-21. 1 Yes. BAS-22. if CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain1 is 50. CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2.0% and CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is 50. CON-31 S-Est P Gain2. in case of oscillation of the speed wave form. leak inductance(Lsigma).

Tripless operation can be possible by increasing the value of CON34 (SL2 OVM Perc) when load is applied. The Trip caused by 8-25 . you can conduct a test mostly by decreasing the P gain or I gain of the speed estimator. The speed estimator gain is set according to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time. Input Voltage is lower than nominal voltage at the area where supply a unstable input voltage so OC1 Trip is occurred frequently when heavy reverse load such as impact load (Torque Limit<Load) is applied. The speed estimator gain can be changed at higher than the medium speed(about a/s of the base frequency) in sensorless(II) vector control. the speed controller I gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 200msec. CON-28 Observer Gain3 : For sensorless(II) vector control. It is recommended that you do not change the observer gain from its default value. Observer Gain2(CON-27) and Observer Gain3(CON-28) can be see only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set at No. 1 Yes. if CON-23 ASR-SL I Gain1 is 100msec and CON-23 ASR-SL I Gain2 is 50. CON-32 S-Est I Gain1 : Can be see only when SL2 G View Sel(CON-20) is set at No. CON-27 Observer Gain2. if CON-29 S-Est P Gain1 is 300 and CON-31 S-Est P Gain2 is 40. (Default value: 120 [%]) Also. 2) Magnetic Flux Observer Controller Gain CON-26 Observer Gain1. CON-30 S-Est I Gain1 : The speed estimator gain of sensorless(II) vector control can be changed. For example.Chapter 8 Applied Functions the lower the responsiveness is. The setting method is the same as the low and medium speed gain setting method. the speed estimator P gain at higher than the actual medium speed is 120. the observer for estimating the stator current and rotor magnetic flux of the motor is essential. The controller gain is set according to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time. Torque limit<load). CON-31 S-Est P Gain2 and CON-32 S-Est I Gain1 are respectively set as the percentage of low speed gain CON-29 SEst P Gain1 and CON-30 S-Est I Gain1. 1 Yes. For example.0%. The speed estimator gain is set according to the default motor parameter and Acc/Dec time. CON-34 SL2 OVM Perc : Output Voltage have a linearity for Input Voltage at non-overmodulation area which the ratio of Output Voltage /Input Voltage is below 100%.0%. The speed estimator P gain or I gain can be increased or decreased by a small amount for adjustment when the displayed value of speed is not equal to the goal value in a normal state. These gains can be also adjusted when there is great vibration in the motor or high current ripple with power ON. At CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) can set the voltage range which is limited at Sensorless-2 overmodulation area. CON-31 S-Est P Gain2. In a application such as impact load (Press etc. Observer Gain1(CON-26) applies at low and medium aped and Observer Gain2(CON-27) applies at medium and high speed and Observer Gain3(CON-28) applies in the torque mode.. 3) Speed Estimator Gain CON-29 S-Est P Gain1. In such a case.

Let’s assume that the sensorless(II) vector control is carried out in speed mode (DRV-10 torque control set at No. Secondly. try increasing CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1 to 50% of the default value to adjust the gain properly. Firstly. Guide on Various Gain Adjustment of Sensorless (II) Vector Control : Because the sensorless(II) vector control is greatly influenced by the characteristics of the motor and load.1. For details on the torque control mode. where regenerative load is usually used. Caution The controller gain can be adjusted according to the load characteristic. adjust the gain properly increasing CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 until it is twice the default value. If the torque control(DRV-10) is set as Yes. CON-49 ACR I Gain : Adjusts the P gain and I gain of the current PI controller. However. it is sometimes necessary to adjust the controller gain. 8-26 . DRV-10 Torque Control : The speed control mode and torque control mode are selected from the sensorless(II) vector control mode and used. In such a case. If it does not work.14 Torque control. torque ripple might occur frequently in the motor with regenerative load supplied. 0 No). motor overheat of system instability might occur according to the controller gain setting.Chapter 8 Applied Functions lower Output Voltage. operation is carried out in the torque control mode. CON-48 ACR P-Gain. set the CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) to 140~150% and you can operate Tripless operation in case heavy load is applied. if instable operation is observed at extremely low speed(below 2~3Hz) or the speed bounds during starting. see 8. increase CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1 back to the default value and adjust the gain value decreasing CON30 S-Est I Gain 1 to 50% of the default value. In this case.

Follow the setting order below before vector control operation.13 Vector control The motor operates at the vector control mode in which high precision control of speed and torque is provided with the encoder option card mounted on the main body of the inverter. there might be a problem with the control characteristic. In addition. If the motor capacity is lower than the inverter capacity by more than 2 phases.10 0 0 Keypad-1 180 180 180 180 Keypad-1 0. 8-27 . so change the control mode to V/F control.0 Asr Gain 2 ASR P/PI Unit Sec % Sec % MSec % mSec Hz Sec MSec mSec % % % % % % - CON 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 IN 65~75 65~75 For high performance operation of the vector control mode.00 0. 09 21 20 09 10 11 12 13 15 16 18 19 Function Display Control Mode Hz / rpm Sel Auto Tuning PreExTime Flux Force Hold Time ASR P Gain 1 ASR I Gain 1 ASR P Gain 2 ASR I Gain 2 Gain Sw Freq Gain Sw Delay ASR Ref LPF Torque Out LPF Torque Lmt Src FWD +Trq Lmt FWD –Trq Lmt REV +Trq Lmt REV –Trq Lmt Trq Bias Src Torque Bias Trq BiasFF Px Define Px Define Setting Display 4 1 1 0 0 36 37 Caution Vector Rpm Display Yes 1.1.0 300 50. in case of vector control operation.0 0.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.0 1.0 100. For high-performance control of sensorless(I) vector control. do not connect more than one motor to the inverter output. the inverter capacity should be equal to that of the motor.0 50.0 300 0. Group DRV BAS Code No. correct data should be input on the related functions including the motor parameter measurement and encoder and so on.

Hz or rpm. select forward operation.1 feedback and input the following information according to the specification of the encoder. 1 feedback. 20 01 04 APO 05 06 08 Function Display Auto Tuning Enc Opt Mode Enc Type Sel Enc Pulse Sel Enc Pulse Num Enc Monitor Setting Display 3 1 0 0 Enc Test Feed-back Line Driver (A+B) 1024 Setting Range 0~4 0~2 0~2 0~2 10~4096 Unit - APO -01 Enc Opt Mode: Set as No.2. select one out of Line Driver(0). select reverse operation.2. select reverse operation. In case of (A+B) of NO. Set it right. APO-06 Enc Pulse Num: input the number of pulse per rotation. referring to the manual. select frequency reference for setting. Select one out of Line Driver(0). Set the encoder option mode(APO-01) at No.0. APO-04 Enc Type Sel: select signal delivery method of encoder. Group BAS Code No. APO-06 Enc Pulse Num: input the number of pulse per rotation. select frequency reference for setting. According to specifications of encoder.1. Totem or Com(1). select forward operation. Open Collect(2). Set with instruction manual of encoder. and Open Collect(2).Chapter 8 Applied Functions 1) Preparation before Starting Separate the load connected to the motor axis. 8-28 . Totem or Com(1). Select NO. APO -04 Enc Type Sel: Set the method to deliver a signal. APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: set the way of encoder output pulse. In case of –(A+B) of NO. APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel: set the way of encoder output pulse.1.0. Select NO. APO-08 Enc Monitor: convert encoder output to the number of motor rotation and write in unit. DRV-14 Motor Capacity(motor capacity) BAS-11 Pole Number(number of poles) BAS-12 Rated Slip(rated slip) BAS-13 Rated Curr(rated current) BAS-15 Rated Volt(rated voltage) BAS-16 Efficiency(efficiency) 2) Check whether the encoder option card is mounted on the main body of the inverter. In case of –(A+B) of NO. In case of (A+B) of NO. Motor parameter input : enter the following values shown on the motor plate.

In the vector torque. 1 All in auto tuning item(BAS-20). auto tuning part changes to None. In case of misconnection. In the vector speed. CON-16 ASR I Gain 2 : A separate controller gain can be used according to the rotation speed of the motor and the load system.Chapter 8 Applied Functions BAS-20 Auto Tuning: forward operation is run upto 20Hz if setting Enc Test of NO. 4) Initial Excitation CON-09 PreExTime : Sets the initial excitation time. the speed of the motor might oscillate. The motor flux increases to the rated flux with the time constant in the following figure. The filter time constant of the speed controller reference input can be adjusted. indicates the sign. Operation can be started after excitation to the rated speed of the motor. But if the gain is too high. 3) Auto Tuning Select No. change APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel or change and connect 2 lines out of inverted output lines connected to motor.3 after setting related parts of encoder explained above. ‘Enc reversed’. In this case. the filter time constant of the torque command can be adjusted. The higher the proportional gain is. Therefore. CON-52 Torque Out LPF : Used in the vector speed or vector torque mode. by supplying the flux-oriented value higher than the rated flux so that the actual flux approximates the rated value. the faster the response is. to reduce the time it takes to reach the rated flux. CON-13 ASR I Gain 1 : Sets the proportional gain and integral gain of the speed controller(ASR). an motion is taken to reduce the supplied flux-oriented value. 8-29 . which applied to high load. CON-51 ASR Ref LPF : Used in vector speed mode. the filter time constant of the speed controller output can be adjusted. The gain of the speed controller varies according to the set values of the gain change frequency(CON-18) and change time(CON-19). CON-10 Flux Force : The initial excitation time can be reduced. acceleration is run upto 20Hz. CON-15 ASR P Gain 2. Motor flux Excitation current FX-CM 5) Gain Setting CON-12 ASR P Gain 1. After forward operation and deceleration. If encoder does not have any problems.

CON-53 Torque Lmt Src : Selects the type of torque limit setting. 8-30 . 1 : Keypad-2 Setting by using the keypad is input in CON-38 Torque Bias. if IN-02 is set at 200% and voltage input(V1) is used. Torque Bias Setting CON-58 Trq Bias Src : Selects the type of setting of the offset value added to the torque reference. Up to 200% can be set on the basis of the rated torque of the motor and the limits on the rotation direction. If the set terminal is input. 3 : I1. 0 : Keypad-1. IN-65~75 Px Define 36 : ASR Gain2 If the set terminal is input. 6) Torque Limit The size of the torque reference is adjusted by limiting the speed controller output. the set value is confirmed in the monitor mode. 3 : I1 The torque limit is set by using the analog input terminal of the inverter terminal block. 37 : ASR P/PI Moves during stop. I1) or communication option. The torque limit can be set by using the keypad. CON-33 FWD +Trq Lmt : forward motoring operation torque limit CON-34 FWD –Trq Lmt : forward regeneration operation torque limit CON-35 REV +Trq Lmt : reverse motoring operation torque limit CON-36 REV –Trq Lmt : reverse regeneration operation torque limit 2 : V1. CON-49 ACR I Gain : Used in sensorless speed/torque and vector speed/torque modes and adjusts the P gain and I gain of the current PI controller. For example. As in the following figure.Chapter 8 Applied Functions CON-48 ACR P-Gain. both reverse and regenerative limits for forward and reverse operation can be set. the integral controller is not active. the torque limit is 200% when 10V is input(only when the V1 terminal function is set at the default function). up to 120% of the rated current of the motor can be set. The setting can be checked in MON mode and select No. 20 Torque Limit is selected in Config Mode CNF-06~08. 1 : Keypad-2 Sets the torque limit using the keypad. 3 : Int 485 Sets the torque limit using the communication terminal of the inverter terminal block. When the torque limit setting method is other than the keypad. 2 : V1. reverse and regenerative limits are set in the following codes. No. 21 Torque Bias among CNF-06 ~ 08. the gain can be changed after the change time(CON-19). 6 : Int 485 The setting method is the same as the torque reference described above. 0 : Keypad-1. The maximum torque is set by using IN-02 Torque at 100% item. analog input of the terminal block(V1.

The rotation speed of the motor stays constant when the output torque and load torque of the motor are in balance.0 Keypad-1 Vector Yes Yes Keypad-1 60. if the multi-function input is not ON.14 Torque control (When you want to control torque) Torque control is controlling the motor for the torque output set at the torque command value. the motor speed gradually goes up. Permanent Control in Stop : Hold Time CON-11 Hold Time : Permanent operation continues for the set period of time when the motor decelerates and stops according to the stop command and the output is blocked. . Therefore. To prevent this. 02 DRV 08 09 10 BAS CON 20 62 63 64 Function Display Cmd Torque Trq Ref Src Control Mode Torque Control Auto Tuning Speed Lmt Src FWD Speed Lmt REV Speed Lmt Setting Display 0 5 1 1 0 0. analog or communication are ignored. If the output torque is larger than the motor load.1. the Torque Bias values being input into the keypad. 3 or 4 SensorlessNo. (You cannot control the torque during limit speed operation) 1) Torque Control Setting DRV-09 Control Mode should be set as Sensorless or Vector.2 or 5 Vector.Chapter 8 Applied Functions IN-65~75 Px Define : Although the multi-function input is set at 48 Trq Bias. 8.00 Unit % Hz Hz 8-31 . it is recommended you set the speed limit to the motor rotation speed.DRV-10 Torque Control : Sets torque control as No. the motor rotation speed in torque control is determined by the load. Group Code No.00 60.1. 1 Yes.DRV-09 Control Mode : Sets the control mode at No. the torque bias decreases by the amount of the input. If a (-) value is input. . CON-60 Trq BiasFF : This is added to the torque bias to compensate for the loss from the motor rotation direction.

3 : I1 The torque reference can be input by using the voltage(V1) or current(I1) terminal block of the inverter. Please. It may cause over current or deceleration error of reverse way. 8-32 . the operating speed can go up at the maximum operating speed according to the load condition. 2 : V1. 19 Torque Ref from CNF-06 ~ 08. do not switch over commands of forward and reverse rotation are during operation. When using torque control. The torque control mode set. 3) Speed Limit During operation in the torque control mode. When controlling with vector control. Therefore the speed limit function is used to prevent such divergence of speed.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Group Code No. 0 : Keypad-1. (CON-71 Speed Search = set Speed Search during acceleration(0001) Setting Display 35 27 100 Speed/Torque Torque Dect 100 5. if IN-02 is set at 200% and the torque reference is set with the current input(V1).0 Unit % % % 2) Torque Reference Setting Torque reference can be set in the same way as the frequency reference. DRV-08 Trq Ref Src : Selects the type to use as the torque reference. For example. the sensorless vector mode and the basic operation conditions described in the vector control mode should be set in advance. choose vector control. please set Speed Search in case that there is possibility to operate during motor free run. you can check the setting in MON mode and select no. 6 : Int 485 Sets the torque limit by using the communication terminal of the inverter terminal block. Torque control is not available during low speed regeneration region and low speed light load. the frequency reference is not active. Set the maximum torque by using the item of IN-02 Torque at 100%. 1 : keypad-2 Input the torque reference using the keypad. 65 IN OUT 65~75 31~33 59 60 Function Display Speed Lmt Gain Px Define Relay x or Q1 TD Level TD Band Caution For operation in the torque control mode. The torque can be set in CON-02 Cmd Torque and up to 180% of the motor rated torque can be set.

3 : I1. 0 : Keypad-1.DroopStTorque 8.0 100. the operation can shift from the torque control mode to vector control mode(speed control). Droop speed = Maximum frequency × DroopPerc × Torque reference .0 Unit % % CON-66 Droop Perc : Sets the rate to be reflected in the speed command value on the basis of the motor rated torque.DroopStTorque 100% torque .0 30.21 Torque Bias from CNF-06 ~ 08.1. If No. The motor speed is adjusted as follows according to the load torque on the basis of the set value. You can shift from the speed mode to torque mode or shift from the torque mode to speed mode by the multi-function input. Group CON Code No.16 Speed/Torque change function This function is active only in vector control. The forward speed limit is set in CON-41 FWD Speed Lmt and the reverse speed limit is set in CON-42 REV Speed Lmt. 6 : Int 485 Operates the same way as the frequency command setting method. 68 69 65~75 Function Display SPD/TRQ Acc T SPD/TRQ Dec T P x Define Initial Setting Display 35 20.1. 1 : keypad-2 The speed limit is set by using the keypad. The setting can be checked in MON mode and select No. 2 : V1. CON-65 Speed Lmt Gain : Sets the rate of reference decrease when the motor speed exceeds the speed limit. 66 67 Function Display Droop Perc Droop St Torque Initial Setting Display 0.0 Speed/Torque Unit Sec Sec - 8-33 . 35 of the multi-function input terminal function items is selected and input during stop. 8. CON-67 Droop St Torque : Sets the torque at which the droop control operation starts. Group CON IN Code No.15 Droop control This can be used to prevent saturation of the speed controller in vector control or for load balancing when one load is driven by multiple controllers.Chapter 8 Applied Functions CON-62 Speed Lmt Src : Selects the type of speed limit setting.

If 1 KEB Select is selected.1. normal decelerating operation is carried out until low voltage. If the load inertia is low. the operation immediately shifts to the vector torque mode. This function maintains the DC link voltage by controlling the inverter output frequency during the outage. 51. 8. is ON during Vector Torque (DRV09:Vector. When inverter operates Energy Buffering operation. 2. the motor will vibrate except for the variable torque load (Fan. a large gain amount is used. In case the motor vibrates severely when KEB function operates because of input power cut off. the DC link voltage goes down and a low voltage failure occurs blocking output. Group Code No. If 0 Continue is selected. DRV10:No) operation. kinetic energy buffering may cause low voltage trip when it is decelerated. 77 CON 78 79 80 Function Display KEB Select KEB Start Lev KEB Stop Lev KEB Gain Setting Display 1 Yes 130 135 1000 Unit % % - CON-77 KEB Select : Selects Kinetic energy buffering operation with the input power OFF. If the load inertia is high. the operation shifts to the vector speed mode according to the Acc/Dec time set in CON50. the inverter DC part is charged with the regenerative energy that is generated from the motor by controlling the inverter output frequency. CON-79 KEB Stop Lev : Sets the start and stop point of Kinetic energy buffering operation on the basis of low voltage (Level 100%) so that the stop level (CON-79) is higher than the start level (CON-78). If the multi-function input.) 8-34 . Pump etc. Depending on the instantaneous interruption time and the load inertia. set the gain (CON80: KEB Gain) to about a half value of previous set value . which is set as Speed/Torque.Chapter 8 Applied Functions If the multi-function input. DRV10:Yes) operation. CON-80 KEB Gain : This is the gain used for controlling the kinetic energy buffering operation by using the inertia moment amount of the load. In this case do not lower the gain too much because low voltage trip may happen during the kinetic energy buffering operation. is ON during Vector Speed (DRV09:Vector. CON-78 KEB Start Lev.17 Kinetic energy buffering If a power outage occurs. a small gain amount is used. Caution 1. which is set as Speed/Torque. thereby helping maintain the interval between the instantaneous outage and the low voltage failure for a longer time.

18 Energy saving operation Manual Energy Saving Operation Group ADV Code No. 50 51 Function Display E-Save Mode Energy Save Setting Display 1 Manual 30 Unit % If the inverter output current is lower than the current set in BAS-14 Noload curr (no-load current of the motor). Caution Be aware that the time required for acceleration or deceleration by a change of the operating frequency or stop command during energy saving operation might be longer than the set period of time for acceleration and deceleration because of the control time it takes the energy saving operation to come back to normal operation. the output voltage is reduced by the amount set at ADV-51. This is not active during acceleration and deceleration. Automatic Energy Saving Operation Group Code No.1.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. Function Display ADV 50 E-Save Mode Setting Display 2 Auto Unit - The output voltage is adjusted by automatically calculating the amount of the saved energy on the basis of the motor rated current (BAS-13) and no-load current (BAS-14). 8-35 .The standard value is the voltage before the energy saving operation starts.

Bit Set(ON) : Bit Not Set(OFF) : Setting Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Function Bit 1 is on the far right of the display. Group Code No. acceleration is carried out in the speed search operation. In such a case. the corresponding bit is set and if the dot of the displayed switch is down. 71 72 CON 73 74 75 OUT 31~32 33 SS P-Gain SS I-Gain SS Block Time Relay 1. thus overworking the motor.0 Speed Search 150 100 Sec Unit Bit % CON-71 Speed Search : The following four types of speed search can be used. a trip might occur. 2 Q1 Define 19 Function Display Speed Search SS Sup-Current Initial Setting Display 0000 Below 75 kW Below 90 kW 100 200 1. It is not accurate speed detection since the rotation speed of the motor is easily judged on the basis of output current of the inverter.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. Speed search selection in acceleration Reset starting after a trip Re-starting after an instantaneous interruption Simultaneous starting at the time of power ON 1) Speed Search Selection in Acceleration If bit 1 is set at 1 and the inverter operating command is input.19 Speed search operation This is used to prevent a failure that might occur when the inverter outputs voltage during the motor idling with the output voltage of the inverter blocked. If voltage is output with an operating command given to the inverter while the motor is rotating according to the load environment. If the dot of the displayed switch is up. 8-36 . it is not active.1. acceleration can continue without a trip if you use the speed search function.

Simultaneous Starting at the Time of Power ON. acceleration is carried out to the target frequency in speed search motion.g. 3) Re-starting after an Instantaneous Interruption If the inverter input power is OFF.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Caution For correct operation. inverter blocks output by making Low voltage trip (Lvt).) Speed search in case of power recovery after instantaneous interruption Notice When input power is blocked due to the instantaneous interruption. low voltage trip occurs and power is recovered before the internal power of the inverter is OFF. please set speed search when accelerating in case of operation from the load to sensorless II mode. Bit 4 is set at 1 and ADV-10 Power-on Run is set as Yes. Normal acceleration at the frequency before trip occurs in case of normal frequency and voltage. frequency is output and voltage increases by PI control before Low voltage trip (Lvt) occurs. If input power is recovered. E. acceleration is carried out to the frequency before the trip in speed search motion when the reset key(or terminal block reset) is input. 8-37 . voltage stops increasing and frequency decreases. t2 : Current drops under the size set in ADV-61. If inverter input power is supplied with the inverter operating command ON. It may cause over current trip or over load trip 2) Reset Starting after a Trip If bit 2 is set at 1 and PRT-08 RST Restart is set as Yes. acceleration is carried out to the frequency before the low voltage trip in speed search motion. t1 : Current exceeds over the size set in ADV-61 code. voltage increases again and voltage stops decreasing.

Therefore if the instantaneous interruption time is longer than 15mSec or the output is higher than the rated output. a low voltage trip(Low Voltage) might occur. 08 PRT 09 10 CON 71~75 Function Display RST Restart Retry Number Retry Delay SS-Related Function Setting Range 0:n /Yes (1) 0 ~ 10 0 ~ 60. The DC voltage inside the inverter might vary according to the output load. The current is on the basis of the static torque load current(CT load). PRT-10 Retry Delay : It operates when PRT-08 RST Restart set to YES and The available number of automatic restart is set at PRT-09. the inverter conducts automatic restart after the time set in PRT-10 Retry Delay.Chapter 8 Applied Functions ADV-61 SS Sup-Current : Controls the current during speed search motion on the basis of the motor rated current. PRT-08 RST Restart.20 Automatic Restart 1) Automatic Restart Group Code No. ADV-64 SS Block Time : Blocks output for the set period of time and then starts operation before starting speed search. emergency stop (Bx). In case of a load with high friction.1.0 Unit Sec - This is used to prevent a system interruption with the inverter protective function in case of noise and so on. The iS7 series is designed to conduct normal operation in case of an instantaneous interruption shorter than 15mSec when being used within the rated output.0 Initial Value 0: No/Yes(1) 0~10 1. 8-38 . 8. Speed search operation is mostly used for loads with high inertia. see Page 8-36. the number of automatic restarts that was reduced inside the inverter increases again. the number of automatic restarts decreases by 1 inside the inverter and a set number of trips occur and if the number is 0. The inverter with 200V input voltage and the inverter with 400V input voltage guarantee the instantaneous interruption time when the input voltage supplied to the inverter is 200~230Vac and 380~460Vac respectively. The acceleration of automatic restart is the same as speed search operation. Caution In case of operation with the number of automatic restarts set. At each automatic restart. the reset is terminated and the motor is rotated automatically by the inverter. Thus the functions of CON72~75 can be set according to the load and for the speed search function. automatic restart is not carried out even if a trip occurs. The maximum increase number is limited to the number of restarts. Automatic restart is not carried out in case of a stop caused by low voltage. PRT-09 Retry Number. overheat or hardware problem (HW Diag). it is recommended to restart after stop. In case of a trip during operation. If a trip does not occur within 60 seconds after automatic restart. The gain of the controller is set at ADV-62 and 63.

The power device(IGBT) inside the inverter generates high frequency switching voltage to supply to the motor. you can reduce heat loss and leak current more than when you select Low Leakage PWM. Here the high frequency is called carrier frequency. The higher the carrier frequency is. the higher the operation sound is.7 ~ 15 kHz Normal PWM /Low Leakage PWM Unit kHz - CON-04 Carrier Freq : Selects the operation sound from the motor.21 Operation sound selection Group CON Code No.7 kHz Normal PWM Motor Noise Heat Noise Leak Current 15kHz LowLeakage PWM 8-39 .0 Normal PWM Setting Range 0. Trip Steady speed operation Frequency voltage Speed search operation reset Operating command 30s ec The number of auto-restart 2 1 2 1 0 2 H27 8. CON-05 PWM Mode : The heat loss and leak current from the inverter can be reduced according to the load rate. the lower the operation sound generated from the motor is and the lower the carrier frequency is.Chapter 8 Applied Functions The following figure illustrates setting the number of automatic restarts at 2. The merits and demerits of each load rate and the carrier frequency are as follows.1. If you select Normal PWM. but the motor sound increases. 04 05 Function Display Carrier Freq PWM Mode Setting Display 1 5. Carrier Frequency 0.

75~7.Chapter 8 Applied Functions The carrier frequency according to the inverter capacity is as follows.5kW 10kHz 7kHz 5kHz 7kHz 2KHz 11~22kW 10kHz 7kHz 5kHz 7kHz 2KHz 30~75kW 5kHz 4kHz 4kHz 3kHz 2kHz 8-40 . Medium load use has an over load rate of 150% per minute and normal load has an over load rate of 110% per minute.75~22kW 5kHz(Max 15KHz) 30~45 kW 5kHz(Max 10KHz) 55~75kW 5kHz(Max 7KHz) 90~110 kW 3kHz(Max 6KHz) 132~160kW 3kHz(Max 5KHz) Caution Carrier frequency default value of 90~160 kW is 3kHz. Therefore the current rating varies according to the load rate and limited according to the surrounding temperature. Rated current(VT) 100% 80% 40 oC Frame 1. Please do not confuse with the value D: 5. 0. Inverter Capacity Normal Temperature(25℃) CT Load High Temperature(40℃) High Temperature(50℃) VT Load Normal Temperature(25℃) High Temperature(40℃) 0.0 which is displayed on the lower left part of the keypad as followed picture that the value is the default value from the below 75kW product. 1) Rated current degrading specification by temperature : The following is the rated current limit according to the temperature in operation at the normal load rate(VT : Variable Torque). iS7 inverter can be used for two types of load rates.2 50 oC 2) Rated current degrading specification by carrier : The following is the rated current guarantee area according to the load and carrier frequency.

Vector are not available. is input. 2nd operation is available when the terminal defined as the 2nd function is 1 for the parameter of 2nd monitor. To use M2-28(M2-Stall Lev). Code No. connecting different 2 monitors with one inverter.1. If the multi-function terminal.0 Unit Sec IN 65~75 Px Define : If you set the function item of the multi-function input terminal to 26 2nd motor. PAR M2 (2nd motor group) is displayed in the parameter mode. which is set as 2nd motor. 65~75 04 Function Display Px Define M2-Acc Time Setting Display 26 2nd Motor 5. To use M2-29(M2-ETH 1min) and M2-30(M2-ETH Cont). the operation modes of V/F PG. you must set PRT50(Stall Prevent) at the value you want to use. Group IN M2 Code No. During operation. you must set PRT40(ETH Trip Sel) at the value you want to use.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.22 2nd Motor operation (when you want to do change operation of 2 monitors with one inverter) During change operation. In M2-08(M2-Ctrl Mode). input of the multi-function terminal does not make the inverter operate in the 2nd motor parameter. 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 25 26 27 Function Display M2-Acc Time M2-Dec Time M2-Capacity M2-Base Freq M2-Ctrl Mode M2-Pole Num M2-Rate Slip M2-Rated Curr M2-Noload Curr M2-Rated Volt M2-Efficiency M2-Inertia Rt M2-Rs M2-Lsigma M2-Ls M2-Tr M2-V/F Patt M2-Fwd Boost M2-Rev Boost Description Acceleration time Deceleration time Motor capacity Rated frequency of the motor Control mode Number of poles Rated slip Rated current No-load current Rated voltage of the motor Motor efficiency Inertia rate of load Stator resistance Lead inductance Stator inductance Rotor time constant Output voltage pattern Forward torque boost Reverse torque boost 8-41 . operation is carried out in the codes set as below.

7kW 0 V/F Unit kW - 7. Croup IN M2 Code No.7kW in previous 7.5kW motor by using P3 terminal with the operation function of the second motor. turn OFF the set terminal.5kW Motor 1 3. 28 29 30 40 41 42 Function Display M2-Stall Lev M2-ETH 1min M2-ETH Cont M2-LoadSpdGain M2-LoadSpdScal M2-LoadSpdUnit Description Stall level 1 minute electronic thermal incessant rated level Electronic thermal operation level Gain adjustment for load speed display Scale adjustment for load speed display Unit adjustment for load speed display Example: set as follows if you want to change to 3. 65~75 31~32 33 Function Display Px Define Relay1.1.2 Q1 Define Setting Display 16 17 18 Exchange Inverter Line Comm Line Unit - The load operating by the inverter can be exchanged with common power supply or a reverse sequence motion can be carried out. 15 Exchange is set and the motor is shifted from the inverter to the common power source. If you want to shift the motor reversely. 67 06 08 Function Display P3 Define M2-Capacity Ctrl Mode Setting Display 26 2nd Motor 3.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Code No.7kW Motor P3 2 IS7 iS7 Inverter 8.23 By pass operation Group IN OUT Code No. IN-65~75 Px Define : This is input when No. 8-42 .

if the temperature of the inverter heat sink is higher than a certain degree. the cooling fan starts operating. However. 8-43 . 64 Function Display FAN Control Initial Setting Display 0 1 2 During Run Always On Temp Control default 0: During Run Unit - This if the function of On/Off control of the fan attached for cooling the heat-sink of the inverter. For relay motion sequence. FAN could be active as In case of operation above regular temperature of cooling fan by current input harmonics or noises. Caution Though 11~75kW class sets ADV-64 as “During Run”.1. If the operating command is OFF and the inverter output is blocked. If the temperature of the inverter heat sink is higher than a certain degree. No. This also helps lengthen the life of the cooling fan. the cooling fan operates regardless of the operating command. Speed frequency interval Output frequency Operation command PX (Exchange) PX (Comm Line) PX (Inverter Line) Inverter Common operation operation t : 500 msec Inverter operation t t 8. 2 Temp Control (temperature check) : The cooling fan is not active even when power is supplied to the inverter and an operating command is input. the cooling fan stops. see the figure below. 1 Always ON (always active) : The cooling fan is always active when power is supplied to the inverter. 0 During Run (active during operation only) : If an operating command is input with the power ON in the inverter. No. This is used for frequently starting/stopping loads or for a quiet environment without the noise of the cooling fan when stopping. No. cooling fan is active. 17 Comm Line. 16 Inverter Line and No.24 Cooling fan control Group ADV Code No.Chapter 8 Applied Functions OUT-30 Realy 1 ~ OUT-32 MO1 Define : Sets the multi-function relay or multi-function output at No.

If changed from 50Hz to 60Hz.1. CNF-48 Parameter Save : Because the parameters set in communication are saved in the RAM area. 19 Function Display AC Input Volt Initial Setting Display 220 Unit V Sets the inverter input power voltage. the previously saved data can be directly used. CNF-46 Parameter Read : Copies the parameter in the inverter to the keypad. the set parameters remain unchanged even if the inverter power is turned Off/On. the items related to the frequency(or rpm) set higher than 60Hz are all changed into 50Hz. they are all gone if the inverter power is turned Off/On.25 Input power frequency selection Group BAS Code No.1. 46 47 48 Function Display Parameter Read Parameter Write Parameter Save Setting Display 1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Unit - This is the function of copying the parameter saved in the inverter to the keypad and copying the parameter saved in the keypad to the inverter. the items related to the frequency(or rpm) set higher than 50Hz are all changed into 60Hz. 10 Function Display 60/50 Hz Sel Initial Setting Display 0 60 Unit Hz Select the inverter input power frequency.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.27 Parameter writing and reading Group CNF Code No. If there is no data saved in the keypad.26 Inverter input voltage selection Group BAS Code No. CNF-47 Parameter Write : Copies the parameter saved in the keypad to the inverter. The existing parameters in the inverter are all deleted. The existing parameters saved in the keypad are all deleted. 8-44 . a message reading “ EEP Rom Empty “ is displayed. In case of an error during parameter writing motion. 8. 8. The low voltage failure(Low Voltage) automatically changes on the basis of the set voltage. If changed from 60Hz to 50Hz.1. If you set parameters in communication and select Yes in CNF-48 Parameter Save.

. a display emerges in which you can register a new password. user mode.If the entered password is the same as the previous password. .Register a new password.28 Parameter initialization Group CNF Code No.1.29 Parameter view lock and Key lock 1) Parameter Mode View Lock Group Code No.If there is a previous password. 8. 0 No is displayed. . trip mode) but the parameter mode(PAR) are always viewed. This function can initialize the data of all groups or selected groups. 40 Function Display Parameter Init Initial Setting Display 0 No Unit - The parameter changed by the user can be initialized to the default value set at the time of delivery. the previous password registration display continues to viewed. enter 0. macro mode. No. 1 All Groups and press PROG. The default value is 0. Function Display CNF 50 51 View Lock Set View Lock PW Setting Display Unlocked Password Unit - The user can set the PAR mode so that it is not viewed using a password on the keypad. CNF-51 View Lock PW : Registers the password to use for parameter mode view lock. initialization starts and when initialization finishes. If you select the desired group and press PROG. 1 : All Groups All the data are initialized.1. In this case. 1 2 3 CNF-50 View Lock Set : If you enter the registered password with the view lock unlocked. 8-45 . see the following procedure. If you enter the password again. “Locked” is displayed and the parameter group is not to be viewed on the keypad. . When you register for the first time. CNF-51 View Lock PW is displayed again. all modes(CNF mode. 2 : DRV ~ 13 : M2 Initialization of each individual group is available.If you press PROG key in CNF-51 code. 0 No is displayed. Initialization is not available in case of a trip or during inverter operation.If the entered password is different from the previous password. . If you select No. register it. initialization starts and when initialization finishes. Procedure Description .When registration is completed. No. the parameter mode is displayed. the previous password registration display is viewed.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. . For setting. “Unlocked” is viewed and if you move with the mode key.

only the changed parameters are displayed. a display emerges in which you can register a new password. . If you enter the password one more time.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Caution If the parameter group view lock function is active. . 2) Parameter Key Lock Group Code No. This is used for tracing the changed parameters. you cannot change the functions related to inverter operation. you cannot shift to the editor mode. “Locked” is displayed and if you press PROG in the function code you want to change for parameter change on the keypad. 1 View Changed. Register your password in the following procedure.Register a new password. you cannot change functions related to inverter operation.If there is a previous password. the previous password registration display is viewed. register it. all the previous parameters are displayed. enter 0.When registration is completed. Caution If the parameter view lock function is active. . Be sure to memorize the registered password.If the entered password is the same as the previous password. The default value is 0. .If you press PROG key in CNF-52 code. CNF 52 53 Function Display Key Lock Set Key Lock PW Setting Display Unlocked Password Unit - The user can make the parameter unchangeable using the registered password. “Unlocked” is gone and you get out of the parameter key lock function. 41 Function Display Changed Para Initial Setting Display 0 View All Unit - This function if making only the parameters different from their default values displayed. When you register for the first time. 0 View All. Procedure Description . the previous password registration display continues to viewed. . If you select No. CNF-53 Key Lock PW is displayed again. 3) Display of Changed Parameter Group CNF Code No. CNF-53 Key Lock PW : Registers the password to use for parameter key lock.If the entered password is different from the previous password. Be sure to memorize the registered password. 8-46 . If you select No. 1 2 3 CNF-52 Key Lock Set : If you enter the registered password with the key lock unlocked.

UserGrp SelKey in CNF Mode Code 42. You can register by selecting the desired code no. which is DRV Group Code 1. That is. parameters can be registered redundantly. it will be registered in code 40 of the user group) 4 : Information on the parameter already registered in code 40 of the user group 5 : Setting range of the user group (0 is for withdrawal of setting) You can set No. user group(USR Grp) will not appear even though multi-function key is set to UserGrp SelKey. CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel : Selects No.30 Addition to User Group (USR Grp) Group CNF Code No. If you do not register user group parameter. 42 45 Function Display Multi-Key Sel UserGrp AllDel Initial Setting Display 3 0 UserGrp SelKey No Unit - You can group data you have chosen from each group of the parameter group and change them. 2 Description of the Display 1 : The group and code number of the parameter to register 2 : Name of the parameter to register 3 : Code No. 4 UserGrp SelKey among the functions of the multi-function keys. Empty Code is displayed. If you press MULTI Key in Cmd Frequency. 4 displays the information on the registered parameters and if nothing is registered with the desired code number. Code 11…. 1) How to Register Parameter in USR Grp Procedure 1 Description is If you select 4.1. displayed at the top of the screen. 3. No. to register in the user group(if you press PROG/ENT Key in 40. you will see the following display. a certain parameter can be registered in Code 2. For example. 3 in the display above. (When necessary. You can register up to 64 parameters in the user group.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.and so on) 3 4 5 8-47 . For example. and press PROG/ENT. The parameters registered as above are registered in the user group of U&M Mode. If the value changed at No. Go to the parameter you want to register in PAR Mode and press MULTI Key. 0 is for withdrawal of setting. 4 change too. the values displayed in No.

Override frequency setting using auxiliary frequency command 8. 8. 1 Yes. MC1(DRAW function) or MC2(traverse function) group is displayed at User & Macro(U&M) on two functions DRAW and traverse functions This function is provided by the inverter. 8-48 . Deletion is completed. ‘All’ is selected in CNF-40 Parameter Init for all the parameters of the inverter to be initialized and Easy Start is launched when power is Off/On first. The user cannot add or delete the function items included in the macro but data can be changed in the macro group. 43 Function Display Macro Select Initial Setting Display 0 None Unit - If you select the application load. Move the cursor to the code you want to delete in U&M Mode USR CNF-25 UserGrp AllDel : If you select No.31 Addition to Macro Group Group CNF Code No. will be seen at the top of the display. all the parameters registered in the user group are deleted. Press YES and then PROG/ENT Key. the related function is displayed so that the inverter selects it and it can be changed in the macro group. Please refer to 8.1. CNF-43 Macro Select : This is the function that enables you to easily set by combining various application functions. You are asked whether to delete.1.37 Traverse operation function for trip bus.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 2) How to Delete Individual Parameters Registered in User Group (USR Grp) Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description If you select 4.UserGrp SelKey with the Multi-Key in CNF Mode Code 42.32 Easy start Group CNF Code No. Group. Press MULTI Key.1. please refer to chapter. using speed difference of motor which is operating by ration for main commands For more details.1. Draw function is one of open loop tension controls to maintain tension of materials stuck. 61 Function Display Easy Start On Initial Setting Display 1 Yes Unit - CNF-61 Easy Start On : If you set this code at Yes.1. 8.

CNF-01 Language Sel : select the language you want.BAS-11 Pole Number : select the pole number of the motor. The minimum parameter to drive the motor having been set. . 2 10 11 12 30~32 CNF 42 44 60 62 74 75 Function Display LCD Contrast Inv S/W Ver Keypad S/W Ver KPD Title Ver Option-x Type Changed Para Erase All Trip Add Title Del WH Count Reset Fan Time Fan Time Rst Initial Setting Display 0 0 0 0 0 x.1. Select All in CNF-40 Parameter Init and initialize all the parameters of the inverter. set proper values. Through the following displays on the digital loader. . 3 8. Now you come back to the monitoring display.Chapter 8 Applied Functions How to Launch Easy Start Procedure 1 2 Description Set CNF-61 Easy Start On as Yes.xx x. CNF-30~32 Option-x Type : can check the type of the option board inserted in slots 1~3. . . . When the power of the inverter is first Off/On.BAS-19 AC Input Volt : set the input voltage.33 Other Config (CNF) mode parameters Group Code No. 8-49 . Easy Start gets started. (If you press ESC on the digital loader.xx None View All No No No 00:00:00 No Unit - CNF-2 LCD Contrast : can adjust the LCD brightness of the digital loader.DRV-14 Motor Capacity : select the capacity of the motor.BAS-15 Rated Volt : select the rated voltage of the motor. you can immediately get out of Easy Start) . the motor is operated by the operating command method set in DRV-06. CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver.BAS-10 60/50Hz Sel : select the rated frequency of the motor. .xx x.DRV-06 Cmd Source : selects the operating command method. CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver : can check the OS version of the inverter and digital loader. .DRV-01 Cmd Frequency : select the operating frequency. CNF-12 KPD Title Ver : can check the title version of the digital loader. .Start Easy Set : select Yes.

the output set as Timer Out becomes active after the period of time set in OUT-55 TimerOn Delay.1.2 / Q1 TimerOn Delay TimerOff Delay Initial Setting Display 38 27 Timer In Timer Out 3. CNF-60 Add Title Del : this is a function to set to enable added codes in previous version to display and operate added functions when SW of inverter main body is updated with new coded. 65~75 31~33 55 56 Function Display Px Define Relay1.Chapter 8 Applied Functions CNF-42 Changed Para: When setting as View Changed. 8. CNF-62 WH Count Reset : The accumulated electricity is cleared. 38 Timer In. CNF-74 Fan Time is cleared. extract the digital loader from the main body and insert it again.34 Timer function Group IN OUT Code No. IN-65~75 Px Define : Set the terminal to operate as the timer among multi-function input terminals at No. If you input the set terminal. Out-56 Px(Timer In) Out-55 Q1(Timer Out) 8-50 . If you select Yes at CNF-75 Fan Time Rst. If the multi-function input terminal is turned off.00 Unit Sec Sec This is the timer function of the multi-function input terminal. the multi-function output(or relay) is turned off after the period of time set in OUT-56 TimerOff Delay. the title of the digital loader is updated. CNF-75 Fan Time Rst : displays the cumulative time for which the cooling fan has operated. If you set this at Yes.00 1. CNF-74 Fan Time. changed parameter comparing to default value is displayed. You can turn the multi-function output(relay included) after a certain period of time. CNF-44 Erase All Tip : deletes all the saved failure history.

If the terminal selected as SEQ-2 is input. If you select Auto-B in AUT-01 code. the operating command and frequency command respectively set in DRV06(Cmd Source) and DRV07(Freq Ref Src) will apply. 43 Manual is input during stop in the auto sequence operation mode. Acc/Dec time and frequency of each step and the rotation direction.1. 4 Auto Sequence. the operation is carried out with the data set in sequence 1.08 8 11. the operation is carried out with the data set in sequence 2. 41 : SEQ-L. the auto sequence group(AUT) is displayed in the parameter mode. 01 65~75 65~75 65~75 65~75 65~75 31~32 33 Function Display App Mode Px Define Px Define Px Define Px Define Px Define Relay 1.0 5. the output signals are output in pulses every time each step changes during auto sequence operation. IN-65~75 Px Define : Use the multi-function input terminal for auto sequence operation. 42 : SEQ-M The sequence type of the auto sequence operation is selected. 20 Seq Pulse and the pulse is output at the last step where a cycle of sequence 1 or 2. 45 : Hold Step During operation with AUT-01 Auto Mode set at Auto-A. this is used as the command of step shift.0 Forward 21. 01 02 04 AUT 10 11 12 13 14 Function Display Auto Mode Auto Check Step Number Seq 1/1 Freq Seq 1/1 XcelT Seq 1/1 StedT Seq 1/1 Dir Seq 1/2 Freq Initial Setting Display 0 1 Auto-A 0. 43 : Manual If the terminal set as No. 19 Step Pulse among the function items of OUT-31~33.00 5. Group Code No. Up to 2 sequence operations are available with different data set for each.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. you can set the type of the auto sequence. the last step can be maintained. The pulse width is 100mSec.00 Unit Sec Hz Sec Sec Hz Displayed repeatedly as the number of set steps 8-51 . If the terminal selected as SEQ-1 is input. If you select No.35 Auto sequence operation Group APP Code No. If you select No. if Hold Step terminal is input. 2 Q1 Define Initial Setting Display 4 41 42 43 44 45 20 21 Auto Sequenc SEQ-1 SEQ-2 Manual Go Step Hold Step Step Pulse Seq Pulse Unit - IN OUT APP-01 App Mode : If you select No. the pulse width is 100mSec. 44 : Go Step The auto sequence operating method is selected.

42 SEQ-2 among the multi-function input terminal functions is input. If one of the two terminals is input. Acc/Dec. see the figure below. AUT-11 Seq 1/1 XcelT : sets the Acc/Dec time and the time it takes to move to the frequency set at AUT-10. AUT-10 Seq 1/1 Freq : displays the operating frequency of step 1. If another terminal is input within the set period of time. AUT-12 Seq 1/1 StedT : sets the time of steady speed operation at the frequency set at AUT-10. another terminal is waited for to be input for the set period of time. steady speed and direction of each step are displayed according to the set number of steps. operation starts from the frequency set at Seq 2/1 Freq. AUT-13 Seq 1/1 Dir : sets the direction of rotation. AUT-02 Auto Check : sets the time when the terminals set as SEQ-L and SEQ-M are simultaneously input. 1 : Auto-B You can proceed with steps every time when a terminal set as Go-Step is input and the terminal set at SEQ-L or SEQ-M is input. which is displayed on the message. The first 1 of 1/1. Ouput Frequency AUT-10 AUT-14 Forward AUT-13 AUT-17 AUT-11 AUT-12 AUT-15 AUT-16 AUT-19 AUT-21 Reverse AUT-18 O u tp u t F re q u e n cy P x(S E Q -L) P x(S E Q M) S equence 1 S equency 2 A u to -A O u tp u t F re q u e n cy P x(S E Q -L) Px(G oS te p ) 8-52 A u to -B . The frequency.Chapter 8 Applied Functions AUT-01 Auto Mode : selects the type of auto sequence operation. AUT-04 Step Number : sets the number of steps of sequence operation. shows the sequence type and the second 1 shows the number of steps. they are treated as being input at the same time. if the terminal set as No. For example. For the motions of each. 0 : Auto-A This is the operating method of proceeding with the automatically set steps if the terminal set at SEQ-L or SEQ-M is input among the multi-function terminal function items.

Trv.0 0.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.1. Amp frequency * (100 . APP-08 Trv Amplit % : selects the magnitude of the traverse operating frequency in percentage on the basis of the operating frequency.OffsetHi frequency = Operation frequency * TrvOffsetHi 100 APP-13 Trv Offset Lo : If you select and input No. Trv.0 3. Amp Frequency = Operation frequency * TrvAmplit % 100 APP-09 Trv Scramb % : selects the magnitude of the scramble operating frequency and the frequency jump as shown below. 1 Traverse. Trv.0 0. 27 Trv Offset Lo among the multi-function input terminal functions. Amp frequency - Trv. The functions necessary for traverse operation are displayed. operation is carried out at the frequency pattern that has increased by the value set at APP-12. APP-11 Trv Dec Time : sets the Acc/Dec time of traverse operation.TrvScramb%) 100 PP-10 Trv Acc Time. 28 Trv Offset Hi among the multi-function input terminal functions.0 Trv Offset Lo Trv Offset Hi Unit % % Sec Sec % % - APP IN APP-01 App Mode : sets the application mode at No.36 Traverse operation Group Code No. APP-12 Trv Offset Hi: If you select and input No. 01 08 09 10 11 12 13 65~75 65~75 Function Display App Mode Trv Amplit % Trv Scramb % Trv Acc Time Trv Dec Time Trv Offset Hi Trv Offset Lo Px Define Px Define Initial Setting Display 1 27 28 Traverse 0. operation is carried out at the frequency pattern that has decreased by the value set at APP-13.Scr frequency = Trv.OffsetLo frequency = Operation frequency * TrvOffsetLo 100 8-53 . Trv.0 2.0 0.

0 0~Maximum frequency 0~Maximum frequency 0~10 0~Maximum frequency % Sec Hz Hz Sec Hz Unit This is used for controlling the On/Off motions of the brake in the load system using the electronic brake. [When the Control Mode Is Not Vector : ] 1) Brake Open Sequence If an operating command is given with the motor static.00 1.00 BR Control Setting Range 0~180% 0~10. This is not active in the torque control mode. 8-54 . 09 41 42 ADV 44 45 46 47 OUT 31~33 Function Display Control Mode BR Rls Curr BR Rls Dly BR Rls Fwd Fr BR Rls Rev Fr BR Eng Dly BR Eng Fr Relay x or Q1 Setting Display 0 35 V/F 50.1. The motion sequence varies according to the set value of the control mode(DRV-09). deceleration stops and the brake closed signal is released to the set output terminal. the starting DC braking(ADV-12) and dwell operation(ADV 20~23) are not active. inverter output is blocked after DC braking.00 2. If the DC braking time(ADV-15) or DC braking amount(ADV-16) is set. the output frequency becomes 0.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8.45) forward or reversely. [When the Control Mode Is Set at Vector[ 1) Brake Open Sequence If the operating command is input. When the output frequency reached the brake closed frequency(BR Eng Fr). Output is blocked after the set brake closed delay time(BR Eng Dly). 2) Brake Closed Sequence If a stop command is given during operation.0 1. deceleration is carried out until the speed reaches 0 and the brake closed signal is released.37 Brake control Group DRV Code No.00 1. brake control is not active. 2) Brake Closed Sequence If a stop command is given. When the current through the motor reaches the brake open current(BR Rls Curr) after reaching the brake open frequency. When the brake control is active. Before constructing the sequence. After being maintained for the brake closed delay time(BR Eng Dly). the motor decelerates. the brake open signal is released with the output terminal set after the initial excitation time. When torque control(DRV-10) is set. Acceleration starts after the frequency is maintained for the brake open delay time(BR Rls Dly). check the control mode setting.00 1. For DC braking motion. the brake open signals are released with the output relay or multi-function output terminal set for brake control. the inverter accelerates to the open frequency(ADV-44. Acceleration starts after the brake open delay time(BR Rly Dly). see page 7-27.

45 Output frequency ADV-47 ADV-41 Output currency ADV-42 ADV-46 ADV-15 Motor speed Brake Output terminal Operation command Brake closed interval Brake open interval Brake closed interval When Control Mode Is Not Set at Vector Output frequency CON-10 Output current ADV-42 CON-12 Motor speed Brake output terminal Operation command Brake closed interval Brake open interval Brake closed interval When Control Mode In Not Set at Vector 8-55 .Chapter 8 Applied Functions ADV-44.

For the relay for control of the auxiliary motors.00 15. Group APP Code No.00 10.38 Multi-function output On/Off control Group Code No. the Relay 1 and 2 of the standard I/O card of the inverter and multifunction output terminal Q1 are used. Select the analog input to use for ON/OFF control at ADV-66 and set the levels at which the output terminal is ON and OFF at ADV-67 and 68 respectively.1.0 Setting Range 0~4 1~4 xx:xx 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~60 0~3600. If the analog input value is over the value set at ADV-67.99 49. 01 20 21 22 23 24 25 Function Display App Mode Aux Motor Run Starting Aux Auto Op Time Start Freq 1 Start Freq 2 Start Freq 3 Start Freq 4 Stop Freq 1 Stop Freq 1 Stop Freq 1 Stop Freq 1 Aux Start DT Aux Stop DT Setting Display 3 MMC 0 1 0:00 49. The motor connected to the inverter output(main motor) controls speed by PID control and other motors(auxiliary motors).0 60.99 15.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 8. 8.0 0~3600.99 49. If the extended I/O option card is connected to the inverter option slot. conduct On/Off control.99 49. it is OFF. connected to the common power source by the relay inside the inverter.00 15. 66 ADV 67 68 OUT 31~33 Function Display OnOff Ctrl Src On-C Level Off-C Level Relay x or Q1 Setting Display 1 34 V1 90.00 15. the output terminal is ON and if below ADV-68. the output relay or multi-function output terminal can be turned ON or OFF. up to 3 relay outputs are available.0 Unit Min Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Sec Sec APO 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 8-56 .00 On/Off Control Setting Range 10~100% 0~Output contact on level Unit % % - If the analog input value is over the set value.39 MMC function This is used when multiple motors are controlled by one inverter in the fan or pump system.1.00 60.

3 MMC as the applied function.Chapter 8 Applied Functions Group APO Code No. Q1 and Relay 2.2 and Q1 control.0 0. 33 : If the number of auxiliary motors is set at APO-33 and there are more than one auxiliary motor. Q1 and Relay 1 when 2 in input in APO-21. the number of currently operating auxiliary motors can be monitored.0 2. the auxiliary motors operate in the sequence of Relay 2. functions such as PID control are displayed. For example. the items related to the MMC function are displayed in the option card function group(APO) and the PID control related functions are displayed in APP. In APP. 33 34 35 36 38 39 40 41 42 OUT 31~33 34~36 Function Display Num of Aux Regul Bypass Auto Ch Mode Auto Ch Time Interlock Interlock DT Actual Pr Diff Aux Acc Time Aux Dec Time Relay x or Q1 Qx Define Setting Display 0 0 0 24 24 4 No Aux 72:00 No 5. APO-27~30 Stop Freq 1~4 : The stop frequency of the auxiliary motor is set. 2) the starting delay time(APO-13) of the auxiliary motor passes and 3) the difference between the reference and the feedback of the main motor PID controller becomes larger than the pressure difference of the auxiliary motor motion(APO-40).0 Unit Min Sec % Sec Sec - 1) Basic Operation APP-01 APP Mode : If you select No. application functions group.0 MMC MMC Setting Range 0~4 No/Yes None/Aux/Main 0~99:00 No/Yes 0. As the main motor is operated by PID control. The auxiliary motors stop in the sequence of Relay 1. 21. The auxiliary motor can operate when 1) the speed of the main motor rises above the starting frequency(APO-23~26) of the auxiliary motor.0~600. 2) the stop delay time(APO-32) of the auxiliary motor passes and 3) the difference between the reference and the feedback of the main motor PID controller becomes smaller than the pressure difference(APO-40) of the auxiliary motor motion.0 0~100% 0. In the APO-20. its operating frequency is risen by the load change and the operation of an auxiliary motor is necessary. The condition of the output terminal of the inverter(Relay or multi-function output(Qx)) being ON for the operation of an auxiliary motor is as follows. If the operating frequency of the main motor goes down below a certain frequency while the auxiliary motor is running. the auxiliary motor should be stopped. the number of the auxiliary motor first operated is input into APO-21. The condition of the auxiliary motor being stopped is as follows. if there are three auxiliary motors and each of them is controlled by Relay 1. APO-20.1~360. The auxiliary motor can be stopped when 1) the speed of the main motor goes down below the stop frequency(APO-27~30) of the auxiliary motor. APO-23~26 Start Freq 1~4 : The starting frequency of auxiliary motors is set. 8-57 .0~600.0 2 2.

Therefore the motion sequence can be reversed to keep the use time of the motors equal. APO-42 Aux Dec Time : The main motor stops PID control and normal acceleration and deceleration operation when the auxiliary motor runs or stops. 8-58 . 0 : None The motion sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21(starting auxiliary motor selection) and the automatic change function is not active.Chapter 8 Applied Functions APO-41 Aux Acc Time. the main motor accelerates to the starting frequency for the accelerating time set at APO-41. the life of the motor might be affected. For details on the PID control of the main motor. the main motor decelerates to the decelerating frequency of the auxiliary motor for the decelerating time set at APO-42. If only a particular motor continues running. Inversely. Stop delay time of the auxiliary motor Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO-31 APO-23~26 Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO-27~30 Main motor output frequency Output terminal Main motor acceleration time when the pump number increases APO-42 auxiliary motor starts stop sequence of the auxiliary motor following load increase Stop delay time of the auxiliary motor Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO-32 APO-23~26 Main motor ouput frequency Output terminal Stop frequency of the auxiliary motor APO-27~30 Main motor acceleration time when the pump number decreases APO-41 auxiliary motor stops Stop sequence of the auxiliary motor following load decrease 2) Automatic Change of Motor(Auto Change) The motion sequence of the main and auxiliary motors can be automatically changed. When the auxiliary motor runs. when the auxiliary motor stops. see page 8-12. APO-35 Auto Ch Mode : Selects the type of motions of the automatic change.

If the inverter stops in the auto change condition. 1.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 1 : Aux The motion sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21(starting auxiliary motor selection). if there are four auxiliary motors operating and No. motors 3. When the cumulative operating time of a main and auxiliary motor exceeds the auto change time(APO-36). 8-59 . 3 is connected to the inverter output in the next restart and the auxiliary motors operates in the sequence of 4. 2 motor.2. Therefore. the inverter output is connected to No.1.4. if the starting auxiliary motor selection(APO-21) is set at 2. For example. For example. the start sequence of the auxiliary motor selected in APO-21 is changed. the start sequence of the auxiliary motor automatically changes to No.2. the previous start sequence of the auxiliary motor of 4.4 and if the condition goes back to the auto change condition.3.1.3 changes to 1. If the inverter is stopped by a stop command or sleep operation mode. If there are four motors and the auxiliary motor operating condition is met. 4 and 1 starts operating one after another in sequence. 1 and 2. The auto change condition is met if the cumulative operating time of the motor connected to the inverter output exceeds the auto change time(APO-36).3. 4 is selected in APO-21. 3 phase input Starting sequence : auxiliary 1 ->auxiliary2 -> auxiliary3 -> auxiliary 4 Stop sequence : auxiliary 4 ->auxiliary3 -> auxiliary2 -> auxiliary1 U V W RST Inverter UVSW R T KD1 KD2 KD3 KD4 Main motor Auxiliary motor1 Auxiliary motor2 Auxiliary motor3 Auxiliary motor4 2 : Main Automatic change is available without distinction between the main and auxiliary motors. motor No. the operating sequence of the motor automatically changes. the auto change condition is met. the sequence changed to 2. If the main motor is stopped by a stop command or sleep operation mode after in the auto change condition.

1) If there are a total of 5 motors and the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 0(None) or 1(Aux). if the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 2(Main) and the main and auxiliary motors are connected to inverter output terminals Relay1. 2 and Q1. the interlock numbers 1. 2. IN-65~75 Px Define : The terminal to use as the interlock among the IN 65~75(75 if there is extended I/O) is selected and Interlock 1~4 are set according to the motor sequence. 2 and 3 correspond to the motor connected to Relay1. 3 and 4 correspond to the motors connected to Relay1. 1 Yes. Q1 and Q2. 2. If the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 0(None) or 1(Aux) and if auxiliary motors 1. (when the starting auxiliary motor selection APO21 is 1) If the terminal block signals are withdrawn. If the failure signal is input into the input terminal and the functions of the relevant terminals are set as Interlock 1~4. it will be decided whether to operate the motor according to the terminal input status. If the interlock signal is withdrawn. 3 and 4. 2 and 3 are connected to inverter output terminals Relay1.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 3 phase input RST Inverter UVW KD1 KM1 KM2 KD2 KM3 KD3 KM4 KD4 M1 3) Interlock M2 M3 M4 This is the function of stopping the motor operating and replacing it with another motor in case of a failure of the motor. the auxiliary motor 4 is stopped and the auxiliary motor 3 operates again. 2 and 4. 2 and Q1 when a total of four motor including the main motor is operating.However. APO-38 Interlock : Select No. If signals are input into the terminal block set at Interlock 3 with a failure of motor 3 when it is static. 2. Interlock 1. 8-60 . the auxiliary motor 3 is stopped and the auxiliary motor 4 operates. the motion sequence is 1. Q1 and Q2(extended I/O used) respectively. 2. the operation is as follows. If signals are input to the terminal of Interlock 3. The replacement operation sequence varies according to the set values of the motor auto change mode selection(APO-35) described above. the auxiliary motors operate in the sequence of 1.

1 Yes. 3 and 4 are operated by the auxiliary motors and interlock signals are input to the auxiliary motors. Group Code No. 8-61 . If the starting auxiliary motor selection APO-21 is set at 1.00Hz 0 ~ 100. motor 1 is operated by the inverter and the remaining 2. At maximum 10V input.0% 20~30. The operation and stop of the auxiliary motor is controlled according to the feedback amount. 74 Function Display RegenAvd Sel Setting Display and Range 0 1 No Yes Initial Value 0: No 350V 700V 1.5V(15Hz of main motor operating frequency). all three auxiliary motors operated. If the feedback input value is between 0~10V and operating frequency of the maximum input value(10V) is 60Hz. If the feedback amount reaches 5V again. If there are four main motors and auxiliary motors(APP-33) in total.40 Regeneration evasion function for press (To evade control operation in the status of regeneration during press) This function is the one to prevent regeneration region.0[%] 500[msec] Unit - ADV 75 76 77 78 RegenAvd Level CompFreq Limit RegenAvd Pgain RegenAvd Igain 200V class: 300~400V 400V class: 600~800V 0~ 10. the operation is as follows.00[Hz] 50. the operation sequence is the same as the procedure described in 1) above. select when frequent regeneration voltage occurs. the output is immediately blocked and motor 2 gets connected to the inverter output and the operation sequence of the auxiliary motor is 3.1. the operation is as follows. the operation sequence of the auxiliary motor is 3. raising the speed of motor operation speed during press in the status of motor regeneration.000msec V Hz % msec ADV-74 RegenAvd Sel (select regeneration evasion function for press): During constant speed operation of the motor.Chapter 8 Applied Functions 2) If there are four motors in total and the auto change mode selection(APO-35) is set at 2(Main). If the interlock signal of motor 1 is withdrawn. the auxiliary motor 1 is started when the feedback amount is 2. which is connected to the inverter. 4. 1. damage and short life of DB Unit due to excessive DB Unit operation or DB Unit operation is evaded limiting DC Link voltage. Operation level of auxiliary motor n = n ∗ Maximum feedback amount The number of auxiliary motor ( APO − 33) 8. APP-34 Regul Bypass : Select No. Bypass Operation (Regul Bypass) The speed of the main motor can be controlled by the feedback without using the PID. However if there is a problem with motor 1. 4. the auxiliary motor 2 is operated.

8-62 . ADV-77 RegenAvd Pgain (P gain set for regeneration evasion compensation control machine function for press) ADV-78 RegenAvd Igain (I gain set for regeneration evasion compensation control machine function for press): Set P. ADV-75 regeneration evasion level voltage Direct voltage(Vdc) ADV-76 compensation frequency limit range Output Command frequency(Hz) frequency Status during regeneration evasion Caution Regeneration evasion function for press is available only when motor operation status is constant speed section. I Gain of DC Link voltage limit PI control machine for regeneration operation region. ADV-76 CompFreq Limit (limit regeneration evasion compensation frequency for press): Set changeable frequency range for real command frequency during regeneration operation region. (not available in the section of acceleration/deceleration) Output frequency can change as much as frequency set ADV-76 CompFreq Limit in spite of constant speed operation during evasion operation.Chapter 8 Applied Functions ADV-75 RegenAvd Level (set regeneration evasion level for press): Set DB operation evasion voltage when DC Link voltage goes up by regeneration voltage.

CNF-21~23 is initialized. Displays the values being input into V1. 1) Selection of Monitor Mode Display Mode Group Code No. they are represented by P1. the currently output operating frequency is displayed in Hz unit. Monitor mode is displayed first when the power is supplied and all three items of Monitor Line-1 ~ Monitor Line-3 can be displayed simultaneously. the voltage input terminal of the inverter terminal block in the voltage term. it represents the maximum value of the DC input voltage. From the right.P2…P11. Q1. they are represented by Relay1. Displays the output voltage. You can select the desired items to monitor in the config mode(CNF). Displays the DC power voltage inside the inverter. Relay2. Displays the status of the output terminals of the inverter terminal blocks. From the right. the set frequency is displayed and during operation. it is represented by -100 ~ 0 ~ 100%.Keypad You can monitor the operating status using the keypad of the inverter.1 Monitor Functions 9. Displays the voltage unit above in percentage. 21 22 23 24 Function Display Monitor Line-1 Monitor Line-2 Monitor Line-3 Mon Mode Init Initial Setting 0 2 3 0 Frequency Output Current Output Voltage No Unit Hz A V - CNF CNF-21~23 Monitor Line-x : Selects the items to display in the monitor mode. Displays the magnitude of the output current.1 Monitor in operation . Displays the electricity consumed by the inverter. During stop. watch three items at a time in the monitor mode and select an item in the status display. The same as above(0) and displayed in rpm unit. If you choose Yes in CNF-24 Mon Mode Init.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9. Displays the status of the input terminals of the inverter terminal blocks. Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 Frequency Speed Output Current Output Voltage Output Power WHour Counter DCLink Voltage Function During stop. Choose from the following items suited to the line you want to display. Displays the output power. Displays the magnitude of the current being input into I1 9-1 6 7 DI Status 8 DO Status 9 10 11 V1 Monitor[V] V1 Monitor[%] I1 Monitor[mA] . If -10 ~ 0 ~ +10V is input.1.

If the torque limit setting method (CON-53) is set as methods other than the keypad (0 or 1). 9-2 . If the output power displayed in the loader is higher than expected. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 I1 Monitor[%] V2 Monitor[V] V2 Monitor[%] I2 Monitor[mA] I2 Monitor[%] PID Output PID Ref Value PID Fdb Value Torque 21 Torque Limit 22 Trq Bias Ref 23 Spd Limit 24 Load Speed 2) Output power display Mode PAR Group BAS Code No. If the torque reference command method (DRV-08) is set as methods other than the keypad (0 or 1). 4 Output Power among the monitor items described above. Displays the feedback of PID controller. Displays the output of the PID controller. Displays the reference of the PID controller. Displays the V2 input voltage in percentage. the speed limit amount is displayed. Displays the load speed in the values to which ADV61 (Load Spd Gain) and ADV62 (Load Spd Scale) are applied in the units of rpm or mpm set in ADV63 (Load Spd Unit). The current input into the I2 terminal of the I/O option card when you use the extended I/O option. 18 Function Display Trim Power % Initial Setting 100. If the input current is 0~20[mA]. raises this set value properly when the output power displayed in the loader is lower than expected.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions Setting Function terminal of the inverter terminal block. it is represented by 0~100%. Displays the input current of the I2 terminal in percentage. If the speed limiting method (CON-62) in the torque control mode is set as methods other than the keypad (0 or 1). Displays the voltage input of the V2 terminal of the I/O option card when you use the extended I/O option. the torque bias is displayed. it decreases this set value properly. Displays the load speed in the scale and unit which the user wants. Output power display is calculated with voltage and current and Output power can have a error when power factor is low. Displays the current above in percentage. the torque limit is displayed. the torque reference is displayed. If the torque bias setting method (CON-58) is set as methods other than the keypad (0 or 1).0 Unit % BAS-18 Trim Power % : selects No.

Above 65535 MW.0001).9 MWh. user can clear the electricity consumption. selects one of RPM(Revolution Per Minute) and MPM(Meter Per Minute). 24 Load Speed among the monitor items. 61 PAR ADV 62 63 Function Display Load Spd Gain Load Spd Scale Load Spd Unit Initial Setting 0 0 100.1”. Above 1000 MW. 6. the unit is kW and it is displayed like a 999.0 X1 rpm Unit % - ADV-61 Load Spd Gain : selects No. ADV-62 Load Spd Scale : selects to what place of decimals to display No. The Pole Number of BAS-11 is applied. Electricity consumption is calculated with voltage and current. 3. 24 Load Speed. In case of CNF-62 WH Count Reset to YES. In addition. the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 99. the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 9999 MWh and can be displayed to 65535 MW. and it is accumulated the calculated electricity every 1 second. For example. if the speed is 300 [mpm] at 800[rpm] and if you want to display the value. if you want it to be displayed to the first place of the decimals. Between 1 ~ 99 MW. The way of Electricity consumption display is followed description. 9-3 . the unit is MW and it is displayed like a 999. Now “300.0 mpm” is displayed on the keypad display instead of “800rpm” for No. 24 Load Speed among the monitor items(x1~x0. 3) Load Speed Display Selection Code Mode Group No.5 WHour Counter (electricity consumed by inverter) among the aforementioned Monitor items. 2.9 kW. Between 100 ~ 999 MW. it is initialized to 0 and the unit becomes to kW and displayed like 999. ADV-63 Load Spd Unit : selects the unit of No. 4. 5. set ADV-61(Load Spd Gain) at“375%”. 24 Load Speed among the monitor items described above and displays the actual number of rotations by computing the gear ratio when the motor axis and load are connected by a belt and so on. 4) Hz / Rpm Display Selection Mode PAR Group DRV BAS Code No.9 kW. set ADV-63(Load Spd Scale) at “X 0. Below 1000kW. 21 11 Function Display Hz / Rpm Sel Pole Number Initial Setting 0 Hz 4 Unit - DRV-21 Hz / Rpm Sel : can convert all the parameters of which the unit is Hz into RPM or reversely.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions * WHour Counter: Describes for No. 1.99MWh.

To change the value to Rpm Display in Monitor mode. The items available are as follows and the items not particularly described have the same functions described in the Monitor Mode Selection Items above. 5) Selection of Status Display Code No. all parameters will be changed to Rpm but it is not changed automatically in monitor mode.g) At CNF-21 Monitor Line-1 to Frequency (Fault value). 20 Mode CNF Function Display AnyTime Para Initial Setting 0 Frequency Unit - The variables to be displayed at the top of Keypad Display(LCD Display) can be selected. Monitor Line-1 set value is not changed. E. if you change the value from Hz to Rpm Display at DRV21 Hz/Rpm Sel. CNF-21 set from Frequency to Speed.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions * Warning If you change the default value of Hz/Rpm Sel from Hz to Rpm display. Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Frequency Speed Output Current Output Voltage Output Power WHour Counter DCLink Voltage V1 Monitor[V] V1 Monitor[%] I1 Monitor[mA] I1 Monitor[%] Function 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 V2 Monitor[V] V2 Monitor[%] I2 Monitor[mA] I2 Monitor[%] PID Output PID Ref Value PID Fdb Value Torque Torque Limit Trq Bias Ref Speed Limit Load Speed 9-4 .

1. Displayed Information 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Output Freq Output Current Inverter State DCLink Voltage Temperature Input State Output State Trip On Time Trip Run Time Function The operating frequency at the time of the failure The output current at the time of the failure Displays acceleration. 9-5 . The type. In this case. the information on the currently displayed failure is saved as part of the failure history. operating frequency and current of the present trip can be monitored and last 5 trips can be saved. Therefore. TRP current Over Voltage (02) 01 Output Freq 48. if more than one failure occurs. deceleration. what was saved in Failure History 1(Last-1) is shifted to Failure History 2(Last-2) The number next to the failure name represents the number of simultaneously occurring failures.2 Failure status monitor – Keypad The Trip Mode displays the present failure status in case of a trip during operation. 1) Present Failure Status Monitor If a failure occurs. you can monitor the type of them by pressing PROG.30 Hz 02 Output Current For the type and description of the failure. see 10. steady speed operation and stop Inverter DC power voltage Inverter temperature Displays the input terminal status Displays the output terminal status Displays the time from the inverter power ON to the failure Displays the time from the inverter Run to the failure If you enter press the Reset key on the keypad or input the reset terminal of the terminal block in order to terminal the failure status.20.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9. Table of Failures/Warnings The inverter operating status at the time of a failure can be monitored and the followings items are recorded. the present failure type is displayed as follows in the keypad display.1.

steady speed operation and stop Inverter DC power voltage Inverter temperature Displays the input terminal status Displays the output terminal status Displays the time from the inverter power ON to the failure Displays the time from the inverter Run to the failure Displays whether the currently saved failure history is to be deleted There are two ways to delete the failure history. The items displayed in the failure history are as follows. One is deleting each failure history by selecting Yes for Trip mode ‘TRP-10 Trip Delete ?’ in the each failure history described above. the more recent failure it represents. If more than 5 failures have occurred. 9-6 . The other is deleting all the failure history by selecting Yes for CNF-24 Erase All Trip of the Config Mode. deceleration.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 2) Failure History Monitor Types of up to five previous failures can be saved and monitored. Displayed Information 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Trip Names(1) Output Freq Output Current Inverter State DCLink Voltage Temperature Input State Output State Trip On Time Trip Run Time Trip Delete ? Function Displays the type of the failure The operating frequency at the time of the failure The output current at the time of the failure Displays acceleration. those that occurred before the last 5 ones are automatically deleted. The lower the number of Last X is.

load current 2 Outputs the set frequency.3 Analog output 1) 0 ~ 10V Voltage Output Code Group No.0 0. Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of the rated torque current.0 5 0.0 Unit % % msec % % The items to be output from AO1 (Analog Output 1) terminal of the inverter terminal block are selected and their size is adjusted. 200% of the rated output is the maximum nominal voltage(10V). 01 02 OUT 03 04 05 06 Function Display AO1 Mode AO1 Gain AO1 Bias AO1 Filter AO1 Const % AO1 Monitor Initial Setting 0 Frequency 100. 10V is produced from the frequency set at DRV-20 Max Freq. It produces 10V at maximum frequency (DRV-20) 9 9-7 . Outputs the produced torque of 10V at 250% of the motor’s rated torque. Monitors the output watt. Outputs the 10V from set value of BAS-15 Rated Volt. Outputs the DC power voltage of the inverter.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9. Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of no-load current. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Torque Output Power Idse Iqse Target Freq Ramp Freq Rated torque current = rated current 2 − . Outputs the output voltage. Produces 10V at maximum frequency (DRV-20) The frequency that has gone through acceleration and deceleration functions and can be different from the actual output frequency. 200V class produces 10V at 410Vdc and 400V at 820Vdc. it outputs to 10V based on that 200V class is 220V and 400V class is 440V. Setting 0 1 Frequency Output Current Output Voltage DC Volt Link Function Outputs the operating frequency.Non .1. OUT-01 AO1 Mode : selects the type of the output items. In case of BAS-15 set to 0V. 10V is produced from 200% of the inverter’s rated current (CT : based on the Constant Torque).0 0.

AO1 = Frequency × AO1Gain + AO1Bias MaxFreq OUT-04 AO1 Filter : sets the filter time constant of the analog output. It produces 6. 9-8 . OUT-06 AO1 Monitor : The analog output value can be monitored. It is valid only in the vector control mode. OUT-03 AO1 Bias : The size and offset can be adjusted.6V at 100% of the reference. The function of each code are the same as the items of 0~10V voltage output described above and the output range is 0~20mA.6V at 100% of the reference. Outputs the command values of the PID controller.0 5 0. It produces 10V at maximum frequency(DRV-20) Outputs the difference between the speed reference(command) and the motor’s rotation speed that inputs into the encoder option card. 11 Speed Dev 12 13 14 15 PID Ref Value PID Fdb Value PID Output Constant OUT-02 AO1 Gain.0 % % Msec % % Selects the items output from the AO2(Analog Output 2) terminal of the inverter terminal block and adjusts their size. It produces 10V at twice the rated slip frequency. It produces 6. which is represented in percentage on the basis of the 10V of maximum output voltage. 07 08 OUT 09 10 11 12 Function Display AO2 Mode AO2 Gain AO2 Bias AO2 Filter AO2 Const % AO2 Monitor Initial Setting 0 Unit Frequency 100. Displays the amount of the feedback of the PID controller. Displays the output value of the PID controller. Outputs the value of OUT-05 AO1 Const %. The output items are selected as frequency and the operation is as follows.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions Setting 10 Speed Fdb Function Displays the information on the speed of the input into the encoder option card. It produces 6.0 0.0 0. 2) 0 ~ 20mA Current Output Group Code No.6V at 100% of the reference.

Code No. The Example of both direction output voltage.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 3) -10 ~ +10V Voltage Output of Extended I/O Option Card If the extended I/O option card is mounted on the option slot of the inverter.0 5 0.0 0. 14 15 OUT 16 17 18 19 Initial Setting 0 - Group Function Display AO3 Mode AO3 Gain AO3 Bias AO3 Filter AO3 Const % AO3 Monitor Unit Frequency 100. unipolar(0~+10V) or bipolar(-10~+10V) voltage can be produced according to the type of the output variable.0 0.0 % % Msec % % The operation function is set equal to the 0~10V voltage output(AO1) described above.0 0. Output Direction Related Functions 0:Frequency forward(+)/reverse(-) 12:PID Value 4:Torque Ref 9:Ramp Freq 13:PID Value 7:Iqss Fdb 10:Speed Fdb 14:PID Output - reverse(-)/ regenerative(-) 4) 0~20mA Current Output of Extended I/O Option Card Connection of the extended I/O card to the inverter makes output of current of 0~20mA possible through terminals AO3 and AO4. the operating status can be monitored using the bipolar voltage output of the extended I/O. However. The selection of the function is the same as described in AO1 terminal of the inverter. Code No. Its output has a resolving power of 11bit.0 Unit % % msec % % 9-9 . because bipolar voltage output is possible for AO3.0 5 0. 20 21 OUT 22 23 24 25 Function Display AO4 Mode AO4 Gain AO4 Bias AO4 Filter AO4 Const % AO4 Monitor Group Initial Setting 0 Frequency 100.0 0.

1: FDT-1 This inspects whether the output frequency of the inverter has reached the frequency set by the user. you can use additional 3 relay outputs and function codes OUT-34. 1) Multi-Function output Terminal & Relay setting Functions 0: None (I recommend it is more easily described) It takes no action. It operates under the final failure of automatic restart repetition setting trials. It begins to operate when the following condition is met. Extended I/O card mounted in the inverter body. absolute value(set frequency – output frequency) < detected frequency width/2 9-10 . Failure Relay will operate Bit on status (ON) : Bit off status (OFF) : Setting option Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Function Right end of the window is ‘ Bit 1’ It operates. 35 and 36 are displayed.1. (PRT-08~09). Select the output items of the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(Relay1.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9. 30 31 OUT 32 33 34~36 41 Function Display Trip Out Mode Relay 1 Relay 2 Q1 Define Q2~Q4 Define DO Status 12 1 Initial Setting 010 Trip Mode Run FDT-1 bit Unit bit - According to OUT-30 Failure output.4 Selection of relay function and multi-function output terminal of terminal block Group Code No. If this multi-function output is set as None with the PLC option card inserted in Slot 1 and Slot 2. it can be used as the contact point output of the PLC option card. Q1 is Open Collector TR output. when the Low voltage trip occurs It operates under trip situations other than low voltage trip. Multi-function output can be monitored at OUT 41 DO Status. 2) of the inverter terminal block. Multi-function output can be monitored to 3 outputs without extended I/O and 6 outputs with extended I/O.

57 58 Function Display FDT Frequency FDT Band (Hz) Group Initial Setting 30.00 40Hz Set Frequency 15Hz Frequency Q1 Operating command 20Hz 40Hz 20Hz Unit Hz 35Hz 2 : FDT-2 Active when the frequency set by the user is equal to the FDT Frequency and the No. Code No. Group OUT Code No. absolute value(detected frequency – operating frequency) < detected frequency width /2 9-11 .00 Unit Hz Hz OUT Set Frequency 25Hz Frequency Q1 Operating command 30Hz 50Hz 3 : FDT-3 Active when the operating frequency meets the following condition. 0 FDT-1 condition above is simultaneously met.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions The detected frequency width is set as follows and the illustration below shows the frequency width having been set at 10Hz.00 10. [absolute value(set frequency – detected frequency) < detected frequency width /2 ] & [ FDT-1 ] This case assumes that the detected frequency width is 10Hz and the detected frequency is 30Hz. 58 Function Display FDT Band (Hz) Initial Setting 10.

Chapter 9 Monitor Functions Group OUT Code No. 9 : Stall (motor stall) Active in case of a stall caused by the motor overload.00 10.00 10. 57 58 Function Display FDT Frequency FDT Band (Hz) Initial Setting - Unit 30.00 Hz Hz 30Hz Frequency 25Hz Q1 Operating command 5 : Over Load (motor overload) Active when the motor is given overload. 8 : Fan Warning (fan failure) Set ‘8: Fan Warning’ at multi-function output and it will be Activated when there is a problem with the cooling fan. 6 : IOL (inverter overload) Active in case of a failure for inverse time characteristic protection against inverter overload. 57 58 Function Display FDT Frequency FDT Band (Hz) Initial Setting - Unit 30.detected frequency/2) Group OUT Code No.00 Hz Hz 30Hz Frequency 35Hz 25Hz Q1 Operating command 4 : FDT-4 Can operate setting the conditions of acceleration and deceleration at the same time. Acceleration : operating frequency >= detected frequency Deceleration : operating frequency > (detected frequency . 7 : Under Load (underload warning) Active in case of underload warning. 9-12 .

Code No. 18 : Comm Line (normal power operation) If normal exchange operation is necessary. see Chapter8 Applied Functions 8. For details about the speed search. see Chapter8 Applied 9-13 .Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 10 : Over Voltage (over voltage failure) Active if the inverter DC power voltage goes up above the protective action voltage.1. It is not active during DC braking. they can be used as the signal sources for operation of the system sequence relay or magnetic contactor. 14 : RUN (running) Active while the inverter produces voltage with given operating command. They use the auxiliary relay of the inverter terminal block(Aux Relay) and multi-function output(MO1) and set one of the multi-function input terminals as the normal exchange.24 By pass operation. The communication option and extended I/O option card are mounted and it operates also in case of loss of the analog input terminal and communication command within the option. 17 : Inverter Line (inverter operation). 16 : Steady (steady speed operation) Active during steady speed operation. For details. 65~72 32 33 Function Display Px Define Relay 2 Q1 Define 16 15 16 Group IN OUT Initial Setting Exchange Inverter Line Comm Line Unit - 19 : Speed Search (speed search) Active while the inverter operates for speed search. Frequency Q1 Operating command 15 : Stop (stop) Active when the operating command is OFF and there is no inverter output voltage. 11 : Low Voltage (low voltage failure) Active if the inverter DC power voltage goes down below the low voltage protective action level. 12 : Over Heat (inverter cooling fan overheat) Active if the inverter cooling fan is overheated. 13 : Lost Command (command loss) Active in case of loss of the analog input terminal and RS485 communication command of the inverter terminal block.

Chapter 9 Monitor Functions Function 8. Group APP 25 : MMC This is used for multi-motor control. This takes necessary actions for multi-motor control if you set the relay 1 and 2 and multi-function output(Q1) at MMC and APP-01 App Mode at No. 01 Function Display App Mode Initial Setting 3 MMC Unit Code No. 23 : Trv ACC. 9-14 .00 Zspd Dect Unit Hz Hz Code No. 24 : Trv DEC Trv ACC produces signals when the accelerating frequency is reached during traverse operation. 09 70 71 OUT 33 Function Display Control Mode ZSD Frequency ZSD Band (Hz) Q1 Define Initial Setting 4 2 5 Vector 2.19 Speed search operation.CON-71 The relay operating on the basis of the revolution of the motor(encoder signal). Trv DEC produces signals when the decelerating frequency is reached.00 1. 01 Function Display App Mode Initial Setting 1 Traverse Unit - CON-70+CON_71 Revolution of Motor Q1(Zspd Dect) CON-70 . Group DRV CON Code No. error might occur at the time of ON/OFF due to the encoder signal noise or filter time constant. Group APP 26 : Zspd Dect This is used where the motor rotation speed is 0(rpm) during operation with the control mode set as vector. 21 : Seq Pulse (auto sequence operation) Active after the advance step of the auto sequence operation and a cycle of the operating sequence. 22 : Ready (stand by for operating command) Active when the inverter is normally operating and ready to operate waiting for operating command from outside. 3 MMC.1. 20 : Step Pulse.

Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 27 : Torque Dect Active if the torque. Vector 100. 65~72 55 56 Group IN OUT Function Display Px Define TimerOn Delay TimerOff Delay Initial Setting 39 Timer In 0.00 Unit Sec Sec 32 : ENC Tune Produces warning by releasing contact point output in case of auto tuning if there is no encoder board or APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is not set as Feed-back. with the control mode set as sensorless or vector. Sensorless-2. 33 : ENC Dir Produces warning by releasing contact point output in case of auto tuning if the encoder has misdistribution although the encoder board has been mounted and APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is set as Feed-back.0 Unit DRV % % OUT 28 : Timer Out This is a function of activating the contact point output after a certain period of time using the multi-function terminal block input. Code No. Code No. is below the following levels.0 5. 9-15 .00 0. 09 59 60 Function Display Control Mode TD Level TD Band Group Initial Setting 3 ~ 4 Sensorless-1.

28 Trip Mode at OUT-31~33 after selecting the terminal and relay to use for failure output. 9-16 . OUT-54 TripOut OffDly : The failure relay or multi-function output becomes active after the period of time set in OUT-53 in case of a failure. With reset input. The terminal and relay gets active in case of a failure of the inverter. Code No. Setting Item bit3 bit2 bit1 Function Bit 1 is on the right of the display. OUT-30 Trip Out Mode : Select the No. Active in case of Low Voltage failure Active in case of a failure due to other than low voltage Active in case of auto re-start failure(PRT-08. 30 31 OUT 32 33 53 54 Function Display Trip Out Mode Relay 1 Relay 2 Q1 Define TripOut On Dly TripOut OffDly Group Initial Setting 29 14 1 010 Trip Run FDT-1 0.00 0. The activeness can be set as follows according to the type of the failure. the contact point gets OFF after the period of time set in OUT-54.5 Failure status output by relay and Multi-function output terminal of terminal block The inverter failure status can be output using the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(relay 1 and 2).Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9.1.00 Unit Sec sec *The inverter failure status can be output by added OUT 34~36 when extended I/O is mounted. PRT-09) OUT-53 TripOut On Dly.

Relay1.6 Output terminal delay time and type of contact point The output terminal of the terminal block and the operating time of the relay can be adjusted. yy:mm(month):dd:hh:mm(minute) 0 / 00 / 00 00 : 00 9-17 . The information on the display is as follows. 70 71 CNF 72 74 75 Function Display On-time Run-time Time Reset Fan time Fan Reset Time Initial Setting 0 0 0/01/01 00:00 0/01/01 00:00 No 0/00/00 00:00 No Unit min min min - CNF-70 On-time : time is accumulated with the inverter supplied with power. 2) Selection of Type of Output Signal Contact Point Code Function Group No.00 0.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions 9. 1) Output Terminal Delay Time Code Group No. If the appropriate bit is set at 0. The delay time set at OUT-50 and 51 apply to both the multi-function output terminal(Q1) and relay(Relay 1. Relay 3. it operates as A contact point(NO) and if at 1.14 Run and ON delay time(DO On Delay) and OFF delay time(DO Off Delay) are set at 1 sec and 2 sec respectively.7 Operating time monitor Group Code No. Relay 2. OUT 50 51 Function Display DO On Delay DO Off Delay Initial Setting 0.00 Unit Sec Sec Operates as follows if OUT-32 Relay 2 is set as No. Q1. Relay 4. Display OUT 52 DO NC/NO Sel Initial Setting 000 Unit bit Selects the type of the contact point of the relay and multi-function output terminal.1.2) except for failure mode of the multi-function output function. ON and OFF delay time can be separately set and you can choose between A contact point(Normal Open) and B contact point(Normal Closed). 9. the selecting 3 of bits for contact point type of terminal block will be added. From the right bit. it operates as B contact point(NC).1. If extended I/O is mounted. Relay 5.

Information on the displayer is same as the total On-time.Chapter 9 Monitor Functions CNF-71 Run-time : cumulatively displays the voltage output time from the inverter with the operating command input.8 Selection of keypad Language Group CNF Code No. CNF-75 Fan Time Reset : If you set Number 1 “Yes”. 1 Yes.1. The information on the display is the same as the cumulative time(On-time). 01 Function Display Language Sel Initial Setting 0 English Unit - Selects the language on the keypad display. CNF-74 Fan time : It displays total On-time of inverter cooling fan. both the total On-time and the total Running time are deleted and will be displayed in the form of 0/00/00 00:00 9. CNF-72 Time Reset : If set at No. the power ON cumulative time(On-time) and operating cumulative time(Run-time) are both deleted and displayed as 0/00/00 00:00. 9-18 .

On the keypad.Chapter 10 Protective Functions 10. 0 : Self-cool The cooling fan connected to the motor axis. One is for overheat and damage and the other is for protecting the inverter itself and preventing malfunction. 1 : Forced-cool This structure supplies separate power to the cooling fan. This applies to the load that should operate for a long time at a low speed and the motor exclusively for the inverter has such a structure. 2 : Dec (Deceleration) Stop after deceleration. 10. Most general induction motors have such a structure. PRT-42 ETH 1min : inputs the amount of current that can flow continuously for a minute on the basis of the rated current (BAS-13) of the motor. Group Code No.1. 1 : Free-Run (Free Run) The inverter output is blocked and the motor does free run. the cooling effect varies according to the rotation speed. 10-1 .1 Motor protection 1) Electronic thermal (Preventing motor overheat) The electronic thermal function is automatically predicting temperature rises using the inverter output current without a temperature sensor and providing protection suited to the inverse time thermal characteristic of the motor. 40 PRT 41 42 43 Function Display ETH Trip Sel Motor Cooling ETH 1min ETH Cont Setting Display 0 0 Yes Self-cool 150 120 Setting Range No/Yes 120~200 50~180 Unit % % PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel : You can select the inverter operation in case of electronic thermal protective operation. PRT-41 Motor Cooling : selects the operating method of the cooling fan mounted on the motor. 0 : None The electronic thermal function is not active. the failure status is displayed as E-Thermal.1 Protective Functions The protective functions provided by the SV-iS7 series are broadly divided into two types.

2 Overload warning and troubleshooting (Trip) This function is for releasing an warning and troubleshooting when the motor is supplied with overload in comparison with the rated current of the motor. 10-2 .Chapter 10 Protective Functions PRT-43 ETH Cont : sets the magnitude of the current at which the electronic thermal protective function becomes active. 2 : Dec Decelerating stop in case of a failure. 1 : Free-Run Inverter output is blocked in case of an overload failure.0 Setting Range No/Yes 30~180 0~30 30~200 0~60. Continuously permitted current[%] PRT-41=1 100 95 PRT-41=0 PRT-42 Current[%] 65 PRT-43 Frequency[Hz] 20 60 60 Electronic thermal time(sec) 10. Incessant operation is available without protection below the set value. 04 17 18 PRT 19 20 21 22 31 OUT 32 33 Function Display Load Duty OL Warn Select OL Warn Level OL Warn Time OL Trip Select OL Trip Level OL Trip Time Relay 1 Relay 2 Q1 Define 5 Over Load Setting Display 1 1 1 Heavy Duty Yes 150 10. 0 : None No action is taken to protect from overload.0 Unit % sec % sec PRT-04 Load Duty : Select a load classification 0 : Nomal Duty Set VT (Variable Torque) loads such as fan or pump (Overload endurance : 1min at 110% of VT rated current) 1 : Heavy Duty Set CT (Constant Torque) loads such as hoist or crane (Overload endurance : 1min at 150% CT rated current) PRT-20 OL Trip Select : selects the inverter operation in case of an overload failure. You can set the current magnitude for the warning and troubleshooting. The motor does free run. Group Code No.0 Free-Run 180 60.1.

PRT-18 OL Warn Level.2. Group Code No. PRT-17 OL Warn Select : Warning signal is released using the multi-function output terminal of the terminal block or relay when a load of OL warning level is supplied. The output frequency of the inverter is automatically controlled in order to prevent the motor stall due to overload.1.00 180 Stall Setting Range Starting Freq ~ Stall Freq 1 30~250 Stall Freq 1~ Stall Freq 3 30~250 Stall Freq 2~ Stall Freq 4 30~250 Stall Freq 3~ Max.00 180 60. over current flows in the motor possibly causing overhead or damage to the motor of interrupting the system process of the motor load side.3 Stall prevention In case of a stall due to overload.00 180 60. Relay2. Freq 30~250 Unit Bit Hz % Hz % Hz % Hz % - 10-3 . PRT-19 OL Warn Time : The multi-function output(Relay 1. t : PRT-19 t Current Multi-Function Output t PRT-18 10. Q1 Initial Setting Display 9 111 60. The output of the inverter is not blocked. PRT-22 OL Trip Time : The inverter output is blocked or stops decelerating according to the method set in PRT-17 if the current flowing in the motor is higher than the value set at OL Trip Level and the current continues to flow for the OL Trip Time. 50 51 52 53 PRT 54 55 56 57 58 OUT 31~33 Function Display Stall Prevent Stall Freq 1 Stall Level 1 Stall Freq 2 Stall Level 2 Stall Freq 3 Stall Level 3 Stall Freq 4 Stall Level 4 Relay1. It gets active if 1 Yes is selected and not active if 0 No is selected.00 180 60. Q1) releases the warning signal if the current flowing in the motor is higher than the OL Warn Level and the current continues to flow for the OL Warn Time.Chapter 10 Protective Functions PRT-21 OL Trip Level. The multi-function output terminal and relay release signals if Over Load is selected at OUT-31~33.

as the stall preventing function during acceleration.Chapter 10 Protective Functions PRT-50 Stall Prevent : Stall preventing action can be selected during acceleration/deceleration or steady speed operation. Acceleration resumes if the load current goes down below the set level. The actual accelerating time becomes longer than the set acceleration time because deceleration is interrupted if stall preventing function gets active during acceleration. Acceleration resumes if the current goes down below the set level during the stall preventing operation. it does not operate. the appropriate bit is set and it below. 54…). If the current stays at higher than the stall level. If the dot of the switch is above. 100 : Stall Prevention during Deceleration The DC voltage of the DC power part is kept below a certain degree and deceleration is conducted to prevent over voltage trip during deceleration. Selection of stall preventing function during accelerating operation Selection of stall preventing function during steady speed operation Selection of stall preventing function during decelerating operation 001 : Stall Prevention during Acceleration Acceleration stops and deceleration begins if the inverter output current during acceleration is higher than the set stall level(PRT-52. Therefore the decelerating time might be longer than the set time according to the load. it decelerates to the start frequency(DRV-19 Start Freq). 010 : Stall Prevention during Steady Speed The output frequency is automatically reduced for deceleration if current is higher than the set stall level during steady speed operation. Caution Be careful because the decelerating time might be longer than the set time according to the load if the stall preventing function is set during deceleration. Bit set(ON) : Bit setting canceled(OFF) : Setting Items bit3 bit2 bit1 Function Bit 1 is the first on the right of the display. 10-4 .

the setting range of Stall Freq2 is between Stall Freq 1(lower limit) and Stall Freq 3(upper limit). you can set the stall level above the base frequency. The lower limit and upper limit are set in the number sequence of the stall frequency. Stall level Stall level1 Stall level2 Stall level3 Stall level4 Stall Frequency 2 Stall Frequency 4 Output Frequency Stall Frequency1 Stall Frequency 3 Caution The start timing is determined by the stall level 1 regardless of the other stall setting levels if the stall preventing function gets active during starting. For example.Chapter 10 Protective Functions Current Frequency Stall level Q1 acceleration Steady speed DC voltage Frequency Q1 Deceleration PRT-51 Stall Freq 1 ~ PRT-58 Stall Level 4 : You can set the stall prevention level for each frequency band according to the load type. In addition. 10-5 .

the inverter output is blocked.0 Low Constant 100% Thermal In Setting Range 0~100 Low/High 0~100 Unit % % - PRT-34 Thermal-T Sel : The inverter operating status is set when the motor is overheat. by using the analog input terminal Using voltage(V1) input terminal Using current(I1) input terminal AO2 V1 5G Switch I1 PTC 5G Measure by letting certain amount of current flow through the A02 terminal and converting it into voltage according to the resistance value change PTC 10-6 . When you use the current input terminal I1 by supplying constant current to the temperature sensor with the analog current output(AO2) terminal.4 Motor overheat sensor input The overhead preventing sensor(PT100. PTC).Chapter 10 Protective Functions 10. The voltage(V2) or current(I2) terminals in the extended I/O option card are also available. is connected to the analog input terminal of the terminal block so that the protective function gets active when the motor is overheated. the switch in the I/O card should be where the PTC is. PRT-35 Thermal In Src : The terminal type is selected when the motor overheat sensor is connected to the voltage(V1) or current(I1) input terminal of the inverter terminal block. If you set at Free-Run(1).1. the inverter carried out decelerating stop if the overheat sensor detects overheat. Before use. Group Code No. which is attached to the motor. If you set at decelerating stop(Dec(2)). 1) Use of temperature sensor such as PTC etc. 34 PRT 35 36 37 07 OUT 08 65~75 IN 87 Function Display Thermal-T Sel Thermal In Src Thermal-T Lev Thermal-T Area AO2 Mode AO2 Const Px Define DI NC/NO Sel Setting Display 1 1 0 14 11 39 Free-Run V1 50. check whether the switch is where the PTC is.

For how to operate it above 2. the protective function starts. Select the type of contact point of the terminal used in IN-87 as 1(NC). 05 06 Function Display Phase Loss Chk IPO V Band Setting Display 11 40 Setting Range 1~100V Unit Bit V You can select input and output phase open respectively. 39 Thermal In among the function items. If phase open occurs to the connection between the motor and inverter output. PRT-37 Thermal-T Area : If voltage lower than the thermal failure level(PRT-36) when you set at No. if you use the current input terminal and set the failure level at 50%. Using multi-function input terminal (Px) Px I CM PTC PRT-36 Thermal-T Lev : sets the action level of the motor overheat sensor. Group PRT Code No.5 Inverter and sequence protection 1) Input/Output phase open Protection The input phase open protection function is used to prevent over current through the inverter input terminal by input power phase open. bottom:0). IN-82 DI NC/NO Sel : You can set the overheat trip function input by using the multi-function terminal block input when using bimetal type sensor relay. Connect PTC between the terminal block to use and CM and select No. motor stall might happen due to torque insufficiency and that is why the output phase open protective function is used.Chapter 10 Protective Functions IN-65~75 Px Define. If the dot mark of the switch is at the top.1. it represents setting completed and if at the bottom. the protective function becomes active and if No. see PRT-37 Thermal-T Area. In case of voltage input terminal(V1). 0 Low. 10. and if voltage higher than the failure level is input. For example. the maximum input voltage is 5V. it does not operate (top:1.5V. the maximum input voltage is 10V and in case of current(I1).5V. the protective function gets active when the voltage supplied to the I1 terminal is below 2. bit setting(ON) : bit setting canceled(OFF) : 10-7 . 1 High.

Note Make sure that you set the motor rated current (BAS-13 Rated Curr) rightly. PRT-06 : IPO V Band : In case of phase open of one or more phase of the inverter inputs.6 External failure signal Group IN Code No. T of the inverter input terminal block. phase open protection might fail to operate. you can stop the inverter operating in case of a problem with the system. 10. IN-87 DI NC/NO Sel : You can select the type of the input contact point. 10 : Input phase open protection In case of phase open of one or more phase of R. If the Dot mark of the switch is at the bottom.1. The band of the ripple voltage is set. S. the inverter blocks output and displays In Phase Open on the keypad. input phase open trip occurs. If the band of the ripple voltage set in this function code is exceeded. 65~75 87 Function Display Px Define DI NC/NO Sel Setting Display 4 External Trip 000 0000000 Unit - By using No. 01 : Output phase open protection In case of phase open of one or more phase of U. 4 External Trip(external failure) among the multi-function input terminal functions. Selects input phase open protective action. it is A contact point(Normal Open) and if at the top. W of the inverter output terminal block.Chapter 10 Protective Functions Setting Items bit2 bit1 Functions On the far right of the display is bit 1. Protection against input phase open starts only when a certain amount of current(70~80% of the inverter rated output current) flows through the motor. it operates as B contact point(Normal Closed). the inverter blocks output and displays Out Phase Open. V. The terminals of each bit are as follows. If the motor rated current being actually used differs from the value set at BAS-13. bit Multi— function terminal 11 10 9 8 P8 7 P7 6 P6 5 P5 4 P4 3 P3 2 P2 1 P1 10-8 . Selects output phase open protective action. the ripple of the DC link voltage gets too large. Selects input/output phase open protective action.

The warning signal is released when 60% of the inverter overload protective action(150%. a warning signal is released in case of a failure if No. Set at No. 10-9 . No. Group OUT Code No.Chapter 10 Protective Functions Frequency External Trip A contact point P7(A contact point) External Trip B contact point P8(B contact point) Operating command 10. the output is blocked or the inverter conducts a decelerating stop according to the set method. 3 DEC. The protective action is also available for the keypad command loss during jog key operation when CNF-22 is set as JOG Key. it does nothing in case of keypad command loss. is selected. Q1 Cmd Source Multi Key Sel Setting Display 2 30 0 0 Free-Run Lost Keypad Keypad JOG Key Unit - PRT-11 Lost KPD Mode : Set the operating command(DRV-06) at No. Group PRT OUT DRV CNF Code No. 11 31~33 06 22 Function Display Lost KPD Mode Relay1. 31~33 Function Display Relay 1.2. the deceleration occurs for the time set at PRT-07 Trip Dec Time. Q1 Setting Display 6 IOL Unit - Warning signals can be produced in advance by using the multi-function output terminal before the inverter overload protective function(IOLT) starts. the inverter action is selected. Set at No. 1 minute) lapses. 1 Warning. 0 keypad.1. In case of decelerating stop. 2 Free-Run or No. 29 Lost Keypad. 0 None.7 Inverter overload If more current than the rated inverter current flows. the protective function starts to protect the inverter according to the inverse time characteristic. of the multi-function output or relay functions. In case of a problem with the communication between the keypad and main body.1.8 Keypad command loss If a problem occurs with the communication during operation or the connection between the keypad and the main body with the operating command method being keypad. 10.2.

Q1 Setting Display 1 1 13 Free-Run 1. For example. Freq Unit Sec Hz - PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode : Selects the action of the inverter in case of speed command loss. 1 Free-Run 2 Dec 3 Hold Input 4 Hold Output 5 Lost Preset PRT-15 AI Lost Level. Group Code No. the protective action starts. if the speed command is set as No. IN-12. The standard value is what is set at IN-08.00 Half of X1 Lost Command Setting Range 0. The standard values are IN-08. 0 Unipolar. IN-12 and IN-23 of the terminal block input group. the action of the inverter can be selected when the speed command is lost due to severance of the signal line and so on.0 0. IN-08 V1 Volt x1. The inverter blocks output with the motor in free run. Setting Items 0 None Functions The speed command is directly operating frequency without protective actions. PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time : sets the criterion voltage of speed command loss and judgment time for analog input. Decelerating stop for the time set at PRT-07 Continues to operate at the average value of the input for the last 10 seconds until the moment that the speed command loss was detected. the protective action begins. 2 : Below X1 If a signal lower than the minimum set vale of the analog input set as the speed command continues for the time set in PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time). IN-23 of the terminal block input group.1~120 Starting Freq~Max. Continues to operate at the average value of the output for the last 10 seconds until the moment that the speed command loss was detected. Operates at the frequency set at PRT-14 Lost Preset F. 12 PRT 13 14 15 OUT 31~33 Function Display Lost Cmd Mode Lost Cmd Time Lost Preset F AI Lost Level Relay1. 1 : Half of X1 If the input signals remain the same for the time set at PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time) with them being a half of the minimum set value of the analog input set as the speed command(DRV-07 Freq Ref Src). 10-10 .Chapter 10 Protective Functions 1) Speed Command Loss If the speed is set by analog input from the terminal block. the protective action starts when the voltage input is below a half of the value set at . communication option or the keypad.2. 2 V1 at DRV-07 Freq Ref Src and IN-06 V1 Polarity is set as No.

Chapter 10 Protective Functions

PRT-14 Lost Preset F : If the operating method(PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) is set as No. 5 Lost Preset in case of loss of the speed command, the protective action starts setting the frequency for continuance of operation. If PRT-15 AI Lost Level is set as No. 2 Below x1, PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode is set as No. 2 Dec and PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time is set at 5 seconds, the operation is as follows.
Set Frequency 5 seconds Frequency Q1 Operating command

In case of speed command loss due to the option card or built-in 485, the protective action becomes active when there is no speed command for the time set at PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time(speed loss judgment time).

10.1.9 Braking resistance use rate setting
The iS7 series is divided into a model in which the braking circuit is built and the other in which a separate external braking unit should be installed. 0.75~22kW belongs to the former(braking resistance unit excluded) and for those above 30kW, you should install a braking unit on the exterior of the inverter. Therefore the function of limiting the braking resistance use rate is necessary for only models below 22kW. Group PRT OUT . Code No. 66 31~33 Function Display DB Warn %ED Relay1,2, Q1 Setting Display 31 10 DB Warn%ED Setting Range 0~30% Unit -

PRT-66 DB Warn %ED : sets the use rate of the resistance unit(%ED : Enshalt Daur). The resistance unit use rate sets the ratio of operation of the braking resistance within an operating cycle. Continuous braking resistance is available up to 15 seconds and after 15 seconds lapses, the inverter does not release any braking resistance use signal. Caution

Be careful when you use the braking resistance above the consumed electric power(Watt) of the braking resistance unit because it might cause a fire due to overheated resistance. If you use a resistance unit with a heat sensor, you can use the sensor output as the external failure signal of the multi-function input terminal.

10-11

Chapter 10 Protective Functions
Example 1) % ED =

T _ dec × 100[%] T _ acc + T _ steady + T _ dec + T _ stop

Where, T_acc : Lead time which accelerate to its set frequency T_steady : Time which drive under constant speed at its set frequency T_dec : Time which reduce to lower frequencies than its constant speed frequency Or Time which comes to a stop from its constant speed frequency. T_stop : Time which stay idle until another start

Frequency

T_acc

T_steady T_dec

T_stop

Example 2) % ED =

T _ dec × 100[%] T _ dec + T _ steady1 + T _ acc + T _ steady 2

Frequency T_dec T_steady1 T_acc T_steady2

10.1.10 Underload warning and failure
Group Code No. 04 25 26 PRT 27 28 29 30 Function Display Load Duty UL Warn Sel UL Warn Time UL Trip Sel UL Trip Time UL LF Level UL BF Level Setting Display 0 1 1 Normal Duty Yes 10.0 Free-Run 30.0 30 30 Setting Range No/Yes 0~600.0 0~600.0 10~30 10~100 Unit sec sec % %

PRT-27 UL Trip Sel : sets the operating method of the inverter in case of a underload failure. If set as No. 1 F ree Run, it holds output in a situation of a underload failure. If set as No. 2 Dec, it stops after deceleration. PRT-25 UL Warn Sel : sets the underload warning. If set as No. 6 UnderLoad for multi-function output terminal at OUT-30~32, signals are released in underload warning conditions. PRT-29 UL LF Level, PRT-30 UL BF Level : sets the range necessary for underload detection according to the underload type. 10-12

Chapter 10 Protective Functions

Set the underload ratio at an operating frequency twice the motor rated slip speed(BAS-12 Rated Slip) at PRT-27. Set the underload ratio at the base frequency (DRV-18 Base Freq) at PRT-28. If variable torque is necessary like a fan or pump, set the PRT-04 Load Duty at No. 0 Normal Duty. In case of No. 1 Heavy Duty, it is set at the load for constant torque such as elevating devices or a conveyer.
O u tp u t C u rre n t PRT-30

PRT-29 R a te d slip X 2

O u tp u t F re q u e n c y B a se F re q u e n c y

S et at n orm al load(N orm al duty:V T)

O u tp u t C u rre n t

P R T- 3 0

R a te d C u rre n t X 2

O u tp u t F re q u e n c y

S et at heavy loa d(H eavy duty:C T)

PRT-26 UL Warn Time, PRT-28 UL Trip Time : The protective function becomes activated if the underload level condition described above continues for the warning time or failure time. This function is not activated during the energy saving operation (ADV-50 E-Save Mode).

10.1.11 Overspeed error
This function is activated when the control mode(DRV-09 Control Mode) is Vector.
Group PRT Code No. 70 72 Function Display Over SPD Level Over SPD Time Setting Display 60.00 0.01 Unit Hz Sec

If the motor rotates faster than the overspeed frequency(Over SPD Freq) for overspeed detection time(Over SPD Time), the inverter blocks output.

10-13

Chapter 10 Protective Functions

10.1.12 Speed variation failure
This function is active when the control mode(DRV-09 Control Mode) is Vector.
Group Code No. 73 PRT 74 75 Function Display Speed Dev Trip Speed Dev Band Speed Dev Time Setting Display 1 Yes 20.00 1.0 Unit Hz Sec

The inverter output is blocked when the motor rotates for the Speed Dev Time set at faster than the speed variation(Speed Dev Band).

10.1.13 Speed sensor error detection
It can be detected whether the encoder option card is mounted on the inverter main body. With the encoder mounted, an error is detected too when the encoder signal of the line drive method is a single line. In case of an error, a message reading Encoder Trip is displayed.
Group PRT Code No. 77 78 Function Display Enc Wire Check Enc Check Time Setting Display 1 Yes 1.0 Unit sec

10.1.14 Fan failure detection
Group PRT OUT Code No. 79 31~32 33 Function Display FAN Trip Mode Relay 1,2 Q1 Define Setting Display 0 8 Trip FAN Trip Unit -

If the cooling fan failure mode is set at No. 0 Trip and if a problem with the cooling fan is detected, the inverter output is blocked and the fan failure is displayed. If you set at No. 1 Warning and select No. 8 FAN Warning as the multi-function output terminal or relay, the fan failure signal is released and operation continues, However, if the temperature within the inverter rises above a certain degree, the output is blocked due to overheat of the cooling fan and so on.

10.1.15 Selection of action in case of low voltage failure
Group PRT OUT Code No. 81 31~32 33 Function Display LVT Delay Relay 1,2 Q1 Define Setting Display 11 0.0 Low Voltage Unit sec -

10-14

Chapter 10 Protective Functions

If the internal DC voltage goes down below a certain degree because of the inverter input voltage being blocked, the inverter blocks output and displays low voltage failure(Low Voltage). If PRT-81 LVT Delay time has been set, in case of a low voltage failure, the inverter output is blocked and it is handled as a failure after the set period of time. A warning signal of a low voltage failure can be released using multi-function output or relay. However, in case of a warning signal, the LVT Delay time does not apply.

10.1.16 Output blocking by multi-function terminal
Group IN Code No. 65~75 Function Display Px Define Setting Display 5 BX Unit -

If you set the function of the multi-function output terminal at No. 2 BX and input it during operation, the inverter blocks output and displays BX on the keypad display. The information on the frequency and current at the time of BX input is to be monitored. Acceleration resumes when the BX terminal is OFF with an operating command input.

10.1.17 How to terminate failure state
Group IN Code No. 65~75 Function Display Px Define Setting Display 3 RST Unit -

To terminate the failure state, press the Reset key on the keypad or use the multi-function input terminal. The failure state is terminated if you input the terminal in case of a failiure after setting the function of the multi-function input terminal at No. 2 RST.

10.1.18 Selection of action in case of option card failure
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display 0 PRT 80 Opt Trip Mode 1 2 None Free-Run Dec 1:Free-Run Unit

If there is a problem with the communication between the option card and the main body of the inverter or the option card is separated from during operation, select the inverter action status. In case of No. 1 Free-Run, the inverter output is blocked and the failure information is displayed on the keypad. In case of No. 2 Dec, it decelerates at the value set in PRT-07.

10-15

No Motor Trip occurs when the inverter’s output current against the rated current(BAS13) continues to be below PRT32(No Motor Level) for PRT33(No Motor Time). set the PRT-32 No Motor Level lower than the value at the time of delivery from the plant. 31 PRT 32 33 Function Display No Motor Trip No Motor Level No Motor Time Setting Display 0 7 None 10 0. 10-16 . No Motor Trip might occur because of low output current in its initial starting. Caution If BAS-07 V/F Pattern is set at 1 Square. No Motor Trip is released to protect the system.0 Unit % sec If an operating command is given with the motor not connected to the output terminal of the inverter.1~10.19 Detection of motor not connected to inverter output terminal Group Code No.5 Setting Range 1~100 0. Otherwise.Chapter 10 Protective Functions 10.1.

Chapter 10 Protective Functions 10.1.20 Table of failures/warnings Category Loader Display Over Current1 Over Voltage External Trip NTC Open Over Current2 Fuse Open Option Trip-x Over Heat Out Phase Open In Phase Open Inverter OLT Latch Type Over Speed Ground Trip Encorder Trip Fan Trip Heavy Failure ParaWrite Trip E-Thermal Thermal Trip Pre-PID Fail IO Board Trip Speed Dev Trip Ext-Brake No Motor Trip Low Voltage Level Type BX Lost Command Lost Keypad EEP Err ADC Off Set Damage to Hardware Watch Dog-1 Watch Dog-2 Gate Pwr Loss DRV operation power error Description(Trip) Trip from over current Trip from over voltage Trip from exterior signals Trip from temperature sensors Trip from ARM short current Fuse open trip Option Trip Trip from Over heat Trip from output phase open Trip from input phase open Trip from inverter overloads Trip from over speed Trip from ground fault Trip from speed sensor Fan trip Trip from parameter write Trip from motor overheat Trip from temperature Trip from Pre-PID failures Trip from IO Board connection Trip from speed deviation Trip from exterior brake Trip from no motor Trip from low voltage Emergency stop trip Trip from lost command Trip from lost-keypad Exterior Memory Error Analog Input Error CPU Watchdog trip 10-17 .

Chapter 10 Protective Functions Category Loader Display Over Load Minor Failure Under Load Lost Command Lost Keypad Lost Command Over Load Under Load Inverter OLT Warning Fan Warning DB Warn %ED Enc Conn Check Enc Dir Check Lost Keypad Retry Tr Tune Description(Trip) Motor overload trip Motor under load trip Trip from lost command Trip from lost keypad Warning from lost command Warning from overload Warning from under load Warning from inverter overload Warning from fan operation Warning for braking resistance % Warning for encoder connection error Warning for rotating direction error Warning for lost keypad Warning for Tr tuning retrial 10-18 .

installation. 11-1 . By violating this manual may result in serious injury or damages to other components.1 Communication Functions 11. T_dec. because inverters can be driven or monitored according to user’s programs. but share basic functions. 1) Benefits under the communication method It is easy to apply inverters into automations in factories. and lost command) * Interface configuration regarding to RS-485 standard: 1) Possible to execute communications between the inverter and computers by numerous companies 2) Capable of controlling up to 16 inverters at a time with single computer due to the multi-drop link system 3) Interface for noise immunity environment Inverters can communicate through RS-232/485 converters with computers that are embedded with the RS-232 card. Caution Must understand this manual thoroughly before installation and operation. The communication method was designed to drive or monitor SV.1.1 Introduction This chapter is to explain SV-iS7 inverter serial communication’s standard. and program with PC or FA computers. frequency. * possible to monitor or modify parameters through computers (example: T_acc.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. More details about standard and guideline are advised to follow under the manual provided by specific manufactures. The standard and performance of converters may vary by manufactures.iS7 inverter series in long distance through PC or FA computers.

#n RS-485 terminal connection: connect to S+.200/2.of the terminal block (see Chapter 4 Wiring) Number of connectable inverters: up to 16 units Number of extendable addresses(St ID):1~250 Length of effective communication lines: possibly 1200m in total. It is effective to reduce the noise influence from communication by environment. Shield Type Twisted-Pare Wire Connect to S+.2 Specifications Category Communication method Transfer form Inverter series Converter Number of connected inverters Transfer distance Recommended cable for communication Installation form Communication Power Communication Speed Control procedure Communication system Letter system Stop bit length Sum check Parity check Specifications RS-485 Bus type.1. Please use communication Repeater to enhance the communication speed if you have to use communication cable above 1200m or to connect additional inverter. Multi drop Link System SV-iS7 series Embedded with RS-232 Max.3 Composition of communication system RS-232/485 Converter PC Inverter.400/9.S-.1.600/19.#1 Inverter. 11-2 . S. Keep it below 700m for stable communication.400 bps Unsynchronized communication system Half duplex system Modbus-RTU: BINARY LS Bus: ASCII 1 bit/2 bit 2 byte None/Even/Odd 11. 16 Max.200/38.#2 Inverter.200m (recommend within 700m) 0. CM of the terminal block Use the power that are insulated from the inner part of inverter as communication power(supplied from inverter) Select out of 1.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. 1.75mm2(18AWG).

No.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11.4 Basic setting Group Code No.1. 01 02 COM 03 04 05 Function Display Int485 St ID Int485 Proto Int485 BaudR Int485 Mode Resp Delay Setting Display 0 3 0 1 ModBus RTU 9600 D8 / PN / S1 5 Setting Range 0~250 0~3 0~5 0~3 0~48 Unit bps mSec COM-01 Int485 St ID: sets inverter address No. parity check / 1 stop bit COM-05 Resp Delay: the 485 communication(Modbus-RTU or LS INV 485) built in iS7 acts as a slave. 0 1 2 Display Modbus-RTU . The communication between the master and slave can be kept smooth by setting this function code properly in a system in which the master is not able to deal with the quick response of the slave. Master Request Response Request Response Slave COM-5 Resp Delay COM-5 Resp Delay 11-3 . No. The slave iS7 responds to the Master after the period of time set in this function code.Reserved LS INV 485 Description Modbus-RTU compatible protocol Not used Protocol exclusive for LS Inverter COM-03 Int485 BaudR: sets the communication speed at up to 38400bps. parity confirmation method and number of stop bits. 0 1 2 3 Display D8 / PN / S1 D8 / PN / S2 D8 / PE / S1 D8 / PO / S1 Description 8 bit data / parity not checked / 1 stop bit 8 bit data / parity not checked / 2 stop bits 8 bit data / even No. COM-02 Int485 Proto: The default protocol is Modbus-RTU(0) / LS INV 485(2). parity check / 1 stop bit 8 bit data / odd No. COM-04 Int485 Mode: selects the communication frame composition and sets the data length.

5 Operating command and Frequency setting Group DRV Code No. PRT-13 Lost Cmd Time: selects the movement of the inverter when there is a communication problem with PRT-13 for more than an hour. 12 13 14 Function Display Lost Cmd Mode Lost Cmd Time Lost Preset F Relay1. The motor continues free run. 0 1 2 3 4 5 None Free-Run Dec Hold Input Hold Output Lost Preset 11-4 . 07: If you select Int 485 No.6 Command loss protection Judgment standard and Protection in case of a problem with the communication for a certain period of time Group PRT Code No.1. 06 07 Function Display Cmd Source Freq Ref Src Setting Display 3 7 Int 485 Int 485 Unit - DRV-06. 3 and 7 as above. 11.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. you can set the operating command and frequency in the parameter located in the common area by using the communication function.00 Lost Command Unit Sec Hz - OUT 31~33 PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode. Q1 Setting Display 1 12 Free-Run 1.0 0. Setting Item Function Speed command is directly the operating frequency without protective movements.2. Decelerating stop Continues to operate at the entered speed command until before speed loss Continues to operate at the operating frequency until before speed loss Operates at the frequency set at PRT-14 Lost Preset F.1. The inverter blocks output.

48 Function Display Parameter Save Setting Display 0 1 -No-Yes- Unit - Set the common area parameter or keypad parameter by communication. all the currently set values are saved in the inverter and will remain unchanged even if you turn off and on the unit. 70~85 86 Function Display Virtual DI x Virt DI Status Setting Display 0 None - Unit - COM-70~85: You can control multi-function input by communication (common area h0385: see Page 11-28). If you select Yes at CNF48 Parameter Save.9 Communication frame monitoring. and the setting state goes back to the state before it was set by communication. other errors. Ex) If you want to send Fx command with controlling virtual multi-function input command area by Int485.1.) of the communication frame being received from the master by using the digital loader.1. all the currently set parameter values are saved in the inverter and will remain unchanged even if you turn off and on the unit. The function which is set will be operated at each bit after set the function at COM-70~85 and then set the bit which is set the function wanted to 1 at 0h0322. 11. You can check the status of virtual multi-function input at COM-86. It works without relation to IN65~75 (Px Define) and impossible to overlap setting. However. Turn off and then on the inverter. etc. Fx function is triggered if 0h0001 is inputted in the 0h0322 after COM-70 (Virtual DI 1) is set to FX. Note that it should be set DRV-06.7 Virtual multi-function input setting Group COM Code No. it’s not effective.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11.8 Caution in parameter setting for communication Group CNF Code No. Group Code No. if it is set at 1 and you switch it to 0. You can easily check the state (normal. 90 91 COM 92 93 94 Function Display Comm Mon Sel Rcv Frame Num Err Frame Num NAK Frame Num Comm Update Setting Display 0 0 1 Int 485 -No-Yes- Unit - 11-5 . start the inverter. CRC/Checksum error. If you set 0h03E0 address at 0 by communication and then at 1. CMD source as Run command source.1. 11.

. COM-93 NAK Frame Num: counts the number of errors (communication address error. writing prohibition error) in the communication frames received from the master. COM-94 Comm Update: reconnect the communication after change of the initial status parameter as communication speed (baud rate) etc. COM-91 Rcv Frame Num: counts the number of communication frames received normally from the master.10 Special communication area setting Entire iS7 communication memory map Communication Area Memory Map Description Common iS5 compatible communication area 0h0000 ~ 0h00FF 0h0100 ~ 0h01FF Area compatible with iS5 Area registered in COM31~38. COM-92 Err Frame Num: counts the number of CRC errors in the case of Modbus-RTU and Checksum errors in the case of LS Inv 485. data range error. COM51~58 Area registered in User Group Area registered in Macro Group Reserved Inverter monitoring area Inverter control area Inverter memory control area Reserved DRV Grp BAS Grp ADV Grp CON Grp IN Grp OUT Grp COM Grp APP Grp AUT Grp APO Grp PRT Grp M2 Grp Parameter registration type area 0h0200 ~ 0h023F 0h0240 ~ 0h027F 0h0280 ~ 0h02FF 0h0300 ~ 0h037F 0h0380 ~ 0h03DF 0h03E0 ~ 0h03FF 0h0400 ~ 0h0FFF 0h1100 0h1200 0h1300 Common iS7 communication area 0h1400 0h1500 0h1600 0h1700 0h1800 0h1900 0h1A00 0h1B00 0h1C00 11-6 .Chapter 11 Communication Function COM-90 Comm Mon Sel: selects the communication channel to monitor.1. 11.

31~38 51~58 Function Display Para Status-h Para Control-h Setting Display Unit Hex Hex Address 0h0100 ~ 0h0107: can only read the parameter registered in COM-31~38 Status Para-h Address 0h0110 ~ 0h0117: can both read and write the parameter registered in COM-51~58 Control Para-h Address 0h0100 0h0101 0h0102 0h0103 0h0104 0h0105 0h0106 0h0107 0h0110 0h0111 0h0112 0h0113 0h0114 0h0115 0h0116 0h0117 Parameter Status Parameter #1 Status Parameter #2 Status Parameter #3 Status Parameter #4 Status Parameter #5 Status Parameter #6 Status Parameter #7 Status Parameter #8 Control Parameter #1 Control Parameter #2 Control Parameter #3 Control Parameter #4 Control Parameter #5 Control Parameter #6 Control Parameter #7 Control Parameter #8 Caution When you register parameter in Control Parameter.g.1. set the operating speed (0h0005. 0h0382) parameters behind the most in the Para Control Frame. 0h0381) and operating command (0h0006. This is convenient for communication of multiple parameters with one communication frame at a time. 0h0380. (E.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. If Para Ctrl Num is 5.11 Parameter group for periodical data transmission Communication is available using the address registered in the Communication Function Group (COM). Allotment for Bits Parameter value registered at COM-31 Parameter value registered at COM-32 Parameter value registered at COM-33 Parameter value registered at COM-34 Parameter value registered at COM-35 Parameter value registered at COM-36 Parameter value registered at COM-37 Parameter value registered at COM-38 Parameter value registered at COM-51 Parameter value registered at COM-52 Parameter value registered at COM-53 Parameter value registered at COM-54 Parameter value registered at COM-55 Parameter value registered at COM-56 Parameter value registered at COM-57 Parameter value registered at COM-58 11-7 . Group COM Code No. register the operating speed and operating command at the highest number of Para Control-h. That is. register the operating speed with Para Control-4 and operating command with Para Control-5.

Code 98 Macro Grp. Macro Grp. Code 2 . . .Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. Code 2 . Code 1 Macro Grp. 0h200 ~ 0h23F: Currently Registered User Grp Parameter Address 0h0200 0h0201 . and MAC Grp. Code 1 User Grp. Code 99 Allotment for Bits U&M>MC->1 Parameter value registered at U&M>MC->1 Parameter value registered at . 0h023E 0h023F Parameter User Grp. Para h: Writing/Reading of the Macro parameter set by the keypad is available through 0h2400 ~ 0h2A3. . . 0h02A2 0h02A3 Parameter Macro Grp. U&M>MAC->1 ~ 64 Macro Grp. . U&M>MC->98 Parameter value registered at U&M>MC->99 Parameter value registered at 11-8 . Code 63 User Grp. . . . . . U&M>USR->1~64 User Grp. .1. Code 64 Allotment for Bits Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->1 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->2 . Para h: Writing/Reading of the USR parameter registered by the keypad is available through the addresses 0h0200~0h023F. addresses registered with U&M mode. Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->1 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->2 0x240 ~ 0x2A3: Currently Registered Macro Grp Parameter Address 0h0240 0h0241 .12 Parameter group for transmission of Macro Grp and User at U&M Mode You can carry out communication using the USR Grp. . User Grp.

Chapter 11 Communication Function

11.2 Communication Protocol
11.2.1 LS INV 485 protocol
Computer and other hosts are the master and the inverter is the slave. The slave inverter responds to the master’s request for writing/reading.

Basic Form
Request:: ENQ 1 byte Normal Response: ACK 1 byte Error response: NAK 1 byte Description: Requests begin with ENQ and end with EOT. Normal responses begin with ACK and ends with EOT. Error responses begin with NAK and ends with EOT. Address No. refers to the inverter No. and represented by 2 byte ASCII-HEX. (ASCII-HEX: hex representation consisting of ‘0’ ~ ‘9’, ‘A’ ~ ‘F’) CMD: in capitals (IF Error if in small letters) Character ‘R’ ‘W’ ‘X’ ‘Y’ ASCII-HEX 52h 57h 58h 59h Command Read Write Monitor registration request Monitor registration implementation Address No. 2 bytes CMD 1 byte Error Code 2 bytes SUM 2 bytes EOT 1 byte Address No. 2 bytes CMD 1 byte Data n * 4 bytes SUM 2 bytes EOT 1 byte Address No. 2 bytes CMD 1 byte Data n bytes SUM 2 bytes EOT 1 byte

Data: represented in ASCII-HEX E.g.) If data value is 3,000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h → 30h 42h 42h 38h 11-9

Chapter 11 Communication Function
Error code: two can be displayed ASCII (20h ~ 7Fh) Transmission/reception buffer magnitude: transmission = 39 byte, reception = 44 byte Monitor registration buffer: 8 Word SUM: inspection by making sum to check communication errors SUM = ASCII-HEX form of the 8 lowest bits of (Address No. + CMD + data) E.g.) Request for reading of one of 3000 address numbers as follows ENQ 05h 1 Address No. “01” 2 CMD “R” 1 Address No. “3000” 4 Number of Addresses “1” 1 SUM “AC” 2 EOT 04h 1

SUM = ‘0’ + ‘1’ + ’R’ + ‘3’ + ‘0’ + ‘0’ + ‘0’ + ‘1’ = 05h + 30h + 31h + 52h + 33h + 30h + 30h + 30h + 31h = 1A7h (Control value excluded: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc.) BroadCast Function used to give command to all the inverters bound by the network at a time Method: give command at Address No. 255 Action: Each inverter receives and replies to it though it’s not their own set address No.

11.2.2 Detailed reading protocol
Reading Request: Request for reading of n number of Word data consecutive from xxxx address No. ENQ 05h 1 Normal Reading Response: ACK 06h 1 Error Reading Response: NAK 15h 1 Total byte = 9 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “R” 1 Error code “**” 2 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “R” 1 Data “XXXX” N*4 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “R” 1 Address No. “XXXX” 4 Number of Addresses “1” ~ “8” = n 1 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Total byte = 12, quotation marks refers to characters.

Total byte = 7 * n * 4 = 39 at maximum

11-10

Chapter 11 Communication Function

11.2.3 Detailed writing protocol
Writing Request: ENQ 05h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “W” 1 Address No. “XXXX” 4 Number of Addresses “1” ~ “8” = n 1 Data “XXXX…” n*4 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Total byte = 12 + n * 4 = 44 at maximum Normal Writing Response: ACK 06h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “W” 1 Data “XXXX…” n*4 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Total byte = 7 + n * 4 = 39 at maximum Error Writing Response: NAK 15h 1 Total byte = 9 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “W” 1 Error Code “**” 2 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

11.2.4 Monitor registration detailed protocol
1) Monitor registration
Monitor Registration Request: Monitor registration is the function of periodically updating data with designating the data in advance which need monitoring continuously. Request for registration of n number of address No. (not necessarily consecutive) ENQ 05h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “X” 1 Number of Addresses “1” ~ “8”=n 1 Address No. “XXXX…” n*4 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Total byte = 8 + n * 4 = Maximum 40

Monitor Registration Normal Response: ACK 06h 1 Total byte = 7 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “X” 1 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

11-11

Chapter 11 Communication Function
Monitor Registration Error Response: NAK 15h 1 Total byte = 9 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “X” 1 Error Code “**” 2 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

2) Monitor implementation
Request for Monitor Registration Implementation: Request for reading the data of the address No. registered by monitor registration request.

ENQ 05h 1 Total byte = 7

Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2

CMD “Y” 1

SUM “XX” 2

EOT 04h 1

Monitor Registration Implementation Normal Response: ACK 06h 1 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “Y” 1 Data “XXXX…” n*4 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Total byte= 7 + n * 4 = maximum 39 Monitor Registration Implementation Error Response: NAK 15h 1 Total byte = 9 Address No. “01” ~ “1F” 2 CMD “Y” 1 Error Code “**” 2 SUM “XX” 2 EOT 04h 1

Error Code
Code Abbreviation Description

01:ILLEGAL FUNCTION

IF

When slave cannot implement the received function. That is, when there is no appropriate function. When the received address is not valid in the slave. Parameter address, not the address No. When the received data is not valid in the slave. Read Only or change prohibition during operation. When the frame size or internal num or sum is different.

02:ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS 03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE 21: WRITE MODE ERROR 22: FRAME ERROR

IA ID WM FE

11-12

Chapter 11 Communication Function

11.2.5 Modbus-RTU protocol
1. Function Code and Protocol (unit: byte) Function Code #03 (Read Holding Register) <Query> Field Name Slave Address Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo # of Points Hi # of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi <Response> Field Name Slave Address Function Byte Count Data Hi (Register 40108) Data Lo (Register 40108) Data Hi (Register 40109) Data Lo (Register 40109) Data Hi (Register 40110) Data Lo (Register 40110) CRC Lo CRC Hi

Function Code #04 (Read Input Register) <Query> Field Name Slave Address Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo # of Points Hi # of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi <Response> Field Name Slave Address Function Byte Count Data Hi (Register 30009) Data Lo (Register 30009) CRC Lo CRC Hi

11-13

Chapter 11 Communication Function Function Code #06 (Preset Single Register) <Query> Field Name Slave Address Function Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi <Response> Field Name Slave Address Function Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Function Code #16 (hex 0x10) (Preset Multiple Register) <Query> Field Name Slave Address Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo # of Register Hi # of Register Lo Byte Count Data Hi Data Lo Data Hi Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi <Response> Field Name Slave Address Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo # of Register Hi # of Register Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi 11-14 .

Chapter 11 Communication Function < Exception Code > Code 01:ILLEGAL FUNCTION 02:ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS 03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE 06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY <Response> Field Name Slave Address Function(note 1) Exception Code CRC Lo CRC Hi note 1) Function value is the set value of the highest bit of the query function value. 11-15 .

5kW 11: 37kW 14: 75kW 17: 132kW 20: 220kW 65535: 0.1 0.5kW 8: 18.4kW Allotment for Bits 0h0006 11-16 .6 Existing iS5/iG5/ iG5A compatible common area parameter Address 0h0000 Parameter Inverter model Scale unit R/W R B: iS7 0: 0.1 0.00 0x0101: Version 1.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11.01 1 1 0.5kW 7: 15kW 10: 30kW 13: 55kW 16: 110kW 19: 200kW 22: 375kW 2: 2. 1: Keypad Local 1: Frequency command by comm. Option) 0: 220V class 1: 400V class (example) 0x0100: Version 1.75kW 3: 3.2.2kW 5: 7.1 0.01 1: 1.5kW 4: 5.1 sec sec A Hz V V kW R/W R/W R R R R R B15 B14 Reserved 0: Keypad Freq 1: Keypad Torq 2~16: Terminal block sequential 17: Up 18: Down 19: STEADY 20: AUTO-A 21: AUTO-B 22: V1 23: 1 24: V2 25: I2 26: Reserved 27: Built-in485 28: Communication option 29: PLC option 30: JOG 31: PID 0: Keypad 1: FX/RX-1 2: FX/RX-2 3: Built-in 485 4: Communication option 5: PLC option Reserved Emergency stop W: Trip reset (0->1) R: Trip status Reverse operation (R) Forward operation (F) Stop (S) 0: Remote.7kW 6: 11kW 0h0001 Inverter capacity R 9: 22kW 12: 45kW 15: 90kW 18: 160kW 21: 280kW 0h0002 0h0003 0h0004 0h0005 Inverter input voltage Version Reserved Command frequency 0. (Built-in type.01 Hz R R R/W R/W B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 R Operating command (option) * see additional description B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 R/W B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0007 0h0008 0h0009 0h000A 0h000B 0h000C 0h000D 0h000E accelerating time decelerating time output current output frequency output voltage DC Link voltage output power status of Inverter 0.

(Built-in type. Option) Reverse direction run command Forward direction run command Brake open signal Jog mode Stop DC Braking Speed reached Decelerating Accelerating Operates according to the set value of Fault (Trip) *PRT-30 Trip Out Mode Reverse operation Forward operation Stop Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved H/W-Diag Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Level Type Trip Reserved Reserved Latch Type Trip Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved P11 (extended I/O) P10 (extended I/O) P9 (extended I/O) P8 P7 P6 11-17 .Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit R/W B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 0h000F Trip information R B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0010 Input terminal information R B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 Allotment for Bits 1: Run command by comm.

Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit R/W B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 0h0011 output terminal information R B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0012 0h0013 0h0014 0h0015 0h0016 ~0h0019 0h001A 0h001B V1 V2 I1 Motor rotation speed Reserved Hz/rpm selection Motor poles displayed 0.01 0.01 1 % % % rpm R R R R R R 0: Hz unit 1: rpm unit Motor poles displayed P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relay 5(extended I/O) Relay 4(extended I/O) Relay 3(extended I/O) Q1 Relay 2 Relay 1 Allotment for Bits V1 voltage input V2 voltage input(extended I/O) I1 current input Current motor rotation speed displayed - 11-18 .01 0.

75kW: 44B0h. 132kW: 4840h. 160kW: 4A00h 185kW: 4B90h 200V single phase open air cooling: 0220h 200V 3 phase open air cooling: 0230h Inverter input voltage / power supply type (single phase. 3.5kW: 4075h. 7.7kW: 4037h. 37kW: 4250h.75kW: 3200h 1. 45kW: 42D0h 55kW: 4370h.2.Chapter 11 Communication Function 11. 22kW: 4160h. 30kW: 41E0h.7 iS7 extended common area parameter 1) Inverter Monitoring Area Parameter (Reading only) Address 0h0300 Parameter Inverter model Scale unit iS7: 000Bh 0. 18. 90kW: 45A0h 110kW: 46E0h.00 0x0101: Version 1.5kW: 4015h.01 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 0h0305 Inverter operating status B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 1: speed search 3:steady speed 5:decelerating stop 7:S/W OCS 0: stop 1: forward operating 2: reverse operating 3: DC operating(0 speed control) 2:accelerating 4:decelerating 6:H/W OCS 8:dwell operating 0: normal status 4: Warning status 8: Fault status (operates according to set value of PRT-30 Trip Out Mode) Allotment for Bits 0h0301 Inverter capacity - - 0h0302 11-19 .2kW: 4022h. 11kW: 40B0h 15kW: 40F0h. 3 phase) / cooling method 200V single phase forced cooling: 0221h 200V 3 phase forced cooling: 0231h 400V single open air cooling: 0420h 400V 3 phase open air cooling: 0430h 400V single phase forced cooling: 0421h 400V 3 phase forced cooling: 0431h 0h0303 0h0304 Inverter S/W version Reserved (example) 0x0100: Version 1. 5. 2.5kW: 4125h.5kW: 4055h.

1 0.00 -32768rpm~32767rpm (Having a polarity.2 motor display Number of selected motor display 0: Hz unit 1: rpm unit Number of selected motor display Selection among Hz/rpm Reserved - 11-20 .2 motor display 0.1 A Hz RPM RPM V V kW % % % - (E.1 0.Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 Allotment for Bits Run command source 0: Keypad 1: Communication option 2:App/PLC 3.1 motor display Number of No.1 0.g) 0x0100: Version 1.1 motor display Number of No.1 0.1 0.) Number of No.01 0h0307 0h0308 0h0309 ~0h30F 0h0310 0h0311 0h0312 0h0313 0h0314 0h0315 0h0316 0h0317 0h0318 0h0319 0h031A 0h031B 0h031C 0h031D 0h031E ~0h031F Keypad S/W version Keypad Title version reserved Output current Output frequency Output RPM Motor feedback speed Output voltage DC Link voltage Output power Output Torque PID reference PID feedback Number of No.01 0 0 0. Built-in 485 4: Terminal Block 5:reserved 6:Auto 1 7:Auto 2 0h0306 Inverter run frequency command source - - B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Frequency command source 0: Keypad speed 1: Keypad torque 2~4:Up/Down run speed 5: V1 6: I1 7: V2 8: I2 9: Pulse 10: Built-in485 11: Communication option 12: App(PLC) 13: Jog 14: PID 15~22: Auto Step 25~39: Multi-step speed frequency 0x0101: Version 1.1 0.

Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 B9 0h0320 Digital input information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 B9 0h0321 Digital output information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved P11 (Extended I/O) P10 (Extended I/O) P9 (Extended I/O) P8 (Basic I/O) P7 (Basic I/O) P6 (Basic I/O) P5 (Basic I/O) P4 (Basic I/O) P3 (Basic I/O) P2 (Basic I/O) P1 (Basic I/O) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relay 5 (Extended I/O) Relay 4 (Extended I/O) Relay 3 (Extended I/O) Q1 (Basic I/O) Relay 2 (Basic I/O) Relay 1 (Basic I/O) Allotment for Bits 11-21 .

01 - Allotment for Bits Virtual DI 16 (COM85) Virtual DI 15 (COM84) Virtual DI 14 (COM83) Virtual DI 13 (COM82) Virtual DI 12 (COM81) Virtual DI 11 (COM80) Virtual DI 10 (COM79) Virtual DI 9 (COM78) Virtual DI 8 (COM77) Virtual DI 7 (COM76) Virtual DI 6 (COM75) Virtual DI 5 (COM74) Virtual DI 4 (COM73) Virtual DI 3 (COM72) Virtual DI 2 (COM71) Virtual DI 1 (COM70) % % % % % % % % - 0: No.01 0.01 0.1 motor / 1: No.01 0.01 0.Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 BI0 B9 0h0322 Virtual digital input information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0323 0h0324 0h0325 0h0326 0h0327 0h0328 0h0329 0h032A 0h032B 0h032C 0h032D 0h032E 0h032F Selected motor display AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.2 motor Analog input1 (Basic I/O) Analog input2 (Basic I/O) Analog input3 (Extended I/O) Analog input4 (Extended I/O) Analog output1 (Basic I/O) Analog output2 (Basic I/O) Analog output3 (Extended I/O) Analog output4 (Extended I/O) - - 11-22 .

Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 B9 0h0330 Latch type trip information-1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 B9 0h0331 Latch type trip information-2 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Allotment for Bits Fuse Open Trip Overheat Trip Arm Short External Trip Overvoltage Trip Overcurrent Trip NTC Trip Overspeed Deviation Overspeed Input open-phase trip Output open-phase trip Ground Fault Trip E-Thermal Trip Inverter Overload Trip Underload Trip Overload Trip Reserved Reserved Inverter output cutoff by terminal block input on Safety Option (applied to above 90kW) Slot3 option board contact defectiveness Slot2 option board contact defectiveness Slot1 option board contact defectiveness No MotorTrip External Brake Trip Basic IO board contact defectiveness Pre PID Fail Error on Parameter Write Reserved FAN Trip PTC (Thermal sensor) Trip Encoder Error Trip MC Fail Trip 11-23 .

Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 0h0332 Level type trip information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 0h0333 H/W Diagnosis Trip information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Keypad Lost Command Lost Command LV BX Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Gate Drive Power Loss Watchdog-2 error Watchdog-1 error EEPROM error ADC error Allotment for Bits 11-24 .

5: Reserved 7: RNet. 20: External IO-1 23: Encorder 1: Reserved 3: Profibus. 9: Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Auto Tuning fail Keypad Lost Encoder miss-wiring Encoder miss-installation DB FAN operation Lost command Inverter Overload Underload Overload Allotment for Bits 0h034C Option 3 11-25 .Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 0h0334 Warning information B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0335~ 0h033F 0h0340 0h0341 0h0342 0h0343 0h0344 0h0345 0h0346 0h0347 0h0348 0h0349 0h034A 0h034B Reserved On Time date On Time minute Run Time date Run Time minute Fan Time date Fan Time minute Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Option 1 Option 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Day Min Day Min Day Min Total number date of inverter power On Total minute except for total date of inverter On Time Total number day of inverter run Total minute except for total day of Run Time Total day of cooling fan run Total minute except for total day of Fan time 0: None 2: Reserved 4: Reserved 6: Reserved 8: Reserved 10: PLC.

1 0. 1:On) BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 Virtual DI 16 (COM85) Virtual DI 15 (COM84) Virtual DI 14 (COM83) Virtual DI 13 (COM82) Virtual DI 12 (COM81) Virtual DI 11 (COM80) Virtual DI 10 (COM79) Virtual DI 9 (COM78) Virtual DI 8 (COM77) Virtual DI 7 (COM76) Virtual DI 6 (COM75) Virtual DI 5 (COM74) Virtual DI 4 (COM73) Virtual DI 3 (COM72) Virtual DI 2 (COM71) Virtual DI 1 (COM70) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Q4 (extended I/O.1 sec sec accelerating time setting decelerating time setting BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 Virtual digital input control (0:Off. reverse operatingcommand:0001h 0h0383 0h0384 Accelerating time Decelerating timed 0. OUT34:None) 0h0385 11-26 .01 1 unit Hz rpm command RPM setting B7 B6 B5 B4 0h0382 Operating command B3 B2 B1 B0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 1: free run stop 0 1: trip reset 0:reverse command 0:stop command 1:forward command 1:run command Allotment for Bits command frequency setting Ex) forward operatingcommand:0003h. 1:On) B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0h0386 Digital output control (0:Off.Chapter 11 Communication Function 2) Inverter Control Area Parameter (Reading and Writing Available) Address 0h0380 0h0381 Parameter Frequency command RPM command Scale 0. OUT36:None) Q3 (extended I/O. OUT35:None) Q2 (extended I/O.

OUT31:None) Reserved PID reference command released PID feedback value - - 3) Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter(Reading and Writing Available) In this area. if set by communication. However.Chapter 11 Communication Function Address Parameter Scale unit B2 B1 B0 0h0387 0h0388 0h0389 0h038A ~0h038F 0h0390 0h0391 0h0392 0h0393 0h0394 0h0395 0h0395 ~0h399 0h039A 0h039B 0h039C 0h039D Reserved PID reference PID feedback value Reserved Torque Ref Fwd Pos Torque Limit Fwd Neg Torque Limit Rev Pos Torque Limit Rev Neg Torque Limit Torque Bias Reserved Anytime Para Monitor Line-1 Monitor Line-2 Monitor Line-3 0. are reflected in the inverter but not saved. in this area. 11-27 . OUT33:None) Relay2 (basic I/O. if the parameter is set. the values set by communication are all deleted and the pre-setting values are saved.1 0. it is not only reflected in the inverter but saved. set parameter values are directly saved in the inverter without the need to save the parameter values.1 0. OUT32:None) Relay1 (basic I/O.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0. Parameters of other areas. If you turn off the inverter and turn it on again.1 0. Therefore you should save the parameter before turning off the inverter after setting through communication.1 % % % % % % % % torque command forward motor ring torque limit forward regenerative torque limit reverse motor ring torque limit reverse regenerative torque limit torque Bias CNF-20 value setting (see page 13-40) CNF-21 value setting (see page 13-40) CNF-22 value setting (see page 13-40) CNF-23 value setting (see page 13-40) Allotment for Bits Q1 (basic I/O.

If you consecutively input the same password. Be careful when setting. thus possibly interrupting the communication. If you read this parameter through communication. 244 -> 0 -> 244 11-28 .) Follow the order below if you want to input 244 twice. you will know the previously set values. Set parameters at 0 through communication and then set them at other values. note 2) The parameters that input password. Therefore if you want to input the same value for another time. If you input password. E.Chapter 11 Communication Function Shift unit during operation X O 0: No 0: No 0: No 2: Drv Grp 0h03E2 note1) 4: ADV Grp 6:IN Grp 8: COM Grp 10:AUT Grp Address 0h03E0 note1) 0h03E1 note1) Parameter Parameter saving Monitor mode initialization Scale - Function 1:Yes 1:Yes 1: All Grp 3:BAS Grp 5:CON Grp 7:OUT Grp 9:APP Grp 11:APO Grp Page 8-44 8-45 Parameter initialization - - X 8-45 12:PRT Grp 13:M2 Grp *no setting during trip 0h03E3 0h03E4 0h03E5 note1) 0h03E6 note1) Changed parameter displayed Macro function item All history of failure deleted User registration code deleted Parameter mode hidden Parameter editing locked Initial parameter easy setting Consumed power initialization Cumulative inverter operating time initialization Cumulative cooling fan operating time initialization 0 0 - Hex Hex - O X O O O O O O O O 0: No 1:Yes 8-46 8-48 1:Yes 1:Yes 8-48 8-47 8-47 8-48 9-19 9-19 8-49 0:None 1: Draw App 2: Traverse 0: No 0: No writing: 0 ~ 9999 reading: 0: Unlock writing: 0 ~ 9999 reading: 0: Unlock 0: No 0: No 0: No 0: No 1:Yes 1:Yes 1:Yes 1:Yes 1:Lock 1:Lock 0h03E7 note 2) 0h03E8 note 2) 0h03E9 0h03EAnote1) 0h03EBnote1) 0h03ECnote1) note1) Be careful in setting parameters. only the first parameter is implemented and the following values are not reflected. **The time required might be longer because the data is saved in the inverter. change it to another value and input the previous value again.g. If you input a value other than 0 while it is set at a value other than 0. an error message will respond. the Lock status becomes Unlock status and the Unlock status becomes Lock status.

5 second on the basis of the inverter rated current. Ground Trip Latch E-Thermal Latch Out Phase Open In Phase Open Latch Latch Inverter OLT Latch 2) Protection by internal circuit abnormality or external signals Type Fuse Open Over Heat Over Current2 External Trip BX H/W-Diag Category Latch Latch Latch Latch Level Fatal Details A failure occurs when the inverter DC fuse responds to over current only above 30kW.1.1 Checking and Troubleshooting 12.5 second might differ according to the inverter capacity. Operation resumes if you set PRT-40 at values other than 0. Of the IN65~75 functions. A failure occurs in order to prevent overheat during overload operation according to the inverse time thermal characteristic. The inverter output is blocked by function selection of the multi-function terminal. Operation can resume after PRT-20 is set at values other than 0. Of the IN65~75 functions.3 External Trip is selected. A failure occurs when one of the three phases input of the inverter is phase open. 200% 0. Operation can resume after PRT27 is set at values other than 0.1 Protective functions 1) Protection from output current and input voltage Type Over Load Category Latch Details A failure occurs when you select the motor overload failure and the load exceeds the set degree. A failure occurs when the DC circuit voltage exceeds the prescribed amount. A failure occurs when the inverter output exceeds 200% of the rated current.4 BX is selected. Operation resumes if you set PRT-05 bit 1 at 1. This is the inverse time thermal characteristic protection against heat between 150% 1 minute to 200% 0. Operation resumes if you set PRT-05 bit 2 at 1. A failure occurs when you select the underload protection function and the Remark Under Load Over Current1 Over Voltage Low Voltage Latch Latch Latch Level motor load is within the set underload level. Trouble with the memory device within the inverter(EPP Rom). A failure occurs when current above the prescribed amount flows due to earth in the inverter output part.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12. A failure occurs when one of the three phases output of the inverter is phase open. A failure occurs when the temperature of the inverter cooling fan rises over the prescribed degree. The earth causing current varies according to the capacity of the inverter. Remark 12-1 . A failure occurs when the DC part in the inverter detects short circuit current. A failure occurs when the DC circuit voltage goes down below the prescribed degree. analogdigital switch output(ADC Off Set) or CPU malfunction(Watch Dog-1. This is an external failure signal by function selection of the multi-function terminal. No. No.

A failure occurs when resistance goes beyond the prescribed value after the external temperature sensor is connected to the terminal block. A failure occurs when abnormality is detected with the cooling fan. Operation resumes if PRT-12 is set at values other than 0. which is regarded as an abnormal state of the system. Only applied to IP54 product Details Remark toPTC Trip Latch Dev Speed Trip Latch Encoder Trip Latch Pre-PID Fail Latch 3) Protection by KEYPAD and option Type Category Details A failure occurs when operating commands come from the keypad or there is any problem with the communication between the keypad and inverter’s main body in the Keypad JOG Mode. A failure occurs when the speed that got feedback from the encoder goes up above the set variation value. Operation resumes if PRT-34 is set at values other than 0. 3 after it was inserted during power supply or when communication is not available with the inverter Note) Level : automatically terminates when the failure is solved. 12-2 . 1 after it was inserted during power supply or when communication is not available with the inverter When the option gets out of the option slot No. Only applied to Operation resumes if PRT-79 is set at 0. The detection level is set in PRT-70. Latch : terminates when the reset signals are input after the failure is solved. When the option gets out of the option slot No.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting Type Category Watch Dog-2). Operation resumes if PRT-73 is set at 1. below 22 kW Detected when IP54 product has a fault of internal circulation at FAN. Fatal : The failure state terminates when you cut the power supply to the inverter and then supply power again with the internal charging lamp is turned off after the failure is solved. ParaWrite Trip Over Speed Trip Latch Latch Trouble during parameter writing with the inverter’s main body from the keypad. A failure occurs when the motor speed goes up above the overspeed detection level. A failure occurs when the control amount(PID feedback) is continuously input below the set value during Pre-PID operation by the function setting between APP-34 ~36. 2 after it was inserted during power supply or when communication is not available with the inverter Remark Lost Keypad Level Lost Command Level Option Trip-1 Option Trip-2 Option Trip-3 Level Level Level When the option gets out of the option slot No. A failure occurs when PRT-77 Enc Wire Check is set at 1 and abnormality is detected for the set period of time. This is not saved in the failure history. (occurs 2 seconds after the communication is interrupted) When there is a problem with the command if frequency or operating commands are given by the terminal block or communication command other than the keypad. Operation resumes if PRT-11 is set at values other than 0. NTC Open Fan Trip IP54 FAN Trip Latch Latch Latch A failure occurs when abnormality is detected with the temperature detecting sensor of the power switch(IGBT).

12 Lost Command is selected among the functions of OUT31~33. Under Load Inv Over Load Set PRT-25 at 1 if an alarm is necessary for an underload situation. If Over Load signals are necessary for the output contact point.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12. Fan Warning DB Warn %ED Enc Conn Check An alarm is released if a problem is detected with the cooling fan with PRT-79 FAN Trip Mode set at 1. An alarm is released if time equal to 60% of the level at which the inverter IOLT functions is accumulated. No. 3 Enc Test is selected from BAS-20 Auto Tuning and the setting is wrongly Enc Dir Check changed between encoder phase A and B during the encoder test or the rotation direction is reverse.2 Alarm functions Type Description An alarm signal is released in case of overload to the motor. An alarm is released if the DB resistance consumption rate is above the prescribed degree. The alarm is released in a Lost Command certain condition between PRT13~15. An alarm signal can be released as well when PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode is 0. No. An alarm is signified if No.1. 6 Under Load is selected among the functions of OUT31~33. As the output signal. No. As the output signal. The detection level is set at PRT-66. No. As the output signal. An alarm is signified if the operating command is keypad or any problem is detected with the Lost Keypad communication between the keypad and the main body of the inverter in Keypad JOG Mode with PRT-11 Lost KPD Mode set 0. No. 12-3 . No. 5 IOL is selected among the functions of OUT31~33. Operation resumes if you set PRT-17 at 1. As the output signal. 4 overload is selected among the functions of OUT31~33. Signals are released if ENC Dir is set among the functions of OUT31~33. An alarm is signified if No. Signals are released if ENC Tune is set among the functions of OUT31~33. 3 Enc Test is selected from BAS-20 Auto Tuning and no signal is input during the encoder test.8 Fan Warning is selected among the functions of OUT31~33. As the output signal. 29 Lost Keypad is selected among the functions of OUT31~33.

1. Ground Trip Earth of the outlet cord of the inverter Deterioration of the insulation of the motor 12-4 . The supply voltage is too high. Inverter output is ON during idling of the motor.30) is lower than the minimum system load. the inertia of the load(GD2). Over Load Under Load There is a problem with the connection ☞ Raise the capacity of the motor and inverter. The supply voltage is too low. between the motor and load. ☞ Operate the inverter after the motor stops or use speed search(CON-60). on the power supply side.3 Troubleshooting Type Cause of Trouble Solution The load is higher than the rated load of the ☞ Raise the capacity of the motor and inverter. Over Current1 The load of the inverter is bigger than its rated ☞ Replace the inverter for one with bigger capacity. load. ☞ Check the output terminal distribution of the inverter. connected(a welder or motor direct on line) Nonconformity of the electronic contactor. motor. The underload level(PRT-29. ☞ Check the machine brake.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12. The load set at the overload failure level (PRT21) is small. ☞ Replace the motor. Over Voltage Regenerative load is located at the inverter ☞ Use a braking resistance device. etc. ☞ Check whether the supply voltage is below the prescribed degree. inertia of the load(GD2). The braking of the motor is too fast. ☞ Check whether the supply voltage is above the prescribed degree. ☞ Increase the set value. ☞ Replace the electronic contactor. Decelerating time is too short compared with ☞ Set the decelerating time higher. ☞ Increase the set value. output. Low Voltage Load larger than the power supply capacity is ☞ Raise the power supply capacity. Acc/Dec time is too short compared with the ☞ Raise the Acc/Dec time.

☞ Replace the cooling fan of the inverter. Earth of the output cord of the inverter ☞ Check the output terminal distribution of the inverter. Inverter cooling fan become to change period time. Internal fan PCB board’s power connector is not connected. ☞ Set the electronic thermal level properly. ☞ Contact a near service provider. ☞ Keep the temperature around the inverter below 50°C. 12-5 . ☞ Check the output distribution. There is foreign substance in the inverter vent where the fan is. near service provider. ☞ Raise the capacity of the inverter and motor. Torque boost is too high. ☞ Check the input distribution. replacement cycle of the cooling fan. Bad distribution of output Contact trouble of the electronic contactor of the input side Bad distribution of input The DC condenser of the inverter needs replacing. E-Thermal Out Phase Open In Phase Open Inverter OLT Over Heat Over Current2 ☞ Reduce the torque boost amount. The load of the inverter is bigger than it’s the inverter rating. ☞ Replace the motor for one that can separately supply power to the cooling fan. Contact a switch(IGBT). ☞Inverter cooling fan have to changed. ☞ Keep the temperature around the inverter below the prescribed degree. ☞ You should replace the DC condenser of the inverter. ☞ Check the vent or air outlet. The inverter has operated for a long time at a low speed. The cooling fan of the inverter needs replacing. ☞ Raise the capacity of the inverter. There is a problem with the cooling system. ☞ Check whether there is any foreign substance in the vent. Get customer service from an agency. There is a problem with the inverter power ☞ Inverter operation is impossible. The inverter has been used longer than the ☞ Replace the inverter cooling fan. The surrounding temperature is too high. The load of the inverter is bigger than its rated load. The electronic thermal level is set too low. There is a problem with the internal temperature sensor of the inverter. ☞ Check the electronic contactor of the input side of the inverter. Solution ☞ Reduce the load or frequency. Internal fan connector is not connected. Contact trouble of the electronic contactor of the output side. ☞Internal fan PCB board’s power connector is connected. NTC Open FAN Trip IP54 FAN Trip The surrounding temperature is out of the prescribed range. ☞Connect internal Fan connector. air duct or outlet.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting Type Cause of Trouble The motor is overheated. ☞ Check the electronic contactor of the output side of the inverter.

<below 3.5kW Push the bracket on the bottom to the arrow direction and pull it forward. 18.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12.5 kW> 2) Replacement steps of product of 11~15kW 200V/400V. then you can replace the fan. then you can replace the fan.7kW> <below 7. 12-6 . Disconnect the connector of the fan.4 Replacement of cooling fan 1) Replacement steps of the product below 7.5~22 kW 400V Release the volts under the In-Out put terminals and disconnect the connector of the fan.1.

12-7 .5~22 kW 200V.) Release the volts upper of the product and disconnect the connector of the fan. then you can replace the fan. 30~75kW 400V (Check capacity.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 3) Replacement steps of product of 18.

recorder Entire devices Power Source Voltage Is there any abnormal vibration or sound? Normal or not of the Voltage of main circuit? 1) Megger check (between main circuit terminals and connecting terminals) 2) Are all of the fixed parts on the position? 3) Is there any evidences of overheating on each parts? 4) cleaning 1)Is there any corrosion on the conductor 2) Is there any damage on coverings of the wire? Is there any damaged? 1) Is liquid leaking inside? 2) Is the safety apparatus on the position? Is there any protuberance? 3) Check the power failure capacity 1) Is there any chattering sound under operation 2) Is there any damage on contact point? 1) Is there any damage on isolating method of Resistor? 2) Check disconnection Ο Ο Ο Ο By seeing or hearing Voltage check among the terminal R.S.3) no matter DC 500V Megger Main circuit Ο Ο Total Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Check by seeing. T phase of the inverter 1) Disconnect the inverter and short terminals R. 2) Check by seeing. If no matter Connected conductors /Wires Terminals Check by seeing.T.W. U. and then measure these terminals and connecting terminals with Cycle megger 2) Screw up 3) Check by seeing. 1).5 Daily and regular checkup list Checkup Part Total Checkup items environment Check up Check: temperature. If no matter Digital multimeter/ tester 1) over 5MΩ 2). hygrometer.1. Checkup cycle Regular daily (Year) 1 2 Ο Way of Checkup See warning Criterion decision No freezing under temperature of -10~+40.2) If no matter Capacity meter Intermediate Condenser Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο 3) Check with Capacity meter 1)check by hearing 2)check by seeing 3) 85% Over than Rated capacity If no matter Relay Resistor 1) check by seeing 2) Disconnect one side and check with the tester 1) If no matter 2) within ±10% variation of indicated resistance value Digital multimeter/a nalogue tester 12-8 .umidity. dust. ETC.Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting 12. No dew under humidity of 50% Counter -plan thermometer. If no matter 1). S.V.

Control circuit Protective circuit during the Operation checking operation. Check the 1) It turns smoothly Cooling system Cooling fan or sound? 2) Is there any laxness on the connecting parts? Is the displayed 2) No Abnormality should be founded Check the regulational and administrative value No Abnormality should be founded voltagemeter /amperemeter Display Meter value normal? Ο Ο Ο Ο displayed value on the surface of panel 1)Check by ears. Ο Ο 1) Turn it with hands under condition of power off 2) Fasten it Again. 12-9 . 2) No abnormalities on the display circuit after executing sequence protection test 1) Is there any abnormal vibration Ο 2) short or open the Inverter protection circuit by force.V.V. damage etc.W Criterion decision Counter plan Digital multimeter/ rectification voltmeter 1) Voltage within phases: For balance 200V (400V) .Chapter 12 Checking and Troubleshooting Checkup Part Checkup items Checkup 1) Check the imbalance of each output voltage Checkup cycle Regular daily (Year) 1 2 Ο Way of Checkup 1) Check the voltage of the Inverter output terminal among U.W and connect the moter wires. eyes and hands 2)Check the abnormality such as overheating. Disconnect the connection of Motor Total 1) Is there any abnormal vibration or sound? 2) Is there any abnormal smell? Megger check Isolation resistance (Between the output terminal and conneting terminal) Over 5MΩ 500V class Megger Ο U.within 4V(8V) 2) Abnormal circuit is on the operation according to the sequence.

0 0. SLT: Sensorless-1.Chapter 13 Table of Functions 13. Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Value 00 01 02 03 Jump Code Cmd Frequency Cmd Torque Acc Time jump code target frequency torque command accelerating time decelerating time 0~99 0~maximum frequency[Hz] -180~180[%] 0~600[sec] 9 0. VC: Vector mode. 2 mode. emerging only in case of setting of the code. VCT: Vector Torque mode Refer to Option manual for options.0 Above 90kW 90.0 Above 90kW 60.0 Below 75kW 20.0 Below 75kW 30.1 Table of Functions 13. X O O O O O 13-1 . h1101 h1102 0h1103 DRV) Shift in Page Operation O O O O 7-1 8-31 7-20 No.0 Control Mode V S V S V / L C L C F T T O O O O O O X O O X O O X O X O O X O O Note1) 04 0h1104 Dec Time 0~600[sec] 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 Keypad Fx/Rx-1 Fx/Rx-2 Int 485 Field Bus PLC Keypad-1 O 7-20 O O O O O 06 0h1106 Cmd Source operating command method 1:Fx/Rx-1 X 7-11 O O O O O 07 0h1107 Freq Ref Src frequency setting method 0:Keypad-1 X 7-1 O O O X X 0 Keypad-1 1 Keypad-2 2 V1 3 I1 torque command 08 0h1108 Trq Ref Src 0:Keypad-1 X 8-32 X X 4 V2 method 5 I2 6 Int 485 7 Encoder 8 Fied Bus 0 V/F 7-21 1 V/F PG 8-20 09 2 Slip Compen 8-11 0h1109 Control Mode control mode 0:V/F X O O Note1) 3 Sensorless-1 8-21 4 Sensorless-2 8-23 5 Vector 8-27 * The grey code refers to hidden code.1 Parameter mode – DRV group( DRV) DRV Group (PAR Communi -cation No.1. SL: Sensorless-1. Note 1) Effectiveness of each code according to the Control Mode setting V/F: V/Fmode (PG included). 2 Torque mode.

5kW.00 0:Hz X X X O 7-21 7-21 7-28 9-4 O O O O O O X X X X O O O O O O O O O O The grey code refers to hidden code. 3:1.0 Below 75kW 2. 1:0. emerging only in case of setting of the code. 17:90kW 18:110kW.Page tion X O 8-31 8-4 Control Mode V / F X S L X V C X S L T V C T CommuniNo.5kW.00 O O O O O O O 20.0 X 7-23 O X X X X 0~15[%] Above 90kW 1.00 0. 5:3.4kW 2:75kW.5~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~600[sec] 0:No 10.50 60. Function Display cation No.15:55kW 16:75kW. 7:7. Name Setting Range Initial Value 10 11 0h110A 0h110B Torque Control Jog Frequency 12 0h110C Jog Acc Time 13 0h110D Jog Dec Time torque control jog frequency jog operation Acc time jog operation Dec time 0 No 1 Yes 0.01~10[Hz] 40~400 0 1 Hz Display Rpm Display 60. 9:15kW 10:18.13:37kW 14:45kW.7kW 6:5.0 O 8-4 O O O O O 0~600[sec] 0:0.11:22kW 12:30kW. DRV-16-17 code is displayed only when DRV-15 (Torque Boost) code value is “Manual”. 21:185kW 0 1 Manual Auto 30.5kW 4:2.0 O 8-4 O O O X X 8-11 14 0h110E Motor Capacity motor capacity depends on inverter capacity X 8-17 O O O O O 15 0h110F Torque Boost 16 Note2) 0h1110 Fwd Boost 17 0h1111 Rev Boost 18 19 20 21 * Note 2) 0h1112 0h1113 0h1114 0h1115 Base Freq Start Freq Max Freq Hz/Rpm Sel torque boost method horward torque boost reverse torque boost base frequency starting frequency maximum frequency speed unit selection 0:Manual Below 75kW 2.Chapter 13 Table of Functions DRV Group (PAR DRV) Shift in Opera.0 X 7-23 O X X X X 30~400[Hz] 0.5kW 8:11kW. 13-2 .2kW.0 X 7-23 O X X X X 0~15[%] Above 90kW 1.2kW. 19:132kW 20:160kW.

0 01 0h1201 Aux Ref Src 0:None X 8-1 O O O X X 02 Note3) 0h1202 Aux Calc Type auxiliary command Movement selection 2 3 4 5 6 7 0: M+(G*A) X 8-1 O O O X X 03 0h1203 Aux Ref Gain auxiliary command gain -200.2 Parameter mode – Basic function group ( BAS) BAS Group(PAR Communi No. 13-3 .Chapter 13 Table of Functions 13. 00 BAS) Shift in Initial Value Opera. -cation No. emerging only in case of setting of the code.Page tion 20 O Control Mode V / F O S L O V C O S L T O V C T O Function Display Name Setting Range Jump Code jump code auxiliary command Setting method 0~99 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 None V1 I1 V2 I2 M+(G*A) M*(G*A) M/(G*A) M+(M*(G*A)) M+G*(A-50%) M*(G*(A-50%)) M/(G*(A-50%)) M+M*G*(A-50%) 100.0~200. BAS-02 code is displayed only when BAS-01 (Aux Ref Src) code has a value other than “NONE”.1.0[%] 0 Keypad Fx/Rx-1 Fx/Rx-2 Int 485 FieldBus PLC O 8-2 O O O X X 04 0h1204 Cmd 2nd Src 1 2nd operation 2 command 3 method 4 5 2nd frequency Setting method 1:Fx/Rx-1 X 7-30 O O O O O 05 0h1205 Freq 2nd Src 0 Keypad-1 0:Keypad-1 O 7-30 O O O X X * Note 3) The grey code refers to hidden code.

Chapter 13 Table of Functions BAS Group (PAR Commu No.01sec 0.1sec 1sec 60Hz 50Hz 0:60Hz X X X X X X X O O 9-3 8-44 8-11 X 8-44 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0:Max Freq X 7-16 O O O X X 0:Linear X 7-22 O O X X X 09 0h1209 Time Scale 1:0. nication No.5~200[A] 180~480[V] 70~100[%] 0~8 70~130[%] 200~230[V] 380~480[V] 0 1 2 3 4 5 None All ALL(Stdstl) Rs+Lsigma Enc Test Tr It depends on inverter capacity 0 It depends on inverter capacity 220V 220 440V 380 20 - Auto Tuning auto tuning 0:None X 8-17 X O O O O 13-4 . BAS) Function Display Shift in Initial Value Page Operation Control Mode V / F S L V C S L T V C T Name Setting Range 06 0h1206 Trq 2nd Src 2nd torque command method 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Keypad-2 V1 I1 V2 I2 Int 485 Encoder FieldBus 0: Keypad-1 O 7-30 X X X O O 9 PLC 10 Synchro 11 Binary Type 12 Keypad-2 0 07 0h1207 V/F Pattern V/F pattern 1 2 3 08 0h1208 Ramp T Mode Acc/Dec standard frequency time unit setting 0 1 0 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0h120A 60/50 Hz Sel 0h120B Pole Number 0h120C Rated Slip 0h120D Rated Curr 0h120E Noload Curr 0h120F Rated Volt 0h1210 Efficiency 0h1211 Inertia Rate 0h1212 0h1213 Trim Power % AC Input Volt input power frequency motor pole rated sleep speed motor rated current motor no load current motor rated voltage motor efficiency load inertial ratio Power display adjustment input power voltage 0 1 Linear Square User V/F Square2 Max Freq Delta Freq 0.1sec X 7-17 O O O X X 2~48 0~3000[rpm] 1~200[A] 0.

00 rotor time constant 25~5000[msec] user frequency 1 user voltage 1 user frequency 2 user voltage 2 user frequency 3 user voltage 3 user frequency 4 user voltage 4 sequential frequency 1 sequential frequency 2 sequential frequency 3 sequential frequency 4 sequential frequency 5 sequential frequency 6 sequential frequency 7 sequential frequency 8 sequential frequency 9 sequential frequency 10 sequential frequency 11 sequential frequency 12 sequential frequency 13 sequential frequency 14 sequential frequency 15 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~100[%] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~100[%] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~100[%] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~100[%] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 41 Note5) 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 Note6) 0h122A User Volt 1 0h122B User Freq 2 0h122C User Volt 2 0h122D User Freq 3 0h122E User Volt 3 0h122F User Freq 4 0h1230 0h1232 0h1233 0h1234 0h1235 0h1236 0h1237 0h1238 0h1239 User Volt 4 Step Freq-1 Step Freq-2 Step Freq-3 Step Freq-4 Step Freq-5 Step Freq-6 Step Freq-7 Step Freq-8 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 0h123A Step Freq-9 0h123B Step Freq-10 0h123C Step Freq-11 0h123D Step Freq-12 0h123E Step Freq-13 0h123F Step Freq-14 0h1240 Step Freq-15 13-5 .Page Value tion X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 8-17 8-17 8-17 8-17 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 Control Mode V / F X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S L O O O O X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O V C O O O O X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S L T O O O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X V C T O O O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X No.00 30. 0h1229 BAS) Function Display Rs Lsigma Ls Tr User Freq 1 Shift in Initial Opera.00 40.00 35.00 45.00 55.00 60.00 5.00 60.00 100 10.00 40.00 50.00 50.00 50 45.00 20.00 15.00 25. Name Setting Range 21 22 23 24 Note4) stator resistance leak inductance stator inductance It depends on motor It depends on motor It depends on motor 15.00 25 30.00 75 60.Chapter 13 Table of Functions BAS Group (PAR Commun ication No.

M.H) even if there is only one IN-72~75 multi-function input 70 0h1246 Acc Time-1 X X X X X X 13-6 . Note 7) displayed only when it is set as “sequential Acc/Dec”(Xcel-L.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] accelerating time 3 sequential 75 0h124B Dec Time-3 40.X) even if there is only one multi-function input. Note 4) BAS-24 is shown only when DRV-09 Control Mode is “Sensorless-2” or “Vector”.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] accelerating time 1 sequential 71 0h1247 Dec Time-1 20.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] Note7) accelerating time 2 sequential 73 0h1249 Dec Time-2 30.H.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] decelerating time 1 72 sequential 0h1248 Acc Time-2 30.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] decelerating time 2 sequential 74 0h124A Acc Time-3 40.M. emerging only in case of setting of the code. Note 6) IN-65~75 is displayed only when it is set as “sequential”(Speed –L.0 O 7-18 O O O X 0~600[sec] decelerating time 3 * The grey code refers to hidden code.Chapter 13 Table of Functions sequential 20. Note 5) BAS-41~48 is displayed only when it is set as “User V/F” even if there is only one BAS-07 or M2-V/F Patt(M2-25).

00 50 0. Note 8) ADV-12 is displayed only when ADV-07 “Stop Mode” is set as “Dc-Start”. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0h1301 0h1302 0h1303 0h1304 0h1305 0h1306 0h1307 Jump Code Acc Pattern Dec Pattern Acc S Start Acc S End Dec S Start Dec S End Start Mode Name Setting Range jump code accelerating pattern decelerating pattern S accelerating starting slope S accelerating end slope S decelerating starting slope S decelerating end slope starting method 0~99 0 Linear 1 S-curve 1~100[%] 1~100[%] 1~100[%] 1~100[%] 0 Acc 1 Dc-Start 0 Dec 1 Dc-Brake 2 Free-Run 3 Flux Braking 4 0 1 2 0 1 08 0h1308 Stop Mode stop method 0:Dec X 7-26 O O O X X 09 0h1309 Run Prevent rotation preventing direction selection power input starting starting DC braking time DC supply Pre-DC braking output block time DC braking time DC braking DC braking frequency Accelerating dwell frequency Accelerating dwell operation time Decelerating dwell frequency 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Note8) 0h130A 0h130C 0h130D 0h130E 0h130F 0h1310 0h1311 0h1314 0h1315 0h1316 0h1317 Power-on Run Dc-Start Time Dc Inj Level Dc-Block Time Dc-Brake Time Dc-Brake Level Dc-Brake Freq Acc Dwell Freq Acc Dwell Time Dec Dwell Freq Dec Dwell Time Powr Braking None 0:Non Forward Prev e Reverse Prev No 0:No Yes 0.00 60[Hz] Starting frequency ~maximum 5.Chapter 13 Table of Functions 13.1. Note 9) ADV-14~17 is displayed only when ADV-08 “Stop Mode” is set as “DC-Brake”.0[sec] 0.3 Parameter mode – Parameter mode – Extended function group (PAR ADV) Extended Function Group (PAR ADV) Shift Initial in Page Value Oper ation 24 0:Linear 40 40 40 40 0:Acc O X X X X X X X 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-25 Control Mode V S V S V / L C L C F T T O O O O O O O O X X O O O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X X X X X Communi No.00 operation time * The grey code refers to hidden code. 13-7 .0[sec] 0. emerging only in case of setting of the code.10 1.00 X 7-14 O O O X X O X X X X X X X X X X 7-15 7-25 7-25 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 8-9 8-9 8-9 8-9 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0~60[sec] 0~200[%] 0~60[sec] 0~60[sec] Note9) 0~200[%] 50 startingfrequency~ 5.00 frequency[Hz] Decelerating dwell 0~60. cation Function Display No.00 Starting frequency ~maximum 5.00 frequency[Hz] 0~60.

00 0:No 10.00 2. Note 13) ADV-51 is displayed only when ADV-50 (E-Save Mode) is set as values other than “None”.00 25.00 1.00 50.00 20.00 0:None X O X X O O O O O O O X X X X X X O X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 7-29 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-54 O O O X X 8-35 O O X X X 8-35 O O O X X 7-18 O O O X X 24 Note10) 0h1318 0h1319 0h131A 0h131B 0h131C 0h131D 0h131E 0h131F 0h1320 0h1321 0h1329 0h132A 0h132C 0h132D 0h132E 0h132F 0h1332 0h1333 Freq Limit Freq Limit Lo Freq Limit Hi Jump Freq Jump Lo 1 Jump Hi 1 Jump Lo 2 Jump Hi 2 Jump Lo 3 Jump Hi 3 BR Rls Curr BR Rls Dly frequency limit frequency lower limit frequency upper limit frequency jump jump frequency lower limit 1 jump frequency upper limit 1 jump frequency lower limit 2 jump frequency upper limit 2 jump frequency lower limit 3 jump frequency upper limit 3 0 1 No Yes 25 26 27 0~upper limit[Hz] 0.00 35. Note 12) ADV-41~47 is displayed only when a code of OUT-31~33 is set as “BR Control”.00 Fr frequency[Hz] frequency * The grey code refers to hidden code.00 15.00 1.0 1.00 1. Note 11) ADV-28~33 is displayed only when ADV-27 (Jump Freq) set as “Yes”.5~maximum frequency[Hz] 0 No 1 Yes 0~jumpfrequencyupper limit1[Hz] Jump frequency lower limit1 ~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~jumpfrequency upper limit2[Hz] Jump frequency lower limit2 ~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~jumpfrequency upper limit3[Hz] Jump frequency lower limit3 ~maximum frequency[Hz] Note 11) 28 29 30 31 32 33 41 42 44 45 46 47 50 51 Note12) brake open current 0~180. Function Display Name Setting Range Initial Shift in Page V S V S V Value Operation / L C L C F T T 0:No 0. Note13) 13-8 . emerging only in case of setting of the code.50 60.0[%] 0~10.00[sec] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0~10[sec] 0~maximum frequency[Hz] 0 None 1 Manual 2 Auto brake open delay time BR Rls Fwd brake open Fr forward frequency BR Rls Rev brake open Fr reverse frequency brake close delay BR Eng Dly time brake close BR Eng Fr frequency E-Save Mode Energy Save energy saving operation energy saving 0~30[%] 0 amount Acc/Dec time Xcel Change 0~maximum 60 0h133C exchange 0.00 30. ADV) Control Mode No.Chapter 13 Table of Functions Extended Function Group (PAR Communication No. Note 10) ADV-25~26 is displayed only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set as “Freq Limit”.

0[%] 0 1 x1 x 0.00 0:Always Enable 0:Free-Run X X X 8-56 O O O O O 8-56 O O O O O 8-98 O O O O O X 8-8 O O O O O 5.1 x 0. No.01 x 0.0[sec] decelerating time Selection of 0 No regeneration RegenAvd Sel and avoidance function for 1 Yes press Operational 200V: 300~400 Voltage level of RegenAvd regeneration Level anc avoidance 400V: 600~800 for press 90.00 10.0 O 8-8 O O O O O No 350V 700V X 8-61 O O O O O X 8-61 O O O X X 13-9 .0 O 9-3 O O O X X Function Display Name Setting Range revolution Load Spd Gain display gain 1~6000.001 x 0. 61 - ADV) Control Mode Shift in V S V Initial Value Page S V Operation / L C L C F T T 100.00~output Off-C Level point OFF level contact point ON level[%] safety 0 Always Enable Run En Mode operation 1 DI Dependent selection 0 Free-Run safety 1 Q-Stop Run Dis Stop operation stop Q-Stop method 2 Resume safety operation Q-Stop Time 0~600.Chapter 13 Table of Functions Extended function Group (PAR Communication No.0001 rpm mpm During Run Always ON Temp Control No Yes None V1 I1 V2 62 - Load Scale Spd revolution display scale 2 3 4 0:x 1 O 9-3 O O O X X 63 0h133F revolution Load Spd Unit display unit cooling control up/down Operation frequency saving 0 1 0 fan 1 2 0:rpm 0:During Run O 9-3 O O O O O 64 0h1340 FAN Control O 8-43 O O O X X 65 0h1341 U/D Save Mode 0 1 0 1 0:No O 8-6 O O O X X 66 0h1342 On/Off Ctrl Src 2 3 0:None X 8-56 O O O O O 67 68 70 71 Note14) 0h1343 0h1344 0h1346 0h1347 72 0h1348 74 0h134A 75 0h134B 4 I2 Output contact On-C Level point ON level 10~100[%] Output contact -100.

Chapter 13 Table of Functions Control Mode Shift in Initial Value Page V S V S V Operation / L C L C F T T Communication No. Note 14) ADV-71~72 is displayed only when ADV-70 (Run En Mode) is set as “DI Dependent”.0% Pgain for press I-gain of RegenAvd regeneration 78 0h134E 500[msec] anc avoidance 20~30000[msec] Igain for press * The grey code refers to hidden code.00Hz 1. Note15) ADV-76~78 is displayed only when ADV-75 (RegenAvd Sel) is set as “Yes”.0[%] anc avoidance 0 ~ 100.00[Hz] Note15) regeneration Limit anc avoidance for press P-gain of RegenAvd regeneration 77 0h134D 50. Function Display Name Setting Range Restriction of compensational 76 CompFreq frequency of 0h134C 0~ 10. X 8-61 O O O X X O 8-61 O O O X X O 8-61 O O O X X 13-10 . No. emerging only in case of setting of the code.

Display CON) CON) Control Mode No.0 1.7~5[kHz] 0 Normal PWM Shift in Page V S V S V Operation / L C L C F T T O O O O O O O 8-42 O O O O O 05 09 10 11 0h1405 0h140A 0h140B 0h140C PWM Mode switching mode Initial flux time Initial flux power Flux Force supply permanent Hold Time operation sustaining time speed control ASR P period Gain 1 proportionalgain1 speed control ASR I period integral Gain 1 calculus gain 1 speed control ASR P period Gain 2 proportionalgain2 speed control ASR I period integral Gain 2 calculusgain2 Gain SW gain exchange Freq frequency Gain Sw gain exchange Delay time sensorless2 2nd SL2 G gain display View Sel setting sensorless1. Name Setting Range Initial Value 51 5.1.7~7[kHz] 90~110kW 0.0 O 8-25 X X O X X 16 18 19 20 0h1410 0h1412 0h1413 0h1414 10~9999[msec] 0~120[Hz] 0~100[sec] 0 1 No Yes 300 0.2 ASR-SL I speed control Gain1 period integral calculusgain1 ASR-SL P sensorless2 Gain2 speed control PreExTime 0:Normal 1 Lowleakage PWM PWM 0~60[sec] 1.0 3.00 0.7~10[kHz] Carrier Freq carrier frequency 55~75kW 0.0 3.7~6[kHz] 132~160kW 0.Chapter 13 Table of Functions 13.7~15[kHz] 30~45kW 0.00 100.0 5.0 00 Jump Code jump code 04 0h1404 0~99 Below 22kW 0.00 X X X X 8-42 O O O O O 8-30 X X O O O 8-30 X X O O O 8-32 X X O X X 100~500[%] 0~60[sec] 12 0h140D 10~500[%] 50.0 O 8-25 X X O X X 13 0h140E 10~9999[msec] 300 O 8-25 X X O X X 15 0h140F 10~500[%] 50.10 0:No Depends on motor capacity Depends on motor capacity Depends on motor O X X O 8-25 X X O X X 8-30 X X O X X 8-30 X X O X X 8-25 X X X X X 21 0h1415 0~5000[%] O 8-25 X O X X X 22 23 Note 0h1416 10~9999[msec] O 8-25 X O X X X 0h1417 1~1000[%] O 8-25 X X X X X 13-11 .0 5.4 Parameter mode – Control function group ( Control Function Group (PAR Communication Function No.2 ASR-SL P speed control Gain1 period proportionalgain1 sensorless1.

No. 13-12 . 31~32 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is “Sensorless2” and CON-20 (SL2 G View Sel) is set as “YES”.0 O 8-25 X X X X X Gain2 measurer gain2 Observer sensorless2 28 0h141C 0~30000 13000 O 8-25 X X X X X Gain3 measurer gain3 sensorless2 Depends S-Est P 29 0h141D O 8-25 X X X X X speed estimator 0~30000 on motor Gain1 proportionalgain1 capacity sensorless2 Depends S-Est I speed estimator on motor 30 0h141E 0~30000 O 8-25 X X X X X Gain1 integral capacity calculusgain1 * The grey code refers to hidden code. emerging only in case of setting of the code. Display 16) Name Setting Range Initial Value Shift in Page V S V S V Operation / L C L C F T T period capacity proportionalgain2 sensorless2 Depends ASR-SL I speed control 24 0h1418 1~1000[%] on motor O 8-25 X X X X X Gain2 period integral capacity calculusgain2 Observer sensorless2 26 0h141A 0~30000 10500 O 8-25 X X X X X Gain1 measurer gain1 Observer sensorless2 27 0h141B 1~1000[%] 100. Note 16) CON-23~28.Chapter 13 Table of Functions Control Mode Communication Function No.

emerging only in case of setting of the code.0 Torque limit forward regenerative 55 0h1437 FWD –Trq Lmt 0~200[%] 180.Chapter 13 Table of Functions Control Function Group (PAR CON) Initial Value Depends on motor No.0 torque limit The grey code refers to hidden code. 0h1436 FWD +Trq Lmt O O O O 8-27 8-27 8-27 8-27 X X X O O X X X O O X X X O O X X X O O 13-13 .0 torque limit reverse offsetting 56 0h1438 REV +Trq Lmt 0~200[%] 180. Commun ication Function Display No. Name Setting Range Shift in Opera Page tion Control Mode V S V S V / L C L C F T T X X X X X 31 0h141F S-Est P Gain2 Sensorless2 speed estimator 1~1000[%] proportional gain2 Sensorless2 speed estimator integral 1~1000[%] calculus gain2 Sensorless2 overvoltage modulation range adjustment PG operation proportional gain PG operation integral calculus gain PG operation maximum sleep Current control period P gain Current control period I gain speed control period reference filter Torque control period Output filter 100~180[%] O 8-23 capacity Depends on motor 32 0h1420 S-Est I Gain2 O 8-23 X X X X X capacity 34 45 Note17) 0h1422 SL2 OVM Perc 120 X 8-25 X O X X X O X X X X O X X X X O X X X X X O O O O X O O O O X O O X X X X X O O 0h142D PG P Gain 0h142E PG I Gain 0h142F PG Slip Max% 0h1433 0h1434 ACR P Gain ACR I Gain ASR Ref LPF Torque Out LPF 0~9999 0~9999 0~200 0~10000 0~10000 0~20000[msec] 0~2000[msec] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Keypad-1 Keypad-2 V1 I1 V2 I2 Int 485 Encoder FiedBus PLC Synchro Binary Type 3000 50 100 1200 120 0 0 O O X O O X X 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-27 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 0h1435 Torque Lmt Src Torque limit Setting method 0:Keypa d-1 X 8-27 X X X O O 54 Note18) * forward offsetting 0~200[%] 180.0 torque limit reverse regenerative 57 0h1439 REV –Trq Lmt 0~200[%] 180.

emerging only in case of setting of the code.0 O O O O O 8-31 8-31 8-32 8-33 8-33 X X X X O X X X X O X X X X O X X X X O X X X X O torque mode speed 68 0h1444 SPD/TRQAcc T mode exchange 0~600[sec] 20. CON-54~57 are displayed only when DRV-09(Control Mode) is set as “Sensorless-1.0 0.00 60.00 500 0.0 O O 8-27